Application Manual

Connecting the worlds of building construction and power distribution
with integrated solutions for commercial and industrial buildings

power
2nd Edition

totally integrated

Conversion Factors and Tables

Volume Non-metric unit 1 in3 16.387 cm3 SI unit

Volume flow rate Non-metric unit 1 gallon/s 1 gallon/min 1 ft3/s 1 ft3/min SI unit 1 l/s m3 1 l/h 1 m3/h 3.785 l/s 0.227 m3/h = 227 l/h 101.941 m3/h 1.699 m3/h Non-metric unit 0.264 gallons/s 0.0044 gallons/min 4.405 gallons/min = 0.589 ft3/min = 0.0098 ft3/s SI unit

Pressure Non-metric unit 1 in HG 1 psi 1 lbf/ft2 1 lbf/in2 1 tonf/ft2 1 tonf/in2 0.034 bar 0.069 bar 4.788 x 10-4 bar = 4.882 x 10-4 kgf/cm2 0.069 bar = 0.070 kgf/cm2 1.072 bar = 1.093 kgf/cm2 154.443 bar = 157 .488 kgf/cm2 Non-metric unit 29.53 in Hg = 14.504 psi = 2088.54 lbf/ft2 = 14.504 lbf/in2 = 0.932 tonf/ft2 = 6.457 x 10-3 tonf/in2 (= 1.02 kgf/cm2) SI unit

1 ft3 1 yd3 1 fl oz 1 quart 1 pint 1 gallon 1 barrel

28.317 dm3 = 0.028 m3 0.765 m3 29.574 cm3 0.946 dm3 = 0.946 l 0.473 3.785 dm3 dm3 = 0.473 l = 3.785 l = 1.589

158,987 = 159 l

dm3

SI unit 1 bar = 105 pa = 102 kpa

SI unit

Non-metric unit

1

cm3

0.061

in3

= 0.034 fl oz
Force Non-metric unit 1 lbf 1 kgf 1 tonf SI unit 4.448 N 9.807 N 9.964 kN Non-metric unit SI unit

1 dm3 =1l 1 m3

61.024 in3 = 0.035 ft3 = 1.057 quarts = 2.114 pint = 0.264 gallons 0.629 barrels

Energy, work, heat content Non-metric unit 1 hp h 1 ft lbf 1 Btu SI unit 0.746 kWh = 2.684 x 106 J = 2.737 x 105 kgf m 0.138 kgf m 1.055 kJ = 1055.06 J (= 0.252 kcal) Non-metric unit 1.341 hp h = 2.655 kgf m = 3.6 x 105 J 3.725 x 10-7 hp h = 0.738 ft lbf = 9.478 x 10-4 Btu (= 2.388 x 10-4 kcal) 3.653 x 10-6 hp h = 7 .233 ft lbf

Velocity

1N
Non-metric unit 1 ft/s 1 mile/h SI unit 1 m/s 1 km/h SI unit 0.305 m/s = 1,098 km/h 0.447 m/s = 1,609 km/h Non-metric unit 3.281 ft/s = 2.237 miles/h 0.911 ft/s = 0.621 miles/h

0.225 lbf = 0.102 kgf 0.100 tonf

1 kN

Torque, moment of force Non-metric unit 1 lbf in 1 lbf ft SI unit 1 Nm SI unit 0.113 Nm = 0.012 kgf m 1.356 Nm = 0.138 kgf m Non-metric unit 8.851 lbf in = 0.738 lbf ft (= 0.102 kgf m)

SI unit 1 kWh 1J

Mass, weight Non-metric unit 1 oz 1 lb 1 sh ton SI unit 1g 1 kg 1t 28.35 g 0.454 kg = 453.6 g 0.907 t = 907 kg .2 Non-metric unit 0.035 oz 2.205 lb = 35.27 oz 1.102 sh ton = 2,205 lb

SI unit Moment of inertia J Numerical value equation: Non-metric unit 1 lbf ft2 0.04214 kg m2 J= GD2 = Wr 2 4

1 kgf m

SI unit

SI unit 1 kg m2

Non-metric unit 23.73 lb ft2

Btu = British thermal unit Btu/h = British thermal unit/hour lbf = pound force tonf = ton force

Conversion Factors and Tables

Conductor cross sections in the Metric and US System Metric cross sections acc. to IEC Conductor cross section [mm2] American Wire Gauge (AWG)

Temperature

Linear measure

°F

°C

Non-metric unit 1 mil 0.0254 mm

SI system

Equivalent metric CSA

AWG or MCM

320° 305°

160° 150° 140°

1 in 1 ft 1 yd 1 mile SI system

2.54 cm = 25.4 mm 30.48 cm = 0.305 m 0.914 m 1.609 km = 1,609 m Non-metric unit

[mm2]

290° 275°

0.75

0.653 0.832 1.040 1.310

19 AWG 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

130° 260° 245° 230° 212° 200° 90° 185° 80° 170° 155° 140° 125° 110° 40° 95° 30° 80° 65° 50° 32° 20° –10° 5° –10° –25° –40° –20° –30° –40° 20° 10° 0° 70° 60° 50° 120° 110° 100°

1 mm 1 cm 1m 1 km

39.37 mil 0.394 in 3.281 ft = 39.370 in = 1.094 yd 0.621 mile = 1,094 yd

1.50

1.650 2.080

2.50

2.620 3.310

4.00 6.00

4.170 5.260 6.630 8.370

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 MCM 300 400 500 600 700 800 1000

Square measure

10.00

10.550 13.300

Non-metric unit 1 in2 1 1 1 ft2 yd2 mile2

SI unit 6.452 cm2 = 654.16 mm2 0.093 m2 = 929 cm2 0.836 m2 4046.9 m2 2.59 km2 Non-metric unit 0.00155 in2 0.155 in2 10.76 ft2 = 1,550 in2 = 1.196 yd2 0.366 miles2

16.00 25.00 35.00 50.00 70.00 95.00 120.00 150.00 185.00 240.00 300.00 400.00 500.00 625.00

16.770 21.150 26.670 33.630 42.410 53.480 67 .430 85.030 107 .200 126.640 152.000 202.710 253.350 304.000 354.710 405.350 506.710

1 acre

SI unit 1 mm2 1 cm2 1 m2 1 km2

Btu = British thermal unit Btu/h = British thermal unit/hour lbf = pound force tonf = ton force

Conversion Factors and Tables

Electrical power Non-metric unit 1 hp SI unit 0.746 kW = 745.70 W = 76.040 kgf m/s (= 1.014 PS) 1.356 W (= 0.138 kgf in/s) 1.163 W 0.293 W Non-metric unit 1.341 hp = 101.972 kgf m/s (= 1.36 PS) 0.738 ft lbf/s = 0.86 kcal/h = 3.412 Btu (= 0.102 kgf m/s)

Examples of decimal multiples and fractions of metric units

1 km = 1,000 m; 1 m = 100 cm = 1,000 mm 1 km2 = 1,000,000 m2; 1 m2 = 10,000 cm2; 1 cm2 = 100 mm2 1 m3 = 1,000,000 cm3; 1 cm3 = 1,000 mm3 1 t = 1,000 kg; 1 kg = 1,000 g 1 kW = 1,000 W

1 ft lbf/s 1 kcal/h 1 Btu/h SI unit 1 kW

1W

Specific steam consumption Non-metric unit 1 lb/hp h SI unit 1 kg/kWh

SI unit 0.608 kg/kWh Non-metric unit 1.644 lb/hp h

Temperature Non-metric unit °F °F SI unit °C K Note: Quantity Temperature in Fahrenheit °F °F °C K SI unit
5 (ϑ – 32) = ϑ F C 9 5 ϑ + 255.37 = T 9 F

Non-metric unit
5 ϑ + 32 = ϑ F 9 C 5 ϑT – 459.67 = ϑ F 9

Symbol

Unit °F °C K (Kelvin) Btu = British thermal unit Btu/h = British thermal unit/hour lbf = pound force tonf = ton force
* The

ϑ F*

Temperature in degrees ϑC* Celsius (centigrade) Thermodynamic temperature

T

letter t may be used instead of ϑ

Contents
1 2
2.1. 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.2

Introduction Power Distribution Planning for Commercial and Industrial Buildings
Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems Requirements to Electrical Power Systems in Buildings Network Configuration Power Supply Systems Routing/Wiring Switching and Protective Devices Planning Aid Power System Planning Modules

1/2

6
6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6.1.5 6.1.6 6.1.7 6.1.8 6.1.9 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6

Low Voltage
Low-Voltage Switchgear and Distribution Systems SIVACON 8PS – Busbar Trunking Systems SIVACON Low-Voltage Switchgear SIKUS Universal and SIKUS Universal HC for the Switchgear Manufacturer Floor-Mounted ALPHA 630 Universal and ALPHA 630 DIN Distribution Boards Wall-Mounted ALPHA 400/160, ALPHA Universal and ALPHA 400 Stratum Distribution Boards ALPHA-ZS Meter and Distribution Cabinets for Germany SIMBOX Small Distribution Boards SMS Rapid Mounting System 8HP Insulated Distribution System Protective Switching Devices and Fuse Systems Circuit-Breakers Fuse Systems Fuse Switch-Disconnectors Miniature Circuit-Breakers Residual-Current-Operated Circuit-Breakers Lightning Current and Surge Arresters 3LD2 Main Control and EMERGENCY STOP Switches Modular Devices Maximum-Demand Monitors Switches, Outlets and Electronic Products SIMOCODE pro – Motor Management System

6/2 6/3 6/6 6/11 6/19 6/22 6/24 6/27 6/29 6/31 6/34 6/36 6/38 6/41 6/49 6/54 6/61 6/71 6/88 6/89 6/102 6/104 6/110 7/2 8/2 8/11 8/16 8/25 8/29 9/2 10/2 10/2 10/3 10/8 11/2 11/2 11/14 11/20 11/28

2/2 2/2 2/3 2/4 2/6 2/8 2/8 2/11 2/12 3/2 3/2 3/3 3/4 3/4 3/6 3/9 3/9 3/16 3/20 3/27 3/33 3/40 3/49 3/51 3/52 3/52 3/58 4/2

3
3.1. 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4

System Protection / Safety Coordination
Definitions Protective Equipment and Features Low-Voltage Protection Equipment Assemblies Selectivity Criteria Preparation of Current-Time Diagrams (Grading Diagrams) Protective Equipment for Low-Voltage Systems Circuit-Breakers with Protective Functions Switchgear Assemblies Selecting Protective Equipment Miniature Circuit-Breakers (MCB) Selectivity in Low-Voltage Systems Selectivity in Radial Systems Selectivity in Meshed Systems Protection of Capacitors Protection of Distribution Transformers Protection with Overreaching Selectivity Equipment for Protecting Distribution Transformers

3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2

7 8
8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4

Communications in Power Distribution Protection and Substation Control
Power System Protection Relay Design and Operation Relay Selection Guide Typical Protection Schemes

4
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2

Medium Voltage
Medium-Voltage and Circuit-Breaker Switchgear for Primary Power Distribution Withdrawable Circuit-Breaker Switchgear, Air-Insulated Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear, SF6-Insulated Secondary Distribution Systems, Switchgear and Substations Medium-Voltage Equipment, Product Range PQM® – Power Quality Management and Load Flow Control Planning of Systems for Primary and Secondary Power Distribution Exemplified by the Automotive Industry

4/3 4/4 4/26

9 10
10.1 10.2 10.3

Power Management Measuring and Recording Power Quality
Overview SIMEAS Q SIMEAS R

4/44 4/72

4.3 4.4

11
11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4

Meters and Measuring Instruments
SIMEAS P Power Meter SIMEAS T Transducers for High-Current Power Quantities Meters / Measuring Instruments as Modular Devices 4NC3 and 4NC5 Current Transformers

4/84

4.5

4/87 5/2

5

Transformers

12 13

SIMARIS design – the Program for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution Appendix

12/2 13/2

power

totally integrated

1 We focus your energy…
… and everything gets so easy Totally Integrated Power is more than mere planning of the power distribution in buildings or industrial plants. Totally Integrated Power encompasses the philosophy to render you support with our advice, with a service that is focused on you. A new project is under way: planning for a complete power distribution system – for a hospital, an office or industrial building. You know what this means: the system has to be designed not just to meet the needs of today but the future as well. Thus, cost calculations and construction timetables are kept under control, and expensive rework is avoided. This is where we offer you our support. But this is not enough: the requirements of building contractors go far beyond this. They demand cross-system thinking and integral concepts right from the project start. The goal is an optimization of building services realized by customer-focused overall solutions. To respond to this demand, Siemens has developed a portfolio which features total functionality. The optimized interplay of all functions creates benefits for everyone involved in the project: the building contractors, the users and building operators, the consulting engineers and, last but not least, the installation company. Totally Integrated Power, a concept which offers electrical consultants and installation companies integrated and coordinated power distribution, from medium voltage to low voltage with load feeder right down to the final outlet – the best foundation for quick and easy planning. Integrated project planning combines individual components such as medium-voltage switchgear, transformers, low-voltage switchgear and low-voltage distribution boards to the power consumer. Costs, whether for new systems or extensions, are always transparent and controllable. The majority of the electrical power consumers belongs to the facilities for supply management, in particular those for heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems, drinking water supply and lighting. The latter is to be seen in a functional relation to integrated room automation, including sun protection, daylight control technologies and motion detection (i.e. presence of persons in a building). Air conditioning technology is in a functional relation to smoke detection and fire alarm systems. Safe power supply must be ensured for all operating modes.

1/2

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Totally Integrated Power makes everything so easy for distribution board manufacturers and electricians: C Designing TTA systems, for example, is no problem: the components are completely compatible C Minimum integration expense when installing: the distribution board manufacturers and electricians simply use the data from the planning tools C Saving time and money all around by a simplification of the workflow C They make use of the evolution of technical and system know-how by Siemens and benefit from it – and they will have a partner for the future C Optimum cross-functional system tuning, coordination of all requirements and support from Siemens as the leading technology manufacturer in the field of automation and alarm technologies

Take advantage of our focused know-how When all the components fit together smoothly, safe and secure power distribution is guaranteed. And your system will be economical. Now you can make use of a system that offers you a complete range of products with integrated solutions from hardware with bus interfaces to easy-to-use software. Your partner also offers you professional expertise and tailored solutions for monitoring, automation, service optimization and operational management of the entire building installations – of course utilizing planning tools for efficient project management. Totally Integrated Power takes into consideration the demands of the liberalized energy markets as well as simple and secure configuration, thus creating the foundation for economical operation. These developments call for a new way of thinking when planning. Low energy import costs are now more than ever a focus of attention. The basis for this is knowledge of the load profiles, the key loads and consumption-based billing. Here, the individual solutions and systems from Totally Integrated Power and Total Building Solutions bring transparency, and thus optimization possibilities within reach. Totally Integrated Power integrates systems and components together with a functional software package for operator control and monitoring.
Safety technology

Information technology

Building control systems

Totally Integrated Power

Automation technology

Heating, ventilation air conditioning

………

Progressive, holistic operation and building management is implemented with systems by Siemens. These systems communicate with each other on the basis of globally standardized communication protocols, such as BACnet, KNX/EIB, ASi and PROFIBUS. System integrations are proficiently carried out using internationally accepted open methods like OPC, LonMark, Modbus and M-Bus. Functions such as consumption recording, cost center allocations or load management can thus be performed, which renders a comprehensive power management system.

1/3

1

Advantage: operators can optimize their installations in terms of maintenance expense, power consumption and availability. Of course, you expect the optimum solution for every investment you make, and it is only natural that system costs are increasingly being determined by operating costs. But what people are often not aware of is the fact that data networks and the data they generate can be used to achieve the optimization of electrical power distribution processes. Electrical power supply is the fundamental basis of all processes and control procedures, and most of the things we take for granted today would not function without electrical energy. This is why it is important to make use of information networking in the field of electrical power distribution. Siemens can implement this because we are completely at home in this field. Totally Integrated Power offers electrical power distribution for all functions in a building: heating, ventilation, air conditioning, production and manufacturing processes, and information technology with clearly defined communication interfaces. This ensures reliable power supply, safe working conditions, appropriate sizing, transparent system status and consumption-based cost structures.

A building automation and control system comprises: C Field devices (sensors, signal sources, switches and actuating devices such as butterfly and control valves, or sensors and actuators) C Local priority control units C Cabling, data networks and communication units C Control panels, variable speed drives (SED 2) and automation stations (PX), or room controllers (RX) C Management and server stations, interactive operator terminals and computer terminals C Software for functions, communications, data management and operation (rights of use, licenses) C Services and tools for the installation of a BACS system (engineering) C Web services and system maintenance

DESIGO RX integrated room automation comprises application-specific devices and functions for zone or single-room control. This includes an integrated monitoring, control and optimization of room-related building equipment which is interconnected through their communication functions. DESIGO PX ensures that the operation of the building, i.e. of its technical installations, is performed in a safe, ecological and economically optimized manner which is also a lowexpense mode of operation. The building automation and control system reliably implements control strategies regarding HVAC. It has been optimized for the performance of operating time optimization, maximum-load limiting and the calculation of enthalpy and heating curves. It informs the operator about trends and present and previous operating states. The building automation and control system provides the data required for operating cost controlling and the documentation of an ecological audit system. It is possible to demonstrate no-fault operation. Technical equipment data and statistics which are relevant for maintenance are made available through the building automation and control system. It can also be employed as a tool for management tasks such as analysis, adjustment and continuous optimization of the modes of operation.

1.1 Total Building Solutions
DESIGO building automation
Building automation includes all facilities, software and services for automatic control, monitoring and load optimization as well as operation and management aimed at energy-efficient, economical and safe operation of all technical building installations.
Fig. 1/1 Systems of the technical building equipment

1/4

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

infrastructure elements or manufacturing processes might be put at risk. The type of building control defines both the complexity of the building automation and control system and its life safety and security management. Detailed descriptions of the available building solutions can be obtained at: www. etc. and the structure of the organizations involved in its operation. This guarantees the protection of human life and property and the maintenance of operations within a building.de 1/5 1 . guided operator interfaces with restricted choices of action to be able to respond fast. Operator tasks are only carried out under high time pressure and psychological stress in the event of a fault.2 Life Safety and Security Management While building automation mainly deals with the data of HVAC and electrical subsystems. Life safety and security management means the limitation and containment of a multitude of risks and encompasses taking rigorous action against the most diverse hazardous events that might occur.siemens. human life. Normally. Total Building Solutions enables product and service offers to be adapted to real customer needs. Signaling and alarms The other – often crucial – aspect deals with sudden system malfunctions. The treatment of those cases is the objective of life safety and security management. In some cases. A good operator interface provides a broad range of options with functions for generating status reports and user-specific statistics and data views. those events do not represent any hazard to the building or its users. be extended to any potential hazard that may be inherent in any other technical installation. Examples are for instance the temperature and humidity limits in museums. It means the limitation and control of various hazards in the building and a rigorous treatment of different potential emergency cases in a building. The main task of life safety and security management is the easy and safe handling of critical alarms and events. critical faults in the power distribution system of a hospital. Such management functions do not require any permanent support in commercial and industrial buildings. however. Those who operate these functions need adaptive graphic displays that facilitate the user's intuitive orientation and enable actions to be performed which are typical for monitoring a complex system. elevator alarms. Differences from the user's point of view Control and optimization One aspect is the control and optimization of the performance of technical building installations to supply both the technical conditions for which buildings have been designed and to ensure their users' productivity by providing appropriate ambient conditions. It must. The purpose is to fight hazards immediately and with the most suitable means to prevent greater damage. which create the basis for process optimization. Life safety and security management is typically associated with the specific tasks of security systems. however. the information rendered by protective and security installations is often vitally important. thus optimizing benefits for the user. Support from Siemens Total Building Solutions by Siemens focus on the performance of the tasks detailed above and the surplus value to be gained by the customer.sbt. safely and efficiently even in a panic situation. as they normally deal with longterm trends and system performance analyses.Introduction 1. Operators of life safety and security management systems need simple.

The language can also be freely selected – both for working with the program and for planning results. From its contents. Selectivity. The tools are designed for international use. for example. data can also be easily verified with SIMARIS design.SIMARIS Planning Software SIMARIS With the SIMARIS range of software products. Suitable components and distribution systems are selected automatically. SIMARIS design is easy to operate and can be used without any extra software training. for example. 1/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . is completely trouble-free. this helps to avoid extra costs arising from badly coordinated systems. Every configuration of an electric power distribution is subject to many changes and adaptations both in the planning and implementation stage. taking into consideration the respective standards and rules of the country where they are to be used. this software offers a scope of functionality that facilitates sizing considerably. Per download from our homepage. Siemens offers integrated tools for fast and effective planning and calculation of power distribution systems for commercial and industrial buildings. In the implementation stage. for example for installations in the safety power supply system. In addition. All of these steps will automatically and accu- rately be documented in SIMARIS design. SIMARIS design integrates each modification into the supply concept and automatically checks it for compliance with the relevant standards and regulations. In the planning stage. The project-planning data from SIMARIS design can also be used directly by this program. exactly following the specifications you have defined. SIMARIS SIVACON The SIMARIS SIVACON® software tool supports the sales and manufacturing process for the SIVACON 8PT low-voltage switchboard system which was specially designed for franchise switchgear manufacturers. You can focus on what’s important in planning your electrical power distribution system and needn’t spend hours looking up product data in catalogs. the forwarding of order data to the Siemens Mall on the Internet. you can dimension the entire supply circuit with SIMARIS design on the basis of real products. you can easily keep up to date the product data contained in the SIMARIS design database. SIMARIS design Thanks to its Windows look and feel.

Frame: Installation Distribution Maintenance measure Hall 1 Distribution 3 Feeder II check HVAC change ACB contacts change meter 1/7 1 . All evaluations that can be derived from operating cycles. To ensure demand values become too high. every upper and lower limit as well as possible overloads. current status and maintenance due dates are shown.Introduction Power Management Energy distribution at a glance The actual status of the power distribution system can be displayed online. runtimes or scheduled times are contained within the module. U I cos o P W Perfect records All changes in power distribution are recorded by the system. Maintenance measures. and can therefore plan both staff and material requirements well in advance. all events are precisely recorded. Extensive information such as personnel requirements and necessary spare parts is also given. This analysis is the basis for the optimization of power consumption or the system structure. Status central ON OFF local ON OFF tripped Event logs Time 22:59:03 23:16:24 01:12:45 03:35:02 Status signal local OFF local incoming circuit breaker off local ON local incoming circuit breaker off Power > 20 A Power < 1600 A Optimum energy flow The utilization of a power distribution system can be determined by the measurement of the energy flows. together with their date and time. sumption values and. Regardless of whether they were remotely controlled or were performed locally. every power requirement. The user of the system is always informed of the maintenance measures currently being carried out or which are due to be carried out. An invaluable opportunity to keep on top of the condition of your power distribution system – and. Selected status signals can also be transmitted directly by SMS via mobile phone. allowing faults to be rectified by the technical staff as quickly as possible. power that is not directly required for opermanagement monitors the conation. Future power requirements can also be calculated by studying the load curves: the ideal prerequisite for any strat- egy involving Load curves Load management Prognoses continuous purchasing contracts or the buying of power on the energy markets. if maximum Maintenance planning The information required for maintenance is gathered from the system. This enables you to easily keep a check on all important parameters: every breaker position. optimum utilization of current concan automatically add extra capacity tinuous purchasing contracts. to control it from a remote location. The event log created is archived in a database and can then be evaluated by other programs. if required.

2 Power System Planning Modules .1 Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems 2.2 Power Distribution Planning for Commercial and Industrial Buildings 2.

Power Distribution Planning for Commercial and Industrial Buildings chapter 2 .

the spectrum of reasonable options can be narrowed down. by medium-voltage-side power transmission to the load centers C High supply and operational safety of the installations even in the event of individual equipment failures (redundant supply.g. Fig. type of use Operation Network calculation: – Load flow – Short-circuit calculation – Energy balance Lists of consumers Temperatures . e..2 Power Distribution Planning for Commercial and Industrial Buildings 2.1 Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems Totally Integrated Power comprises products. Rating: – Transformers – Cables – Protective/switching devices – Provisions for redundant supply Priorities and prognoses for the electrical power system etc. such as C Simplification of operational management by transparent. power supply concepts must always be evaluated in the context of their framework parameters and project goals. For this reason. When focusing on power supply in the field of building infrastructure. selectivity of the power system protection. 2/1 Power system planning tasks C Good quality of the power supply..e. Siemens responds to customer requirements. Siemens supports your power system planning with service offers and tools such as SIMARIS design. simple power system structures C Low power loss costs. few voltage changes due to load fluctuations with sufficient voltage symmetry and few harmonic distortions in the voltage C Compliance with IEC/EN/VDE specifications and project-related stipulations for special installations The efficiency of a power supply system rises and falls with good planning. i. systems and services from Siemens for a homogenous implementation concept for power distribution from a medium-voltage switchgear station to the transformer and from there to the floor distribution board or final circuit. With Totally Integrated Power. and high availability) C Easy adaptation to changing load and operational conditions C Low operating cost thanks to equipment that is easy to maintain C Sufficient transmission capacity of the equipment under normal operating conditions as well as in fault conditions to be handled Framework parameter analysis: Power system concept: – Analysis – Selection of the network configuration – Type of connection to ground – Technical features Building Rooms. The following design aids can be obtained from Siemens: C Application manual C SINCAL C SIGRADE C Specific product catalogs 2/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

energy balance.g.g. the largely ambivalent requirements of the three project stages.Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts 2. Investment – Installation – Operation. permissible equipment – Use of power management to operate the power system economically within the agreed electric rates options. Further influencing factors The main characteristics of a power system are determined by the following requirements: C Use/consumers or purpose of power distribution. powerful safety power supply (SPS) TN-S system to minimize stray fault currents IT system Busbar trunking systems Redundant supply. e.1. meshed electrical networks Selective grading Offices Many PC workstations High proportion of Counter action in the capacitive loads event of harmonics General escape routes DP server rooms Medical Communications equipment (network) Life-saving machines Intensive care. safety at work regulations C By the supplying public utilities company – Technical specifications regarding voltage. power density and load centers C Architecture.1 Requirements on Electrical Power Systems in Buildings When planning electrical power systems. short-circuit power.g. insurance rates) Table 2/1 Project stages maximum irrelevant irrelevant Type of use Residential Features Requirements Action Many small Low nominal currents at Back-up protection consumer devices comparatively high line short-circuit power Users are no electrical engineering experts Protection against direct Residual currentand indirect contact operated circuitbreakers are mandatory! Voltage stability and reliable power supply Inductor-type compensation Generator supply TN-S system to minimize stray fault currents Redundancy. EKG Safety power supply Good electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) High reliability of supply Good electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Local limitation of fault currents Industrial Mainly motor loads Minimize downtimes Different processes High power quantities required per area High reliability of supply Table 2/2 Examples for different types of building use and their impact on electric power systems/equipment 2/3 2 . e. stipulations by public authorities. selective grading. building authorities. Investment Implementation cost Implementation time Technology/equipment minimum minimum low-cost Installation maximum minimum Operation irrelevant irrelevant easy installation flexible operation maximum irrelevant irrelevant irrelevant irrelevant maximum minimum minimum Space requirements for equipment minimum Period of use Fire load Operating cost (e.e. i. must be taken into consideration. low building or high-rise building C Operating and environmental conditions C Legal provisions. agreed maximum connected load.

it has now been agreed upon that drafts shall be submitted at the central (IEC) level and then be adopted as regional or national standards. the compliance to technical standards is crucial for any approval of operation granted by authorities or insurance coverage. 2/2 Unmeshed power system (radial) 2/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . While in the past. standards were mainly drafted at a national level and debated in regional (i.e. American etc. 2/2. major planning rules have been compiled in standards. A complete list of IEC members and links to more detailed information can be obtained at www. Technical standards are desired conditions stipulated by professional associations which are however made binding by legal standards such as safety at work regulations. Furthermore.iec.ch q structure & management q iec members.IEC Regional America PAS USA: ANSI CA: SCC BR: COBEI . regional and international standards for electrical engineering Standards To minimize technical risks and/or to protect persons involved in handling electric equipment or components. a standard shall be drafted regionally... Buildings featuring different power densities can therefore be distinguished according to the type of their configuration. Association of German Electrical Engineers International Electrical Engineering Commission Japanese Industrial Standards Committee Pacific Area Standards South African Bureau of Standards Standards Australia Standards Council of Canada Standards New Zealand UNION TECHNIQUE DE L’ELECTRICITE ET DE LA COMMUNICATION Technical Association of Electrical Engineering & Communications CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique) CEI COMITATO ELETTROTECNICO ITALIANO Italian Electrical Engineering Committee Comitê Brasileiro de Eletricidade. Fig.) committees. Eletrônica.2 Network Configuration As detailed above. The clearly hierarchical structuring offers the following advantages: C Easy monitoring of the power system C Fast fault location C Simple power system protection C Easy operation National AUS: SA NZ: SNZ CN: SAC J: JISC … SA: SABS ANSI BS American National Standards Institute British Standards DIN VDE German Industrial Standard. if there are any time constraints.1. Only provided that IEC is not interested in dealing with the matter or. The interrelation of the different standardization levels is illustrated in Fig. Europe CENELEC DE: DIN VDE I: CEI F: UTE GB: BS Australia Asia Africa 2. An optimum configuration should particularly meet the following requirements: C Simple structure C High reliability of supply C Low losses C Favorable and flexible expansion options The following characteristics shall be selected accordingly: C Type of meshing C Number of feeder points C Type of feed Meshing Low-voltage-side power distribution shall preferably be designed in a radial topology. Iluminação e Telecomunicações Standardisation Administration of China IEC JISC PAS SABS SA SCC SNZ UTE COBEI SAC Table 2/3 Interdependencies of national. the supply task determines the configuration of a power system. European.

i ≥ Ptotal / cosϕ.c.i ≥ PSV / cosϕ Continued operation of all consumers (n-1) 8 ai 8 SN.o.Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts Simple radial network Radial network with changeover reserve a) Partial load reserve b) Full load reserve . K1 2 n.o. Fig.c.c. LVMD3 n. 2/3 Radial topology variants As the operation of a meshed system places high demands on the equipment. 2/3 shows an optimization of the radial network assuming one fault in the infeed. LVMD2 n. K1 2 n.T1 ≥ Ptotal / cosϕ Continued operation of selected consumers (n-1) 8 SN.transformers not fully utilized . Number of feeder points The availability of the radial power system can be optimized by means of its infeed configuration. LVSPS MD2 n. Ring-type systems are mainly used in highly consumptive industrial processes in combination with high-current busbar trunking systems. K2 3 Complete power failure SN.c. the radial system is generally preferred at the infrastructure level for economical reasons. LVMD1 n. 2/5 2 .c. as these systems have the advantage of safe and flexible supply for the consumers. a: Utilization factor Fig. They are also used for public supply systems at the > 1 kV level. n.Use transformers with forced-air cooling T1 T1 T2 T1 T2 T3 LVMD LVGPS MD1 n.o.

1. as it has a major impact on the expense required for protective measures. low-resistance.3 Power Supply Systems Electric systems are distinguished as follows: C Type of current used: DC. 2/4 has proven itself for the building infrastructure level. L2. For general power supply (GPS) by C Direct connection to the public grid: normally up to 300 kW at 400 V C Supply from the medium-voltage system (up to 52 kV) via distribution transformers up to 2 MVA For redundant power supply (RPS). power sources are selected in dependency of the permissible interruption time. TT. Type General power supply (GPS) Safety power supply (SPS) Example Supply of all installations and consumer devices available in the building Supply of life-protecting facilities in cases of danger C Safety lighting C Elevators for firefighters C Fire-extinguishing equipment Supply of sensitive consumer devices which must be operated without interruption in the event of a GPS failure: C Emergency lighting C Servers/computers C Communications equipment Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Fig. the best cost-benefit ratio for electric systems within the general power supply is achieved with C Low-resistance neutral for medium-voltage applications C TN-S systems for low voltage 2/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . TN medium-voltage systems: isolated. compensated GPS consumer SPS consumer UPS consumer Fig. determined by its primary function.Type of infeed Electrical energy can be fed into the power system in different ways. N. It also determines electromagnetic compatibility regarding the low-voltage system. L3. 2/4 Supply types T-1 T-2 T-3 G UPS GPS system RPS system 2. From experience. C Generators for safety power supply C Second independent system infeed with automatic changeover for safety-supply consumers C Static uninterruptible power supply (USP) from a rectifier/inverter unit or storage battery C Rotating USP consisting of motor and generator set A constellation as described in Fig. AC ~ 50 Hz C Type and number of live conductors within the system: L1. 2/4 Type of infeed The type of connection to ground must be selected carefully for the MV or LV system. PE C Type of connection to ground: low-voltage systems: IT.

a protective device with an integrated overload protection should be used at the N conductor (example: LSIN). 4* All branch circuits must be designed as TN-S systems. we recommend to always use the TN-C-S system as shown in Fig.e. As according to IEC 60364-5-54. 2/5 EMC-friendly power system. 3* There must be no connection between the transformer neutral to ground or to the PE conductor in the transformer chamber. residual currents in the building can be avoided because current flows back via a separate N conductor. in case of a distributed N conductor function with a separately wired N conductor and PE conductor. such as fuses or circuit-breakers tripping in the event of a fault. centrally installed (short distances) The advantage of a TN-S system lies in the fact that the short-circuit current generated in the event of a fault is not fed back to the voltage source via a connection to ground but via a conductor. this also applies for its wiring in the low-voltage main distribution (LVMD) 2* The PE conductor connection between LVMD and transformer chamber must be configured for the max. 4-pole switching/protective devices must be provided at the infeeds and changeover equipment (parallel operation inhibited). When TN-S systems are used. The comparatively high 1-pole ground fault current enables rather simple protective devices to be used. Both 3-pole and 4-pole switching devices may be used. Fig. i. a TN-S system is only permissible in a central arrangement of the feed system. In case of distributed infeed. short-circuit current that might occur (K2S2 ≥ Ik2tk). Magnetic fields depend on the geometrical arrangement of the connections. If N conductors with reduced cross sections are used (we do not recommend this).Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts Section A Section B 3* Transformer Generator 1* 2* 3* 1* 2* L1 L2 L3 PEN (isolated) PE 4* Central grounding point dividing bridge L1 L2 L3 N PE Branches Circuit A 1* L1 L2 L3 PEN (isolated) PE 4* L1 L2 L3 N PE Main equipotential bonding Branches Circuit B 1* The PEN conductor must be wired isolated along the entire route. 2/7 2 . 2/5.

which can however be combined.01 0. Some features of these different options are listed below: C Cable laying + Lower material costs + When a fault occurs along the line.4 Routing/Wiring Nowadays the customer can choose between cables and busbars for power distribution. The technology that has been selected affects the behavior and properties of the power system and hence also influences certain aspects of use.5-1 x Ir Optionally Off Ground fault release Standard t g Optionally I 2t Fig.1.45 C Short-circuit protection S2K2 >= I2t C Protection against electrical shock in the event of indirect contact C Permissible voltage drop 10 Ig Isd 0 0. only one distribution board including its downstream subsystem will be affected – High installation expense – Increased fire load C Busbar distribution + Rapid installation + Flexible in case of changes or expansions + Low space requirements + Reduced fire load – Rigid coupling to the building geometry These aspects must be weighted in relation to the building use and specific area loads when configuring a specific distribution. 2/6 Characteristic curve variants 2. C Fuse technology + Good current-limiting properties + High switching capacity up to 120 kA + Low investment cost + Easy installation + Safe tripping.1.5 1 5 10 50 100 x In “ L Overload release „L 2 S Standard I t Optionally I 4t Short-time delayed short-circuit release „S“ Standard tsd Optionally I 2t I N G Instantaneous short-circuit release „I“ Standard On Optionally Off Neutral conductor protection Standard 0. it is useful to determine which technology shall be used to protect the electric equipment.5 Switching and Protective Devices As soon as the initial plans are drafted. such as C Safety of supply C Mounting expense C Maintenance and downtimes Types of protective equipment Protective equipment can be divided into two categories. Connection layout comprises the following specifications for wiring between output and target distribution board C Overload protection Ib ≤ Ir ≤ Iz and Iz > I2/1.1 tg tsd Ii 0.t a (s) Ir 1000 IrN tr 100 Ik max Ik min 2. no auxiliary power required + Easy grading between fuses 2/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

the following device properties must be taken into account: Current limiting: A protective device has a current-limiting effect if it shows a lower letthrough current in the event of a fault than the prospective short-circuit current at the fault location. a combined solution using selective and partially selective network sections will be applied in power systems for buildings when economic aspects are considered. Selectivity: When series-connected protective devices cooperate for graded tripping. the selection of the tripping unit is crucial for meeting the defined objectives for protection.Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts Protective tripping P = I 2* R This energy (area below the curve) is also transported in the contacts and hence in the switch I Above all when fuseless technology is employed. 2/8 Selective tripping 10 ms t Trip Q1 – Downtime after fault – Reduces selective tripping in connection with circuit-breakers – Fuse ageing – Separate protection of personnel required for switching high currents C Fuseless technology + Clear tripping times for overload and short circuit + Safe switching of operating and fault currents + Fast resumption of normal operation after fault trip + Various tripping methods adapted to the protective task + Communications-capable: signaling of system states – Coordination of the protection concept requires a calculation of short circuits – Higher investment costs Q2 Trip Q3 Fig. it will be protected by the upstream protective device. selective tripping is gaining more and more importance. the protective device which is closest upstream of the fault location must trip first. 2/9 Back-up conditioned fault tripping Back-up protection: The provision is that Q1 is a currentlimiting device. 2/7 Current limiting Fig. In this context. Q2 can be selected with Icu Ikmax. While standards such as DIN VDE 0100 Part 710 or DIN VDE 0108 demand a selective behavior of the protective equipment for safety power supply or certain areas of indoor installations. as this results in a higher supply safety and quality. This results in partial selectivity. The other upstream devices remain in operation. the proportion of buildings where selective tripping is also desired for the general power supply is rising. The temporal and spatial effects of a fault will be limited to a minimum. In power systems for buildings. Q2. Q1 Q2 Trip Q3 Current flow when zero-current interrupters are used Current flow when current-limiting circuitbreakers are used 4 ms Fig. 2/9 2 . If the fault current is higher than the rated breaking capacity of the downstream device in the event of a line shorting. Generally speaking.

Supply section 800 kVA ACB ≥ 1. This means cost savings in investment and operation. economical transformer outputs are between 630 and 1. For building power supplies. This equipment then determines the amount of investment involved. 2/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . With Pmax = Σ(Pi 8 ai) 8 g cosϕB Power factor. a circuit-breaker with definite-time overcurrent-time protection must also be selected for the medium-voltage system. Consequently. a household or a shop. in order to increase the short-circuit current. different protective devices are preferably suited to meet the requirements of power supply and protection.000 kVA. in order to ensure both a sufficient voltage stability and safe shutdown in the event of a fault. please refer to C Chapter 3 Power System Protection and Safety Coordination C Chapter 4 Medium Voltage C Chapter 6 Low Voltage in the Application Manual. For more detailed information in particular regarding the tripping characteristics. TIP: If an 800 kVA supply section is fed by a transformer and if selective tripping is a major requirement. i Please note that the lower limit for the short-circuit current is at ~15 kA .250 A LSI Supports the priority of selective fault tripping Fuse ≤ 400 A Supply section 400 kVA MCCB ≤ 630 A LSI Supply section 30 kVA Fuse 63 A Fuse 80 A MCB ≤ 16 A MCB ≤ 25 A Supports the priority of cost minimization Fig. a minimization of the purchased power results in a minimization of the short-circuit strength for the operating equipment. i kr. Smax in kVA < 1260 1600 1890 2400 2520 3000 3200 Table 2/5 SN in kVA 630 800 630 800 630 1000 800 n 2 2 3 3 4 3 4 ukr 6% 6% 6% 6% 6% 6% 6% Ikmax in kA 30 40 45 60 65 75 80 Proven transformer constellations for buildings Power requirements are established by Smax = Pmax /cosϕB. max ≈ Σ u IrTransformer. e. 2/10 Grading for a supply section of 800 kVA Grading in the supply section Starting from the smallest supply unit in a building. Higher outputs must therefore be divided into several (>2) separate supply sections to gain manageable power system data and hence economical solutions. Power requirements The power requirements of the entire distribution largely determine the layout of the main distribution as well as the transformer and/or generator rating. purchased quantity a Utilization factor g Simultaneity factor (demand) When the dimensioning rule Icu ≥ Ik“ is applied.g. transformers shall only be selected for outputs up to 400 kVA. Table 2/5 shows useful constellations for transformers connected in parallel per supply section. Transformer: 100 % Ik.

type 2: centralized. no. such as good expandability. type 1 Low building.e. number of floor distribution boards ≥ 2 Smax ≤ 2 MVA? i ≤ 20? no no yes Central utilities room. type 1: centralized. type 5: distributed. ukr 4% Smax ≥ 630 kVA. 2/11 Overview of power supply concept modules 2/11 2 .2a/h i < 5? no Low building High-rise building A ≤ 2000 m2 ? no i ≤ 10? no Tip: Smax = P/cosϕ Smax < 630 kVA. ukr 6% yes Separation into several supply sections per area. LVMD with central grounding point Tip: Given ground area = a2 Length l ≤ 100 m = 2 8 a. supplytransformerLVMD Centralized MV supply. cables High-rise building. fire load minimization Cables? no Busbars? Fig. i.6 Planning Aid Different individual decisions made regarding the power supply of buildings can be combined as follows: Commercial building? yes Radial system with partial load reserve Functional areas: Offices Meeting rooms Computing center Catering kitchen and canteen Heating–Ventilation– Air Conditioning Fire protection Logistics TN-C-S system. type 3: transformers at remote location High-rise building. busbar High-rise building. busbar yes yes yes Tip: Use busbar trunking systems if requirements are mainly set for ease of use. type 2 High-rise building.1. of floors i ≤ 100 . max. distributed transformers to LVMD Distributed MV supply to transformers to LVMD Interlocked changeover with 4-pole devices Low building.Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts 2. type 4: distributed. cables High-rise building.

2 SPS2. detailed descriptions on a variety of applications can be obtained on the Internet at www.2 UPS4.2. the power system can easily be configured and calculated with the aid of the SIMARIS design software.2 4th floor GPS3.2 Power System Planning Modules The following modules may be used for an easy and systematic power distribution design for typical building structures.2 UPS3.siemens.2 GPS 1 MVD Basement From PCO GPS FD PCO FF MVD SPS UPS General power supply Floor distribution boards Power company or system operator Firefighters Medium-voltage distribution Safety power supply Uninterruptible power supply SPS z 2 HVAC Heating – Ventilation – Air conditioning LVMD Low-voltage main distribution 2/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens SPS1. When the preplanning stage has been completed.2 G 3~ UPS1.2 UPS UPS2.com/tip Low building.2 3rd floor GPS2.2 SPS3. These are schematic solution concepts which can then be extended to meet specific customer project requirements.2 2nd floor 1st floor LVMD GPS1.2 .2 GPS4. Up-to-date. type 1: One supply section Elevators HVAC FF elevators HVAC-SPS GPS4.

cost center allocation 2/13 2 . 15% side area 1. time savings during installation Easy operation and fault localization Optimized voltage quality.500 m2 / 10. e. Ik ≤ 30 kA lighter design Redundant supply unit: – Generator 400 kVA (30 %) (the smaller the generator. for billing. to prevent lower transmission rates at communication lines) Cost transparency Wiring/ main route Cables Central measurements of current. indoor installation Low-voltage main distribution SIVACON 8PT with central EMC-friendly power system grounding point q splitting of PEN in PWE and N to the TN-S system Protection from electromagnetic interference (e. during power failure of the public grid Safety power supply Safety power supply acc. during power failure of the public grid Minimized space requirements for electric utilities room. high safety of supply and operation Power system protection Special requirements Proposal for concept finding Feature Network configuration Smax = 1.85 Our solution Central transformer supply close to load center Advantage Supply at the load center. to DIN VDE 0108 Uninterruptible supply of consumers. the greater the short-circuit current must be compared to the nominal current) Supply of important consumers on Increased safety of supply all floors in the event of a fault. e.000 to 2.g. voltage.g. i. power.g. cosϕ = 0.200 kVA. Voltage stability ukr = 6 %.g. economical Radial network Transformer module with 2 x 630 kVA.000 m2 85% utilized area.e. no maintenance Economical – UPS: 200 kVA (15 %) Medium-voltage supply station SF6 gas-insulated Supply of sensitive and important consumers Small switchgear station independent of climate Transformer GEAFOL cast-resin with reduced losses Low fire load. short LV cables low losses Transparent structure Your benefit Low costs.000 kW 100% total power from the public grid 10 – 30% of total power for safety power supply (SPS) 5 – 20% of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Selectivity is aimed at Good electromagnetic compatibility. e.Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts Building type Number of floors Ground area / total area Segmentation of power required Power required Supply types Low building 4 2.

2 SPS4.1 UPS1.1 .1 GPS3. type 2: Two supply sections Elevators HVAC FF-elevators HVAC-SPS UPS4.2 GPS2.1 SPS1.2 UPS UPS4.2 SPS4.1 GPS4.1 GPS4.2 SPS2.Low building.2 SPS2.1 1st floor LVMD GPS 1 MVD Basement From PCO GPS FD PCO FF MVD SPS UPS General power supply Floor distribution boards Power company or system operator Firefighters Medium-voltage distribution Safety power supply Uninterruptible power supply SPS z 2 G 3~ HVAC Heating – Ventilation – Air conditioning LVMD Low-voltage main distribution 2/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens GPS1.1 UPS3.2 UPS2.1 3rd floor GPS2.2 SPS1.2 UPS1.1 2nd floor GPS1.2 SPS3.2 UPS3.1 4th floor GPS3.1 UPS2.2 SPS3.

g. during power failure of the public grid Safety power supply Increased safety of supply Safety power supply acc. short LV cables low losses Transparent structure Your benefit Low costs. Optimized voltage quality. power. indoor installation EMC-friendly power system Low-voltage main distribution Protection from electromagnetic interference (e. cost center allocation Shorter cable routes. no maintenance Economical – UPS: 400 kVA (15 %) Medium-voltage supply station SF6 gas-insulated Supply of sensitive and important consumers Small switchgear station independent of climate Transformer GEAFOL cast-resin with reduced losses SIVACON 8PT with central grounding point q splitting of PEN in PE and N to the TN-S system Low fire load. e. to prevent lower transmission rates at communication lines) Cost transparency Wiring/ main route Cables Central measurements of current. during power failure of the public grid Minimized space requirements for distribution board room.g.g. time savings during installation Easy operation and fault localization Radial network Transformer module with 3 x 800 kVA. e. to DIN VDE 0108 Uninterruptible power supply. i. the greater the short-circuit current must be compared to the nominal current) Supply of important consumers on all floors in the event of a fault.000 m2 85 % utilized area 15 % side area > 2.400 kVA cosϕB = 0.g. e.e. Minimization of voltage fluctuations.000 kW 100 % total power from the public grid 10 – 30 % of total power for safety power supply (SPS) 5 – 20 % of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Selectivity is aimed at Good electromagnetic compatibility Power system protection Special requirements Proposal for concept finding Feature Network configuration Smax = 2. voltage.Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts Building type Number of floors Ground area / total area Segmentation of power required Power required Supply types Low building 4 2. ukr = 6 %.500 m2 / 2 x 10. lower voltage drop Two outgoing distribution board feeders per floor Economical 2/15 2 . Ik ≤ 60 kA low static requirements on building cost minimization in the structures building construction work Redundant supply unit: – Generator 730 kVA (30%) (the smaller the generator. for billing. no extra utilities room necessary.85 Our solution Two supply sections per floor Advantage Supply at the load center.

type 1: Central power supply Elevators HVAC FF elevators HVAC-SPS nth floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-1)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-2)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-3)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-4)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 5th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 4th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 3rd floor GPS FD General power supply Floor distribution boards FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 2nd floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS PCO Power company or system operator FF Firefighters HVAC Heating – Ventilation – Air conditioning MVD Medium-voltage distribution LVMD Low-voltage main distribution SPS UPS Safety power supply Uninterruptible power supply 1st floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS LVMD GPS 1 MVD Basement From PCO 2 SPS z G 3~ UPS 2/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .High-rise building.

g. power.85 Floors: 8 Our solution Central transformer supply close to load center Advantage Simple network configuration. i.800 kW 100 % total power from the public grid 10 – 30 % of total power for safety power supply (SPS) 5 – 20 % of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Selectivity is aimed at Good electromagnetic compatibility High safety of supply and operation Power system protection Special requirements Proposal for concept finding Feature Network configuration Smax = 1. e. voltage. the greater the short-circuit current must be compared to the nominal current) – UPS: 200 kVA (15 %) Radial network Supply of important consumers on Increased safety of supply all floors in the event of a fault. for billing. Voltage stability. independent of climate EMC-friendly power system Low-voltage main distribution Protection of telecommunications equipment from interference (e.000 kVA cosϕ = 0. Ik ≤ 30 kA Redundant supply unit: – Generator 400 kVA (30 %) (the smaller the generator. lighter design Ukr = 6%. during power failure of the public grid Safety power supply Safety power supply acc. no maintenance Economical Supply of sensitive or important consumers Transparent structure Medium-voltage supply station Transformer SF6 gas-insulated GEAFOL cast-resin with reduced losses SIVACON 8PT with central grounding point q splitting of PEN in PE and N to the TN-S system Cables Compact design. to DIN VDE 0108 Uninterruptible power supply during power failure of the public grid Easy operation and fault localization Minimized space requirements for utilities room. easy and low-cost operation of electric system Optimized voltage quality.g. central recording Cost savings 2/17 2 . to prevent lower transmission rates at communication lines) Cost center allocation at minimum expense Wiring/ main route Central measurements of current. e. economical Transformer module with 2x 630 kVA.000 m2 / ≤ 10.Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts Building type Number of floors Ground area / total area Segmentation of power required Power required Supply types High-rise building ≤ 10 1.e.000 m2 80 % utilized area 20 % side area ≤ 1.g. independent of climate Compact design. low power losses Your benefit Only one electric utilities room required.

type 3: Transformers at remote location Elevators 3 4 HVAC FF elevators HVAC-SPS nth floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-1)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-2)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-3)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-4)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 5th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 4th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 3rd floor GPS FD General power supply Floor distribution boards FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 2nd floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS PCO Power company or system operator FF Firefighters HVAC Heating – Ventilation – Air conditioning MVD Medium-voltage distribution LVMD Low-voltage main distribution SPS UPS Safety power supply Uninterruptible power supply 1st floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS LVMD GPS 1 2 z Basement From PCO SPS MVD G 3~ UPS 2/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .High-rise building.

during power failure of the public grid Safety power supply Safety power supply acc.g.500 kW.e. e.g. lower transmission rates for communication lines) Wiring/ main route Central data processing 2/19 2 . a relocation of the transformers should be considered even if the number of floors is less than 10 100 % total power from the public grid 10 – 30 % of total power for safety power supply (SPS) 5 – 20 % of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Selectivity is aimed at Good electromagnetic compatibility High safety of supply and operation Supply types Power system protection Special requirements Proposal for concept finding Feature Network configuration Smax = 1. Ukr = 6% i. to DIN VDE 0108 Uninterruptible power supply during power failure of the public grid Easy operation and fault localization Minimized space requirements for utilities room. Ik ≤ 45 kA Redundant supply unit: – Generator 800 kVA (30 %) (the smaller the generator. the greater the short-circuit current must be compared to the nominal current) – UPS: 400 kVA (15 %) Advantage Short LV cables. economical Supply of important consumers on Increased safety of supply all floors in the event of a fault.800 kVA cosϕ = 0. indoor installation Low-voltage main distribution SIVACON 8PT with central EMC-friendly power system grounding point q splitting of PEN in PE and N to the TN-S system (4-pole switches in the feeding lines and at the changeover point) Cables Central measurements of current.g. for 2 MW or higher. low power losses. lighter design Your benefit Economical.000 m2 80 % utilized area 20 % side area ≥ 1. e. centrally per floor in LVMD Protection of telecommunications equipment from interference (e. voltage.85 Floors: 20 Our solution Splitting into two supply sections 2 transformer modules with (2 + 1) x 630 kVA. no maintenance Economical Supply of sensitive or important consumers Radial network Transparent structure Medium-voltage supply station Transformer SF6 gas-insulated GEAFOL cast-resin with reduced losses Small switchgear station.Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts Building type Number of floors Ground area / total area Segmentation of power required Power required High-rise building 10 to 20 1. independent of climate Low fire load. reduction of fire load Voltage stability. eased fire protection Optimized voltage quality. power.000 m2 / ≤ 20. for billing.

type 4: Distributed supply Elevators FF elevators 4 5 6 HVAC HVAC-SPS G 3~ UPS nth floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-1)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-2)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-3)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-4)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 5th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 4th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 3rd floor GPS FD General power supply Floor distribution boards FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 2nd floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS PCO Power company or system operator FF Firefighters HVAC Heating – Ventilation – Air conditioning MVD Medium-voltage distribution LVMD Low-voltage main distribution SPS UPS Safety power supply Uninterruptible power supply 1st floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS LVMD GPS 1 2 3 z Basement From PCO SPS MVD G 3~ UPS 2/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .High-rise building.

600 kVA cosϕ = 0.Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts Building type Number of floors Ground area / total area Segmentation of power required Power required Supply types High-rise building > 20 1. no maintenance Economical Supply of sensitive or important consumers Radial network Transparent structure Medium-voltage supply station Transformer SF6 gas-insulated GEAFOL cast-resin with reduced losses Small switchgear station.000 m2 / > 20.g. to DIN VDE 0108 Uninterruptible power supply during power failure of the public grid Easy operation and fault localization Minimized space requirements. i. Voltage stability. simplified fire protection 2 transformer modules with 3 x 630 kVA. e. during power failure of the public grid Safety power supply Safety power supply acc. economical Supply of important consumers on Increased safety of supply all floors in the event of a fault. for billing.g.g.000 m2 80 % utilized area 20 % side area ≥ 2.e.85 Floors: 25 Our solution Splitting into two supply sections Advantage Short LV cables. indoor installation without any special precautions Low-voltage main distribution SIVACON 8PT with central EMC-friendly power system grounding point q splitting of PEN in PE and N to the TN-S system (4-pole switches to connect to the low-voltage main distribution) Cables Central measurements of current. Ik ≤ 45 kA Redundant supply unit: – Generator 2 x 500 kVA (30 %) (the smaller the generator.000 kW 100 % total power from the public grid 10–30 % of total power for safety power supply (SPS) 5–20 % of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Selectivity is aimed at Good electromagnetic compatibility High safety of supply and operation Power system protection Special requirements Proposal for concept finding Feature Network configuration Smax = 3. voltage. power. e. lighter design Ukr = 6 %. cost center allocation Protection of telecommunications equipment from interference (e. lower transmission rates for communication lines) Wiring/ main route Cost transparency Cost savings 2/21 2 . low power losses. reduction of fire load Your benefit Economical solution. the greater the short-circuit current must be compared to the nominal current) – UPS: 2 x 250 kVA (15 %) Optimized voltage quality. independent of climate Low fire load.

High-rise building. type 2: Central busbars Elevators HVAC FF elevators HVAC-SPS nth floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-1)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-2)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-3)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-4)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 5th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 4th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 3rd floor GPS FD General power supply Floor distribution boards FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 2nd floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS PCO Power company or system operator FF Firefighters HVAC Heating – Ventilation – Air conditioning MVD Medium-voltage distribution LVMD Low-voltage main distribution SPS UPS Safety power supply Uninterruptible power supply 1st floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS LVMD GPS 1 2 z Basement From PCO SPS MVD G 3~ UPS 2/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

no maintenance Economical Supply of sensitive or important consumers Radial network Transparent structure Medium-voltage supply station Transformer SF6 gas-insulated GEAFOL cast-resin with reduced losses Small switchgear station. indoor installation without any special precautions Low-voltage main distribution SIVACON 8PT with central EMC-friendly power system grounding point q splitting of PEN in PE and N to the TN-S system Protection of telecommunications equipment from interference (e.85 Floors: 8 Our solution Central transformer supply close to load center Advantage Simple network configuration.800 kW 100 % total power from the public grid 10–30 % of total power for safety power supply (SPS) 5–20 % of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Selectivity is aimed at Good electromagnetic compatibility High safety of supply and operation Power system protection Special requirements Proposal for concept finding Feature Network configuration Smax = 1.g. minimized rising main busbar Less space requirements for supply lines 2/23 2 . e. Optimized voltage quality Ukr = 6 %. low power losses Your benefit Only one electric utilities room required. flexible power distribution Few branches in the distribution.500 kVA cosϕ = 0.g. the greater the short-circuit current must be compared to the nominal current) – UPS: 200 kVA (15 %) Supply of important consumers on Increased safety of supply all floors in the event of a fault. to DIN VDE 0108 Uninterruptible power supply during power failure of the public grid Easy operation and fault localization Minimized space requirements for utilities room. i. independent of climate Low fire load. during power failure of the public grid Safety power supply Safety power supply acc.Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts Building type Number of floors Ground area / total area Segmentation of power required Power required Supply types High-rise building ≤ 10 1. small distribution Small.e. lower transmission rates for communication lines) Safety. economical equipment Transformer modules with 2 x 800 kVA. time savings at restructuring Minimized space requirements for for electric utilities room Wiring/ main route Busbars to the subdistribution boards Low fire load.000 m2 / ≤ 10. Ik ≤ 40 kA Redundant supply unit: – Generator 400 kVA (30 %) (the smaller the generator.000 m2 80 % utilized area 20 % side area ≤ 1. easy and low-cost operation of electric system Operation that is gentle on the user's equipment.

High-rise building. type 5: Distributed busbars Elevators FF elevators 4 5 6 HVAC HVAC-SPS G 3~ UPS nth floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-1)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-2)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-3)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS (n-4)th floor FD-GPS System disconnecting point FD-SPS System disconnecting point FD-SPS FD-UPS System disconnecting point FD-UPS 5th floor FD-GPS 4th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 3rd floor GPS FD General power supply Floor distribution boards FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS 2nd floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS PCO Power company or system operator FF Firefighters HVAC Heating – Ventilation – Air conditioning MVD Medium-voltage distribution LVMD Low-voltage main distribution SPS UPS Safety power supply Uninterruptible power supply 1st floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS GPS 1 LVMD Basement From PCO 2 3 z SPS MVD G 3~ UPS 2/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

g.85 Floors: 21 Our solution Splitting into two supply sections Advantage Short LV cables. reduction of fire load Your benefit Lower cost 2 transformer modules with 3 x 800 kVA. economical Supply of important consumers on Increased safety of supply all floors in the event of a fault. e.000 m2 80 % utilized area 20 % side area > 2.000 kVA cosϕ = 0. time savings when restructuring work is carried out Minimized space requirements for for electric utilities room Small. low power losses. Ik ≤ 60 kA Redundant supply unit: – Generator 2 x 630 kVA (30 %) (the smaller the generator. lower transmission rates for communication lines) Wiring/ main route Safety. flexible power distribution Few branches in the distribution.Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts Building type Number of floors Ground area / total area Segmentation of power required Power required Supply types High-rise building > 20 1. indoor installation Low-voltage main distribution SIVACON 8PT with central EMC-friendly power system grounding point q splitting of PEN in PE and N to the TN-S system (4-pole switches in the feeding lines and at the changeover point) Busbars to the subdistribution boards Low fire load. small distribution Protection of telecommunications equipment from interference (e. during power failure of the public grid Safety power supply Safety power supply acc. to DIN VDE 0108 Uninterruptible power supply during power failure of the public grid Easy operation and fault localization Minimized space requirements for utilities room.e. no maintenance Economical – UPS: 2 x 300 kVA (15 %) Radial network Supply of sensitive or important consumers Transparent structure Medium-voltage supply station Transformer SF6 gas-insulated GEAFOL cast-resin with reduced losses Small switchgear station. the greater the short-circuit current must be compared to the nominal current) Optimized voltage quality.000 m2 / ≥ 20. i.g. Voltage stability lighter design Ukr = 6 %. minimized rising main busbar Less space requirements for supply lines 2/25 2 . independent of climate Low fire load.000 kW 100 % total power from the public grid 10–30 % of total power for safety power supply (SPS) 5–20 % of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Selectivity is aimed at Good electromagnetic compatibility High safety of supply and operation Power system protection Special requirements Proposal for concept finding Feature Network configuration Smax = 4.

7 4.155 1.3 Max.9 6.155 1.1 6.5 8.5 10.309 577 909 1.6 10.6 8.155 1.000 400 630 800 1.443 1.000 1.155 1.9 4. secondary-side short-circuit current [kA] 16 25 31 39 10 17 21 26 33 42 16 25 31 39 10 17 21 26 33 42 2/26 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . to DIN VDE 0102 EN 60909.000 400 630 800 1.4 7.4 7.250 1.600 400 630 800 1.804 2.8 8.443 577 909 1.5 11.3 6. dated 07-01-2002 Rated power [kVA] 400 630 800 1.5 12.443 1.3 6.250 1.600 HV voltage [kV] 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 LV voltage [V] 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 Rated current Ir Impedance oltage Ukr [A] [%] 577 909 1.000 1.804 2.Appendix Short-circuit currents Calculated acc.309 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 Reduced power losses Pk [kVA] 4.443 577 909 1.4 3.9 9.4 7.0 7.

Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts 2/27 2 .

5 Protection of Distribution Transformers .2 Protective Equipment for Low-Voltage Systems 3.3 System Protection and Safety Coordination 3.1 Definitions 3.4 Protection of Capacitors 3.3 Selectivity in Low-Voltage Systems 3.

System Protection / Safety Coordination chapter 3 .

Activities in the LV system (short circuits. Some terms and definitions shall be described in this chapter for a better understanding of the issue. Protection and Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks”. occurs at a particular point in the system. advance with the network planners. Due to the complexity of this issue. Selectivity Selectivity. A power system is considered fully selective. Back-up protection If a short circuit. in particular. full selectivity is increasingly demanded. The system interconnection together with the 5 rules of circuit dimensioning must also be taken into account. It must also permit short clearance times to limit the fault power and the effect of arcing faults. as seen in the direction of energy flow (from the infeed to the load). and the relatively short distances in industrial and building power systems mean that lowvoltage and medium-voltage systems are closely linked. please also refer to the Siemens handbook ”Switching. the control state of the MV system affects the selectivity criteria in the secondary power system. 3. starting currents) also have an effect on the MV system. maximum. Partly. 3/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . installation companies and system operators involved.e. Erlangen. If the situation is reversed. the emphasis lies on the low-voltage side. The protective device may be used in power systems for rated switching capacities up to this value. Specific network protection requirements for medium voltage are dealt with in Chapter 4 “Medium Voltage” and in Chapter 8 ”Substation Control and Protection Systems”. information about proper selection and application is often insufficient. The probability of faults occurring and the effects of these on the load must then be considered for unfavorable scenarios. Partial selectivity In certain situations. Rated short-circuit breaking capacity The rated short-circuit breaking capacity is the maximum value of the short circuit that the protective device is able to clear according to specifications. if only the protective device upstream of the fault location disconnects from supply. Note: Full selectivity always refers to a dead. country. Mutual system interference It is therefore necessary to adjust the power system and its protection throughout the entire distribution system and to coordinate the protective functions. i. it has become a general requirement in tender specifications. also when dealing with network protection. back-up protection must provide protection for the downstream installation component and for the protection device by means of an upstream protective device (grading). These requirements as well as the effects of full or partial selectivity in power distribution systems within the context of the relevant standard. fault current at the mounting location. Objectives of system protection The objective of system protection is to detect faults and to selectively isolate faulted parts of the system. The protective equipment of these devices is connected in series. radial system configurations are normally preferred for the lowvoltage side (radial systems. high individual power outputs. industry. A number of switchgear stations and distribution boards are required for distributing power from the infeed to the load. If you wish to obtain more detailed information regarding further applications. has become a topic for discussion in the previous years.1 Definitions Electrical installations in a power system are protected either by protective equipment allocated to the installation components or by combinations of these protective elements. partial selectivity (up to a particular short-circuit current) is sufficient. controlgear and switchgear. which is higher than the rated switching capacity of the protective device used. Full selectivity To maintain the supply safety of power distribution systems. This chapter basically comprises the installation of electrical equipment in LV systems. three-phase. system configuration or structure should be clarified in 1) For descriptions and modes of operation of low-voltage protection devices.3 System Protection and Safety Coordination System configuration While in building and industrial power systems star-type system configurations are normally used for medium voltage. Therefore. please contact your Siemens representative. published by Publicis MCD. High power density. double spur systems).

Low-voltage miniature circuitbreakers (MCB) Miniature circuit-breakers are distinguished according to their method of operation – either high or low current limiting. or non-current-limiting: ACB). C Short-circuit protection. similar to the inverse-time delay function in medium voltage) C Ground fault protection Designation: ”G” (previously also called ”g” release).1. I-releases are also offered with a fixed settable or OFF function. or partial range fuse for short-circuit protection only) and the rated current (Fig. utilization category (A or B. solenoid releases. In addition. Besides the standard curves and settings. Besides the standard function (definite-time).1 Protective Equipment and Features Low-voltage protective devices1) Low-voltage high-rupturingcapacity fuses Low-voltage high-rupturing-capacity (LV HRC) fuses have a high breaking capacity. protective functions (see releases). withdrawable). C Short-circuit protection. Their protective functions are determined by electromechanical releases: 3/3 3 . inverse time-delay overload releases are also available with optional characteristic curves. see IEC 609472). instantaneous Designation: “I “ (previously also called ”n” release). e. Releases / protective functions The protective function of the circuitbreaker in the power distribution system is determined by the selection of the appropriate release. 3/1 Protective characteristic of LV HRC fuse and LV circuit-breaker with releases Fig. To detect differential fault currents up to 3 A. They fuse quickly to restrict the peak short-circuit current to the utmost degree. previously also “z” release (“S” for short-time delay).g. communication capability (capability to transmit data to and from the switch). IEC 60947-2 Circuit-breakers for power distribution systems are distinguished according to their type design (open or compact design). similar to the RCCB function for the protection of persons (up to 500 mA). For a temporal adjustment of protective functions in series connections. plug-in. there is also an optional function (I 2 t = inverse-time delay). electronic releases also permit new tripping criteria which are not possible with electromechanical releases. full-range fuse for overload and short-circuit protection. Releases can be divided into thermo-magnetic releases (previously also called electromechanical releases) and electronic tripping units (ETU). with delay Designation: “S”. 3/1). similar to the DMT function in medium voltage) Inverse-time-delay overcurrent release: For this optional S-function applies I 2 t = constant.System Protection / Safety Coordination Inverse time-delay t t Inverse Definite time-delay I 2 . Low-voltage circuit-breakers. The protective characteristic is determined by the selected utilization category of the LV HRC fuse (e. This function is generally used to ensure a higher degree of selectivity (inverse time. g.” the desired delay time tsd is set to a definite value when a set current value (limit-value Isd) is exceeded (definite time. t = constant Definite Instantaneous LV circuit-breaker with releases I Variable characteristic curves and setting ranges Instantaneous release LV HRC fuse HV HRC fuse MV circuit-breaker with time-overcurrent protection I Variable operating zones and setting ranges Fig. 3/2 Protective characteristic of HV HRC fuse and MV time-overcurrent protection 3. Depending on the type of release. Definite-time-delay overcurrent releases: For this “standard S-function. there are also optional functions for special applications. C Overload protection Designation: “L” or earlier “a” (“L” for long-time delay). Depending on the application. rated current (maximum nominal current of the switch) method of operation (current limiting: MCCB. C Fault current protection Designation: RCD (= residual current device). Protective characteristics The protective characteristic curve is determined by the rated circuitbreaker current as well as the setting and the operating values of the releases (see Table 3/5). mounting type (fixed mounting.

it is possible to arrange the following protective devices in series (relative to the direction of power flow): C Fuse with downstream fuse 3/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .and low-voltage protection for the transformers feeding power to the LV system must be harmonized and adjusted to the additional protection of the secondary power system. impedance (distance protection) and current difference (differential protection) are also used.3 Selectivity Criteria In addition to factors such as rated current and rated switching capacity. since only this setting of Id /Isd guarantees that the instantaneous overcurrent release can carry out its personnel and system protection functions.Releases C Overload protection by means of inverse time-delayed overload releases. solenoid releases. Protective characteristics Secondary relays. HV HRC fuses restrict the peak short-circuit current.g. Differential protection does not affect. a further criterion to be considered when implementing a protection device is selectivity. whose characteristic curves are also determined by the actual current transformation ratio. are normally used as protective devices in medium-voltage systems. C Circuit-breaker with downstream miniature circuit-breaker C Circuit-breaker with downstream fuse C Fuse with downstream circuit-breaker C Fuse with downstream miniature circuit-breaker C Several parallel infeeds with or without coupler units with downstream circuit-breaker or downstream fuse Current selectivity must be verified in the case of meshed LV systems. Selectivity is important because it ensures optimum supply reliability. A minimum short-circuit current is therefore required for correct operation. time-overcurrent protection with additional directional function or differential protection. The following criteria can be applied for selective operation of series-connected protection devices: C Time difference for clearance (time grading) C Current difference for operating values (current grading) 3. the admissible tolerance limit of ± 20% must be observed! Criterion: Isd ≤ IKmin – 20 % C The observance of specified tripping conditions determines the maximum conductor lengths or their cross sections. Distance protection is rarely used in the distribution systems described here. Note: With these settings. Medium-voltage protection equipment High-voltage high-breakingcapacity fuses High-voltage high-breaking-capacity (HV HRC) fuses can only be used for short-circuit protection. Static numerical protection devices are increasingly preferred. C Combination of time and current grading (inverse time grading) Power direction (directional protection). HV HRC fuses are normally only installed upstream of the transformers in the LV infeed.1. the operating value of this release must be less than the lowest short-circuit current at the end of the line to be protected.g. or only slightly influences the grading of the other protective devices.1. e. Medium-voltage circuit-breakers Circuit-breakers can provide timeovercurrent protection (definite and inverse). The high. only time-overcurrent protection devices with different characteristics are usually connected in series. Criterion: Icu/ Ics > IKmax C The lowest short-circuit current is important for setting the overcurrent release. 3/2). 3. C Selective current grading is only possible if the short-circuit currents are known. e. With the upstream circuit-breakers. partial selectivity can be achieved using combinations of carefully matched protective devices. Appropriate checks must be carried out to determine the effects on the primary MV system. bimetallic releases C Short-circuit protection by means of instantaneous overload releases. Requirements for the selective behavior of protective devices Protective devices can only behave selectively if both the highest and the lowest short-circuit currents for the relevant system points are known at the project planning stage. They do not provide any overload protection.2 Low-Voltage Protection Equipment Assemblies Protection equipment assemblies With series-connected distribution boards. C In addition to current grading. In MV systems. As a result: C The highest short-circuit current determines the required rated short-circuit switching capacity Icu/ Ics of the circuit-breaker. The protective characteristic is determined by the selected rated current (Fig.

25 times the operating value of the downstream circuit-breaker. Time sequence for circuit-breakers When grading the operating currents. 3/3 illustrates the individual time-related terms using two graded LV circuit-breakers as an example. With large installations.e. Grading time. Fig. delay time The grading time tsd is the interval required between the tripping characteristics of two series-connected protection devices to ensure correct operation of the protective device immediately upstream of the fault.System Protection / Safety Coordination ta1 ta2 te1 te2 td2 Operating time of breaker Q1 Operating time of breaker Q2 Disengaging time of breaker Q1 Disengaging time of breake Q2 Delay time of breaker Q2 ≈ grading time tst2 Opening time of breaker Q1 Opening time of breaker Q2 Arcing time of breaker Q1 Arcing time of breaker Q2 Total clearance time of breaker Q1 Total clearance time of breaker Q2 (tg = to+tL) Ik L S Q2 t d2 ≈150 ms ta2 td2 ≈ tst2 to2 to1 ta1 L S Q1 to1 = 3 to 30 ms depending on circuit-breaker type and magnitude of short-circuit current tg1 te1 tL1 tg2 te2 tL2 to1 to2 tL1 tL2 tg1 tg2 M Safety margin t Fig. the operating value of the overcurrent release of the upstream circuit-breaker must be at least 1. Grading the operating currents with time grading Grading of the operating currents is also taken into consideration with time grading. C The single-phase short-circuit current will be the lowest fault current if the damping zero phase-sequence impedance of the LV cable is active. C With infeed into LV power systems. the single-phase fault current will be greater than the threephase fault current if transformers with the Dy connection are used. it is advisable to determine all short-circuit currents using a special computer program. Plotting the tripping characteristics of the graded protective devices in a grading diagram will help to verify and visualize selectivity. 3/5 3 . our SIMARIS design® planning software comes as the optimum solution (see Chapter 12). Here. i. 3/3 Time sequence for the breaking operation of two graded LV circuit-breakers in the event of a short circuit C The highest short-circuit current can be both the three-phase and the single-phase short-circuit current. Scattering of operating currents in definite-time-delay overcurrent releases (S) is thus compensated (≤ ±10%). the time sequence of the breaking operation of the circuit-breakers must also be taken into consideration. The delay time to be set at the circuit-breaker tsd is obtained from the sum of the grading times.

the following must be observed: C To ensure positive selectivity. value) Fig. 3/4 shows a hand-drawn grading diagram with tripping curves for two series-connected circuit-breakers.4 kV. 3/20 and 3/24 only). only the delay time (td) is plotted for circuit-breakers with definite-time-delay overcurrent releases (S). C Without fuses. for the fused outgoing circuit from the busbars with the highest rated fuse-link current. Circuit-breakers are preferred to fuses in cases where fuse links with high rated currents do not provide selectivity vis-à-vis the definite-time-delay overcurrent release (S) of the transformer feeder circuit-breaker. i s t st2 ≈150 ms t d2 ≈180 ms to1 < 30 ms 2 3 4 6 103 2 3 4 6 104 2 3 4 6 105 Current I (r.120 100 40 t 20 min 10 4 2 1 s 20 10 4 2 1 400 200 100 ms 40 20 10 2 101 2 3 4 6 102 Q1 Q2 Ik1 Ik2 L (cold) 3.4 kV. 3/3 Grading principles Delay times and operating currents are graded in the opposite direction to the flow of power. 3/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . as it is not affected by preloading. 13. or only with very long delay times tsd (400 to 500 ms). starting with the final circuit.s. C With fuses. and only the opening time (to) for circuit-breakers with instantaneous overcurrent releases (I).4 Preparation of CurrentTime Diagrams (Grading Diagrams) Manual preparation General notes When characteristic tripping curves are entered on log-log graph paper. for the load breaker with the highest current setting of the overcurrent release. 3/4 Grading diagram with tripping curves of the circuit-breakers Q1 and Q2 shown in Fig. C Templates for plotting the tripping curves Fig. C With mechanical (thermal) inversetime delay overload releases (L). 3/39 ff. there is only one tripping curve. C With overcurrent releases – instantaneous (I) and definite-time delayed releases (S) – the tolerance may be ±20% of the current setting (according to EN 60947-2 / IEC 60947-2 / VDE 0660 Part 101).8/0. not taking into account tolerances. all currents and tripping curves on the high-voltage side are converted and referred to the low-voltage side on the basis of the transformation ratio.1. 3/4. Furthermore. The time sequence for the breaking operation illustrated in Fig. 3/3 was used here (time selectivity). circuitbreakers are used where high system availability is required as they help to clear faults faster and the circuitbreakers’ releases are not subject to aging – especially with consumers with very long infeed distances. a manual preparation of grading diagrams is no longer necessary. Procedure with two or more voltage levels In the case of selectivity involving two or more voltage levels (Fig. Tools for preparing grading diagrams C Standard forms with paired current values for commonly used voltages. the characteristic curves shown in the manufacturer catalog apply for cold releases. When the SIMARIS design planning software is used. The selected characteristic curve must therefore be suitable for a motor or transformer at operating temperature. the tripping curves must neither cross nor touch. 20/0.m. Significant tripping times For the sake of clarity. 10/0. The opening times to are reduced by up to 25% at normal operating temperatures. Tolerance range of tripping curves C The tripping curves of circuit-breakers given in the manufacturer catalogs are usually only average values and must be extended to include tolerance ranges (explicitly shown in Fig.). e. g.4 kV. etc. C With electronic inverse-time delay (long-time delay) overcurrent releases.

Precise information must be obtained from the device manufacturer. Id.e. only the grading times are added. in order to allow for the scatter band of the L-release (Fig. i. Ir Definite-time delay. Ii L S Q2 td2 t d2 ≈ t gt2 t o1 Grading margin L I M Q1 to1 Safety margin t Fig. short-time grading control) the grading distance has been defined as 50 ms Irrespective of the type of S-release (mechanical or electronic). C Grading between two circuit-breakers with electronic overcurrent releases (Q1 and Q2) should be about 70-80 ms C Grading between two circuit-breakers with different release types (Q2 = ETU and Q3 = TM) should be about 100 ms C For circuit-breakers with ZSI (zoneselective interlocking. The resulting inaccuracies are corrected by the calculated grading margins. The delay time tgt2 of breaker Q2 can be equated approximately with the grading time tgt2 . Between an LV HRC fuse and a downstream circuit-breaker. to1 Opening time of breaker Q1 tgt2 Grading time of breaker Q2 L S Q3 td3 t d3 ≈ (t gt2 + ttgt3) ttgt3 tgt3 Grading time of breaker Q3 td2 td3 L S I Delay time of breaker Q2 Delay time of breaker Q3 Inverse-time delay. 3/6).System Protection / Safety Coordination Low-voltage time grading Grading and delay times Only the grading time tgt and delay time tsd are relevant for time grading between several series-connected circuit-breakers or in conjunction with LV HRC fuses (Fig. the delay time tgt3 of breaker Q3 is calculated from the sum of the grading times tgt2 + tgt3. Proven grading times tgt Series-connected circuit-breakers: Those so-called "proven grading times" are guiding values or rules of thumb. 3/5 Time grading for several series-connected circuit-breakers 3/7 3 . td Instantaneous. 3/5). a grading time tgt (safety margin) of at least 1 s must be maintained from the prearcing-time/current characteristic of the LV HRC fuse to the point at which the tripping curves L and I or S intersect. a grading time of 70 ms to 100 ms is necessary between a circuit-breaker and a downstream LV HRC fuse. In the interests of simplicity.

The DIN VDE and IEC standards also permit a switching device to be protected by one of the upstream protective devices with an adequate rated short-circuit switching capacity if both the feeder and the downstream protective device are also protected (back-up protection). a safety margin is incorporated in the grading time. Only then does the protection system revert to the normal/rest position (release time). Protection and Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks” and the ”Electrical Installations Handbook”. 3/6). which depends on a number of factors. please refer to the Siemens publication “Switching. The release causes the circuitbreaker to open. has to be expected for the protective devices (including circuitbreakers). the set time must elapse before the device issues the tripping command to the shunt or undervoltage release of the circuitbreaker (command time tc). miniature circuit-breakers must be fitted with back-up fuses with a rated current of 100 A (max. Whereas grading times tgt of less than 400 to 300 ms are not possible with protective devices with mechanical releases. Medium-voltage time grading Command time and grading time The following must be observed when determining the grading time tgt on the medium-voltage side: Once the protective device has been energized (Fig.) to prevent any damage being caused by short-circuit currents. Erlangen. The short-circuit current is interrupted when the arc has been extinguished.Back-up protection Current I According to the Technical Supply Conditions of the power supply companies (see ”Electrical Installations Handbook”). 3/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Since a spread of time intervals. published by Publicis MCD Verlag. 3/6 Time grading in medium-voltage switchgear Bibliography Literature on LV installations For more information about low-voltage switching and protective devices. The grading time tgt between successive protective devices must be greater than the sum of the total clearance time tg of the breaker and the release time of the protection system. Time setting for back-up protection Short-circuit current Operating current Load current Time setting for protection Grading time t gt Command time tc Spread of Spread of Spread of protection circuit-breaker protection response time clearance time response time Clearance time of circuit-breaker t Release time Grading margin Total clearance time t g of circuit-breaker Fig. the more modern electronic and digital releases permit grading times of only 300 or 250 ms.

to EN 60947-2/ IEC 609472/DIN VDE 0660-101 C Circuit-breakers for motor protec tion acc. The protective switching devices and safety systems dealt with in this chapter are further described in Chapter 6.4 Section 6.2 EN 60 269/IEC 60 269/DIN VDE 0636 EN 60 947-4-1/IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660-102 – × × – × – – No protection provided. Overcurrent protection devices Standard 3. EN 60 947-2/IEC 60 947-2/DIN VDE 0660-101 EN 60 947-4-1/IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660-102 – × × Protection provided Table 3/1 Overview of line and cable overcurrent protection devices discussed in this manual together with their protection ranges 3/9 3 .g.2. Overload protection × × × Short-circuit protection × × × × See Section Fuses gL Miniature circuit-breakers Circuit-breakers with overload and overcurrent releases Switchgear fuses aM Switchgear assemblies with back-up fuse. for clearance with undervoltage.7).2. e.System Protection / Safety Coordination 3. When configuring selective distribution boards. to EN 60947-2/ IEC 60947-2 / DIN VDE 0660-101 C Circuit-breakers used in motor star ters acc. for overload and short-circuit protection. first and foremost. The protection equipment in the MV system of outgoing transformer feeders has also been listed in Table 3/2. to EN 60898/ IEC 60898 / DIN VDE 0641-11 Zero-current interrupters / current limiters Depending on their method of operation.2. or with supplementary modules for detecting fault/residual currents (also see Chapter 6).2. Section 1. In order to increase their protective functions. zero-current interrupters are more suitable as upstream protection devices and current limiters as downstream protection devices.2 Protection Equipment for Low-Voltage Power Systems Tables 3/1 and 3/2 provide an overview of the protection equipment for LV systems.2. they can also be equipped with additional releases. Publicis MCD Verlag. The circuit-breakers are distinguished according to their protective function: C Circuit-breakers for system protection acc. Overcurrent protection for lines and cables Overcurrent protection devices must be used to protect lines and cables against overheating which may result from operational overloads or dead short circuits (”Electrical Installations Handbook”. circuit-breakers are available as: C Zero-current interrupters or C Current limiters (fuse-type current limiting). utilization category gL or aM. and contactor with overload relay or starter circuit-breaker and contactor with overload relay EN 60 269/IEC 60 269/DIN VDE 0636 EN 60 898/IEC 60 898/DIN VDE 0641-11 EN 60 947-2/IEC 60 947-2/DIN VDE 0660-101 Section 6. to EN 60947-4-2/ IEC 60947-4-2 / DIN VDE 0660-102 C Miniature circuit-breakers for cable and line protection acc.2 Section 6. Erlangen.1 EN 60 269/IEC 60 269/DIN VDE 0636 – Section 6.1 Circuit-Breakers with Protective Functions Protective functions of LV circuit-breakers Circuit-breakers are used.

Protection devices MV Switch-disconnectors. twolevel I> and I>>. HV HRC fuses Circuit-breakers. HV HRC fuses LV Circuit-breakers or LV HRC fuses Low Network circuit-breakers and network master relays Low Cost Medium-voltage side Justifiable High Transformers with thermal release or full thermal protection Low-voltage side with various series-connected protection devices in radial systems. ≤ 100 A HV or LV HRC fuses I> I>> S Definite-time-overcurrent protection. via current transformer Network master relay (directional power relay) via current transformer and system voltage Power-factor correction controller Switch-disconnector Circuit-breaker Drawout circuit-breaker (with safe clearance) Contactor Overload relay Table 3/2 Overview of protection grading schemes discussed in this manual for outgoing transformer and LV feeders 3/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . and parallel-connected LV HRC fuses in interconnected systems Individual and parallel operating customary HV HRC MV LV Optional ≤ 630 A I> I>> MV LV Individual and parallel operating customary Only parallel operation customary HV HRC MV LV S LV HRC (interconnected system) ≤ 50 A. transducer. timeovercurrent protection Tie breaker Circuit-breakers Switch-disconnectors.

Table 3/5 contains the operating ranges of the overcurrent releases. protection also includes “zone-selective interlocking” (ZSI) In the following. The information supplied by the Protective function Siemens symbol Time-delay characteristics of release Graphical symbol acc. it should be noted that the circuit-breakers are designed for a specific maximum permissible thermal and dynamic load. whereas the electronic overcurrent releases used in Siemens circuit-breakers all have variable settings. Circuitbreakers with electronic overload releases must be used in such cases. combinations of releases will be referred to by their code letters only (L-. According to the standards specified in Table 3/1. an I-release must also be used to ensure that the circuitbreaker is opened instantaneously with very high short-circuit currents. in the event of a short circuit.and I-releases). the operating value at which the releases trigger may deviate by ± 20% from the set value. S. If. Overcurrent releases The instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent releases have either fixed or variable settings. the time delay results in this load to be exceeded. Overload releases Mechanical (thermal) inverse-time-delay overload releases (L-releases) are not always suitable for networks with a high harmonic content.System Protection / Safety Coordination Overload and overcurrent protection Tables 3/3 and 3/4 provide an overview of releases and relays in LV circuit-breakers. to EN 60 617/DIN 40 713 Circuit diagram or Block diagram Overload protection L Inverse-time delay Selective short-circuit protection S1) Definite-time delay by timing element or inverse-time delay Definite-time delay or inverse-time delay Instantaneous I> I> Fault current/ residual current/ earth fault protection G1) I Short-circuit protection I I>> I> 1) For SENTRON 3WL and SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers. Short-circuit protection with S-releases In the case of circuit-breakers with definite (short-)time-delay overcurrent releases (S) used for time-grading short-circuit protection. Possible exceptions are indicated in the manufacturer specifications. Symbols for releases according to protective functions Table 3/3 Function Overload protection Release Overload release Inverse-time delay or electronic delay Relay Overload relay Thermal delay or electronic delay Thermistor protection release devices Overcurrent relay Instantaneous electromagnetic release – Short-circuit protection Overcurrent release Instantaneous electromagnetic or electronic Overcurrent release Instantaneous electromagnetic or electronic Selective short-circuit protection Table 3/4 Circuit-breaker releases and relays with protective functions 3/11 3 . Modules The overcurrent releases can be integrated in the circuit-breaker or supplied as separate modules for retrofitting or replacement.

Circuit-breakers with fault-current/ residual-current tripping The assembly comprising a circuitbreaker and add-on module has established itself for circuit-breakers with rated currents In of up to 400 A and fault-current/residual-current tripping. circuitbreaker assemblies which are sensitive to AC/DC currents are required for electrical installations in which smooth DC fault currents or currents with a low residual ripple occur in the event of a fault.. adjustable in steps.000 mA/3. AC/DC sensitive circuit-breaker assemblies In industrial applications.25 I∆n < v∆ ≤ 0.000 mA C Tripping time ta. e.000 ms C Operation depends on system voltage C Sensitivity: tripping with alternating and pulsating DC fault currents C Reset button ”R” for resetting after residual-current tripping C Test button ”T” for testing the circuit-breaker assembly C Status display for the current leakage / residual current I∆ in the downstream circuit. adjustable in steps. 8 to 15 · Ir manufacturer should be consulted when the release type is selected. Reclosing lockout after short-circuit tripping A number of circuit-breakers can be fitted with a mechanical and/or electrical reclosing lockout which prevents reclosing to the short-circuit after short-circuit tripping. g. e. 3/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Apart from residual-current-operated circuit-breakers. g.5 v∆n – red: cA > I∆ > 0. 6 to 12 · Ir Approx. short-time delay for rush current shunting Operating ranges of the overcurrent releases (acc. are being used to an increasing extent for commercial and industrial applications. by means of colored LEDs: – green: I∆ ≤ 0. 30 mA/ 100 mA/300 mA/500 mA/1. the circuit-breaker assemblies can be equipped to bus systems to enable the exchange of information and interaction with other components in the electrical installation. miniature circuit-breakers with fault-current tripping.Applications (primarily for short-circuit current clearance) Circuit-breaker for generator protection Circuit-breaker for line protection Circuit-breaker for motor protection 1) Time-delay characteristic Operating ranges of inverse-time-dealy overcurrent release as multiple of set value Ir Approx. Fault-current/residual-current protection The global importance of fault-current protection devices has grown in the field of protection technology due to the high level of protection they provide (protection of human life and property) and their extended scope of protection (alternating and pulsating current sensitivity). Instantaneous or short-time delay1) Poss. miniature circuitbreaker assemblies. e. e. instantaneous/60 ms/ 100 ms/250 ms/500 ms/1. 3 to 6 · Ir Instantaneous or short-time delay Instantaneous Approx. to EN 60 947 / IEC 60 947/DIN VDE 0660) Table 3/5 MCBs with fault-current tripping These circuit-breaker assemblies are available as compact factory-built devices or may be assembled from a miniature circuit-breaker as the basic device and an add-on module. Technical features The add-on module for residual-current tripping used in system protection applications includes such technical features as: C Rated residual current I∆n. g.5 I∆n – yellow: 0. The circuit-breaker can only be closed again after the fault has been eliminated and the lockout has been reset manually.5 I∆n IA = Tripping current of additional residualcurrent module C Disconnection of the electronics overvoltage protection prior to insulation measurement in the installation C ”Remote tripping” C ”Auxiliary switch (AS)” Interface to bus systems With appropriate interfaces.g.

special attention must be paid to the following characteristics: C Type of circuit-breaker and its releases according to the respective protective function and tasks C Rated voltages C Short-circuit strength Icu/ Ics and rated short-circuit making (Icm) and breaking capacity (Icn) C Rated and maximum load currents The system voltage and system frequency are crucial factors for selecting the circuit-breakers according to C Rated insulation voltage Ui and C Rated operating voltage Ue.5 1. Other time values can be converted assuming Icn = constant. Icu Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Ics Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity O-t-CO-t-CO • service short-circuit breaking capacity Testing • the overload tripping • the insulation resistance • the overheating Test sequence Test of O-t-CO • ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Testing • the overload tripping • the insulation resistance • the overheating O Opening (O = Open) CO Opening and closing (C = Close) t Interval (t = time) Table 3/7 Switching performance categories acc.25 0. Short-circuit current The maximum short-circuit current at the installation location is a crucial factor for selecting the circuit-breakers according to C Short-circuit strength Icu/ Ics .5 6 10 20 50 < < < < < I I I I I ≤ 6 ≤ 10 ≤ 20 ≤ 50 Power factor cos ϕ Minimum value n short-circuit making capacity n= short-circuit breaking capacity 1. 3/13 3 . Rated insulation voltage Ui The rated insulation voltage Ui is the standardized voltage value for which the insulation of the circuit-breakers and their associated components is rated in accordance with HD 625 / IEC 60664 / DIN VDE 0110.m. the Icw current refers to 1 s. to EN 60947 / IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660 and IEC 157-1 Standards The standards EN 60947-2/ IEC 60947-2 / DIN VDE 0660-101 apply for circuit-breakers with addon fault-current or residual-current modules. value) kA 4.7 2. Generally. Thermal fault withstand capability (1-s current) The permissible thermal short-circuit strength is referred to as the rated short-time current Icw .System Protection / Safety Coordination Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn (r.7 0. as well as C Rated short-circuit making Icm and breaking capacities Icn.1 2. It is the maximum current which the breaker is capable of withstanding for X s without any damage occurring. It is the highest permissible instantaneous value of the prospective short-circuit current along the conducting path with the highest load. Rated switching capacity The rated switching capacity of the circuit-breakers is specified as the rated short-circuit making capacity and rated short-circuit breaking capacity.2 0. Selection criteria for circuitbreakers When selecting the appropriate circuit-breaker for system protection. Insulation Group C.s.0 2.5 0. Dynamic short-circuit strength The permissible dynamic short-circuit strength is indicated as the peak shortcircuit current.2 Table 3/6 Correlation n between rated short-circuit making and breaking capacity and the respective power factor (for AC circuit-breakers) The rated short-circuit breaking capacity is indicated using two values: Switching capacity Rated operating voltage Ue The rated operating voltage Ue of a circuit-breaker is the voltage value to which the rated short-circuit making and breaking capacities and the shortcircuit performance category refer.3 0.

600 A As isolating circuit-breaker (load interrupter) up to 2.600 A For system protection up to 1. no back-up fuse required I Circuit-breaker 3RV1 0.Circuit-breaker type Air circuit-breaker (ACB) SENTRON 3WL1 Rated current Application example Protection of distribution systems. microprocessor-based overcurrent releases independent of external voltages – Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) with total delay time of 50 ms Designed and tested in compliance with EN 60947 / IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660 Possible applications: Tripping characteristic L S G I 630A to 6.300 A Current-limiting circuit-breaker (MCCB) SENTRON 3VL L S I TM release: 16 A to 630 A ETU release: 63 A to 1.000 A with integrated overcurrent releases.600 A Optional adjustable overload and overcurrent release: Precise adaptation to protection requirements L I ETU release: 63 A to 500 A For motor protection up to 500 A Electronic overload release with adjustable time-lag class: Effective protection when motor is under full load L I M release: 63 A to 500 A For starter combinations up to 500 A Unsusceptible to inrush currents: Breaker not tripped by direct-on-line motor starting I M release: 100 A to 1. transformers and generators – High rated short-time current for time selectivity – Two series. motors. SENTRON WL1 and SENTRON WL6 with high and medium rated switching capacity – Electronic.16 to 100 A 3 RV1 circuit-breaker for motor protection with overload and overcurrent protection L I I L Overload tripping Table 3/8 S Short-time delay overcurrent tripping I Instantaneous overcurrent tripping G Ground fault tripping Application examples for modern Siemens circuit-breakers and their typical tripping characteristics 3/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics can also be specified on the basis of the shortened switching sequence O-t-CO (see Table 3/7 for explanation of O. The rated continuous current Iu can be carried for an unlimited time. multiplied by the factor n specified in Table 3/6. the rated operating voltage and rated frequency. Rated operating current Ie The rated operating current Ie is the current that is determined by the operating conditions of the switching device. t. It is expressed as the r. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn is based on the test sequence O-t-CO-t-CO. rated continuous current Iu The conventional rated thermal current Ith or Ithe for motor starters in enclosures is defined as an 8-h current in accordance with EN 60947-1. 1) The utilization category describes the switching devices’ application and stress. and C). utilization category1). It is expressed as the maximum peak value of the prospective short-circuit current. -4-1. rated frequency and a specified power factor cos ϕ. rated frequency and a specified power factor. -3 / DIN VDE 0660-100.m. With adjustable inverse-time-delay releases and relays. Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn The rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn is the short-circuit current which the circuit-breaker is capable of breaking at the rated operating voltage +10%. -4-1. the rated duty. Switching capacity category Switching capacity categories.g.s. the maximum current setting is the rated continuous current Iu. The following rated currents are distinguished according to the thermal characteristics: C Rated thermal current Ith C Rated continuous current Iu C Rated operating current Ie. -107. Conventional rated thermal current Ith . Application examples and tripping curves Application examples for circuitbreakers with protection The principal application examples and typical tripping curves of modern circuit-breakers currently available from Siemens are specified in Table 3/8. It is the maximum current which can be carried during this time without the temperature limit being exceeded. intermittent operation or short-time operation. -102. contact life and the degree of protection. rated switching capacity. value of the alternating current component. see device standards EN 60947 / IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660. which specify how often a circuit-breaker can switch its rated making and breaking current as well as the condition of the breaker after the specified switching cycle. are defined for circuit-breakers in EN 60947 / IEC 60947/ DIN VDE 0660 and in accordance with IEC 157-1 (Table 3/7). e. plays a decisive role in selecting the switchgear according to its rated currents. 3/15 3 . -3 / IEC 60947-1. continuous operation.System Protection / Safety Coordination Rated short-circuit making capacity Icm The rated short-circuit making capacity Icm is the short-circuit current which the circuit-breaker is capable of making at the rated operating voltage +10%. Rated circuit-breaker currents The rated duty. and is at least equal to the rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn .

while the I-release detects short-circuit currents up to the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the circuitbreaker.2 Switchgear Assemblies Switchgear assemblies are seriesconnected switching and protection devices which perform specific tasks for protecting a system component. 3/7). motor supply conductors and contactor against overloading. Fuse.2. Protection and operating ranges Defined protection and operating ranges are assigned to each device in the switchgear assembly. the first device (relative to the flow of power) provides the short-circuit protection. the protection ranges and characteristics of all the components (Fig. 3/8. 3/7 Switchgear assembly comprising fuse and circuit-breaker Type a Destruction and replacement of individual components or complete switching device Welding of contacts and permanent change in characteristic values of overload relay Welding of contacts without permanent change to operating values of over load relay.t Circuitbreaker L Fuse Fuse Circuitbreaker A I Ik Icn Ik L Inverse-time-delay overload release I Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release A Icn Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Ik Prospective sus- 3. if a three-phase motor is started directly.000 V for direct-online starting (with maximum voltage). The fuse must. Switchgear assemblies with fuses Fuses and molded-case circuitbreakers If the prospective short-circuit current Ik exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn of the circuitbreaker at its point of installation. The overload relay protects the motor. 3/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . therefore. For this reason. 1) The standards EN 60 947-1 / IEC 60 947-4-1/ DIN VDE 0660-102 comprise modified descriptions for short-circuit behavior as follows: Coordination type ”1”: Destruction of contactor and overload relay are permissible. When short-circuit current protection equipment is selected for switchgear assemblies. and thermal inverse-time-delay overload relay The contactor is used to switch the motor on and off. The fuse upstream of the contactor and overload relay provides protection against short circuits. the circuit-breaker disconnects all-pole almost simultaneously via its I-release. however. The L-release monitors overload currents. Type b Type c Protection and operating ranges of equipment Grading diagram for motor starter The protection ranges and the relevant characteristics of the equipment constituting a switchgear assembly used as a motor starter are illustrated in the grading diagram in Fig. Contact welding at the contactor is. a distinction is made between various types of protection according to the permissible degree of damage as defined in EN 60947-4. the latter must be provided with upstream fuses (Fig. Coordination type ”2”: The overload relay must not be damaged. triggered by the letthrough current ID of the fuse./ IEC 60947-4-1 / DIN VDE 0660-1021): tained short-circuit current at mounting location A Safety margins Operates Clears I L release I release Fuse Circuit-breaker Fuse + circuit-breaker Fig. contactor. be selected such that its let-through current ID is less than the rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn of the circuitbreaker. Specifications for contactors and motor starters The standards EN 60947-4-1 / IEC 60947-4-1 / DIN VDE 0660-102 apply for contactors and motor starters up to 1. The switchgear assembly comprising contactor and overload relay is referred to as a motor starter or. a direct-on-line starter. The fuses are only responsible for short-circuit clearance with higher short-circuit currents Ik . In this case too. The contactor and/or over load relay must be replaced if necessary. 3/8) must be carefully coordinated with each other. permissible. The circuit-breaker provides protection against all overcurrents up to its rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn and ensures all-pole opening and reclosing. given the contacts can easily be separated or the contactor can easily be replaced.

A. the prearcing-time/current characteristic curve of the fuse. In order to protect the contactor against contact welding.System Protection / Safety Coordination 1 Tripping characteristic of (thermal) inversetime-delay overload relay 2 Destruction characteristic of thermal overload relay 3 Rated breaking capacity of contactor 4 Characteristic of contactor for easily separable welding of contacts 4 (Depends on current limiting by fuse) 5 C 6 I t 1 1 min 2 B A Assembly comprising LV HRC fuse. Compared with LV HRC fuses of utilization category gL used to protect lines and cables. the fuses must protect the contactor to such an extent that any damage does not exceed the specified degrees of damage mentioned above (depending on the rated operating current Ie. the fuse must respond in good time. contactor. must lie in margin B below the tripping characteristic of the overload relay (1). contactor. 3/8). or else C welded contacts can easily be separated (characteristic curve 4 in Fig. It is therefore preferable to use switchgear fuses rather than lineprotection fuses with relay settings > 80 A at higher operating currents with correspondingly lower shortcircuit current attenuation. and thermal inverse-time-delay overload relay The fuses in this assembly must satisfy a number of conditions: C The time-current characteristics of fuses and overload relays must allow the motor to be run up to speed. contactors must be able to withstand motor start-up currents of between 8 and 12 Ie without the contacts being welded). LV HRC switchgear fuses of utilization category aM provide the advantage of weld-free short-circuit protection for the maximum motor power which the contactor is capable of switching. The total clearance time characteristic of the fuse (6) must lie in margin C below the characteristic curve of the contactor for easily separable contact welding (4) (total clearance time = prearcing time + extinction time). the prearcing-time/current characteristic of the fuse (an LV HRC switchgear fuse of utilization category aM was used in this example. C Safety margins for reliable short-circuit protection Fig. utilization category aM 6 Total clearance-time characteristic of aM fuse 3 1 ms Therefore. Protection of contactor In order to protect the contactor against excessively high breaking currents. C The fuses must protect the overload relay from being destroyed by currents approximately 10 times higher than the rated current of the relay. 3/8 Switchgear assembly comprising fuse. 3/9. 3/17 3 . and thermal overload relay (motor starter) 5 Prearcing-time/current characteristic of fuse. To satisfy these conditions. C In the event of a short circuit. Selecting fuses LV HRC switchgear fuses Fuses for motor starters are selected according to the aforementioned criteria. the following safety margins A. starting from the current value which corresponds to the breaking capacity of the contactor (3). in both cases. B and C must be maintained between certain characteristic curves of the devices: Protection of overload relay In order to protect the overload relay. time-current characteristic curves can be specified for each contactor indicating which load currents can be applied as maximum currents so that C contact welding is avoided. they are very effective in relieving contactors of high peak short-circuit currents ip since they respond more rapidly in the upper short-circuit range as shown in Fig. Owing to their more effective current limiting abilities (as compared with those of line-protection fuses). B. C The fuses must interrupt overcurrents beyond the capability of the contactor (Ie currents approximately 10 times higher than the rated operating current Ie of the contactor). refer to the following section ”Selecting fuses”) must lie in margin A below the intersection of the tripping curve of the overload relay (1) with its destruction curve (2). Table 3/9 shows the classification of the fuses based on functional features.

The circuitbreaker Q2 can. Its I-release is set to a very high operating current. if possible to the rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn of the downstream circuit-breakers. e. The rated current of the upstream circuit-breaker Q2 is selected in accordance with its rated operating current. As a result. Utilization category gL/gG This category includes fuses of utilization category g/gG used to protect cables and lines. the downstream circuit-breaker with a lower rated switching capacity can be in- stalled at a location where the possible short-circuit current exceeds its rated switching capacity. Utilization category aM This functional category applies to switchgear fuses of utilization category aM. 3/11).Functional category Designation Utilization category Protection of Rated continuous Rated breaking Designation current ≤ current t s Prearcing time for fuse 104 s t s 103 Full-range fuses g In ≥ Ia min gL/gG gR gB Cables and lines Semiconductors Mining installations 102 101 100 10-1 Utilization category gL aM Back-up fuses a In ≥ 4 In ≥ 2. 3/10 Single-line diagram of a back-up circuit (cascade connection) in a sub-distribution board 3/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .g. 3/9 Comparison of prearcing-time/ current characteristics of LV HRC fuses of utilization categories gL and aM. fuses of functional category a must not be used above their rated current. they will open simultaneously in the event of a fault (K) in the vicinity of the distribution board (Fig. 3/10. be used as a main circuit-breaker or group circuit-breaker for several feeders in sub-distribution boards. For this reason.7 In aM aR Switchgear Semiconductors 10-2 10-3 4 10 8 2 Ia min Minimum rated breaking current 103 I 104 5 [A] Table 3/9 Classification of LV HRC fuses based on their functional characteristics defined in EN 60269-1/ IEC 60269-1/DIN VDE 0636-10 Fig. a thermal time-delay relay. These fuses are thus only intended for short-circuit protection. The short-circuit current is thereby detected by two series-connected interrupting devices and effectively extinguished. 3/11 the principle of a cascade connection. the minimum breaking current of which is approximately four times the rated current. Q2 Circuit-breaker with I-release and Q1 Circuit-breaker with L I-release K Fig. Comparison of characteristic curves for utilization categories gL and aM The prearcing-time/current characteristics of LV HRC of utilization category gL and aM for 200 A are compared in Fig. Protection and operating ranges of the circuit-breakers Fig. A means of overload protection. Functional category a (back-up fuses) Functional category a applies to backup fuses which can interrupt currents above a specified multiple of their rated current up to the rated short-circuit breaking current. Switchgear assemblies without fuses (fuseless design) Back-up protection (cascade-connected circuit-breakers) If two circuit-breakers with I-releases of the same type are connected in series along one conducting path. rated current 200 A Classification of LV HRC fuses and comparison of characteristic curves of gL and aM utilization categories LV HRC fuses are divided into functional and utilization categories in accordance with their type design. must therefore always be provided. for example. Functional category g (full-range fuses) Functional category g applies to fullrange fuses which can interrupt currents from the minimum fusing current up to the rated short-circuit breaking current. 3/9. They can continuously carry currents up to their rated current. 3/10 shows the single-line diagram and Fig.

in order to include low short-circuit currents in the instantaneous breaking range as well (Fig. and overload relay (a) Readiness for reclosing Overload protection is provided by the overload relay in conjunction with the contactor. while the contactor performs switching duties (Fig. Further advantages of the starter circuit-breaker following short-circuit tripping are three-phase circuit interruption and immediate readiness for reclosing. 3/11 Principle of a back-up circuit (cascade connection) 3/19 3 .and I-releases and contactor Protection and operating ranges of devices The circuit-breaker provides overload and short-circuit protection also for the contactor. 3/12). switchgear assemblies with thermistor motor-protection devices are used. Maximum asymmetrical shortcircuit current (peak value) Let-through current Q1 i D (1+ 2) Actual let-through current (less than i D1) ue Source voltage (opening voltage) u B (1+ 2) Sum of arc voltages of upstream circuit-breaker Q2 and outgoing circuit-breaker Q1 u B1 Arc voltage of outgoing circuit-breaker Q1 Fig. Temperature sensor in motor winding The degree of protection that can be attained depends on whether the motor to be protected has a thermally critical stator or rotor. 3/13).System Protection / Safety Coordination The outgoing circuit-breaker Q1 provides overload protection and also clears autonomously relatively low short-circuit currents which may be caused by short circuits to exposed conductive parts. while short-circuit protection is provided by the starter circuit-breaker. Circuit-breakers with L. insulation faults or short circuits at the end of long lines and cables. Starter circuit-breaker with I-release. Switchgear assemblies with thermistor motor-protection devices ip i i D1 i D(1+2) t u ue u B(1+2) u B1 Overload relays and releases cease to provide reliable overload protection when it is no longer possible to establish the winding temperature from the motor current. The requirements that must be fulfilled by the circuit-breaker are the same as those that apply to the fuse in switchgear assemblies comprising fuse. 3/8). The operating temperature. This is the case with: C C C C High switching frequencies Irregular. the contactor or the starter circuit-breaker has opened. The switchgear assemblies with the starter circuit-breaker are becoming increasingly important in fuseless control units. intermittent duty Restricted cooling and High ambient temperatures ip i D1 t In these cases. contactor and overload relay (see Fig. The upstream circuitbreaker Q2 is only involved at the same time if high short-circuit currents occur as a result of a dead short circuit in the vicinity of the outgoing circuit-breaker Q1 (restricted selectivity). contactor. The switchgear assemblies are designed with or without fuses depending on the installation’s configuration. The operating current of its I-release is set as low as the starting cycle will permit. via the overload relay. The advantage of this switchgear assembly is that it is possible to determine whether the fault was an overload or short circuit according to whether. coupling time constant and the position of the temperature sensor in the motor winding are also crucial factors. They are usually specified by the motor manufacturer.

3 Selecting Protective Equipment Short-circuit protection of branch circuits Branch circuits in distribution boards and control units can be provided with short-circuit protection by means of fuses or by means of circuit-breakers without fuses.t Circuitbreaker with li releases L 1 2 Contactor t Circuit-breaker with I-release for starter assemblies a Contactor Inverse-timedelay overload relay with L-release Setting range n I 3 Icn Icn Trip Opens I L-release Contactor I-release Circuit-breaker I 1 Rated breaking capacity of contactor 2 Rated making capacity of contactor 3 Characteristic of contactor for easily separable contact welding L Characteristic of inverse-time-delay overload release I Characteristic of instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release Icn Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of circuit-breaker L Characteristic curve of (thermal) inverse-time-de lay overload relay I Characteristic curve of ad justable instantaneous overcurrent release Fig. 3/14b). 3/12 Switchgear assembly comprising circuit-breaker and contactor Fig. Motors with thermally critical rotors Motors with thermally critical rotors.2.and I-releases b) Fuse c) d) Circuit-breaker with L. 3/13 Switchgear assembly comprising circuit-breaker.and I-releases Contactor Overload relay Contactor Circuit-breaker with L. can only be provided with adequate protection if they are fitted with an additional overload relay or release. and overload relay a) Fuse Circuit-breaker with L. may also be a 3/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . adjustable overcurrent release. Feeder cables are protected against short circuits and overloads either by fuses and circuit-breakers (Fig. 3/14a.and I-releases Contactor Overload relay Thermistor motor protection M +ϑ Fig. 3/14 Thermistor motor protection M +ϑ M +ϑ Thermistor motor protection M +ϑ Thermistor motor protection Switchgear assemblies with thermistor motor-protection devices plus additional overload relay or release (block diagram) Motors with thermally critical stators Motors with thermally critical stators can be adequately protected against overloads and overheating by means of thermistor motor-protection devices without overload relays. 3. which is higher in fuses with low rated currents than in current-limiting circuit-breakers with the same rated current. The overload relay or release also protects the cabling against overloads (Fig. The level of anticipated current limiting. even if started with a locked rotor. 3/14a) or by fuses alone (Fig. contactor. c and d).

i.5 iD cos ϕ 0. and the “I” tripping characteristic b of a circuitbreaker are.System Protection / Safety Coordination [kA] 100 cos ϕ 0. The adjustable overload release enables the current setting and. i D a´ 13 10 8 100 A 63 A 1 1 10 22 Short-circuit current I k 100 [kA] 1 1. Owing to the high motor starting currents. Current limiting range (1) The typical test range for fuse currents (A) is.4. C The level of current limiting which. utilization category gL. 3/16. however. The current setting for the inverse-time-delay overload release of the circuit-breaker corresponds to the rated current of the fuse link.5 kA iD Circuit-breaker 8 kA 1 2 3 A Current limiting range Overload range Short-circuit current range Test range for fuse currents B Test range for limiting tripping currents of circuit-breaker Icn Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Fig. therefore. at 400 V and 50 Hz compared to an LV HRC fuse of type 3NA. plotted in the time-current diagram in Fig. the different current ratings of which only permit approximate matching.7 iD b 10 ms ip 63 A i D a. by way of example. a´ t 10 s a 1 B A 2 b 3 Icn Ik I 100 [kA] 2h ip .(Ie) 1. between 1. Section 6.3 cos ϕ 0.3 and 1. C Clearance conditions in accordance with HD 384.e.6 times the rated current while the test range for the limiting tripping currents of the overload release (B) is between 1. 3/15 shows the current-limiting characteristics of a circuit-breaker with rated continuous current of 63 A. Chapter 2). 3/21 3 .3 ”Protection measures in TN systems” (see ”Electrical Installations Handbook”.05 1. C The shape of the prearcing time/current characteristic curves of fuses and the tripping curves of circuit-breakers.25 cos ϕ 0. a circuit-breaker with a minimum rated current of 63 A or a fuse with a minimum rated current of 100 A is required for a 30 kW motor.6 Ir. the rated current of the fuse must be higher than the rated operating current of the motor. Comparing the protective characteristics of fuses with those of current-limiting circuit-breakers The following should be taken into consideration when comparing the protection characteristics of fuses and circuit-breakers: C The rated short-circuit breaking capacity.05 and 1. 3/16 Characteristics and rated switching capacities of fuse (a) and circuit-breaker (b) with I-releases crucial factor in making a choice in favor of one or the other solution. with fuses of up to 400 A. rated currents 63 A and 100 A.2 iD Let-through currents ip Peak short-circuit current e.2 times the current setting. the limiting tripping current to be matched more closely to the continuous loading capability than it would be possible with a fuse. 3/15 Current-limiting characteristics of circuit-breaker (63 A) and LV HRC fuses (63 and 100 A) Fig.41 / IEC 60 364-4-41/ DIN VDE 0100-410. utilization category gL. is always higher than for current-limiting circuit-breakers with the same rated current.3 1. where Ik = 10 kA: iD Fuse (100 A) 7. for example. Comparison of current-limiting characteristics Current limiting with LV HRC fuses and circuit-breakers Fig. which can vary considerably. Comparison between the tripping curves and rated short-circuit breaking capacity of fuses with those of circuit-breakers with the same rated current and a high switching capacity Tripping curves and rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn The prearcing-time/current characteristic curve a of the 63 A fuse link.g.1.

The switchgear assemblies comprising fuse and circuit-breaker. e. which provide motor protection. The Siemens circuit-breakers SENTRON WL and 3VL are ideal for this purpose. The feeder circuit-breaker provides overload protection and selective shortcircuit protection for the transformer and distribution board. as well as fuses. Extremely high rated switching capacity of LV HRC fuses This results in an extremely high rated breaking capacity for fuses of over 100 kA at an operating voltage of 690 V AC. At higher currents. the instantaneous release of the circuit-breaker detects short-circuit currents above its operating value faster than the fuse. The switchgear assemblies comprising fuse and circuit-breaker. Distribution boards without fuses (fuseless design) In distribution boards without fuses (Table 3/13). whereby a specific task is allocated to each protection device. which provide system protection. short-circuit protection is provided by circuit-breakers for system protection and for load switching. the rated operating voltage Ue and the type. contactor and overload relay protect the motor feeder cable and the motor against overloads and short circuits.g. Selecting circuit-breakers for distribution boards with and without fuses Distribution boards and control units can be constructed with or without fuses. please refer to the literature supplied by the manufacturer. furthermore circuit-breakers fulfill motor protection tasks only or protect starter assemblies together with the contactor. the fuse trips more quickly and therefore. depends on a number of factors. contactor and overload relay have already been dealt with in this chapter. however. Overload range (2) In the overload range (2). The protection ranges of the switchgear assemblies comprising circuit-breaker. A comparison between the protection characteristics of fuses.Although the limit current of the fuse is adequate for providing overload protection for lines and cables. circuitbreakers and their switchgear assemblies can be found in Tables 3/10 and 3/11. 3/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . limits the short-circuit current more effectively than a circuit-breaker. Short-circuit current range (3) In the short-circuit current range (3). it is not sufficient for the starting current of motors where a fuse with the characteristic a’ would be needed.time/current characteristic curve of the fuse is steeper than the tripping curve of the overload release. the prearcing. For further technical data. protect the lines to the sub-distribution board against overloads and short circuits. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn of circuit-breakers. Distribution boards with fuses The standard design of distribution boards with fuses (Table 3/12) includes switchgear assemblies comprising circuit-breakers and fuses.

690 V Circuit-breaker f (Ir Ue type1)) f (Ir Ik Ue type1)) f (Ir Ik Ue type1)) No f ( I r I k) None Yes With additional costs2) Yes No With additional costs3) Yes Yes With additional costs4) Yes No Yes No No Yes No No additional costs Yes5) Yes f (condition) f (condition) f (number of operations and condition) With additional costs With unit of same make Very good Very good Good Good Adequate Not possible 3) 4) 5) Good Good 2) The term ”type” embraces: current extinguishing method. type of construction For example. short-circuit strength through internal impedance.System Protection / Safety Coordination Characteristic Rated switching capacity (AC) Current limiting Additional arcing space External indication of operability Operational reliability Remote switching Automatic all-pole breaking Indication facility Interlocking facility Readiness for reclosing after clearing overload clearing short circuit Interrupted operation Maintenance costs Selectivity Replaceability Short-circuit protection cable motor Overload protection cable motor 1) Fuse > 100 kA. by means of shockproof fuse switch-disconnectors with snapaction closing By means of fuse monitoring and associated circuit-breakers By means of fuse monitoring Due to standardisation Table 3/10 Comparison between the protective characteristics of fuses and circuit-breakers 3/23 3 .

Equipment to be protected and switching rate Protection devices with fuses Fuse Circuit-breaker Contactor Overload protection Thermistor motor protection M 3~ M 3~ M +ϑ M +ϑ M +ϑ M +ϑ Overload protection – Cable – Motor (with thermally critical stator) – Motor (with thermally critical rotor) Short-circuit protection – Cable – Motor Switching rate ++ ++1) ++1) ++ ++ ++ + ++ + + ++ + ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ – ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ – ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ – ++ ++ ++ Equipment to be protected and switching rate Protection devices without fuses – Circuit-breaker Contactor Overload protection Thermistor motor protection M 3~ M 3~ M +ϑ M +ϑ M 3~ M +ϑ Overload protection – Cable – Motor (with thermally critical stator) – Motor (with thermally critical rotor) Short-circuit protection – Cable – Motor Switching rate ++ ++1) ++1) ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++1) ++1) + ++ ++ ++ ++ + ++ ++ + ++ ++ + ++ ++ + ++ ++ – ++ ++ – 1) Protection with slight functional loss following failure of phase conductor ++ Very good + Good – Poor Table 3/11 Comparison between the protective characteristics of different switchgear assemblies (block diagrams) 3/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

System Protection / Safety Coordination No. Type of circuitbreaker Type code ↔ Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn Feeder circuit-breaker 1 1 Ik1 Type of release/relay L S Adjus.Fixed Adjustable settable ting I Fixed setting Back-up fuse Adjustable Icn > 100 kA Tripping characteristic Adjustable ↔ release Circuitbreaker for selective protection 3W ≥ Ik1 × – × – × – t Icn Ik1 I Distribution circuit-breaker 2 Fuse 3NA and 3VF circuit-breaker 3VL for system protection ≥ Ik2 ≤ Ik2 ≤ Ik2 – – – – × × – – – – × × – – – × – – Icn t Ik2 I 2 Ik2 Load circuit-breaker 4 3 3 Fuse 3NA and 3RV1 circuit-breaker for motor protection ≥ Ik3 ≤ Ik3 – × – – – – – × – – × – Icn t Ik3 I Ik3 Ik3 4 M 3~ M 3~ Fuse and direct-on-line starter 3NA 3ND 3TW ≥ Ik3 ≥ Ik3 ≤ Ik3 – – × – – – – – – – – – – – – × × – Icn t Ik3 I Table 3/12 Power distribution boards with fuses and circuit-breakers 3/25 3 .

Type of circuitbreaker Type code ↔ Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn Feeder circuit-breaker 1 1 Ik1 Type of release/relay L S Adjus.No.Fixed Adjustable settable ting I Fixed setting Adjustable Tripping characteristic Adjustable ↔ release Circuitbreaker for selective protection 3W ≥ Ik1 × – × – × t Icn Ik1 I Distribution circuit-breaker 2 Circuit-breaker 3VF for system 3VL protection ≥ Ik2 ≥ Ik2 – – × × – – × × – – Icn t Ik2 I 2 Ik2 3 Ik2 3 Circuitbreaker for selective protection SEN.≥ Ik2 TRON WL × – × – × t Icn Ik2 I Load circuit-breaker 4 5 4 Circuitbreaker for motor protection 3RV1 ≤ Ik3 × – – × – t Ik3 Icn I Icn 5 Ik3 Ik3 M 3~ M 3~ Circuit3RA breaker 3TW and direct-online starter ≥ Ik3 – – × – – – – – – × – t Ik3 I Table 3/13 Power distribution with circuit-breakers without fuses 3/26 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

4. 3/27 3 .e. DIN VDE 0100-430. the current which does not result in tripping in defined conditions Large test current. I3 In Rated current. opencircuit shunt releases).e.g. the current which is broken within one hour in defined conditions (In ≤ 63 A) Tolerance limiting Seal-in current of the instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release (shortcircuit release) Tripping current of the instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release (shortcircuit release) I1 I3 I2 I3 I4 I4 I5 I5 I Fig.41/ IEC 364-4-41 / DIN VDE 0100-410. for long-line circuits and where disconnection within 0. the current for which the miniature circuit-breaker has been rated and to which other parameters refer (set value) Small test current. e. fault signal contacts. i.g.e.45 · Iz Ib Iz Ib Rated operating current to be expected.System Protection / Safety Coordination 3.g. 3/17 Typical values of lines and protective devices DIN VDE 0100-4110. thus ensuring the protection of electrical equipment against excessively high heating according to the relevant standards. Under certain conditions.4 s is required in accordance with HD 384. they are able to meet the various requirements of the most diverse areas of application. both for commercial buildings and industrial buildings. i.45·Iz I 1.45 ·Iz Maximum permissible timelimited overload current where a short-term exceeding of the continuous limit temperature will not yet result in a safety-relevant reduction of insulation properties.4 Miniature CircuitBreakers (MCBs) Task Miniature circuit-breakers are mainly designed for the protection of lines and cables against overload and short circuit.e. C Tripping characteristic A is particularly suitable for the protection of transducers in measuring circuits.41 S2 / IEC 60 364-4-41/ 1st condition 2nd condition Ib ≤ In ≤ I z I2 ≤ 1. Due to a wide range of versions and accessories (e. Application Miniature circuit-breakers are used in all distribution networks. e.4. Tripping characteristics Four tripping characteristics A. C and D are available for the actual type of application corresponding to the equipment being connected in the circuit to be protected. C Tripping characteristic B is the standard characteristic for wall-outlet circuits in residential and commercial buildings. i. i.2. auxiliary contacts. according to HD 384. B. load-determined current during normal operation Permissible continuous load current for one conductor where the permanent temperature limit for the insulation is not exceeded Iz In time t I1 I2 I2 1. MCBs in a TN system also provide protection against electrical stroke at excessively high contact voltage due to wrong insulation.

Auxiliary switches (AS) signal the switching state of the MCB and indicate whether it has been switched off manually or automatically. Undervoltage releases (UR) protect devices connected in the circuit against impacts of insufficiently low supply voltage. 3/28 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Device sizes are described in DIN 43880. AC/DC current type MCBs may also be used for 220 V DC (1-pole) and 440 V DC (2-pole). the MCB which is tripped via the open-circuit shunt release (AA) can also be remotely tripped via instabus EIB. an auxiliary switch (AS).41 S2 / IEC 60364-4-41 / DIN VDE 0100-410 have to be met. luminaires and motors. e. MCBs are allocated the following rated currents: C Devices with 55 mm depth 0. fault-signal contact (FC). e. By fitting an RCCB module to an MCB.C Tripping characteristic C is advantageous wherever equipment with higher inrush currents. For the protection against personal injury. is used. Versions MCBs are available in many different versions: 1-pole. miniature circuit-breakers by Siemens have the following features: C Excellent current limiting and selectivity characteristics C Identical terminals on both sides for optional infeed from the top or bottom C Installation and dismantling without the use of tools C Rapid and easy removal from the system C Terminals safe-to-touch by fingers or the back of the hand according to VDE 0106-100 (VBG4) C Combined terminals for simultaneous connection of busbars and feeder cables C Main switch characteristics according to EN 60 204 / IEC 60204/ VDE 0113 C Separate switch position indicator AC current type MCBs are suitable for all AC and three-phase networks up to a voltage of 240/415 V and all DC networks up to 60 V (1-pole) and 120 V (2-pole). C Tripping characteristic D is adapted to highly pulse-generating equipment. Open-circuit shunt releases (ST) are suitable for remote switching of MCBs. Corresponding to the preferred series according to IEC 60898 and DIN 43880. open-circuit shunt release (ST). Multi-pole devices are coupled mechanically at the outside via handles and simultaneously inside via their releases. undervoltage release (UR) or residual-current-operated circuit-breaker (RCCB module) can be retrofitted. When using an instabus EIB binary output. including overcurrent remote tripping (via thermal overcurrent instantaneous release). the disconnecting requirements according to the relevant standards. Depending on the device type.3 A to 63 A C Devices with 70 mm depth 0. Faultsignal contacts (FC) indicate tripping of the MCB due to overload or short circuit. solenoid valves or capacitors.3 A to 125 A Depending on the device type.g. which – as a complete system – can be used for line protection as well as for protection against electrically ignited fires and personal injury in the event of direct or indirect contact voltages. By connecting the AS and the FC to an instabus®EIB® binary input. 3-pole.g.4. 2-pole. Standards The international basic standard is IEC 60898. Operating method Miniature circuit-breakers are protective switches for manual operation. you will receive an RCBO assembly. such as transformers. HD 384. the signals may also be read into an instabus EIB system. The European standard EN 60 898 and the German national standard DIN VDE 0641-11 are based upon it. The MCB voltage rating is 230/400 V AC. 4-pole and with connected neutral 1-pole+N and 3-pole+N.

System Protection / Safety Coordination

Rated cross section qn mm2 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35
Table 3/14

Rated current In of the MCB when protecting 2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load A A 16 25 32 40 63 80 100 125 16 20 32 40 50 63 80 100

Iz (line) Permissible continuous load current with 2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load A A 19.5 26 35 46 63 85 112 138 17.5 24 32 41 57 76 96 119

Allocation of miniature circuit-breakers to conductor cross sections Example: flat-webbed cable, stranded cables on or in the wall, installation type C1) at an ambient temperature of 30°C 1) Installation type C acc. to DIN VDE 0298-4 and DIN VDE 0100-430, Supplement 1. Cables are fixed in such a way that the spacing between them and the wall is smaller than 0.3 times the outer cable diameter.

minutes

In order to avoid damaging of the conductor insulation in case of faults, temperatures must not rise above certain values. For PVC insulation, these values are 70 °C permanently or 160 °C for a maximum of 5 s (short circuit). For line-overcurrent protection, the MCBs usually have two independent releases. In the event of overload, a bimetal contact opens inverse-time delayed corresponding to the current value. If a certain threshold is exceeded in the event of a short circuit, however, an electro-magnetic overcurrent release instantaneously trips without delay. The tripping range (time-current threshold zone) of the MCB according to EN 60898 / IEC 60898 / DIN VDE 0641-11 is defined via parameters I1 to I5 (Fig. 3/18). The line parameters Ib and Iz (see Fig. 3/17) are related to it.

300 timet 60 I1 I2

MCBs with tripping characteristics B, C, D acc. to EN 60 898 / IEC 60 898 / DIN VDE 0641-11

A1)
I1 (t > 1h) I2 (t < 1h) I4 (t > 0.1s) I5 (t < 0.1s)

B

C

D

1)

1.13 x In 1.13 x In 1.13 x In 1.13 x In 1.45 x In 1.45 x In 1.45 x In 1 x In .45 2 x In 3 x In 3 x In 5 x In 5 x In 10 x In 10 x In 20 x In

Specifications in compliance with DIN VDE 0100-410

10

I3 1

10 5 seconds I3 A B I5 I4 I4 I4 C I5 I4 D I5 I5

1 0.4 0.1

Breaking condition acc. to HD 384.4.41S2/ IEC 60 364-4-41 DIN VDE 0100-410

0.01

1

2

3 4

6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 x rated current In

Fig. 3/18

MCB time-current limit ranges

3/29

3

When the IEC 60898 was published, new characteristics B, C and D were defined internationally. They were also adopted in EN 60898 and DIN VDE 0641-11. The new tripping requirements of MCBs facilitate their assignment to conductor cross sections. In the relevant German standards, e.g. DIN/VDE 0100-430, the following conditions are listed: 1st condition Ib ≤ In ≤ Iz (Rated current rule), 2nd condition I2 ≤ 1,45 · Iz (Tripping current rule). The 2nd condition automatically being fulfilled with the new characteristic curves due the fact that these curves have been defined (Iz = In), the MCB merely needs to be selected according to the simplified criterion In ≤ Iz . Resulting from this, a new allocation of rated currents for MCBs and conductor cross sections can be given (see Table 3/14), related to an ambient temperature of 30 °C, as it is considered appropriate according to DIN VDE 0100-430, Supplement 1, and in dependence of the type of installation and accumulation of equipment.

Siemens MCBs are available with the tripping characteristics B, C and D, bearing, among other things, the VDE mark based upon the CCA procedure (CENELEC-CertificationAgreement). Figure 3/19 represents all tripping characteristics. Due to the position of the tripping bands, the following features vary in intensity with a rising degree from curve A to D C Current pulse withstand strength, rising C Permissible line and cable length for the protection of persons, decreasing Temperature impact The tripping characteristics are standard defined at an ambient temperature of +30 °C. At higher temperatures, the thermal tripping curve in Fig. 3/18 shifts to the left, and to the right at lower temperatures. This means that tripping becomes effective even with lower currents present (higher temperatures) or only with higher currents (lower temperatures). This has to be taken into account in particular for an installation in hot rooms, in encapsulated distribution boards where, owing to the currentinduced heat losses of the built-in devices, higher temperatures may prevail and for distribution boards installed outdoors. MCBs can be

used at temperatures ranging from –25 °C to +55 °C. The relative humidity may be 95%. Resistance to climate Miniature circuit-breakers by Siemens are resistant to climate according to IEC 68-2-30. They were successfully tested in six climatic cycles. Degree of protection As MCBs are mainly installed in distribution boards, their degree of protection must meet the requirements of the respective type of room. MCBs without an encapsulation can reach IP 30 according to EN 60529/ IEC 60529 / DIN VDE 0470-1 provided that they have sufficient terminal covers. All MCBs are equipped with a snapon fixing for rapid fitting on 35-mm wide standard mounting rails according to DIN EN 50022. Some versions may additionally be screwed on mounting plates. Installation Moreover, some type series are available with a rapid wiring system for manual handling without the use of tools, which even enables the removal of individual MCBs from the busbar system.

Standard EN 60 898 / IEC 60 898 / DIN VDE 0641-11

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity classes 1,500 A 3,000 A 4,500 A 6,000 A 10,000 A 15,000 A 20,000 A 25,000 A

Table 3/15 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity classes for miniature circuit-breakers

3/30

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

System Protection / Safety Coordination

[A2 s] I2 t Transformer Fuse B 16 MCB [A] i Ik i Ieff 104
Permissible value I 2 t of 1.5 mm2 cable

Fuse 50 A

1

2

3

B 16

3

2

1 Sinusoidal semiwave 103 10-1

0

5 t

10 [ms]

3

6

100

3 Ik

6

101 [kA]

Fig. 3/19

3 [ Selectivity of MCBs with current limiting classes1 2 and towards back-up fuses. Curve B16 applies to 16 A Siemens breakers, tripping characteristic B.

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Besides a reliable adherence to characteristic curves, an important performance feature of MCBs is their rated short-circuit breaking capacity. It is divided into short-circuit breaking capacity classes and indicates up to which level short-circuit currents can be broken according to EN 60898 / IEC 60898/ DIN VDE 0641-11 (Table 3/18). Depending on their design, MCBs by Siemens have short-circuit breaking capacity ratings up to 25,000 A and VDE approval (VDE is the Association of German Electrical Engineers).

Current limiting classes As a selectivity indicator with regard to upstream fuses, miniature circuitbreakers with characteristic B and C up to 40 A are divided into three current limiting classes according to their current limiting capability. For permissible let-through I 2t values, please refer to the standards EN 60898/ IEC 60898 / DIN VDE 0641-11. For reasons of selectivity, only Class 3 MCBs with a rated switching capacity of at least 6,000 A may be used in distribution boards connected downstream of the meter for residential and commercial buildings in compliance with the Technical Supply Conditions of German power supply companies.

Devices must be labeled 6000 3 Selectivity Selectivity means that only that protective device will trip in the event of a fault which is closest to the fault location in the course of the current path. This enables maintaining energy flow in circuits which are connected in parallel. In the diagram in Fig. 3/19, the current sequence in a disconnection process is illustrated with regard to current limiting classes. MCBs of type B16 by Siemens reduce the energy flow to much lower values than defined for current limiting class 3.

3/31

3

Figure 3/19 shows the selectivity limits of MCBs with different current limiting classes as the intersection of the MCB tripping curve with the melting curve of the fuse. The highly effective current limitation of the MCB also affects the high current discrimination towards the upstream fuse. Characteristic B16 relates to 16 A Siemens breakers, tripping characteristic B. Back-up protection If the short-circuit current at the point where the MCB is installed exceeds its rated switching capacity, another short-circuit protecting device has to be connected upstream. Without affecting the operability of the breaker in such cases, the switching capacity of such an assembly will be increased up to 50 kA. In some countries, circuit-breakers rather than LV HRC fuses are connected upstream instead, which – depending on the type – reduces the combined switching capacity considerably.

Although circuit-breakers have a high inherent rated breaking capacity, they do not switch sufficiently current-limiting in the range of the MCB switching capacity limit (6 kA/10 kA) so that they cannot provide much support. Therefore, miniature circuitbreakers with a rated current of 6 A to 32 A are only protected by an upstream circuit-breaker (type 3VF1 to 3VF6 and SENTRON WL1/WL5) up to the defined rated switching capacity of the MCB (back-up protection). A more detailed description can be found in Chapter 6.1.2. Further product information on MCBs by Siemens is contained in the Siemens Catalog ”BETA Built-in installation devices”, Order No. E86060-K8220-A101-A6-7600.

3/32

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

System Protection / Safety Coordination

3.3 Selectivity in LowVoltage Systems
Selectivity and selectivity types With two series-connected protective devices, full selectivity in the event of a fault is achieved if only the protective device directly upstream of the fault location disconnects from supply. Selectivity types / selectivity limit A distinction is made between two types of selectivity: C Partial selectivity acc. to IEC 60947-2, 2.17.2: Overcurrent discrimination of two series-connected overcurrent pro tection devices, where the loadside protective device takes over the full protection task up to a defi ned overcurrent level without the other protective device being active. C Full selectivity acc. to IEC 60947-2, 2.17.2: Overcurrent discrimination of two series-connected overcurrent pro tection devices, where the loadside protective device takes over the full protection task without the other protective device being active. Selectivity types C Current selectivity: Selective disconnection by grading the instantaneous short-circuit releases. Circuit-breakers with LI characteristics. C Time selectivity: Grading of the configurable tripping times (tsd in the S-part) of the short-circuit releases. This applies to standard as well as to optional characteristic curves. Circuit-breakers with LSI characteristics. It is often required in main distribution boards and at transfer points using devices of different manufacturers.

C Dynamic/energy selectivity Selectivity based on the evaluation of the let-through energy of the downstream devices and the tripping energy of the upstream protective device. Selectivity determination According to IEC 60947-2, Appendix A, the determination or verification of the desired type of selectivity is divided in two time ranges. Time range > 100 ms: The time range above 100 ms can be analyzed by a comparison of characteristic curves in the L- or S-range, taking the tolerances, required protective settings, curve representation in identical scales etc. into account. Time range < 100 ms: According to Fig. A2 in this standard, selectivity in this time range must be verified by testing. Due to the fact that the time and cost expense involved being very high, different devices being used in the power distribution system, selectivity limits can often be obtained from renowned equipment manufacturers only. In practice, let-through currents are therefore often compared to the operating or pickup currents or, the letthrough currents of the protective devices are compared to each other. The prerequisite being that the relevant data is available from the equipment manufacturer and that it is analyzed thoroughly. Comparing characteristic curves Three diagram types can be used for comparing characteristics: C Time-current diagram C Let-through current diagram C Let-through energy diagram Since these characteristic curves are compared over several orders of magnitude, they are usually plotted on log-log paper.

All characteristic curves must – if not already specified by the manufacturer – be assigned a scatter band to determine selectivity reliably. In the case of switchgear, EN 60947–2 / IEC 60 947–2 / DIN VDE 0660–101 specify a scatter of ± 20% for the instantaneous overcurrent release. The operating times, which are sometimes considerably shorter at normal operating temperatures, must be taken into account for electromechanical overload releases. Determination of the selectivity limit As a rule, all selectivity limits between two protective devices can be determined by carrying out measurements or tests. These measurements are virtually indispensable, particularly when assessing selectivity in the event of a short circuit, owing to the extremely rapid switching operations when current-limiting protection equipment is used. The measurements can, however, be very costly and complicated, therefore many manufacturers publish selectivity tables for their switchgear (see Table 3/16). When using SIMARIS design, all criteria are automatically considered.

3/33

3

Upstream circuit-breakers System protection

Type 3VL3 TM 200-250

3VL4 TM 160-200 200-250 250-315

Characteristics In li A Icn

TM 160-200

1,000-2,000 1,200-2,500 1,000-2,000 1,250-2,500 1,575-3,150 40-100 40-100 45-100 45-100 45-100

Downstream circuit-breakers Type Characteristics
5SY4 LI

[A] 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

[A] B B B B B B B B B B C C C C C C C C C C B B B B B B B B B B C C C C C C C C C C

kA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15

Selectivity limits (kA) T T T T 9.2 8.6 7.5 7.7 6.7 6.2 T T T T 8.6 8.5 8.5 7.5 6.6 6.2 T T T T 9.2 8.6 7.5 7.7 6.7 6.2 T T T T 8.5 8.5 8.5 7.5 6.6 6.2 T T T T T T T T T 9.0 T T T T T T T T 9.7 8.7 T T T T T T 14.3 11.1 11.1 9.0 T T T T T 14.7 14.7 13.0 9.7 8.7 T T T T 9.1 8.6 7.6 7.6 6.6 6.2 T T T T 8.5 8.5 8.5 7.6 6.5 6.1 T T T T 9.1 8.6 7.6 7.6 6.6 6.2 T T T T 8.5 8.5 8.5 7.6 6.5 6.1 T T T T 8.8 8.0 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.1 T T T T 7.1 8.1 7.8 6.9 6.5 6.1 T T 12.9 11.5 8.8 8.0 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.1 T 14.3 11.1 11.1 7.1 8.1 7.8 6.9 6.5 6.1 T T T T T T T T T 8.0 T T T T T T T T T 8.0 T T T T T T 12.4 11.8 10.7 8.0 T T T T T 13.7 13.4 12.0 10.2 8.0

Characteristics

LI

Type Characteristics

5SY7 LI

Characteristics

LI

Table 3/16

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn acc. to IEC 60898 Rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu acc. to IEC 60947-2

3/34

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

System Protection / Safety Coordination

3VL5 TM 315-400 250-315 315-400 400-500 500-630

3VL5 ETU 10/20 252-630

3VL6 ETU 10/20 320-800

3VL7 ETU 10/20 400-1,000 500-1,250

3VL8 ETU 10/20 640-1,600

2,000-4,000 1,575-3,150 2,000-4,000 2,500-5,000 3,150-6,500 788-6,300 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100

1,000-6,400 1,250-11,000 1,563-12,500 2,000-14,400 50-100 50-100 50-100 50-100

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 14.6 T T T T T T T T T 13.4

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 13.8 13.0 T T T T T T T T 14.2 12.0

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 14.2 13.3 T T T T T T T T 14.6 12.3

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T = Full selectivity up to Icn = rated shortcircuit breaking capacity of the lower-rated protective device M = Electromagnetic release TM = Thermomagnetic release ETU = Electronic tripping unit

3/35

3

Downstream circuit-breakers Type Series Characteristics IR li MCCB [A] [A] 300 300 300 300 600 600 600 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,500 300-600 300-600 400-800 500-1,000 625-1,250 800-1,600 80-693 125-1,100 200-1,760 1,000-2,000 1,250-2,500 250-2,200 312-2,750 1,000-2,000 1,250-2,500 1,575-3,150 2,000-4,000 400-3,465 500-4,400 1,575-3,150 2,000-4,000 2,500-5,000 3,250-6,500 788-6,300 1,000-6,400 1,250-11,000 1,562-12,500 2,000-14,400 Icn [kA] 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 50-100 50-100 50-100 50-100

Upstream circuit-breakers System protection 3WL1 ETU25/27 1,000-2,500 1,280-3,200 1,600-4,000 2,000-5,000 2,520-6,300 50,000 55-100 50,000 80-100 50,000 100 50,000 100 50,000 100

3VL1 Line Pro LI TM

16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 40-50 50-63 63-80 80-100 100-125 125-160 25-63 40-100 64-100 160-200 200-250 80-200 100-250 160-200 200-250 250-315 315-400 126-315 160-400 250-315 315-400 400-500 500-630 252-630 320-800 400-1000 500-1250 640-1,600

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 41.4 41.4 41.4

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 41.4 41.4 41.4

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 41.4 41.4 41.4

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 41.4 41.4 41.4

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 41.4 41.4 41.4

3VL2 Line Pro LI TM

ETU

3VL2 Line Pro LI TM ETU

3VL4 Line Protect TM

ETU

3VL5 Line Protect LI TM

ETU

3VL6 Line Pro LI 3VL7 Line Pro LI
ETU

3VL8 Line Pro LI
Table 3/16

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn acc. to IEC 60898 Rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu acc. to IEC 60947-2 (continued)

3/36

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

System Protection / Safety Coordination

3LW1-3B ETU45B 252-630 787.5-7560 50-65 320-800 1,000-9,600 100 400-1,000 500-1,250 640-1,600 800-2,000 1,000-2,500 1,280-3,200 1,600-4,000 2,000-5,000 50,000 100

1,250-12,000 1,562.5-15,000 2,000-19,200 2,500-24,000 3,125-30,000 100 100 100 55-100 55-100

4,000-38,400 50,000 80-100 100

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

T = Full selectivity up to Icn = rated shortcircuit breaking capacity of the lower-rated protective device M = Electromagnetic release TM = Thermomagnetic release ETU = Electronic tripping unit

3/37

3

8 1.50 2.00 1.0 2.0 0.2 LI 3RV1.6 0.0 0.2 1.4 0.2 1.5 0.8 Table 3/16 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn acc.6 0.8 0.6 0.2 1.8 0.8 0.2 1.8 0.20 2.8 0.0 0.1 LI 3RV1.8 0.2 1.50 2.4 0.6 0.20-3.50-5.80-4.5 0.2 1.0 0.0 2.20 2.6 3RV1.0 1.5 1.0 2.0 0.5 T T T 2.00 3.5 0.0 6.8 T T T T T T T 20.5 1.0 6.60 1. to IEC 60898 Rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu acc.0 1.6 T T T T T 2.5 1.2 1.5 T T T T T 2.2 1.4 3RV1.0 2.Downstream circuit-breakers Type Series Characteristics IR li Circuit-breaker for motor protection [A] Icn [A] 0.0 3.0 0.8 1.50-8.6 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.5 T T T T T 5.5 T T T 2.0 0.3 LI 0.0 0.00 0.6 0.25 1.0 0.6 0.50-6.00 4.5 0.2 1.6 0.10-1.6 0.5 0.80-4.0 1.0 0.5 1.0 0.0 0.6 0.6 0.0 2.80-2.0 1.8 0.0 0.4 1.50-8.8 0.5 0.00 7-10 9-12.30 5.50-6.90-1. to IEC 60947-2 (continued) 3/38 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .0 3.5 0.00 3.00 7-10 9-12 0.5 1.0 2.0 0.5 0.5 1.5 0.00 1.4 0.6 0.4 LI 0.8 0.2 1.6 0.00 4.6 T T T T T 2.5 T T T T T 5.2 1.6 0.6 0.2 1.5 11-16 14-20 17-22 20-25 11-16 14-20 18-25 22-32 28-40 36-45 40-50 11-16 14-20 18-25 22-32 28-40 36-50 45-63 57-75 70-90 80-100 [A] 12 15 19 24 30 38 48 60 76 96 120 144 12 15 19 24 30 38 48 60 76 96 120 150 192 240 264 300 192 240 300 384 480 540 600 192 240 300 384 480 600 756 900 1080 1140 [kA] 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 50-100 50-100 50-100 50-100 50-100 50-100 Upstream circuit-breakers System protection 3VL1 TM 16 300 40-70 20 300 40-70 25 300 40-70 32 300 40-70 40 600 40-70 50 600 40-70 63 600 40-70 Selectivity limits [kA] T T T 2.5 1.8 T T T T T T T 20.20-3.2 1.8 0.70-1.8 T T T T T T T 20.8 0.6 0.60 1.10-1.8 1.6 0.90-1.0 2.5 T T T T T 5.6 0.2 1.5 1.70-1.0 0.5 1.25 1.4 0.0 3.6 0.5 1.80-2.8 0.6 0.00 0.0 6.6 0.40-2.5 0.0 0.5 0.6 T T T 2.8 1.30 5.50-5.5 0.5 0.0 0.0 0.6 0.6 0.40-2.0 1.5 0.8 0.8 0.0 1.6 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.5 T T T T T 5.8 0.

5 T T T T T T T T 40-50 30.5 1.6 0.2 1.0 2.2 1.2 1.0 2.800 System protection 3VL2 TM 40-50 300-600 40-100 50-63 300-600 40-100 63-80 400-800 40-100 80-100 100-125 125-160 800-1.0 1.2 T T T T T T T 20.5 1.5 1.6 0.8 0.0 5.5 1.6 T T T T T 30.0 2.5 3.2 1.6 T T T T T T 5.0 2.0 2.0 3.8 0.0 1.2 0.5 2.5 2.5 2.6 0.0 5.0 6.8 T T T T T T T 20.5 1.0 12.6 0.0 2.0 2.0 5.5 1.5 1.0 1.5 T T T T T T T T T T 10.0 1.0 0.5 1.6 3.0 5.8 0.5 1.5 0.0 0.0 4.0 2.0 6.0 3.6 T T T T 4.0 1.5 8.5 4.0 2.6 0.0 1.0 T T T T T T T T 30.0 4.000 625-1.0 0.8 0.0 10.000 40-70 100 1.2 1.0 1.5 1.0 12.0 2.8 0.0 0.0 3.0 4.5 1.6 2.5 2.2 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.6 0.0 8.6 T T T T T 20.0 1.8 0.0 4.0 2.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 1.250 40-100 40-100 T T T T T T 8.6 0.0 8.0 5.000 40-70 160 1.6 0.0 2.5 1.8 0.5 1.6 0.2 1.2 T T T T T T T T 20.6 1.0 2.0 2.5 1.0 2.6 0.6 2.0 2.0 0.5 2.6 0.5 1.5 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.2 0.0 1.0 4.0 0.0 5.5 1.0 1.0 3.6 0.Disconnector 3VL1 M 80 1.2 T T T T T T T T 20.0 3.2 1.0 2.5 1.0 4.0 3.6 0.0 T T T T T T T T T T 30.0 10.5 T T T T T T T T 30 6 4 4 T T T T T T T T T T 30.0 3.0 1.0 1.2 0.5 1.0 2.0 0.6 0.6 2.0 6.8 0.600 40-100 500-1.5 2.0 2.5 1.5 1.0 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T T 20.0 2.8 0.2 1.5 1.2 1.0 2.0 2.6 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 2.0 5.5 1.5 1.0 2.6 0.6 0.0 2.8 0.0 6.8 0.6 T = Full selectivity up to Icn = rated shortcircuit breaking capacity of the lower-rated protective device M = Electromagnetic release TM = Thermomagnetic release ETU = Electronic tripping unit 3/39 3 .0 3.0 3.5 1.5 1.6 1.2 1.0 8.5 1.2 1.6 0.0 2.0 3.0 3.5 1.0 1.5 1.6 0.0 4.0 2.2 1.0 15.0 1.0 0.0 6.0 6.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 15.0 8.0 2.0 1.8 0.0 2.2 1.0 2.000 40-70 125 1.0 4.0 4.2 0.0 15.0 1.0 3.0 5.500 40-70 100 1.2 1.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 2.8 0.0 6.0 T T T T T T T T 8.0 1.2 T T T T T T T T 40.2 1.5 1.0 T T T T 4.0 25.2 0.8 0.0 6.0 0.0 5.5 3.0 4.5 1.0 1.6 0.0 T T T T T T 8.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 3.5 8.6 T T T T T T T 5.0 0.0 2.2 1.8 0.2 1.5 3.6 0.0 2.0 2.2 1.0 4.5 1.5 3.6 T T T T T 4.6 2.0 4.6 T T T T T 20.0 1.0 3.0 4.0 2.0 3.5 1.0 1.0 T T T T T T 8.0 8.5 1.0 1.0 4.6 0.5 2.0 5.8 0.8 0.2 1.2 0.800 160 1.8 1.0 2.0 4.0 1.0 3.0 3.5 1.5 1.2 1.6 0.6 0.0 2.5 1.

Prerequisites for this are: Current grading with different short-circuit currents The short-circuit currents in the event of a short circuit at the respective locations of the circuit-breakers are sufficiently different. selectivity is ensured across the entire overcurrent range up to the rated breaking capacity (absolute selectivity) if the rated currents differ by a factor of 1.000 A so that even very small short circuits are cleared at the input terminals of the downstream circuitbreaker Q1 within the specified time.3. a 160 A LV HRC fuse would also have absolute selectivity with respect to a 100 A LV HRC fuse.1 Selectivity in Radial Systems Selectivity between series-connected fuses The incoming feeder lines and the outgoing feeders of the busbar of a distribution board carry different operating currents and.[s] ts 200 A (160 A) Ik =1300 A 100 A size 00 200 A size 1 3. the I-release values of the upstream and downstream circuit-breakers differ accordingly. 3/20 1. also have different cross-sections.4 50 A 50 A 100 A Ik =1300 A K1 101 a) Selective isolation of short circuit K1 Fig. does not permit conclusions to be drawn with regard to selectivity. gL or gG) are used. particularly if current limiters are used. the dynamic processes in the circuit and in the electromechanical releases have a considerable effect on selectivity behavior.03 102 103 1. In the example shown.g. and the interaction of series-connected protection devices.37 s 0. in the event of a short circuit. Current grading with differently configured I-releases The rated currents and. The Joulean heat values (I 2t-values) should be compared in case of high short-circuit currents. which result from the complicated dynamic switching and tripping operations. Only partial selectivity can be established by comparing characteristic curves for current grading since the increased appearance of broken lines in the curve in the range < 100 ms. 3/40 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .4. therefore. therefore. 3/21). Possible solution: dynamic selectivity Selectivity through circuit-breaker coordination (dynamic selectivity) With high-speed operations. 1. Consequently. the I-release must generally be set to 4.41 / IEC 60364-4-41 / DIN VDE 0100-410 or the 5-second line-protection condition specified in DIN VDE 0100-430 (if line protection cannot be provided in any other way). 3/20).g.3 104 I [A] b) Prearcing times where Ik =1300 A Selectivity between series-connected LV HRC fuses with identical utilization categories (example) Selectivity between seriesconnected circuit-breakers Selectivity by grading the operating currents of instantaneous overcurrent releases (current grading) Selectivity can be achieved by grading the operating currents of instantaneous overcurrent releases (I-releases) (Fig. Selectivity between series-connected fuses with identical utilization categories When fuses of the same utilization category (e. 5-second breaking and lineprotection conditions In complying with the 5-second breaking condition specified in HD 384. they are usually protected by fuses with different rated currents which ensure selectivity on account of the different operating behavior. e.6 or higher (Fig.

selectivity can be provided by time grading short-time delay overcurrent releases. it is important to check the selectivity in the event of an overload by comparing the characteristic curves and by means of tripping times in accordance with the relevant regulations. This requires grading of both the tripping delays and the appropriate operating currents. Generally speaking. i. 101 Q1 Ir = 600 A (L-release) Ie = 4000 A (I-release) 10 100 10 II Ir = 60 A (L-release) Ii = 720 A (I-release) 100 I (720 A) 10-1 I (4000 A) 1 2 Sr = 400 kVA at 400 V. 3/21 Current selectivity for two series-connected circuit-breakers at different short-circuit current levels (example) Selectivity is also achieved if the downstream current-limiting protection device trips so quickly that. the ”mechanically slow” release does not have time to trigger. This may be sufficient (full selectivity) if the prospective maximum short-circuit current at the downstream protective device is lower than the established selectivity limit. Selectivity limits of two series-connected circuit-breakers A maximum short-circuit value – the selectivity limit – up to which the downstream circuit-breaker can open more quickly and alone. The let-through current depends on the peak short-circuit current and current limiting characteristics. 3/20). consideration of dynamic selec- tivity provides a suitable possibility for establishing full selectivity without having to use switchgear with shorttime-delay overcurrent releases.8 kA I 2.1 kA Q1 10-2 M 3~ 4 5 102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 Current I 5 [A] a) Single-line diagram b) Tripping curves L Inverse-time delay overload release I Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release 1) Q1 Circuit-breaker for motor protection (current-limiting) Q2 Circuit-breaker (zero-current interrupter) Maximum setting range Fig. Selectivity by means of shorttime-delay overcurrent releases (time grading) Time grading by short-time-delay releases If current grading is not possible on account of the requirements listed on page 36 and cannot be achieved by selecting the switchgear in accordance with the selectivity tables (dynamic selectivity). can be determined for each switchgear assembly. 3/22). only partial selectivity is possible in the case of dynamic selectivity with short circuits. With partial selectivity. selectively. Irrespective of this. 3/41 3 .System Protection / Safety Coordination [s] Opening time t 104 2 10 min. 50 Hz U kr = 4% I r = 577 A I k ≈ 15 KA I II 103 Q2 I k = 10 kA Q2 L L I (6000 A)1) 4. although the let-through current does momentarily exceed the operating value of the upstream protection device. Table 3/16 shows an example of a selectivity table.e. which usually arises with current grading owing to the clearance condition (see Fig. The selectivity limit indicated in the table may be well above the operating value of the instantaneous overcurrent release in the upstream circuit-breaker (see Fig.

3/42 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . they can be fitted with instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent releases in addition to the short-time delay releases (Fig. Q3 is temporarily disabled by Q1 and Q5 by Q3 by means of appropriate communication lines. The value selected for the operating current of the instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent releases must be high enough to ensure that the releases only operate in case of direct ”dead” short circuits and. Q3. The necessary grading time. it trips after only 50 ms. Operating current The operating current of the shorttime-delay overcurrent release should be set to at least 1. also called “zone-selective interlocking”. only the downstream circuitbreaker disconnects the affected part of the installation from the system. Selectivity between circuitbreaker and fuse When considering selectivity in conjunction with fuses. Without "ZSI". A short circuit at K1 is detected by Q1. Additional I-releases In order to reduce the short-circuit stress in the event of a ”dead” short circuit at the upstream circuit-breakers. 3/24.45 times (twice per 20% scatter. since it does not receive any disabling signal. unless other values are specified by the manufacturer) the value of the downstream circuitbreaker. Fig. under normal operating conditions. This control function allows the tripping delay to be reduced to max. If ZSI is active. Since Q1 does not receive any disabling signal. A short circuit at K2 is only detected by Q5. and Q5. if a fault occurs. has been developed for circuit-breakers to prevent excessively long tripping times when several circuit-breakers are connected in series. which allows for all scatter bands. depends on the operating principle of the release and the type of circuit-breaker. Time grading with virtually identical short-circuit currents The upstream circuit-breaker is equipped with short-time-delay overcurrent releases (S) so that. 3WL1 220 ms 3WL1 3VL 150 ms 3VL 80 ms 3VL 3RV M Fig. a grading time of approximately 70 ms to 100 ms from circuit-breaker to circuit-breaker is sufficient to allow for all scatter bands. This requires grading of both the tripping delays and the operating currents of the overcurrent releases. tripping would only occur after 150 ms. 50 ms for the circuit-breakers located upstream of the short circuit. a permissible scatter band of ± 10% in the direction of current flow must be allowed for in the time-current characteristics. it trips after only 10 ms. 3/23). 3/22 Instantaneous Required delay time settings for electromagnetic short-time-delay S-releases for selective short-circuit protection Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) A microprocessor-controlled shorttime grading control. Electronic S-releases With electronic short-time-delay overcurrent releases (S-releases). do not interfere with selective grading. 3/22 also contains the associated grading diagram.Circuitbreaker Power supply system Delay time t d of S-release Time grading can be implemented to safeguard selectivity if the prospective short-circuit currents are almost identical. In addition to the diagram with the four series-connected circuit-breakers. The method of operation regarding zone-selective interlocking is illustrated in Fig.

3/24 Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) of series. 50 Hz U kr = 6% I n = 1445 A I k ≈ 24.or parallel-connected circuit-breakers (block diagram) 105 [A] 3/43 3 .System Protection / Safety Coordination Sr = 1000 kVA at 400 V. 3/23 Q2 Q3 t d3 = 150 ms n (20 kA) 102 L 10 1 L L t d2 = 80 ms 100 I k = 17 kA 10-1 n 10-2 102 S t d2 = 80 ms S t d3 = 150 ms 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 Current I 5 105 [A] Selectivity between three series-connected circuit-breakers with limitation of short-circuit stress by means of an additional I-release in circuit-breaker Q3 Q5 K2 t d = 150 ms A t ZSi = 50 ms E [s] Opening time t 104 103 Q1/Q2 Q3/Q4 Q5 102 Q3 A E t d = 80 ms t ZSi = 50 ms Q4 A E t d = 10 ms t ZSi = t d 101 100 A E A E 10 t d =10 ms t ZSi = t d K1 Communication lines 10-2 102 103 104 td = 150 ms td = 80 ms tZSi Q1 Q2 -1 Icn td = 10 ms Current I Fig.1 kA [s] Opening time t 104 103 Q1 Q3 Main distribution board Q2 Subdistribution board Q1 I k = 10 kA M ~ Fig.

3/26). the rated current of which is very low compared with the rated continuous current. Selectivity between fuse and downstream circuit-breaker Selectivity ratios in the overload range In order to achieve selectivity in the overload range. 3/26 ts I td Selectivity between circuit-breaker with LS-releases and downstream fuse. Selectivity ratios between LS-releases and fuses with relatively high rated currents Due to the dynamic processes that take place in electromagnetic releases. absolute selectivity can also be achieved with fuses. only to be expected for a fuse. Section 4. 3/44 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .1. selectivity can only be verified by means of appropriate measurements of Ii. Absolute selectivity can be achieved by using circuitbreakers with short-time-delay overcurrent releases (S-releases) if the safety margin for the operating current td between the upper scatter band of the fuse characteristic and the delay time of the S-release td is selected so that tA ≥ 100 ms (Fig.1). whose ID briefly exceeds the operating current. F1 Q1 L S Q1 t L L S tA Id ts td Overload release Short-time-delay overcurrent release Safety margin Operating current of s release Prearcing time of fuse Delay time of s release S F1 t A ≥ 100 ms Ik Id Fig. 3/27). a safety margin of tA ≥1 s is required between the lower scatter band of the fuse and the characteristic curve of the inverse-timedelay overload release (Fig. partial selectivity is achieved if the upper scatter band of the fuse characteristic does not touch the tripping characteristic of the fully preloaded instantaneous overcurrent release and maintains a safety margin of tA ≥ 1 s (Fig. however. Once again.F1 Q1 L I Q1 t L tA F1 I F1 Fuse Q1 Circuit-breaker Inverse-time-delay L overload delay Instantaneous electromagnetic I overcurrent release tA Safety margin Operating current of n release Ii The time-current characteristics (scatter bands) do not touch I Ii Overload range I Fig. 3/25 Selectivity between circuit-breaker and downstream fuse in overload range I Absolute selectivity for circuit-breakers without short-time-delay overcurrent releases is achieved if the letthrough current of the fuse ID does not reach the operating current of the instantaneous overcurrent release (please refer to current limiting diagram for LV HRC fuses in ”Electrical Installations Handbook”. A reduction in the tripping time of up to 25% must be allowed for at normal operating temperatures (unless the manufacturer states otherwise). This is. short-circuit current range Circuit-breaker with downstream fuse Selectivity between LI-releases and fuses with very low rated currents In the overload range up to the operating current Ii of the delayed overcurrent release. 3/25).

System Protection / Safety Coordination Q1 F1 F1 t L tA ≥ 1 s F1 Fuse Q1 Circuit-breaker L Inverse-time-delay overload release I Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release tA Safety margin Operating current of I-release Ii The time-current characteristics (scatter bands) do not touch In case of short circuits.000 A I k ≤ 10 kA Ik Part Q1 L I Q3 L S I 102 I k ≤ 10 kA 101 S 100 Ii 10-1 ttd2/3 ≈150 ms (≥ 70 ms) tö1 2 4 6 10 3 I r = 200 A I i = 2. the maximum let-through I 2t value of the circuit-breaker is compared with the minimum prearcing I 2t value of the fuse (Fig. the scatter bands are not necessary. overload range F1 F1 I 2t Q1 Circuit-breaker (max. Since these values are maximum and minimum values.400 A IkΣ M ~ 102 102 2 3 4 6 104 I 2 4 [A] Fig. 2/28). 3/27 Selectivity between fuse and downstream circuit-breaker. prearcing value) ISel Selectivity limit L I Q1 Q1 Ik ISel Selectivity range Fig. let-through value) F1 Fuse (min. 3/45 3 . In this diagram. Example with outgoing feeder in the center of the busbars. 3/29 Selectivity with two infeed transformers of the same rating and operating simultaneously. L I Q1 I I I Overload range I Fig.diagram. after the releases in the circuit-breaker have tripped. the fuse continues to be heated during the arcing time. The selectivity limit lies approximately at the point where a safety margin of 70 ms between the lower scatter band of the fuse and the operating time of the instantaneous overcurrent release or the delay time of the short-time-delay overcurrent release is undershot. it is important to remember that. short circuit I [s] t T1 Equal ratings T2 Separate Parallel Q1 Q2 Q2+Q3 104 L 103 L L Base Ik Part IkΣ Q2 L S I r = 600 A I sd = 3. Short-circuit range A reliable and usually relatively high selectivity limit for the short-circuit range can be determined in the I 2t. 3/28 Selectivity between fuse and downstream circuit-breaker.

LS-releases are required for the circuit-breakers in the infeeds in order to achieve unequivocal selectivity ratios. it must be ensured that selectivity is also achieved for operation with one transformer and for all short-circuit currents (single. Reduced selectivity with LV HRC fuses with a rating of 630 to 1. the tripping curve of circuit-breakers Q2 and Q3 must. the tripping curve of circuit-breakers Q2 and Q3 can be shifted optimally to the right along the current scale by a characteristic displacement factor of 2 up to the line I k∑. short-circuit current distribution will differ according to the impedance ratio along the incoming feeder lines. If the characteristic curve of the individual circuit-breaker is used instead of the shifted characteristic. the exact short-circuit current (distribution) which flows through the circuitbreaker must be taken into consideration. the total short-circuit current I k∑ of e. 630 to 1. with the outgoing feeder connected centrally to the busbars and incoming feeders of equal length. With asymmetrical configurations and with infeeds and outgoing feeders located at the busbars. Characteristic displacement factor Since the total short-circuit current is ideally distributed equally among the two infeeds (ignoring the load currents in the other outgoing feeders) with the outgoing feeder located at the center of the busbars.g. each carry only half this current. When setting the releases of circuitbreakers Q1.000 A. e. Two identical infeeds If a short circuit occurs in the outgoing feeder downstream of the circuitbreaker Q1.000 A near an infeed This is particularly significant in the event of fused outgoing circuits with high current ratings. therefore. the total short-circuit current I K∑ that occurs in the faulted outgoing feeder comprises the partial short-circuit currents I k Part in the individual infeeds and represents the base current in the grading diagram (Fig. which represents the base current for this fault condition.e. i. ≤ 10 kA. 3/29). It is important to ensure that a safety margin of ≥ 100 ms between the tripping characteristic of the S-release and the prearcing-time/current characteristic of the LV HRC fuse is provided not only with parallel operation. be more favorable than with two units since the characteristic displacement factor is > 2 and < 3. S-releases for the feeder circuit-breakers must also be provided for low and medium rated fuse currents as the resulting current selectivity of I-releases is insufficient.g. 3/30 Selectivity with three infeed transformers operating simultaneously Fig. The result of this is selectivity both with regard to time and also current. This is the case for all fault types. Q2 and Q3. 3/46 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 3/31 Short-circuit distribution via the tie breaker Q3 with two infeeds Q1 and Q2 Selectivity with parallel infeeds Improving selectivity with parallel infeeds With parallel infeeds to a busbar. Three identical infeeds With parallel operation of three transformers. be considered in relation to the base current of the circuit-breaker Q1. owing to the additional current selectivity.to three-phase).T1 T2 T3 I k Part 1 I k Part 2 Q2 Q3 I kΣ < 30 kA L Q1 S I 15 kA Ik <15 kA Q2 Ik <15 kA Q3 Q1 I kΣ 15 kA Fig. ≤ 20 kA flows via this breaker. the selectivity ratios will. Parallel operation permits additional current selectivity by means of a shift in the tripping curve (I i) of the LS-releases of the infeed circuit-breaker Additional current selectivity with parallel transformer operation In the grading diagram. Once again. while the infeed circuitbreakers Q2 and Q3. For cost-related reasons. but also with individual transformer operation.

only the faulted transformer infeed will trip on the high-voltage and low-voltage side. however. They provide information concerning selective characteristics with a large number of different fault currents and are determined and evaluated with the aid of a computer program. 3/32a and b is faulted. approximately equal partial short-circuit currents flow through the tie breakers Q4 and Q5. e. Note on setting the overcurrent releases in tie breakers The values set for the overcurrent releases must be as high as possible in order to prevent operational interference caused by the tie breakers opening at relatively low short-circuit currents. 3/32b). it is necessary to provide additional I-releases to allow a fault between the transformer and feeder circuit-breaker to be detected as shown in Fig. Instantaneous. (Fig.I k I kΣ 2 . With a ”dead” short circuit. the voltage at the short-circuit location drops to almost zero.e. For this purpose. therefore. Generally speaking. 3/32 Distribution of the short-circuit currents used in determining the settings for the overcurrent release in the tie breakers Q4 and Q5 with three infeeds and faults a and b in the outgoing feeders of different busbar sections Additional I-release necessary Furthermore. 3/47 3 . Selecting the circuit-breakers The type of device used in the outgoing feeders and the selectivity ratios depend primarily on whether circuit-breakers with current-zero cut-off. but < I k∑. I k Part I kΣ With three infeeds and fault With three infeeds. or with current limiting are used as tie breakers. therefore. i. I k Part 2) flows through the tie breaker Q3 as shown in Fig. the system voltage collapses to a residual voltage at the short-circuit location. 3/32a). Fig. in the outgoing feeders of the sub-distribution boards. the fault impedance and. Due to the I-releases.g. With two infeeds With two infeeds and depending on the fault location (left or right busbar section or feeder).g. the ratios are different according to which of the outgoing feeders shown in Fig. arcs with arc-drop voltages between approximately 30 V and 70 V occur with short circuits. Selectivity and undervoltage protection If a short circuit occurs. 3/30. current-limiting tie breakers relieve the outgoing circuits of the effects of high unlimited total peak short-circuit currents I p and. without current limiting. In the center busbar section If a fault occurs at the outgoing feeder of the center busbar section (Fig. 3/31. The circuit-breakers in the ”sound” infeeds remain operative. permit the use of less complex and less expensive circuitbreakers. the S-releases of circuit-breakers Q1 to Q3 must be set to a value < I k and the I-releases to a value > I k. only the associated partial short-circuit current (e. In the outer busbar section If a fault occurs at the outgoing feeder of the outer busbar section. Parallel-connected infeeds via tie breakers Protective functions under fault conditions Tie breakers must perform the following protective functions in fault situations: C instantaneous release with faults in the vicinity of the busbars and C relief of outgoing feeders of the effects of high total short-circuit currents. Computer-assisted selectivity check Precise values for the short-circuit currents flowing through the tie breakers are required to permit optimum setting of the overcurrent releases. The magnitude of the residual voltage depends on the fault impedance. The highest and lowest fault currents are important here.System Protection / Safety Coordination a) Fault at the outgoing feeder of the centre busbar section b) Fault at the outgoing feeder of the outer busbar section Q1 I k Part 1 Q4 Q2 I k Part 2 Q5 Q3 Q1 I k Part Q4 Q2 I k Part Q5 Q3 3 . two partial short-circuit currents flow through the tie breaker Q4.

Ue Main distribution board Q2 td ≥ 70 ms 80 m 3 x 95 mm2 Cu Q2 K2 Sub-distribution board Q1 td = 0 0.13. 3/33 Voltage ratios for short-circuited LV switchgear with a main and sub-distribution board Ik1 F1 Ik3 F3 a F2 Ik2 Ik3 = Ik1+Ik2 K1 Ik1+Ik2+Ik4 Ik Ik4 b Ik Ik Fig.13. 3/35 Example of a meshed system with multi-phase infeed 3/48 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .a) Short circuit at sub-distribution board b) Short circuit at main distribution board Q3 0.5.U e Q3 0. 3/34 Short-circuited cable with its two incoming feeder nodes a and b Fig.Ue Q1 K1 Ue Rated operating current td Delay time Fig.

Fig. 3/35). the rated operating voltage at the busbar of the main distribution board is reduced to 0. through which the partial short-circuit current I k1 or I k2 flows. The delay time is at least 70 ms. . 3/49 3 . starting at the fault location. only the faulted terminal may be disconnected from the system. Depending on the size and type of the circuitbreaker. 3/33a).35 times this value and the voltage reduction lasts longer than approximately 20 ms. This is not necessary if current-limiting circuit-breakers with a maximum total clearing time of 10 ms are used. It is equipped with a short-time-delay overcurrent release (S). all of the circuitbreakers with undervoltage releases open. If a short circuit (K1) occurs along the meshed system cable. The open-circuit shunt release receives the tripping pulse from the network master relay. possibly without overcurrent release. melts and fuse F1 or F2.13 Ue at the busbar of the subdistribution board and to 0. A network master relay (reverse power relay) and a ”circuitbreaker for mesh-connected systems” are required for this purpose. The fault location is thus selectively disconnected from the power system.e. 3. 3/34). through which the total current I k3 flows. If the rated operating voltage drops to 0. but with a capacitor-delayed shunt release (open-circuit shunt release with memory). During this time. on the LV side. The next upstream circuitbreaker Q1 clears the fault. the circuit-breaker Q2 opens. This is a three-pole circuit-breaker. power flows back to the fault location via the network circuit-breaker. If a short-circuit occurs at the terminals of an infeed transformer. Node fuses The nodes of a meshed LV system are normally equipped with cables with the same cross-section and with LV HRC fuses of utilization category gL of the same type and rated current (Fig.5 · Ue at the busbar of the main distribution board. In the case of Siemens LV HRC fuses.System Protection / Safety Coordination This voltage. Short-circuit current I k3 from node ”a” comprises the partial currents I k1 and I k2 which may differ greatly depending on the impedance ratios. increases proportionately to the intermediate impedance with increasing proximity to the power source. Power transformers in meshed systems Feeder circuit-breaker with network master relay In multi-phase meshed systems (Fig. If a short circuit occurs on the HV side of the transformer (K1) or between the transformer and network circuit-breaker (K2) or along the cable (K3) (Fig.13 · Ue. 3/33b). If a short-circuit occurs at K2 (Fig.7 – 0.3. remain operative. Tripping delay for contactors and undervoltage releases Undervoltage releases and contactors with tripping delay are required to ensure that the selective overcurrent protection is not interrupted prematurely.2 Selectivity in Meshed Systems Two selectivity functions must be performed in meshed systems: 1. 3/33 illustrates the voltage ratios in LV switchgear with a ”dead” short circuit. power feedback from the LV system to the fault location shall be prevented if a fault occurs in a transformer substation or MV line. the permissible current ratio I k1 /(I k1 + I k2) for high short-circuit currents is 0. the HV HRC fuse operates on the HV side.8. the total breaking time is 30 ms for zero-current interrupters and a maximum of 10 ms for currentlimiting circuit-breakers. Only the short-circuited cable may be disconnected from the system. 3/36). infeed via several MV lines and transformers. 2. the rated operating voltage Ue drops to 0. All contactors also open if the rated control supply voltage collapses to below 75% of its rated value for longer than 5 to 30 ms. the shortcircuit currents I k3 and I k4 flow to the fault location. If a short circuit occurs at K1 (Fig. i. Permissible current ratio Selectivity of the fuses at node ”a” is achieved if fuse F3.

they ensure fast. 120 ms K3 t 100 Ue 0.3.Network circuit-breaker without S-release If the outgoing transformer feeders are protected by network master relays. the total short-circuit current of all the infeed points flows through the meshed system and the circuitbreaker to the short-circuit location. To prevent errors. Technical details regarding network master relays and circuit-breakers for mesh-connected networks can be found in the literature supplied by the manufacturer. 3/37 Tripping characteristic of the network master relay 7RM with standard setting (6 A) Circuit-breakers for mesh-connected networks Circuit-breaker selection When selecting this circuit-breaker and its rated switching capacity. it is important to remember that the highest short-circuit current must be expected in the event of a short circuit between the transformer terminals and the circuit-breaker. Fig. In multi-feed LV power systems. in the event of a short circuit in an MV feeder cable of the meshed system. 3/37 shows the tripping characteristic for the standard setting of 6 A and for various other voltages.6. The relay detects a reversal in the flow of power if.Ue 80 a K1 60 40 K2 b S 20 c a HV HRC fuses b Network circuitbreaker with network master relay c Node fuses 0 0 20 40 I A 60 Fig. 3/50 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . The total short-circuit current may be higher than the short-circuit current of the relevant transformer. no S-release is provided or the value set for this release is so high that the thermal overload capability of the transformer can be fully utilized.Ue 0. the network master relay permits circulating currents up to the same value as the rated current at the rated voltage (setting can be varied between 2 A and 6 A using the spring bias). 3/36 Single-line diagram showing the infeed point of a meshed LV power system Fig. Network master relays Network master relays are used in conjunction with circuit-breakers for mesh-connected systems. high currents flow through the LV power system and the transformers of the damaged MV cable to the fault location. selective disconnection of a damaged MV cable from the connected transformer substations. In this case. however.

This may result in premature tripping. therefore.g. Resonance phenomena occur if the natural frequency of the resonant circuit matches or is close to the frequency of a harmonic current generated by the power converter. 3/51 3 . Owing to the above-mentioned dimensioning requirements. no longer form a resonant circuit with the system reactance.6. capacitor units must be suitable for continuous operation with a current whose r. allowing for the permissible capacitance deviation.43 times the rated current of the capacitor since. The capacitors. Settings for overload relays If thermal time-delay overload relays are used to provide protection against overcurrents. no overload protection is provided for capacitor units in the majority of cases Capacitors in systems with harmonic components The capacitors can only be overloaded in systems with devices which generate high harmonics (e. a higher secondary current flows due to the changed transformation ratio of the transformers caused by the harmonic components. unlike the reactorconnected capacitors. An LC resonant circuit. together with the seriesconnected transformer and short-circuit reactance of the primary system. Short-circuit protection LV HRC fuses with utilization category gL are normally used in capacitor units for short-circuit protection. As a result. A rated fuse current of 1.m. is used instead of the capacitor. form an anti-resonant circuit. Reactor-connected capacitors The capacitors must be provided with reactors to prevent resonance (see ”Electrical Installations Handbook”. The capacitor unit is thus inductive for all harmonic currents that occur in the load current and can. generators and converter-fed drives). the capacitor current can be 1. Section 1.43 times the rated capacitor current.3 to 1.1 · 1.6). Harmonics suppression by means of filter circuits An alternative solution would be to use filter circuits to remove the majority of harmonics from the primary system (see ”Electrical Installations Handbook”. With transformer-heated overload relays or releases.3 and 1.6 to 1.3 times the current which flows with a sinusoidal voltage and rated frequency.7 times the rated capacitor current is required to prevent the fuses from tripping in the overload range and when the capacitors switch.6. The filter circuits are also series resonant circuits which.4 Protection of Capacitors According to IEC 60358 / VDE 0560 Part 4. the tripping value can be 1.4).System Protection / Safety Coordination 3.s. are tuned precisely to the frequencies of the harmonic currents to be filtered. whose resonance frequency is below the lowest harmonic component (250 Hz) in the load current.3 = 1. the impedance is almost zero. Sections 1. value does not exceed 1.

to be collected and stored. 800 kVA and for high switching rates. Three-phase time-overcurrent protection In the interests of future system safety. Current transformer rating for protection purposes Current transformers are subject to the standards DIN VDE 0414.5 to 2 times the rated transformer currents. be checked before the protection scheme is chosen and dimensioned. Circuit-breakers with protection Protection relays Protection relays connected to current transformers (protection core) can be used to perform all protectionrelated tasks irrespective of the magnitude of the short-circuit currents and rated operating currents of the required circuit-breakers. Relay operating currents with emergency generator operation Care should be taken to ensure that the operating currents of the protection relays provided for normal system operation are also attained in the event of faults during emergency operation using generators with relatively low rated outputs. or Circuit-breakers with protection Circuit-breakers with protection (see page 54) from approx. therefore. it is advisable to configure the time-overcurrent protection as a threephase system. be incorporated in substation control and protection systems as an autonomous component.5 Protection of Distribution Transformers The following devices are used for protection tasks in medium-voltage systems: HV HRC fuses High-voltage high-rupturing-capacity (HV HRC) fuses usually used in conjunction with switch-disconnectors to protect radial feeders and transformers against short circuits. Current transformers with 5P or 10P cores must be used for connecting protection equipment. 1. which can be called up via serial data interfaces. as well as IEC 185 and IEC 186.1 Protection with Overreaching Selectivity Ideally. 3/52 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Digital protection can. The required rated output and overcurrent factor must be determined on the basis of the information provided in the protection relay descriptions. irrespective of the method of neutral-point connection. Digital protection Modern protection equipment is controlled by microprocessors (digital protection) and supports all of the protective functions required for a medium-voltage outgoing feeder. The lowest rated current is dictated by the rush currents generated when the transformers are energized and is 1.5. transformer feeders should be protected by: HV HRC fuses High-voltage high-rupturing-capacity (HV HRC) fuses used in conjunction with switch-disconnectors for rated transformer outputs of up to approx. Overcurrent protection Overcurrent protection via current transformers for protecting cables and transformer feeders can be either two-phase or three-phase. Protection as component of the substation control and protection system Digital protection also allows operating and fault data. 3. also when several circuit-breakers with S-releases are arranged in series on the low-voltage side and selectivity is not possible with upstream HV HRC fuses. The anticipated selectivity ratios must. Protection by means of HV HRC fuses Dimensioning HV HRC fuses The rated current of the HV HRC fuses specified by the manufacturers for the rated output of each transformer should be used when dimensioning the HV HRC fuses. The neutral-point connection of the mediumvoltage network must be considered here.250 kVA for low switching rates. Standards for protection relays Static protection relays must comply with the standards IEC 255 and DIN VDE 0435-303. therefore.3. Parts 1 to 3.

with short circuits on a transformer’s secondary side. Generally. a minimum safety clearance of 25% is observed from I a min to the transformer’s short-circuit current I k (see Fig. The required transmission range can be seen in Fig. 3/38 Protection zones of HV HRC back-up fuses necessary for various protection devices used on the low-voltage side 40 tp min 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 F1 s 10 6 4 2 1 600 400 200 ms 100 60 40 20 10 6 A at 0.4 kV A at 10 kV 1000 40 2000 3000 80 120 5000 7500 10000 200 400 20000 800 50000 2000 I >25% Safety margin Ia min F2 F3 I k < 9. Back-up protection with transmission range HV HRC fuses must ensure sufficient back-up protection in case of a possible failure of the downstream protective device. Safety clearances between the melting current characteristic of HV HRC fuses and other protective devices Rated currents of LV HRC fuses must be selected in such a way that. between the established maximum short-circuit current near the low-voltage side’s busbar system (converted to the medium-voltage side) and the minimum breaking current I a min (circle in the melting current characteristic). 3/39 to 3/43). 3/39 Example showing grading of HV HRC with LV HRC fuses in infeed circuits 3/53 3 . illustrated for three circuit diagrams.4 kV ≤ 400 A t p Prearcing time for fuses Minimum breaking current Ia min of HV HRC fuse Fig. the minimum breaking current I a min of the fuse must be exceeded.5 kA F1 400 A 630 A 100 A Base Ik < 9.5 kA 10 kV F3 630 A 400 kVA Ukr 6% F2 630 A 0. the load on I a min is 4 to 5 times that of the transformer’s rated current. affecting even the installation's busbar system. Required back-up protection zones a LV HRC 3WL S 3WL c 400 V LV HRC LV HRC LV HRC b S 7RM network master relay Fig. The working range of the back-up protection increases with the decreasing protective rated current of the fuse.System Protection / Safety Coordination HV HRC HV HRC HV HRC Minimum breaking current I a min For the determination of the maximum rated current it must be observed that. Between these limit values. 3/38. the fuse link can be chosen according to selectivity.

3/38.200 A Minimum breaking current Ia min of HV HRC fuse Example showing grading with HV HRC fuses – network master relay in the infeed – and LV HRC fuses in the outgoing feeder. 3/40 Further data on safety margins for gradings as shown in Fig.1 F1 S IkT 630 A Ring interconnection 630 A Ik R. . circuit-breakers with overcurrent releases are used on the low-voltage side for rated outputs ≥ 500 kVA. transformer rating 630 kVA Fig. Grading of HV HRC fuses with circuit-breakers for mesh-connected systems and downstream LV HRC fuses Selecting the HV HRC fuse rating In meshed systems with several transformers and parallel system operation.e.g. the back-up protection range of the HV HRC fuse must be extended as shown in Fig.2 ≈25% Safety margin Ia min required Scatter band 50000 2000 I Command time for network master relay of circuit-breaker Q1 Virtual prearcing time of fuses Short-circuit current with individual transformer operation Tripping characteristic for network master relay S set to 1. the LV feeder circuit-breakers are not fitted with overcurrent releases (LS) but. since their minimum breaking current I a min is 12 kA. 160 A as shown in Fig. can be found in the following sections. since both fuses protect the same system element and interruption will occur in all cases (restricted selectivity). = 1. HV HRC fuses with higher rated currents (e. t vs min 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 s 10 6 4 2 1 600 400 200 ms 100 60 40 20 10 6 A at 0.4 kV – and possible tripping of the switch disconnector on the medium-voltage side by the upstream HV HRC fuse are acceptable. Grading of HV with LV HRC fuses in infeed circuits Grading with LV HRC fuses Example of a transformer with a rated output of 400 kVA (Fig. case b and c. A Ring interconnection Q1 630 A Ik R. have separate 7RM19 network master relays which only respond to reverse currents. 3/40. this is achieved by selecting the HV HRC fuse with the lower current rating.5 kA). case b. Tangent prearcing time/current characteristics F2 (LV HRC) and F3 (HV HRC) – referred to 0.1+Ik R. 3/38. 3/39): LV HRC fuse switch-disconnectors or motor fuse-disconnectors (maximum rated 3/54 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 1000/ . Given the absence of the LS-release as a grading element. i. well above the short-circuit current I k which the transformer can carry (max. instead.4 kV IkΣ= Ik T+Ik R. 9. for example. 3/40) would not be suitable here. In Fig.40 t k.2 Q1 0.2 In transf.4 kV A at 10 kV tk t vs Ik Q1 1000 40 2000 3000 80 120 5000 200 10000 400 20000 800 Reverse protection F1 630 A F2 (160) A 10 kV 100 A (optionally 160 A) S n = 630 kVA Ukr = 6% Ik max = 15 kA Base Ik <15 100 A F2 current 630 A) are mainly used for transformers with rated outputs of up to 400 kVA.

Grading of HV HRC fuses with lowvoltage circuit-breakers and downstream LV HRC fuses using a 630 kVA transformer as an example Requirements Selectivity is required between the protection devices of the feeders and those of the infeed. td min Base Ik <15 kA 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 s 10 6 4 2 1 600 400 200 ms 100 60 40 20 10 6 A at 0. 3/43). This is possible because a higher short-circuit current (I k∑) flows through the LV HRC fuse F1 than through the HV HRC fuse F2 (I kT). 3/40). since the ring interconnections also function as infeeds in the event of a fault. 40 t s.4 kV 400 (630) A Ik <15 kA ≈25% Safety margin (requirement) Scatter band F2 L Q1 S Safety margin 100 ms Safety margin 100 ms (required) 50000 2000 I tn Prearcing time for fuses t d Delay time for S-release Minimum breaking current Ia min of HV HRC fuse Fig.4 kV A at 10 kV 1000 40 2000 3000 80 120 5000 200 10000 400 20000 800 Setting range S Q1 td Selective I sd=6 kA Ia min Q1 F1 400 A F1 (630 A) Not selective F2 100 A (160 A) 10 kV 100 A (optional 160 A) 630 kVA Ukr 6% 3 WL1 1000 A t d=220 ms 0. SENTRON WL (Fig. 3/41 Example showing the grading of HV HRC fuses F2 with circuit-breaker Q1 and downstream LV HRC fuse F1 in the outgoing feeder 3/55 3 . selectivity is achieved with the 400 A LV HRC fuse-link used in the example. In such cases. or using a considerably more powerful transformer. The setting and delay time td must be adjusted with the S-release (6 kA setting).System Protection / Safety Coordination The proximity of the characteristics F1 and F2 does not have a detrimental effect on selectivity in this case. the associated circuit-breaker enables the S-release to be set to a higher value. Between LV HRC fuses and S-releases Thus. 3/41). which means that selectivity is improved as a result of the total short-circuit current I k∑ in the feeder being distributed among the infeeds (with the two ring interconnections in Fig. a safety margin of at least 100 ms is necessary between the characteristic of an LV HRC fuse and that of an S-release (Fig. e. which form a functional unit. selectivity can be achieved more easily using downstream circuit-breakers.g.

Scatter band of HV HRC fuses According to EN 60 282-1/ DIN VDE 0670-4. Result: When selecting circuit-breakers instead of low-voltage fuses. selectivity is required. 3/42 Example showing the grading of HV HRC fuses F2 with circuit-breaker Q2 and downstream circuit-breaker Q1 with LS-release in the outgoing feeder 3/56 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . HV HRC fuse-links with a higher rated current should be chosen. overlapping of characteristics Q1 and F2 should be avoided. a restriction in selectivity in the upper shortcircuit current range is accepted in the case of faults in the vicinity of the busbars (as indicated by the circle in the diagram) for the 100 A HV HRC fuse in Fig. 40 t s. Siemens HV HRC fuse-links have a scatter band width of ± 10%. as it could result in erroneous tripping. on the other hand. selectivity can easily be attained.Between HV HRC fuses and S-releases Since the protection devices in the infeed form a functional unit.g. for example.4 kV A at 10 kV 1000 40 2000 3000 80 120 5000 200 10000 400 20000 800 “L characteristic Q1 “ not shown I sd =3.4 kV 3 WL1 630 A td1= 100 ms F2 L Q2 S Q1 Ik <15 kA ≈25% Safety margin (required) Scatter band Safety margin ≈100 ms More pronounced intersection of Q1 and F2 must be avoided if possible 50000 2000 I tn Prearcing time for fuses t d1 Delay time for S-release (Q1) t d2 Delay time for S-release (Q2) Minimum breaking current Ia min Fig. there should be a safety margin of approximately 100 ms on the base line I k between the characteristic curve of the S-release and the left-hand limit of the scatter band of the prearcing-time/current characteristic of the HV HRC fuse.6 kA selective t d2=220 ms Safety margin ≥100 ms t d1=100 ms td2 td1 I sd =6 kA Q2 Ia min Q2 F1 630 A F1 630 A F2 not selective 100 A (160 A) (choose Q1) 10 kV 100 A (optionally 160 A) 630 kVA Ukr 6% 3 WL1 1000 A t d2=220 ms 0. For such cases. the scatter band width of HV HRC fuse-links can be ± 20%. 3/42. with different switching priorities at the two voltage levels or in order to avoid the medium-voltage switchgear having to be switched off. when HV HRC fuses are replaced. Safety margin between HV HRC fuse and S-release If. tv min Base Ik <15 kA 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 s 10 6 4 2 1 600 400 200 ms 100 60 40 20 10 6 A at 0. e.

Q2 with mechanical S-releases (setting range 3 to 6 kA) ≤ 400 A for F1.System Protection / Safety Coordination Base IkT <15 kA (individual operation) 40 t s. circuitbreakers with time or. 0. td.V. current grading should be used.000 40 Safety margin ≥ 100 ms Q3 I> = 200 A L Q2 F1 400 A Q3 60/1 A 10 kV 630 A tI > ≈ 500 ms I> I>> 630 kVA U kr 6% Protection by means of circuitbreakers with definite-time overcurrent protection (DMT) Requirement The two feeder circuit-breakers (in Fig.000 I Opening time of circuit-breaker (Q1) Delay time of “S“ release (Q2) Prearcing time of fuses F1 Command time of DMT protection (Q3) Fig. Larger LV HRC fuses are also selective if SENTRON WL circuit-breakers with an S-release range of 2 to 12 · I r are used.000 2. this results in a delay time td of 220 ms for the smallest permissible safety margin of 100 ms.t o min 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 s 10 6 4 2 1 600 400 t d ≈ 220 ms 200 ms 100 60 40 20 10 6 A at 0. In the case of mechanical S-releases with the highest current setting of 6 kA. e.4 kV A at 10 kV to td tvs tc 1. the safety margin of at least 100 ms relative to the largest permissible LV HRC fuse-link for F1 is the crucial factor in determining the setting for the S-release of Q2. if possible. 1000 A with LS-releases (Q2) and downstream outgoing feeders. Outgoing feeders with mixed components If outgoing feeders with mixed components are used. 400 A LV HRC fuse (F1) and 630 A distribution circuit-breaker (Q1) in a 630 kVA transformer feeder 3/57 3 . L Q2 S S = 6 kA Q2 3 WL 1000 A t d = 220 ms H. selectivity with circuitbreakers with mechanical releases (3WF) can only be achieved up to a certain maximum fuse current rating. Outgoing feeders with LV HRC fuses If low-voltage fuses are connected downstream. This determines the starting point for all subsequent upward and downward gradings in the diagram.000 5.000 3.4 kV L F1 I 400 A Q1 630 A Ik <15 kA Setting range S tc > ≈ 500 ms Safety margin ≈ 300 ms Q2 I>> = 792 A Q3 tc ≈ 50 ms I 6 kA Q1 t o 2. Outgoing feeders with circuit-breaker Since selectivity cannot be achieved using LV HRC fuses with a higher current rating (see Fig. in the example.000 400 20. SENTRON WL circuit-breaker. 3/41). 3/43 Example showing the grading of circuit-breaker with DMT protection (Q3).000 800 50.g.000 80 120 200 10. 3/43) form a functional unit and require selectivity with respect to the protection devices on the lowvoltage side.

C Temperature monitoring systems for GEAFOL® resin-encapsulated transformers comprising – temperature sensors in the low-voltage winding and – signaling and tripping devices in the incoming-feeder switch panel.Based on the assumption that verification of the short-circuit currents would show that current grading would be possible. with the characteristic Q3 I> at 200 A positioned at the abscissa for 10 kV and with the broad setting ranges. etc.3 A 60/1 Timing element for I > excitation: ti> = 0. This also provides a certain degree of back-up protection with respect to the L-release of circuit-breaker Q2. contact thermometers. 3/43) between the I > tripping value of the DMT protection and the LV HRC fuse characteristic F1 and selectivity is. Here. If. Operating current I> approximately > I kT · 1.4 A on the high-voltage side of the 630 kVA transformer. therefore.5. achieved. the current sensors must be set as follows: Setting the current sensors I>.g. Fig. a 630 A (Q1) distribution circuit-breaker with LI-releases was selected. for example. 60/1 A current transformers are selected. it is important to bear in mind the higher investment costs for current transformers with lower rated primary currents. it allows the full output of the transformer to be utilized irrespective of the number of load cycles without the risk of damage to the transformer. 3/29). DMT protection Nowadays.2 = 728 A Operating current (in secondary circuit) = 728 A I p = ______ ≈ 12. temperature detectors. These signaling and protection devices do not have to be included in the grading diagrams (e.6 A ukr 6% Operating current = I kT · 1. I>> and timing elements Current sensor I >: The setting for a selected operating value of 200 A is as follows: 200 A I p = ______ = 3.1 A 60/1 3.20 (safety margin relative to I kT) IrT · 100% 36. which only occurs in the range 1–1. 3/58 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 3/43): Current transformers with a rating of 40 to 200 A could be selected for rated currents of 36. provide a greater and more consistent level of measuring accuracy and are self-monitoring.3 times the rated current of the transformer. The thermistor-type thermal protection protects the transformer against overheating resulting from increased ambient temperatures or overloading.2 Equipment for Protecting Distribution Transformers (against Internal Faults) The following signaling devices and protection equipment are used to detect internal transformer faults: C Devices for monitoring and protecting liquid-cooled transformers such as Buchholz protectors.4 A · 100% I kT = _______ = __________ = 606. Intersection of the characteristics Q2 and Q3 in the middle short-circuit range is permissible because: C the L-release of the low-voltage circuit-breaker Q1 (not shown in Fig. 3/43) protects the transformer against overloading. Furthermore. Selecting current transformers for DMT protection The following points should be observed when selecting current transformers for DMT protection (these considerations are applied in the example shown in Fig. digital devices are used to provide DMT protection in practically all applications. Higher rated transformer outputs and broader setting ranges for the S-release of Q2 make it easier for the characteristic Q3 I > to be shifted to the left of the characteristic Q2 s.5 s Current sensor I> >: The current sensor I> should only re> spond to faults on the high-voltage side (in the shortest possible time). C there is a safety margin of ≥ 150 ms (≈300 ms in the example shown in Fig. They have broader setting ranges. allow a choice between definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection or overload protection.

System Protection / Safety Coordination 3/59 3 .

4

Medium Voltage

4.1 Medium-Voltage and Circuit-Breaker Switchgear for Primary Power Distribution 4.2 Secondary Distribution Systems, Switchgear and Substations 4.3 Medium-Voltage Equipment, Product Range 4.4 PQM® – Power Quality Management and Load Flow Control 4.5 Planning of Systems for Primary and Secondary Power Distribution Exemplified by the Automotive Industry

Medium Voltage

chapter 4

4 Medium Voltage

Standards

Insulation

Busbar system

Compartments

Accidental arc qualification Operational availability Compartme ntalization class

Switching device 4)

Access option

Type-tested indoor switchgear acc. to IEC 62271-200 (IEC 60298)

Interlocking control circuit-breaker/cable compartment, or tool-dependent busbar/cable compartment

LSC 2B (three-compartment design + isolating distances to busbar and cable)

PM (metal-clad)

IAC (IEC 60298)

CB, SD,

CB, SD, contactor1) CB, SD, contactor 2) CB, SD, contactor 2)

Single

CB

Airinsulated

Interlocking control circuit-breaker/cable compartment, or tool-dependent busbar/cable compartment Interlocking control to the high-voltage compartment Double Interlocking control circuit-breaker/cable compartment, or tool-dependent busbar/cable compartment

LSC 2A (two-compartment design + isolating distances to busbar and cable)

PM (metal-clad)

IAC (IEC 60298)

CB, SD,

CB, SD, contactor 1) – IAC CB, SD,

LSC 1 (isolating distances to busbar and cable) LSC 2B (three-compartment design + isolating distances to busbar and cable)

PM (metal-clad)

IAC (IEC 60298)

CB

CB

Single

Busbar compartment: tool-based Circuit-breaker compartment: not accessible Cable compartment: tool-based

No restriction

PM (metal-clad)

IAC (IEC 60298)

CB, SD, contactor CB

CB

Gasinsulated Busbar compartment: tool-based Circuit-breaker compartment: not accessible Cable compartment: tool-based No restriction PM (metal-clad) IAC (IEC 60298) CB, SD, contactor CB

Double

CB

Table 4/1

Medium-voltage switchgear

4/2

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Medium Voltage

4.1 Medium-Voltage and Circuit-Breaker Switchgear for Primary Power Distribution

Every operator or user of medium-voltage primary distribution equipment, whether they be power supply or industrial companies or power stations, places special demands on the switchgear. These include, for example, high reliability, personal safety and low space requirements. In addition to appropriate voltage levels, air or gas insulation, a differentiation is made with respect to environmental in-

dependence, maintenance-free design, compactness, security of investment, cost-efficiency, serviceability and flexibility – to suit the demand. You definitely make the right decision with circuit-breaker switchgear from Siemens. The complete range of switchgear sets standards for the safe and cost-efficient solution to your special requirements.

Isolating distance

Switchgear type

Technical data

Maximum rated short-time withstand current [kA], 1/3 s 7 .2 kV Withdrawable unit/truck Withdrawable unit/truck Withdrawable unit/truck Truck NXAIR 25/3 12 kV 25/3 15 kV – 17 .5 kV – 24 kV – 36 kV – 40.5 kV –

Maximum rated normal current of busbar [A] 7 .2 12 15 17 .5 24 kV kV kV kV kV 2,500 2,500 – – –

36 kV –

40.5 kV –

Maximum rated normal current of feeder [A] 7 .2 12 15 17 .5 24 kV kV kV kV kV 2,500 2,500 – – –

36 kV –

40.5 kV –

NXAIR M

31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 25/3

25/3

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –

NXAIR P

50/3

50/3

50/3

4,000 4,000 4,000 –

4,000 4,000 4,000 –

SIMOPRIME

31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 –

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –

Truck

8BT2

31.5/3 –

2,250 –

2,000 –

Withdrawable unit/truck Truck

NXAIR M

25/3

25/3

2,500 2,500 –

2,500 2,500 –

8BT1

25/1

25/1

2,250 2,250 –

2,000 2,000 –

Truck

8BT3

16/1

1,250 –

1,250 –

Withdrawable unit/truck Withdrawable unit/truck

NXAIR M

31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 25/3

25/3

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –

NXAIR P

50/3

50/3

50/3

4,000 4,000 4,000 –

4,000 4,000 4,000 –

Disconnector, fixed-mounted Disconnector, fixed-mounted Disconnector, fixed-mounted Disconnector, fixed-mounted Disconnector, fixed-mounted Disconnector, fixed-mounted

NXPLUS C3)

31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 25/3

25/3

–/3

–/3

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –

NXPLUS

31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3

2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000

8DA

40/3

40/3

40/3

40/3

40/3

40/3

40/3

4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500

NXPLUS C3)

25/3

25/3

25/3

25/3

25/3

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –

1,250 1,250 1,250 1,250 1,250 –

NXPLUS

31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 –

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –

8DB

40/3
1) 2)

40/3

40/3

40/3
3) 4)

40/3

40/3

40/3

4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500

up to 7.2 kV up to 12 kV

The product ranges of single busbars and busbars can be combined with each other. CB = circuit-breaker, SD = switch-disconnector

4/3

4

4.1.1 Withdrawable CircuitBreaker Switchgear, Air-Insulated NXAIR Family
Switchgear from the NXAIR family just makes solutions simpler, because it brings security into all significant decisions for future planning. Security of investment through innovative technology The novel modular design of switchgear panels allows rapid reavailability because the individual compartments (connection, module and low-voltage compartment) can be replaced after a fault inside the switchgear panel. The bushing-type current transformer principle, together with the pressure-resistant partitions, allows the selective disconnection of an internal fault up to 31.5 kA by means of the associated circuit-breaker. A mimic diagram with self-explanatory operating symbols for optimum operator prompting is integrated into the equipment front as a standard feature. The numerical bay controller family integrates protection, control, communication, operating and monitoring functions into one device.

Cost-efficiency of the switchgear Decades of experience in the manufacture of air-insulated medium-voltage switchgear as well as type and routine testing in accordance with IEC 62271-200 ensure reliability. Internal arc tests and self-explanatory operating symbols ensure personal safety and operational reliability. Rapid re-availability is achieved by the modular design and selectivity. Flexibility shows itself in the choice between truck-type or withdrawable

switchgear, or in the fact that any customary cable sealing ends can be used. Service friendliness Switchgear maintenance intervals of more than 10 years, minimized training expenses due to the self-explanatory operating symbols, and modern documentation guarantee service friendliness over the entire life of the product.

Photo 4/1

NXAIR

4/4

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Medium Voltage
Rated
voltage frequency short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage lightning surge withstand voltage short-circuit breaking current kV Hz kV kV max. kA max. kA max. kA max. kA max. A 7.2 50 20 60 25 25 63 63 2,500 12 50 28 ** 75 25 25 63 63 2,500

NXAIR features The air-insulated, metal-clad NXAIR switchgear is the innovation on the distribution level up to 12 kV, 25 kA, 2,500 A. C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad (LSC 2B) C Uniform panel structure for all versions C Cable connection from the front or rear C Available as truck-type or withdrawable switchgear C Bushing-type current transformers permit selective shutdown of feeders C Panels resistant to internal arc faults C Exchange of the module and connection compartment possible C Switchgear modules with integrated interlocking and control board

short-time withstand current, 3s short-circuit making current peak withstand current normal current of busbar normal current of feeders: with circuit-breaker with switch-disconnector

max. A max. A

2,500 800 *

2,500 800 *

* Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used ** Higher value on request

Table 4/2

NXAIR rating

W

H1

H2

D

All panel types Width W for all panels (compartment) Height H1 Standard, H2 – with a high low-voltage cubicle – with open-circuit ventilation – with busbar fittings Depth D for all panels

Dimensions in mm 800

2,000 2,350

1,350

Photo 4/2

NXAIR switchgear panel

Table 4/3

NXAIR dimensions

4/5

4

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 18 19 20 21
1234

B
14 15 16 17

E

A
22 23 24

D
25 26

11 12

C

28 29

1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 2 Protection equipment 3 Option: capacitive voltage detection system for feeder and busbar 4 High-voltage door to module compartment 5 Door knob for opening high-voltage door 7 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening for withdrawable part 8 “Closing spring charged“ indicator and operating cycle counter 9 Mechanical switch position indication for switching device 10 “ON/OFF“ pushbuttons for switching device 11 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening for make-proof grounding switch 12 Mimic diagram

14 Pressure relief duct 15 Busbars 16 Bushing-type insulator 17 Bushing-type current transformer 18 Make-proof grounding switch 19 Cable connection for 4 cables per phase 20 Cable sealing ends 21 Cable support rail 22 Low voltage plug connector 23 Withdrawable part 24 Combined operating and interlocking unit for circuit-breaker, withdrawable part and grounding switch 25 Vacuum interrupters 26 Contact system 28 Grounding busbar 29 Option: truck

A Module compartment B Busbar compartment C Connection compartment D Vacuum vacuum circuit-breaker module E Low-voltage cubicle

Fig. 4/1

NXAIR circuit-breaker panel 12 kV / 1,250 A, basic panel design (example)

4/6

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Medium Voltage
Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Switch-disconnector panel Spur panel

and/or

and/or

and/or

and/or

and/or

and/or

and/or

and/or

or

and/or

or

and/or

or

and/or

and/or

or

and/or

or

and/or

or

and/or

or

or

or

or

or

and/or

and/or

or

and/or

or

and/or

and/or

and/or

Bus sectionalizer (mirror-image version also possible)

Metering panel

Circuitbreaker panel

Riser panel

and/or

and/or

or

or

or

and/or

or

or

or

and/or

and/or

Fig. 4/2

NXAIR product range

4/7

4

Rated voltage frequency short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage lightning surge withstand voltage short-circuit breaking current kV Hz 7.2 12 15 17.5 24

50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60

kV kV max. kA max. kA max. kA max. kA max. A max. A max. A max. A

20 60 31.5 31.5 80 80

28 75 31.5 31.5 80 80

35 95 31.5 31.5 80 80

38 95 25 25 63 63

50 125 25 25 63 63

NXAIR M features The air-insulated, cubicle-type or metal-clad switchgear NXAIR M is the consequent further development of the NXAIR family for use on the distribution and process level up to 15 kV, 31.5 kA, 2,500 A or 24 kA, 25 kA, 2,500 A. C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad or cubicle-type (LSC 2A, LSC 2B) C Circuit-breaker, contactor and switchdisconnector panels can be lined up C Cable connection from the front or rear C Available as truck-type or withdrawable switchgear C Bushing-type current transformers permit selective shutdown of feeders C Panels resistant to internal arc faults C Exchange of the module and connection compartment possible C Switchgear modules with integrated interlocking and control board

short-time withstand current, 3s short-circuit making current1) peak withstand current1)

normal current of busbar normal current of feeders: with circuit-breaker with switch-disconnector with vacuum contactor
1)

2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 800* 800* 800* 800* 800* 400* – – – –

* Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used Values for 50 Hz
NXAIR M rating

Table 4/4

W

H1

H2 H3

D

All panel types Width W Standard (compartment) with 24 kV / 2,500 A with vacuum contactor panel Height H1 H2 with standard low-voltage cubicle – with attached air guides (standard) – with a high low-voltage cubicle – with open-circuit ventilation with busbar fittings Single busbar cubicle-type2) metal-clad

Dimensions in mm 800 1,000 400 2,200 2,550

H3 Depth D

2,770 1,454 1,554 1,650 cubicle-type2) metal-clad 2,958 3,158

Vacuum contactor panel Double busbar with back-to-back installation
2)

For 24 kV only
NXAIR M dimensions

Photo 4/3

NXAIR M switchgear panel

Table 4/5

4/8

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

withdrawable part and grounding switch 25 Vacuum switching tubes 26 Contact system 27 Lower partition 28 Grounding busbar 29 Option: truck 30 Air guide A Module compartment B Busbar compartment C Connection compartment D Vacuum circuit-breaker module E Low-voltage cubicle 30 B 15 E A 22 23 16 24 D 17 18 25 26 C 19 20 28 21 29 Cubicle-type version (feature: common module and connection compartment) Fig. basic panel design (example) 4/9 4 .Medium Voltage 30 30 B 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 1234 14 15 E A 22 23 16 24 D 17 18 25 26 11 12 19 20 21 C 27 28 29 Circuit-breaker panel Metal-clad version 1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 2 Protection equipment 3 Option: capacitive voltage detection system for feeder and busbar 4 High-voltage door to module compartment 5 Door knob for opening high-voltage door 7 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening for withdrawable part 8 “Closing spring charged“ indicator and operating cycle counter 9 Mechanical switch position indication for switching device 10 “ON/OFF“ pushbuttons for switching device 11 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening for make-proof grounding switch 12 Mimic diagram 14 Pressure relief duct 15 Busbars 16 Bushing-type insulator 17 Bushing-type current transformer 18 Make-proof grounding switch 19 Cable connection for 4 cables per phase 20 Cable sealing ends 21 Cable support rail 22 Low voltage plug connector 23 Withdrawable part 24 Combined operating and interlocking unit for circuitbreaker. 4/3 NXAIR M.

or or or and/or and/or and/or and/or Vacuum contactor panel (7. optionally with current transformers Note Double-busbar switchgear with busbar disconnector attachment on request.2 kV) Bus sectionalizer (mirror-image version also possible) Metering panel and/or or and/or and/or and/or and/or or or or and/or and/or or and/or and/or or or or and/or and/or Fig. 4/4 NXAIR M product range 4/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . consisting of – circuit-breaker panel with current and voltage transformers – disconnecting panel. consisting of – circuit-breaker panel – disconnecting panel and/or and/or and/or or and/or or and/or or and/or or and/or or and/or or and/or or and/or and/or Back-to-back installation • Panels from the product range of the single-busbar systems (circuit-breaker panel.Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Switch-disconnector panel Panels for double-busbar applications Double-busbar switchgear is made up of the product range of the single-busbar panels. which are available as: • vis-à-vis installation • back-to-back installation Vis-à-vis installation • Panels from the product range of the single-busbar systems (circuit-breaker panel. bus sectionalizer and metering panel) • Connection of the two systems with bars within the panels • Bus coupling. bus sectionalizer and metering panel) • Connection of the two systems with cables or bars below the panels • Bus coupling.

metal-clad switchgear NXAIR P is based on the design principles of the NXAIR family for use on the distribution and process level up to 15 kV.Medium Voltage Rated voltage frequency short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage lightning surge withstand voltage short-circuit breaking current kV Hz kV kV max. A max.000 A (with panel ventilation) Height H1 with standard low-voltage cubicle H2 with attached pressure relief duct H3 with forced ventilation (4.000 800* 800* 800* 400* 400* – * Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used Values for 50 Hz NXAIR P rating Table 4/6 H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 D All panel types (except for vacuum contactor panel) Width ≤ 2.000 2.635 3.550 1. kA max.000 4. A 7. A max.000 4.710 1.000 4.5 kA C Panels resistant to internal arc faults up to 31. A max. C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad (LSC 2B) C Circuit-breaker. kA max. 50 kA.2 12 15 50/60 50/60 50/60 20 60 50 50 125 125 28 75 50 50 125 125 35 95 50 50 125 125 NXAIR P features The air-insulated.000 A) Depth D Single busbar Double busbar with back-to-back installation Vacuum contactor panel Width W1 Standard (compartment) Height H1 with standard low-voltage cubicle H2 with attached pressure relief duct Depth Photo 4/4 NXAIR P switchgear panel Table 4/7 400 2.225 2.550 2.000 A. contactor and switch-disconnector panels can be lined up C Cable connection from the front or rear C Available as truck-type or withdrawable switchgear C Bushing-type current transformers permit selective shutdown of feeders up to 31. 4.5 kA C Exchange of the module and connection compartment possible C Switchgear modules with integrated interlocking and control board short-time withstand current.650 D Single busbar NXAIR P dimensions 4/11 4 . 3s short-circuit making current1) peak withstand current1) normal current of busbar normal current of feeders: with circuit-breaker with switch-disconnector with vacuum contactor 1) 4.000 4.320 (compartment) > 2.000 A (standard) Dimensions in mm 800 1.225 2.000 4. kA max. kA max.

000 A with forced ventilation 1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 2 Protection equipment 3 Option: capacitive voltage detection system for feeder and busbar 4 High-voltage door to module compartment 5 Mechanical lifting device for opening high-voltage door 6 Locking device for high-voltage door 8 “Closing spring charged” indicator.1 2 3 4 5 6 14 E A 15 16 23 17 B 26 25 8 D 9 10 11 12 13 18 24 22 19 31 20 C 21 28 29 Circuit-breaker panel Panel 3. basic panel design (example) 4/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .150 A with open-circuit ventilation 32 32 Panel 4. 4/5 NXAIR P. switch position indication for switching device and operating cycle counter 9 “ON/OFF” pushbuttons for switching devices 10 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening for withdrawable part 11 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening for make-proof grounding switch 12 Mimic diagram 13 Ventilation duct 14 Pressure relief duct 15 Busbars 16 Bushing-type insulator 17 Bushing-type current transformer 18 Make-proof grounding switch 19 Cable connection for 6 cables per phase 20 Cable sealing ends 21 Cable support rail 22 Low voltage connector 23 Withdrawable part A Module compartment B Busbar compartment C Connection compartment D Vacuum circuit-breaker module E Low-voltage cubicle 24 Drive unit 25 Vacuum switching tubes 26 Contact system 28 Grounding busbar 29 Option: truck 31 Interlocking unit for circuit-breaker and grounding switch 32 Fan unit with fan Fig.

4/6 NXAIR P product range 4/13 4 .2 kV. 12 kV) Bus sectionalizer (mirror-image version also possible) Metering panel and/or or and/or and/or and/or or or and/or and/or Fig. bus sectionalizer and metering panel) • Connection of the two systems with bars within the panels • Bus coupling. which are available as: • vis-à-vis installation • back-to-back installation Vis-à-vis installation • Panels from the product range of the single-busbar systems (circuit-breaker panel. consisting of – circuit-breaker panel – disconnecting panel Back-to-back installation • Panels from the product range of the single-busbar systems (circuit-breaker panel.Medium Voltage Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Switch-disconnector panel Panels for double-busbar applications Double-busbar switchgear is made up of the product range of the single-busbar panels. bus sectionalizer and metering panel) • Connection of the two systems with cables or bars below the panels • Bus coupling. consisting of – circuit-breaker panel with current and voltage transformers and/or or and/or or and/or or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or or or and/or and/or Vacuum contactor panel (7.

SIMOPRIME features The air-insulated.200 1. kA max. metal-clad switchgear SIMOPRIME is a factoryassembled.500 2.5 31. C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad (LSC 2B) C Circuit-breaker.5 31.500 2.250 A / vacuum contactor 600 with 2.500 A circuit-breaker. contactor and switch-disconnector panels can be lined up C Cable connection from the front or rear C Truck-type version C Use of block-type or ring-type current transformers C Panels resistant to internal arc faults C All switching operations with closed door C Logic interlocks Rated voltage frequency short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage lightning surge withstand voltage short-circuit breaking current short-time withstand current.860 (compartment) W Height H1 with standard low-voltage cubicle H2 with a high low-voltage cubicle Depth Photo 4/5 SIMOPRIME switchgear panel Table 4/9 D Standard SIMOPRIME dimensions 4/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . A 7. A max.5 80/82 80/82 2. kA max.5 kV. kA max.500 A.5 31. kA max. 3s short-circuit making current peak withstand current normal current of busbar normal current of feeders: with circuit-breaker with switch-disconnector with vacuum contactor kV Hz kV kV max.500 2.5 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 20 60 31. 2.500 630* 630* 630* 630* 400* 400* – – * Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used Table 4/8 SIMOPRIME rating H1 W H2 D All panel types Width W Dimensions in mm with circuit-breaker ≤ 1. A max.5 80 80 35 95 31. disconnector truck or switch-disconnector 800 2. type-tested indoor switchgear for use on the distribution and process level up to 17.500 2. A max.5 kA.2 12 15 17.5 80 80 38 95 31.500 2. 31.500 2.5 31.780 1.500 2.5 80 80 28 75 31.

Medium Voltage 1 2 13 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 18 11 19 12 20 21 Circuit-breaker panel.250 A 17 15 16 23 22 14 E B A 24 D C 1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 2 Opening for locking/unlocking the low-voltage cubicle door 3 Option: capacitive voltage detection system for feeder and busbar 4 High-voltage door to switchgear compartment 5 Inspection window for identifying the switch truck 6 Opening for locking or unlocking the high-voltage door 7 Actuating opening for the mechanical charging of the closing spring of the circuit-breaker 8 Openings for manual circuit-breaker operation (CLOSED/OPEN) 9 Inspection window for reading off the indicators 10 Door knob 11 Openings for switch truck operation 12 Opening for grounding switch operation 13 Pressure relief duct 14 Busbars 15 Bushings 16 Insulators 17 Option: ring-type or block-type current transformer 18 Option: make-proof grounding switch 19 Cable sealing ends 20 Option: current transformer 21 Grounding busbar 22 Low-voltage plug connector 23 Vacuum switching tubes 24 Switch truck A Switchgear compartment B Busbar compartment C Connection compartment D Vacuum circuit-breaker truck E Low-voltage cubicle Fig. 1. 4/7 SIMOPRIME. 12 kV. basic panel design (example) 4/15 4 .

4/8 SIMOPRIME product range 4/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Switch-disconnector panel Vacuum contactor panel and/or or and/or or and/or and/or or or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or Bus sectionalizer (mirror-image version also possible) Metering panel or and/or Fig.

250 2. kA max. for use on the distribution and process level up to 12 kV. kA max. kA max.500 A circuit-breaker. disconnector truck 800 2. cubicle-type switchgear 8BT1 is a factory-assembled. disconnector truck. A max.Medium Voltage 8BT1 features The air-insulated. A max.250 A. C Metal-enclosed and cubicle-type (LSC 2A) C Circuit-breaker and contactor panels can be lined up C Cable connection from the front C Truck-type version C Use of block-type current transformers C Enclosure tested for resistance to accidental arcing C All switching operations with closed door C Logic interlocks Rated voltage frequency short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage lightning surge withstand voltage short-circuit breaking current short-time withstand current. 25 kA. contactor 600 W 1.000 400* * Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used Table 4/10 8BT1 rating W Photo 4/6 8BT1 switchgear H D All panel types Width Dimensions in mm W ≤ 1.000 A circuit-breaker. type-tested indoor switchgear for the lower performance range. 2. 3s short-circuit making current peak withstand current normal current of busbar normal current of feeders: with circuit-breaker or disconnector truck with contactor kV Hz kV kV max. 2. A 8BT1 12 50 28 75 25 25 63 63 2. kA max.250 A.050 1.200 Height Depth Table 4/11 H T 8BT1 dimensions 4/17 4 .

1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 2 Protection equipment 3 Option: capacitive voltage detection system for feeder and busbar 5 Door of high-voltage compartment 6 Inspection window for disconnector position 7 Knob for high-voltage door 8 “ON/OFF“ pushbuttons for switching device 9 Mechanical switch position indication for switching device 10 Mechanical switch position indication “Spring charged“ and operating cycle counter 11 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening of the feeder grounding switch 12 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening for establishing an isolating distance 13 Mimic diagram 14 Busbars 16 Block-type current transformer 17 Cable connection for 4 cables max. basic panel design (example) 4/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 4/9 8BT1. per phase 18 Make-proof grounding switch 19 Cable sealing ends 20 Cable bracket 21 Low-voltage plug connector 22 Vacuum tube 23 Contact system top/bottom 24 Switch truck 25 Voltage transformer A Busbar compartment B Connection compartment C Switchgear compartment E Low-voltage cubicle 14 8BT1 switchgear 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 E A 21 22 23 C 16 17 B 18 19 20 24 25 Feeder panel Fig.

2 kW) and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or or and/or or and/or or and/or and/or and/or or and/or or and/or and/or and/or or and/or or and/or and/or and/or Metering panel Bus sectionalizer Busbar termination panel and/or Switch truck panel Riser panel or and/or and/or or and/or and/or Fig.Medium Voltage Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Spur panel Vacuum contactor panel (7. 4/10 8BT1 product range 4/19 4 .

550 2. type-tested indoor switchgear for the lower performance range.250 2. A max.450 W H D 8BT2 dimensions 4/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 3s short-circuit making current peak withstand current normal current of busbar normal current of feeders: with circuit-breaker with contactor with switch-disconnector Table 4/12 8BT2 rating 8BT2 kV Hz kV kV max. kA max. A 36 50/60 70 170 31. metal-clad switchgear 8BT2 is a factory-assembled. for use on the distribution and process level up to 36 kV. kA max.400 2. C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad (LSC 2B) C Cable connection from the front C Truck-type version C Use of block-type current transformers C Enclosure tested for resistance to accidental arcing C All switching operations with closed door C Logic interlock Rated voltage frequency short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage lightning surge withstand voltage short-circuit breaking current short-time withstand current.8BT2 features The air-insulated. kA max.5 31. 2250 A. 31.000 – – W H D Photo 4/7 8BT2 switchgear All panel types Width Height Depth Table 4/13 Dimensions in mm 1. kA max.5 kA. A max.5 80/82 80/82 2. A max.

Medium Voltage 1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 2 Protection equipment 3 Option: capacitive voltage detection system for feeder and busbar 4 Mimic diagram 5 Door of high-voltage compartment 6 Inspection window for disconnector position 7 Knob for high-voltage door 8 “ON/OFF“ pushbuttons for switching device 9 Mechanical switch position indication for switching device. “Spring charged“ and operating cycle counter 11 Actuating opening of the feeder grounding switch 12 Actuating opening for establishing an isolating distance 14 Busbars 15 Bushing to busbar or feeder 16 Block-type current transformer 17 Cable connection for 4 cables max. 4/11 8BT2. basic panel design (example) 25 4/21 4 . per phase 18 Make-proof grounding switch 19 Cable sealing ends 20 Cable bracket 21 Low-voltage plug connector 22 Vacuum tube 23 Contact system top/bottom 24 Switch truck 25 Voltage transformer 26 Grounding bus A Busbar compartment B Connection compartment C Switchgear compartment E Low-voltage cubicle 15 22 23 21 14 8BT2 switchgear 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 1 2 C E A B 16 17 24 18 19 26 20 Fig.

Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Spur panel and/or and and/or and and/or and/or or and/or or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or Metering panel Bus sectionalizer Busbar termination panel and/or Switch truck panel Riser panel or and/or and/or or and/or and/or Fig. 4/12 8BT2 product range 4/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

Medium Voltage 8BT3 features The air-insulated. A max. 3s short-circuit making current peak withstand current normal current of busbar normal current of feeders: with circuit-breaker with contactor with switch-disconnector kV Hz kV kV max. fixedmounted switch-disconnector can be lined up C Cable connection from the front C Truck-type version C Use of block-type current transformers C Enclosure tested for resistance to accidental arcing C All switching operations with closed door C Logic interlock Rated voltage frequency short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage lightning surge withstand voltage short-circuit breaking current short-time withstand current. for use on the distribution and process level up to 36 kV. A max. 1. C Metal-enclosed and cubicle-type (LSC 1) C Circuit-breaker panel. kA max.250 – 400* * Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used Table 4/14 8BT3 rating W Photo 4/8 8BT3 switchgear H D All panel types Width Height Depth Table 4/15 Dimensions in mm 1.250 A.000 2. 16 kA.450 W H D 8BT3 dimensions 4/23 4 . A max. A 8BT2 36 50/60 70 170 16 16 40/42 40/42 1. kA max. cubicle-type switchgear 8BT3 is a factory-assembled. type-tested indoor switchgear for the lower performance range.250 1. kA max.400 1. kA max.

4/13 8BT3. per phase 18 Make-proof grounding switch 19 Cable sealing ends 20 Cable bracket 21 Low-voltage plug connector 22 Vacuum tube 23 Contact system top/bottom 24 Switch truck 25 Voltage transformer D High-voltage cubicle E Low-voltage cubicle 14 8BT3switchgear 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 1 2 E D 21 22 23 16 17 18 19 20 24 25 Fig.1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 2 Protection equipment 3 Option: capacitive voltage detection system for feeder and busbar 5 Door of high-voltage compartment 6 Inspection window for disconnector position 7 Knob for high-voltage door 8 “ON/OFF“ pushbuttons for switching device 9 Mechanical switch position indication “Spring charged“ and operating cycle counter 10 Mechanical switch position indication “Spring charged“ and operating cycle counter 11 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening of the feeder grounding switch 12 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening for establishing an isolating distance 13 Mimic diagram 14 Busbars 16 Block-type current transformer 17 Cable connection for 2 cables max. basic panel design (example) 4/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

4/14 8BT2.Medium Voltage Circuit-breaker panel Disconnector truck panel Switch-disconnector panel and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or Metering panel Busbar termination panel or or and/or and/or Fig. 8BT3 product range 4/25 4 .

plug-in system C Operating mechanisms and transformers easily accessible outside the SF6 enclosure C Reduced number of functional elements due to three-position disconnector used for isolating and earthing the outgoing feeder C Dielectrically unstressed ring-type current transformers C Make-proof grounding with vacuum circuit-breaker C Measurements on the busbar possible without the need for additional panels C Aseismic version optionally available Photo 4/9 NXPLUS C Insulation technology C Switchgear container filled with SF6 gas C Characteristics of the SF6 gas: – nontoxic – odorless and uncolored – non-flammable – chemically neutral – heavier than air – electronegative (high-quality insulator) C Pressure of the SF6 gas in the switchgear container: – Rated filling pressure: 150 kPa 4/26 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . This is achieved by the gas-tight enclosure of the high-voltage part.2 Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear. Whether extreme climatic conditions or most adverse conditions in conurbations or industrial centers are concerned. At the same time. our NXPLUS switchgear masters every environmental challenge. Unique pressure system This is the only switchgear worldwide with hermetically sealed pressure systems. no work on the gas system is required on site. Features: C Hermetically sealed pressure system with SF6 filling for the complete service life C Type-tested switchgear – gets by completely without any work on the gas system during installation and extensions C Safe-to-touch enclosure and standard connections for cable plugs of the outside-cone type C Three-pole SF6-insulated module for the three-position disconnector and the circuit-breaker with panel connection C Single-pole-insulated and screened busbars.1. Cost-efficiency Whether you decide for an NXPLUS or an NXPLUS C – you opt for the most compact dimensions. by using SF6 as insulating medium and by maintenance-free operating mechanisms. for the highest voltages and switching capacities and thus certainly for a cost-efficient solution. NXPLUS C It is the first medium-voltage circuitbreaker switchgear to make SF6 insulation and vacuum technology costefficient in its class – the compact NXPLUS C for voltages up to 24 kV. SF6-Insulated NXPLUS Family Switchgear of the NXPLUS family provides the plus in performance and is fit for any terrain. This makes it independent of external influences.4. nor throughout the lifetime of the system. Maintenance-free design Switchgear of the NXPLUS family requires no maintenance for life.

screened. hermetically welded. plug-in type C No maintenance required C Degree of protection – IP65 for all high-voltage sections of the primary conducting path – IP3XD for the switchgear enclosure C Vacuum circuit-breaker and vacuum contactor C Three-position disconnector for isolating/grounding via the circuit-breaker C Three-position switch-disconnector C Make-proof grounding with the help of the vacuum circuit-breaker C Cable connection with outside cone plug-in system acc. plug-in type. single-pole. external surface grounded 17 Option: busbar current transformer 18 Switchgear container. 4/15 NXPLUS C circuit-breaker panel. hermetically tight welded. fully insulated. SF6-insulated 4/27 4 . pluggable ring circuits C Lateral.Medium Voltage Circuit-breaker panel (basic design) 1 15 2 16 17 1 – Design pressure: 180 kPa – Design temperature of the SF6 gas: 80 °C – Operating pressure of the bursting disc: ≥ 300 kPa – Bursting pressure: ≥ 400 kPa Panel configuration C Factory-assembled. metal cable ducts for control lines 18 Z 19 20 3 4 5 6 7 24 25 26 27 34 28 29 33 32 21 22 23 31 30 Front view Detail Z 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Cable connection from the front 14 Actuating opening for “READY TO GROUND” function of three-position disconnector 15 Option: busbar current transformer. front and end walls varnished with the color „light basic“ C Low-voltage cubicle can be disassembled. filled with SF6 gas 19 Three-position disconnector 20 OFF pushbutton for circuit-breaker 21 Vacuum interrupter of circuit-breaker 22 Pressure disc (bursting disc) 23 Capacitive voltage detection system 24 Locking device for “Feeder grounded“ (suitable for locking with padlock) 25 Disconnecting device for feeder voltage transformer 26 Bushing feeder voltage transformer 27 Option: feeder voltage transformer 28 Option: pressure relief duct 29 Cable connection compartment 30 Operating mechanism for three-position disconnector 31 Circuit-breaker operating mechanism 32 Feeder current transformer 33 Cable connection with outside cone T-plug 34 Actuation for the disconnecting device of the feeder voltage transformer 1 Low-voltage cubicle 2 SIPROTEC 4 multifunction protection (example) 3 Switch position indicator of circuit-breaker 4 Actuating opening for the charging of the circuit-breaker springs 5 ON pushbutton for circuit-breaker 6 “Spring charged“ indicator 7 Counter for circuit-breaker 8 Switch position indicator for “ISOLATING“ function of three-position disconnector 9 Ready-for-service indicator 10 Switch position indicator for “READY TO GROUND” function of three-position disconnector 11 Preselection slide and locking device for “ISOLATING/GROUNDING” function of three-position disconnector 12 Interrogation lever 13 Actuating opening for “ISOLATING“ function of three-position disconnector Fig. to DIN EN 50181 C For wall-mounting and stand-alone installation C Installation and possible later expansions of existing panels without any gas works C Exchange of the switchgear container without any gas works C Transformer can be removed without any gas works since it is arranged outside the gas compartment C Sheet-steel enclosure with sendzimir coating. plug-in type 16 Busbar. type-tested C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad C Switchgear container made of stainless steel. without any sealings C Single-pole busbars with solid insulation.

100 A) * 42 / 95 kV possible acc.500 2.500 max.2 50/60 20 60 12 50/60 28* 75 * 15 50/60 36 95 17.500 25 25 63 63 2.41). to a number of international specifications Table 4/16 Electrical data Width Height Depth Single busbar Double busbar Weight (approx.5 80 80 2.500 31.500 2.5 50/60 38 95 24 50/60 50 125 Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV Rated short-circuit breaking current Rated short-time withstand current.370 kg kg 900.500 25 25 63 63 2. please refer to the NXPLUS catalog (HA 53.500 2.5 80 80 2.225 2.250 mm mm 1.5 80 80 2. A 31.5 31.100. kA kA kA kA max.) incl. 2 panels Table 4/17 Dimensions and weights mm mm 600.1. 1 panel double busbar. A 2.SF6-insulated circuit-breaker switchgear NXPLUS C Rated voltage Rated frequency kV Hz 7. 1. packing: single busbar.200 2.5 31. 3 s Rated short-circuit making current Rated peak withstand current Rated normal current of busbar Rated normal current of feeders Rated normal current of switch-disconnector panels with fuses max.500 1.500 31. 1.800 For further technical data. 4/28 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .5 31.000 Depending on rated current of fuse (max.000 2.

Medium Voltage Single busbar panels Circuit-breaker panel Disconnector panel Switch-disconnector panel with fuses Metering panel Double busbar panels Bus sectionalizer Circuit-breaker panel Bus coupling Incoming-feeder coupling BB1 BB2 BB1 BB2 BB1 BB2 Panel variants of single and double busbars can be combined. 4/16 NXPLUS C panel versions 4/29 4 . For further variants.41) BB1 = busbar 1 BB2 = busbar 2 Fig. please refer to the NXPLUS C catalog (HA 35.

Features: C Hermetically sealed pressure system with SF6 filling for the complete service life C Type-tested switchgear – gets by completely without any work on the gas system during installation and extensions C Easy module replacement thanks to self-supporting. mechanically C Operating mechanisms and transformers easily accessible outside the SF6 enclosure C Reduced number of functional elements due to three-position switch used for isolating and grounding the outgoing feeder C Dielectrically unstressed ring-type current transformers C Make-proof grounding with vacuum circuit-breaker C Measurements on the busbar possible without the need for additional panels Photo 4/10 NXPLUS 4/30 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .5 kV with the benefits of vacuum technology – for a high degree of independence in operation. as an option. interlocked electrically and. individual modules which are bolted together C Safe-to-touch enclosure and standard connections for cable plugs of the outside-cone or inside-cone type C Three-pole SF6-insulated modules for the busbar with the three-position switch and for the circuitbreaker with the panel connection C Single-pole-insulated and screened couplings for interconnecting the modules C Motor operating switching devices.NXPLUS NXPLUS is the gas-insulated switchgear for up to 40.

standard: 935 mm high Option: 1. welded. SF6 -insulated 9 Rupture diaphragm 10 Three-pole busbar system 2 2 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 4 3 14 4 9 5 6 15 16 24 22 23 17 18 19 20 21 5 11 Three-position disconnector. 4/17 NXPLUS circuit-breaker panel with single busbar 4/31 4 . welded.Medium Voltage 1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 2 Multifunction protection SIPROTEC 4 7SJ61/ 7SJ62 for control and 1 protection 3 Mimic diagram 4 EMERGENCY-OFF pushbutton.100 mm high 18 Ring-core current transformer 19 Manual and motor operating mechanism of three-position switch 20 Mechanical control board 21 Manual and motor operating mechanism of circuit-breaker 22 Voltage transformer connection socket as inside cone 23 Cable connection compartment 24 Voltage transformer 25 Isolating device for feeder voltage transformer 26 Voltage transformer connection socket as outside cone 27 Cable connection as outside cone Panel with integrated inside cone 9 13 25 26 27 24 23 18 Panel with outside cone Fig. SF6 insulated. SF6 -insulated. with the three positions: 6 CLOSED – OPEN – READY-TOGROUND 12 Module coupling between busbar module and circuit-breaker module 13 Circuit-breaker module. mechanical 5 Door to mechanical control board 6 Cover of cable connection compartment 7 Busbar cover and space for pluggable busbar current transformers 8 Busbar module. with integrated cable connection 14 Vacuum switching tube of circuit-breaker 15 Pressure relief duct 16 Integrated cable connection as inside cone 17 Low-voltage cubicle.

000 2. packing (approx.000 2.000 A (> 2. kA max.SF6-insulated circuit-breaker switchgear NXPLUS Rated voltage Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage Rated short-circuit breaking current Rated short-circuit breaking current Rated short-time withstand current. kA max.600 1. 3 s Rated short-circuit making current Rated peak withstand current Rated normal current of busbar Rated normal current of feeders 1) bis kV Hz 24 50/60 40.500 A possible Electrical data Table 4/18 Single Double busbar busbar Width Width of bus sectionalizer panel ≤ 2.5 31. kA max.840 1. A max. kA max.200 300 2.450 1.000 1) 1) with double busbar 2.5 80 80 2.000 1) 1) 85 185 31.5 31.5 80 80 2.000 A) mm mm 600 900 (1.600 Bus coupler Metering panel Height Depth Weight per panel incl.200) – – 2.) Table 4/19 Dimensions and weights mm mm mm mm kg 4/32 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .5 50/60 kV kV max.200 600 600 (900) 600/1. A 50 125 31.600 1.

to the LRM or IVDS system 2) Not possible with busbar voltage transformer 3) Requires cable connection with container for separate inside cone 4) With single busbar only Fig.5 kA – rated normal currents of busbars and feeders up to 2.Medium Voltage Busbar fittings Fittings upstream of circuit-breaker module Fittings downstream of circuit-breaker module 3) 1) Panel connection fittings Capacitive voltage detection system 1 x plug-in cable. interface type 2 or 3 or Surge arrester. 4/18 NXPLUS panel versions with cable connection as inside cone Single busbar / double busbar circuit-breaker panel With cable connection as inside cone for – rated voltage up to 36 kV/40. interface type 2 4) or 2 x plug-in cable. plug-in type 4) or 4 x plug-in cable.000 A 4/33 4 . plug-in type Current transformer or 1 x plug-in cable. plug-in type 4) or 3 x plug-in cable. interface type 2 and 2) Busbar current transformer or Solidinsulated bar Surge arrester. interface type 2 or 3 or Voltage transformer. plug-in type 1) Capacitive voltage detection system acc.5 kV (single busbar only) – rated short-circuit breaking current up to 31. interface type 2 or 3 Voltage transformer.

000 A and feeders up to 1.Busbar fittings Fittings upstream of circuit-breaker module Fittings downstream of circuit-breaker module 1) Panel connection fittings Capacitive voltage detection system 1 x plug-in cable Voltage transformer. to the LRM or IVDS additionally system 2) Not possible with busbar voltage transformer 3) With single busbar only Fig. plug-in type 3) and 2) Busbar current transformer Surge arrester 1) Capacitive voltage detection or limiter. to be plugged in system acc. disconnectable Current transformer or 1 x plug-in cable.5 kA) – rated normal currents of busbars up to 2. interface type 2 3) or 2 x plug-in cable or Voltage transformer.250 A 4/34 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . plug-in type 3) or 3 x plug-in cable or Surge arrester. 4/19 NXPLUS panel versions with cable connection as outside cone Single busbar and double busbar circuitbreaker panel With cable connection as outside cone for – rated voltage up to 24 kV – rated short-circuit breaking current up to 25 kA (for 12 kV: 31.

4/20 NXPLUS bus sectionalizer 4/35 4 .Medium Voltage Bus sectionalizer for – rated – rated up to – rated up to voltage up to 36 kV/40.5 kA normal current of busbars 2.000 A Busbar fittings Fittings upstream of circuit-breaker module Capacitive voltage detection system Current transformer Fig.5 kV short-circuit breaking current 31.

simple adaptations to new system states and thus.and double-pole versions (example 8DA11) 8DB10 panel for double busbar applications Photo 4/11 8DA/8DB panels Nearly no maintenance required Switchgear containers as hermetically sealed pressure system. nomaintenance switchgear and encapsulated cable plugs ensure C highest security of supply C safety of the personnel C reduced operating costs C economic efficiency of the investment Innovation The use of digital secondary technology and combined protective and control devices results in C a clear integration into process control C flexible.and doublepole) for traction power supplies C 8DB10 for double busbar applications are metal-enclosed. C existing switchrooms become effectively usable C new buildings become more cost-effective C inner-city areas are used economically 8DA10 panel for single busbar applications 8DA11/8DA12 panel for traction power supplies. Thus.5 kV. in economical operation 4/36 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .Fixed-mounted circuitbreaker switchgear. type 8DA and 8DB up to 40.5 kV.g. single. metalclad. – dust – dirt C independent of the installation height Compactness The use of SF6-insulation results in small panel width of only 600 mm up to 40. SF6-insulated Versions Fixed-mounted circuit-breaker switchgear C 8DA10 for single busbar applications C 8DA11/8DA12 (single. SF6-insulated switchgear for indoor installation Features Environmental independence Encapsulation with modular standard containers made of noncorrosive aluminum alloys make 8DA and 8DB switchgear C insensitive to aggressive ambient conditions such as – salt water – air humidity – dust – temperature C hermetically tight against ingress of foreign substances such as e.

4/21 Panel design (examples) 4/37 4 .g. e. 3-pole 1 Low-voltage cubicle 1 2 Electronic operating interface. 3-pole Panels for traction power supply 8DA11 single-pole 8DA12 double-pole 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8DB10 panel for double busbar. multifunction protection 3 Operating mechanism and interlock for the three-position switch-disconnector as well as mechanical switch position indication of the three-position switch disconnector and circuit-breaker 2 4 3 5 6 8 4 Pressure gage for gas monitoring of the feeder gas compartments 5 Circuit-breaker operating mechanism 6 Operating shaft for vacuum switching tubes 7 Voltage detection system 8 Operating shaft for three-position switch-disconnector 7 Fig.Medium Voltage 8DA10 panel for single busbar.

Single busbar 1 2 3 1 Busbar container 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 Busbar 3 Three-position switchdisconnector 4 Gas-tight bushing between three-position switch-disconnector and circuit-breaker 5 Circuit-breaker container 6 Vacuum interrupter 7 Current transformer 8 Pole support plate 9 Panel connection Double busbar 1 10 2 3 4 11 5 6 7 8 9 12 Pos. 4/22 Single-pole design 4/38 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 1 to 9. see above 10 Gas-tight bushing between three-position switch-disconnector or switch-disconnector and busbar 11 Gas-tight bushing between three-position switch-disconnector (busbar 1) and switchdisconnector (busbar 2) 12 Busbar switch-disconnector for busbar system 2 Fig.

5 kV 2.930 Busbar modules with disconnection option: With voltage transformer up to 24 kV 2.5 kV 2.570 2. 4.850 with make-proof busbar 1. dimensions 4/39 4 . 40 kA max. connection type 3 2.250 With connection for all-insulated bar2) 1.640 2.630 2.000 A max.100 2.030 – 2 or 3 connectors. connection type 3 2.110 – 2 or 3 connectors.490 2.500 2.660 2.320 additional panel loss Busbar module without disconnection option: With voltage transformer up to 24 kV 2. to kV 15 25 EN 50163 and IEC 60850 -isolation voltage max.350 Height switchgear rear side Standard 1.420 36/40.240 – 2 or 3 connectors. connection type 2 2.180 2.Medium Voltage 8DA10 3-pole Rated values Rated -voltage max. single-pole 865 for 8DA12. connection type 2 2.390 2. 2.050 – 1 connector. 100 kA -normal current of busbar max. connection type 2 2.220 36/40. connection type 3 2.500 A Dimensions in mm Compartment (width) Circuit-breaker panel 600 Switch-disconnector panel 600 Transverse coupling – Longitudinal coupling (2 panels) 2 x 600 Longitudinal coupling for connection 2 x 600 in the cable basement (2 panels) Switchgear termination (end wall) for left and right switchgear cabinet side 152 Depth for all panel types 1.000 A Dimensions in mm Compartment (width) Incoming-feeder panel 600 Section feeder panel 600 Switchgear termination end wall for left and right 152 switchgear side Depth for 8DA11.350 with high low-voltage cubicle 2. double-pole 1.380 60 Hz on request The busbar supplier must be consulted about the dimensions Table 4/20 Electrical data. kV 17.5 50 Hz1) 28 50 70 85 75 125 170 185 max. 40 kA -short-time withstand current.300 2.850 8DA11/8DA12 single-/doublepole 2.7 50/60 -power-frequency to ground kV 50 95 withstand over isolating kV 60 110 voltage distance -peak to ground kV 125 200 withstand over isolating kV 145 220 current distance -short-circuit breaking current max.360 2. connection type 2 2. 2. connection type 2 2.380 With connection for all-insulated bar2) 2. 100 kA max.430 2.510 2. connection type 3 2.240 – 2 or 3 connectors.130 1) 2) 8DB10 3-pole 12 24 36 40. kV 12 24 36 40.280 2. 2.500 A busbar -normal current of feeders max.700 with make-proof busbar 2. 31.700 grounding switch Height switchgear rear side Standard 1. connection type 2 2.625 Height (switchgear front) Standard 2.130 – 4 to 6 connectors.5 27. 40 kA max. 2.350 2.470 With cable connection for – 1 connector.180 – 1 connector.490 2.700 Rated values Rated -voltage acc. 80 kA -normal current of max. 40 kA -short-time making current max.5 -frequency 50 Hz1) -short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 28 50 70 85 -lightning surge withstand voltage kV 75 125 170 185 -short-circuit breaking current max.210 2.500 A 600 – 600 2 x 600 2 x 600 152 2.5 kA -short-circuit making current max.960 grounding switch with busbar isolation without 2.700 2.260 – 4 to 6 connectors.380 2.5 -frequency Hz 16.590 2. 100 kA -peak withstand current max. 3s max.245 Height switchgear front Standard 2.000 A -normal current of feeders max.840 2.670 With cable connection for – 1 connector. 100 kA max. 4.

single-pole and 8DA12. double-pole on request) 4/40 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . depending on the connector size 3) The use of these modules reduces the possible number of connectable plug-in cables by 1 piece each Voltage transformer. connected via cable 3) Ohmic voltage divider and/or or and/or 3) Surge arrester Switch-disconnector panel Fittings and connection options same as for circuit-breaker panel Busbar fittings Fitting at the riser housing Fitting over the panel connection 1) Panel connection variants Longitudinal coupling Busbar fittings Consisting of 2 panels (circuit-breaker arranged optionally in the left or right panel) Fitting at the riser housing 1) Busbar current transformer Current transformer Fig. to EN 50181 – Max.Circuit-breaker panel Busbar fittings Fitting at the circuit-breaker housing Fitting over the panel connection 1) Panel connection variants Fitting at the panel termination Ohmic voltage divider 1) Capacitive voltage detection system 2) – For plug-in cable connection with inside cone acc. solid or gas insulation 3) Inductive voltage transformer and/or or Cable or busbar connection. fixed or disconnectable or Make-proof grounding switch or 2) Plug-in cable Current transformer all-insulated bar. fixed or disconnectable Longitudinal disconnection without additional space requirements Busbar current transformer or 3) Inductive voltage transformer. 4/23 8DA10 single busbar panels. of 6 connections per conductor possible. 3-pole (panels 8DA11.

BB2 Cable or bar connection. BB2 Cable or bar connection. solid or gas insulation and/or or BB1 BB2 3) Inductive voltage transformer 3) Inductive voltage transformer. 4/24 8DB10 double busbar panels.Medium Voltage Circuit-breaker panel Busbar fittings BB1 BB2 Fitting at the circuit-breaker housing Fitting over the panel connection 1) Panel connection variants Voltage transformer. of 6 connections per conductor possible. fixed and/or or BB1 BB2 HA35-2444 eps BB1. disconnectable Make-proof grounding switch All-insulated bar. disconnectable and/or 3) Surge arrester or BB1 BB2 Busbar current transformer or BB1 BB2 Longitudinal disconnection without additional space requirements Abbreviations BB1 = busbar 1 BB2 = busbar 2 1) Capacitive voltage detection system 2) – For plug-in cable connection with inside cone acc. depending on the connector size 3) The use of these modules reduces the possible number of connectable plug-in cables by 1 piece each Fig. connected via cable 3) Ohmic voltage divider and/or or BB1 BB2 BB1 . fixed or 2) Plug-in cable Fitting at the panel termination Ohmic current divider or BB1 BB2 Current transformer or BB1 BB2 Voltage transformer. 3-pole 4/41 4 . to EN 50181 – Max.

Transverse coupling Busbar fittings BB1 BB2 1) Fitting at the riser housing or BB1 BB2 Voltage transformer. 3-pole Fig. BB2 Cable or bar connection. fixed Current transformer or BB1 BB2 Voltage tranformer. disconnectable or BB1 BB2 Busbar current transformer or BB1 BB2 Longitudinal disconnection without additonal space requirements Abbreviations BB1 = busbar 1 BB2 = busbar 2 1) Capacitive voltage detection system 8DB10 double busbar panels. 4/25 4/42 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . fixed 1) or BB1 BB2 BB1 . BB2 Cable or bar connection. disconnectable or BB1 BB2 Make-proof grounding switch or BB1 BB2 BB1 .

sizes 1 to 3 or bar (solid or gas insulation) Fitting per panel at the circuit-breaker or riser panel termination Current transformer Abbreviations BB1 = busbar 1 BB2 = busbar 2 1) Capacitive voltage detection system Fig.Medium Voltage Longitudinal coupling for busbar 1 and 2 consisting of 2 assembled panels Busbar fittings BB1 BB2 1) 1) Busbar current BB1 transformer at BB1 Busbar current transformer at BB2 BB2 Current transformer oder Longitudinal coupling for connection in the cable basement consisting of 2 separate panels Busbar fittings BB1 BB2 Fitting at the circuit-breaker housing 1) 1) 1) 1) Fitting above the panel connection Busbar BB1 current transformer at BB1 or Busbar current BB2 transformer at BB2 or Ohmic voltage divider Panel connection variants: Single plug-in cable. 4/26 8DB10 double busbar panels. 3-pole 4/43 4 .

Secondary distribution level. Therefore.g. making maintenance work unnecessary throughout the entire service life of the substations in operation. the large number of substations within the distribution system asks for a cost-effective solution. the system configuration and switchgear technology should be optimally designed and dimensioned. 4/27 Secondary distribution system Furthermore. maintenance-free switching devices. switchgear and substations with a high degree of safety and reliability and. To limit transmission losses.2 Secondary Distribution Systems. In order to minimize transmission losses and attain an economical solution for switchgear and transformer substations. optionally with or without HV HRC fuses. with switchgear of the 8DJ and 8DH types Utilities substation Utilities customer transfer substation Utilities distribution substation.Generator level G Primary distribution level 4. The packaged transformer substations consisting of medium-voltage switchgear. switchgear made of climate-independent. industrial plant Low-voltage distribution Further utilities substations Fig. The large number of substations installed in the distribution system requires a high degree of standardization and the application of technically mature products. metering panels and bus sectionalizer panels. Switchgear and Substations General information In its basic version. Extendable switchgear consists of switch-disconnectors. the secondary distribution system consists of consumer substations with ring-main feeders and directly fed transformer feeders. at the same time. the packaged transformer substations/ consumer substations must be located directly in the load center. minimum dimensions are to be preferred. transformer and lowvoltage distribution are available as factory-assembled units or as single components and can be installed in any building and room at the site of installation. circuit-breaker panels. e. Block-type ringmain units (non-extendable) and modular switchgear (extendable) have been developed for such packaged transformer substations. Block-type switchgear are ring-main units available with various schemes. Medium-voltage ring-main units and switchgear in secondary distribution systems must reliably meet the operational requirements regarding: C Various layouts of the different switchgear types for optimum application in the different substation sizes C Personal safety C Operational reliability C Maximum possible environmental independence C Cost-efficiency 4/44 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . The switchgear types described below fulfill these quality requirements in every respect.

g. extension installation not possible C 8DH type as modular switchgear “line-up and extendable type“ in panel-type construction More than 400.com/ptd Standards The 8DJ.siemens. They have been proven to reliably comply with all requirements of operation with regard to: Maximum personal safety C Arc-fault-tested stainless-steel vessel and cable connection compartment tested on the resistance to accidental arcs C Logic interlockings C Guided operation C Capacitive voltage indication integrated in switchgear C Isolation from supply can be safely tested on the closed switching front C Locked and grounded covers for the fuse section and the cable terminal compartment Further information can be obtained at: www. customer transfer substations and distribution substations of power supply companies and municipal utilities or industrial plants. factory-assembled. metal-enclosed switchgear with SF6 gas insulation. Application areas 8DJ/8HD switchgear is used in secondary distribution systems. gas-insulated switchgear for indoor installation. 8DJ secondary distribution switchgear and 8DH switchgear are metal-enclosed. e. C 8DJ type as ring-main units in block-type construction.000 VDE 0670 Part 6 VDE 0671 Part 100 VDE 0671 Part 102 VDE 0670 Part 301 VDE 0671 Part 105 VDE 0682 Part 415.000 8DJ/8DH-type switchgear panels are in operation worldwide. substations. DIN EN 61243-5 VDE 0470 Part 1 VDE 0111 IEC 60529 IEC 60071 Instrument transformers (e. Typical application areas are C Wind power stations C High-rise buildings C Airports C Lignite open-cast mining C Underground stations C Sewage plants C Docks C Traction power supplies C Automobile industry C Oil industry C Chemical industry C Cement industry The 8DJ secondary distribution switchgear and 8DH switchgear are type-tested.Medium Voltage Siemens has developed switchgear which complies with all the aforementioned requirements. for 8DH or SIMOSEC switchgear) IEC standard VDE standard Current transformers IEC 60044-1 VDE 0414 Part 1 Voltage transformers IEC 60044-2 VDE 0414 Part 2 Combined transformers for 8DH switchgear IEC 60044-3 Table 4/21 VDE 0414 Part 5 Standards 4/45 4 .g. 8DH10 and SIMOSEC switchgear correspond to the following standards and specifications: IEC standard IEC 60694 IEC 60298 IEC 62271-100 IEC 62271-102 IEC 60265-1 IEC 62271-105 IEC 61243-5 VDE standard VDE 0670 Part 1.

IEC 60298 Gas-insulated Non-extendable Single Accessible HV HRC fuse compartment Busbar Not accessible Switching devices LSC 2A/B Cable connection Gas-insulated Extendable Single Accessible Busbar HV HRC fuse Not accessible Switching devices Air-insulated Extendable LSC 2A/B Single Accessible Busbar Circuit-breaker Cable connection Not accessible Disconnector LSC2 A/B Busbar 1) 2) 3) 4) LS = circuit-breaker LTS = switch-disconnector LST = circuit-breaker with disconnecting function PM = partition of metal Accessible HV HRC fuse Cable connection Not accessible Switchdisconnector and grounding switch Circuit-breaker Table 4/21a Secondary distribution systems – selection matrix 4/46 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . type-tested according to IEC 62271-200.Specifications Insulation Type of construction. installation Busbar system Compartments Access option Operational availability Type of compartment LSC 2A Cable connection Medium-voltage indoor switchgear.

use Switchgear type Interlocking control Tooldependent Interlocking control PM4) (metal partitions) IAC (IEC 60298) RK2) TR2) LS13) Ring-main unit for packaged transformer substations.Medium Voltage Accidental arc classification Access control Compartment class Feeder or switching device Application. distribution and switching substations. standard type 1: – for substations with very narrow widths – transformer cable connection at the top Ring-main unit for packaged transformer substations. substations with control aisle – transformer cable connection at the front (standard) 8DJ10 8DJ20 Interlocking control Tooldependent Tooldependent Interlocking control PM4) (metal partitions) IAC (IEC 60298) RK2) TR2) LS11) LS21) LTx1) LST3) SE2) ME1 ME2 ME32) Switchgear for substations. circuit-breaker switchgear up to 1. circuit-breaker switchgear up to 630 A 8DH10 Tooldependent Interlocking control Interlocking control PM4) (metal partitions) IAC (IEC 60298) LS111)2) LS321)2) Tooldependent Interlocking control PM4) (metal partitions) IAC (IEC 60298) RK1) TR1) LS12) SE1) ME1 ME31) HF Switchgear for substations.250 A SIMOSEC 4/47 4 . standard type 2: – for compact substations. distribution and switching substations. customer transfer substations. customer transfer substations.

5 20 max.2/12 [kV] 8DJ10 60/75 60/75 95/125 95/125 17 . 1.2– 25 20 20 20 630 1) max.5 7 24 .250 up to 1.2–17 .2– 25 20 20 20 630 630 up to 630 up to 630 8DH10 60/75 60/75 95/125 95/125 7 .2–17 .5 7 24 .Switchgear type Technical data Rated lightning surge withstand voltage Up 7 .2–17 .5 7 24 .2– 25 20 20 20 630 630 up to 630 up to 630 8DJ20 60/75 60/75 95/125 95/125 7 .250 1) Standard Table 21b Secondary distribution systems – selection matrix / technical data 4/48 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .2–17 .250 630 1) max.250 up to 1.5 7 24 .250 up to 630 up to 630 SIMOSEC 60/75 60/75 95/125 95/125 7 . 1.2– 25 20 11.5/24 [kV] Rated voltage Ur [kV] Maximum rated shorttime withstand current [kA] 1s [kA] 3s Rated operating current for busbar for feeder [A] [A] 7 .250 max. 1. 1.

hermetically tight welded. safe-to-touch HV HRC fuse assembly that is not affected by climatic impacts Environmental compatibility C Continuous and integrated environmental management from manufacture to disposal C Tightly sealed vessel. 4/49 4 . stainless steel vessel without gaskets. no-maintenance operating mechanisms C No-maintenance.Medium Voltage Operational reliability / no maintenance required C Non-corrosive. Cost-efficiency The switchgear is cost-effient not only in purchase but also in service due to its compactness and minimum space requirements as well as its no-maintenance. non-corrosive. stable under variable pressures C Insulating gas which complies with the requirements to insulating and extinguishing tasks throughout the entire service life C Single-pole enclosure outside the vessel C Clear ‘ready-for-service’ indicator independent of temperature and site altitude C Complete protection zone of switch-disconnector/fuse assembly even with thermal overload of the HV HRC fuse (thermal protection function) C Easy replacement of HV HRC fuses without tools C Reliable electrical and mechanical switching device that requires no maintenance Maximum environmental independence C Robust. climate-independent and safe-to-touch cable connections C Free from leakage currents and partial discharges C No-maintenance. climate independent-design. virtually no loss of gas C Easy installation and commissioning Quality and environment Quality and environmental mangement systems in compliance with DIN EN ISO.

650 mm C Switchgear design with up to 6 feeders C Three-pole primary enclosure.000 8DJ10 secondary distribution switchgear is in operation worldwide.2–24 kV. Application areas 8DJ10 secondary distribution switchgear is used for power distribution in substations – also for severe ambient conditions – e.360 mm – 1. for wind power stations C Garage and vault substations C Low-lying and underfloor substations C Pavement substations C Accessible substations C Extremely narrow designs More than 80.in contact C Connection of conventional cable sealing ends (cable feeders) – for thermo-plastic-insulated cables via AKE 20/630 elbow adapter (by Siemens) – for ground cables via adapter systems C Easy installation C Detachable lever mechanism (optional: rotary operating mechanism) C With capacitive voltage detection system at ring-main feeders C Optional motor operating mechanism for switch-disconnector (24 V DC up to 230 V AC for remote control) Cost-efficiency Extremely low ”life-cycle costs” and maximum availability due to: C Maintenance-free concept C Climatic independence C Minimum space requirements 4/50 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Specific features of the standard type 8DJ10. type-tested and metal-enclosed switchgear for indoor installation. non-extendable – block-type construction 8DJ10 secondary distribution switchgear is factory-assembled. gas-insulated. the narrowest type by Siemens C 2 heights available – 1. sandy or dusty areas C Simple outdoor substations Main fields of application C Compact substations C Compact transformer substations. e. metal-enclosed C Insulating gas SF6 C Gas-tight. welded switchgear vessel made of stainless steel.2 ring-main feeders 1 transformer feeder Scheme 10 3 ring-main feeders 1 transformer feeder Scheme 71 4 ring-main feeders 2 transformer feeders Scheme 62 Photo 4/12 Ring-main transformer block versions 8DJ10 secondary distribution switchgear: standard type 1 7.g. in: C Industry C Damp.g. with welded-in bushings for electrical connections and mechanical components C No maintenance required C Independent of climate C Three-position switch-disconnector with switch-disconnector and make-proof grounding switch function C Cable connection for bushings with outside cone C Connection with cable plugs – in ring-main feeders with bolted contact (M16) – in transformer feeders with plug.

650 300 Height mm Weight 2) net weight approx.5 38 95 50/60 400 or 630 200 16 20 25 20 40 50 63 25 40 50 63 24 50 125 50/60 400 or 630 200 16 20 – 20 40 50 – 25 40 50 – Rated short-time withstand current Ik.2 20 60 50/60 400 or 630 200 – 20 25 20 – 50 63 25 – 50 63 – 40 to +70 1.360 340 650 390 1. motor operating mechanism Table 4/23 Dimensions and weights: block versions consisting of ring-main and transformer feeders For further technical data: please refer to the catalog HA 45.410 775 710 mm 775 1. please observe the max. 1 s kV kV kV Hz A A kA 7.500 12 28 75 50/60 400 or 630 200 – 20 25 20 – 50 63 25 – 50 63 15 36 95 50/60 400 or 630 200 – 20 25 20 – 50 63 25 – 50 63 17.g. let-through current of the HV HRC fuse elements Table 4/22 Electrical data. temperature.Medium Voltage 8DJ10 switchgear Rated voltage Ur Rated insulation level: Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage Ud Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage Up Rated frequency fr Rated normal current Ir for ring-main feeders for transformer feeders depending on the HV HRC fuse link Rated short-time withstand current Ik.360 270 1.360 500 650 580 RK = ring-main feeder T = transformer feeder 1) Additional wall distance required: ≥ 15 mm 2) Depending on the equipment. kg 1. 3 s (option) Rated peak withstand current Ip kA kA Rated short-circuit making current Ima 1) for transformer feeder for ring-main feeder kA kA Ambient temperature T Pressure values for insulation: Rated filling pressure pre (at 20°C) 1) °C hPa (absolute) Depending on HV HRC fuse set. filling pressure Supply overview Scheme 10 Scheme 71 Scheme 62 2 ring-main feeders and 1 transformer feeder (identification symbols 2RK + 1T) Width mm Depth 1) 3 ring-main feeders and 1 transformer feeder (identification symbols 3RK + 1T) 1.060 775 4 ring-main feeders and 2 transformer feeder (identification symbols 4RK + 2T) 1. e.11 8DJ10 switch-disconnector system 4/51 4 .

cable routing to the top 17 18 Personnel safety All feeder covers can only be opened when the respective three-position switch-disconnector is switched to ”GROUNDED”. Fig. filled with SF6 gas 22 Cable connection compartment 23 Straight cable plug with plug-in contact 24 Cover of the HV HRC fuse compartment 25 Spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism 26 Cover of cable connection compartment Option (only for schemes 10 and 71) cable connection for elbow plug with plug-in contact. cable routing to the back Cable connection with screw contact (M 16). cover removed 18 12 Lock for HV HRC fuse assembly 14 Rating and type plate 16 Arrangement of cable connections 17 Cable elbow plug with plug-in contact 18 Transformer cable connection 20 Three-position switch-disconnector 21 Switchgear vessel. optionally for: – cable T-plugs or right-angle cable plugs – AKE 20/630 right-angle adapter (by Siemens) for conventional cable sealing ends 1 Feeder designation label 2 Sockets for voltage detection system 3 Ready-for-service indicator 4 Switch position indication for grounding function ”OPEN – GROUNDED” 5 Switch position indication for switch-disconnecting function ”CLOSED – OPEN” 6 Locking device (option for threeposition switchdisconnector) 7 Manual operating mechanism for the grounding function 8 Manual operating mechanism for the switch-disconnecting function 9 Short-circuit/groundfault indicator (option) 23 10 Lock for cable compartment cover 11 HV HRC fuse assembly.Ring-main transformer block A B 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 L1 L2 L3 Transformer feeder Section A-A 17 Ring-main feeder Section B-B 18 12 24 25 13 14 20 10 19 26 2 16 32 22 27 22 29 21 26 21 31 20 30 15 B A Scheme 10 Standard Cable connection for cable elbow plug with plug-in contact. 4/28 Switching panel design – example 4/52 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . cable routing to the right 27 Grounding connection M12 29 Cable support rail 30 Spring-operated mechanism 31 Ring-main cable connection 32 Option: Elbow adapter AKE 20/630 with conventional cable sealing end (M16 bolted contact) Option Cable connection for straight cable plugs with plug-in contact.

metal-enclosed C Insulating gas SF6 C Gas-tight. for wind power stations C Garage and vault substations C Low-lying and underfloor substations C Pavement substations C Accessible substations Specific features of the standard type 8DJ20. with welded-in bushings for electrical connections and mechanical components C Maintenance-free C Independent of climate C Three-position switch-disconnector with switch-disconnector and make-proof grounding switch function C Cable connection for bushings with outside cone C Connection with cable plugs – in ring-main feeders with bolted contact (M16) – in transformer feeders with plug-in contact C Connection of conventional cable sealing ends – for thermo-plastic-insulated cables via AKE 20/630 elbow adapter (by Siemens) – for ground cables via adapter systems C Easy installation C Detachable lever mechanism (optional: rotary operating mechanism) C With capacitive voltage detection system at ring-main feeders C Optional motor operating mechanism for switch-disconnector (24 V DC up to 230 V AC for remote control) C Various possibilities for transformer cable connection: – Standard: front – Option: bottom.760 mm C Switchgear design with up to 5 feeders C Three-pole primary enclosure.400 mm – 1. the most diverse type by Siemens C 3 heights available – 1.g. type-tested and metalenclosed switchgear for indoor installation.200 mm – 1.2–24 kV. in: C Industry C Damp.Medium Voltage Radial transformer panel 1 transformer feeder 1 radial cable connection Scheme 01 Photo 4/13 Typical versions Ring-main transformer block 2 ring-main feeders 1 transformer feeder Scheme 10 Ring-main transformer block 3 ring-main feeders 2 transformer feeders Scheme 82 8DJ20 secondary distribution switchgear: standard type 2 7. e. welded switchgear vessel made of stainless steel.g. gas-insulated. non-extendable – block-type construction 8DJ20 ring-main units are factoryassembled. sandy or dusty areas C Simple outdoor substations Main fields of application C Integrated substations C Integrated transformer substations. Typical uses 8DJ20 secondary distribution switchgear is used for power distribution in substations – also for severe ambient conditions – e. for cable routing to the rear Cost-efficiency Extremely low ”life-cycle costs” and maximum availability due to: C Maintenance-free concept C Independence of climate C Minimum space requirements 4/53 4 .

1 s Hz 20 60 50/60 28 75 50/60 36 95 50/60 38 95 50/60 50 125 50/60 A A 400 or 630 200 400 or 630 200 400 or 630 200 400 or 630 200 400 or 630 200 kA – 20 25 20 – 50 63 – 20 25 20 – 50 63 – 20 25 20 – 50 63 16 20 25 20 40 50 63 16 20 – 20 40 50 – Rated short-time withstand current Ik. 3 s (option) Rated peak withstand current Ip kA kA Rated short-circuit making current Ima 1) for transformer feeder for ring-main feeder kA kA 25 – 50 63 – 40 to +70 25 – 50 63 25 – 50 63 25 40 50 63 25 40 50 63 Ambient temperature T Pressure values for insulation: Rated filling pressure pre (at 20°C) 1) °C hPa (absolute) 1. temperature.2 12 15 17. 5 24 Rated insulation level: Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage Ud kV Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage Up kV Rated frequency fr Rated normal current Ir for ring-main feeders for transformer feeders depending on the HV HRC fuse link Rated short-time withstand current Ik. 8DJ20 switch-disconnector system 1 Switchgear vessel.500 Depending on HV HRC fuse set. filled with SF6 gas 2 Three-position switch-disconnector 3 Operating mechanism for three-position switch-disconnector Fig. 4/29 Panel design – Example 4/54 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . cable routing to the bottom 4 Transformer cable connection: Cable elbow plug with plug-in contact (option) 5 Ring-main connection: cable T-plug with bolted contact (option) Cable connection with bolted contact (M16): – for cable T-plug or cable elbow plug – for conventional cable sealing ends via AKE 20/630 elbow adapter (by Siemens) 6 HV HRC fuse assembly For further technical data: please refer to the catalog HA 45. please observe the max.8DJ20 switchgear Rated voltage Ur kV 7. let-through current of the HV HRC fuse elements Electrical data.31. filling pressure Table 4/24 Ring-main/transformer block B A Transformer feeder Section A-A 6 Ring-main feeder Section B-B 1 2 3 L1 L2 L3 4 5 B A Scheme 10 Standard Cable connection for elbow plug (option: for cable T-plug).

200 1.760 470 500 540 RV RV RV T Block versions.200 1.410 775 1.200 1.400 1.060 T Scheme 71*) 775 1.Medium Voltage Scheme Components shown with dashes are optional Radial transformer panels Scheme 01 K Radial cable connection incoming feeder K T 1 transformer feeder and 1 ring-main connection (identification symbol 1T) 510 775 1.760 210 230 270 Scheme 70* 4 ring-main feeders (identification symbol 4RK) 1.400 1.400 1. consisting of ring-main feeders (without HV HRC fuse installation) Scheme 11 2 ring-main feeders (identification symbol 2RK) 710 775 1.200 1. kg Single panel Scheme 02 a) Ring-main connection b) Radial cable connection RK K 1 ring-main feeder with radial cable connection (identification symbol 1RK) 710 775 1. e.760 280 300 340 Scheme 84 5 ring-main feeders (identification symbol 5RK) 1.400 1.200 1.410 775 1.200 1.200 1.200 1.760 280 300 340 Scheme 20 1 ring-main feeder and 1 transformer feeder (identification symbol 1RK + 1T) 710 T Scheme 72 775 1.g. supply overview.400 1.400 1. 4/30 Identification symbol: RK = K = T = K(E) = ring-main feeder cable feeder transformer feeder cable feeder for radial cable connection with make-proof grounding switch 8DJ20 switchgear.400 1.200 1.760 340 360 400 4 ring-main feeders and 1 transformer feeder (identification symbol 4RK + 1T) 1.400 1.400 1.410 T 775 1.400 1.760 160 170 210 Scheme 32*) 3 ring-main feeders (identification symbol 3RK) 1.200 1.760 350 380 420 1) Depending on the equipment.760 T 775 1.200 1. up to 24 kV.400 1.760 150 170 210 Block versions.760 200 210 250 3 ring-main feeders and 1 transformer feeder (identification symbol 3RK + 1T) 1.760 T 775 1. motor operating mechanism 2) With transformer cable routing to the bottom *) Scheme also suitable for outdoor enclosures **) Additional wall distance required: ≥ 15 mm Fig.400 1.760 400 420 460 Scheme 82 4 ring-main feeders and 1 transformer feeder (identification symbol 4RK + 1T) 1.760 420 440 480 Scheme 81*) 3 ring-main feeders and 1 transformer feeder (identification symbol 3RK + 1T) 1.060 775 1.200 1. SF6-insulated. consisting of ring-main and transformer feeders (with HV HRC fuse assembly) Scheme 10*) 2 ring-main feeders and 1 transformer feeder (identification symbol 2RK + 1T) 1.200 1.760 140 160 200 Scheme 21 Radial cable con nection K(E) (with make-proof grounding switch) K(E) T 1 ring-main connection and 1 transformer feeder (identification symbols 1K(E) + 1T) 710 775 1. kg mm mm**) mm Dimensions Scheme Components shown with dashes are optional Dimensions Width Depth2) Height mm mm**) mm Weight1) net weight approx.400 1.760 775 1.760 200 210 250 Weight1) Width Depth2) Height net weight approx. schemes 4/55 4 .

customer transfer substations.and routine-tested C Standardized and manufactured using numerically controlled machines C Quality management system according to DIN EN ISO 9001 C More than 400.8DH10 switchgear up to 24 kV. outside the switchgear vessel C All live parts are protected against humidity. extendable Modular design for consumer substations Application 8DH10 switchgear is factory-assembled. reliability and availability C No gas work at site C Easy installation and extension C Operation not influenced by environmental conditions C Minimum space requirements C Fully insulated. in: C Substations. distribution substations and switching substations of power supply and public utilities C Industrial plants Examples C Wind power stations C High-rise buildings C Airports C Lignite open-cast mines C Underground stations C Sewage treatment plants C Port facilities C and many other applications Modular design C Individual panels and panel blocks can be freely combined and extended – without the need for work involving SF6 gas at site C Low-voltage cubicles can be supplied in two overall heights and are wired to the panel by means of plug-in connections Photo 4/14 8DH10 extensible switchgear in modular construction Reliability C Type. single-pole. e. pollution. dust and small animals C Connection of cable T-plugs or cable elbow plugs for thermo-plasticinsulated cables up to 300 mm2 C All switching devices are accommodated safe-to-touch in earthed enclosure. type-tested and three-phase metal-enclosed single-busbar switchgear for indoor installation: C Up to 24 kV C Feeder currents up to 630 A C Busbar currents up to 1250 A Typical uses 8DH10 switchgear is used – even under severe environmental conditions – for power distribution in secondary distribution systems. cast-resin-insulated.000 8DJ/8DH panels have been in service for many years all over the world The 8DH10 switchgear complies with the requirements for medium-voltage switchgear. gas-insulated.g. enclosed. all bushings for electrical connections and operating mechanism welded gas-tight – without seals 4/56 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . air-insulated HV HRC fuse assembly. e. Fuse assembly arranged at the top. plug-in busbars for interconnection of individual panels and panel blocks C Busbar arrangement for panel blocks within the switchgear vessel filled with SF6 gas C Single-phase.g. HV HRC fuse assembly and cable sealing ends safe-totouch in grounded enclosure C Access to HV HRC fuses and to cable connection compartment only possible in grounded state C Hermetically sealed switchgear vessel.: C High degree of security of operation.

filling pressure Class “Minus 25 indoor“ (-25 °C up to +70 °C) Class “Minus 5 indoor“ (-5 °C up to +55 °C) hPa (absolute) 1. depending on the cut-off current of the HV HRC fuse Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc for circuit-breaker feeders kA kA – 20 25 – 20 25 – 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 – Ambient temperature T without secondary equipment Panels with secondary equipment and circuit-breaker panels Pressure values for insulation: Rated filling pressure pre (at 20 °C) Minimum operating pressure pme for insulation Table 4/25 Electrical data.250 (option) up to 630 – 20 25 20 – 20 25 20 – 20 25 20 16 20 25 20 16 20 – 20 Rated short-time withstand current Ik for switchgear with tk = 1 s (option) Rated peak withstand current Ip kA kA – 50 63 – 50 63 25 – 50 63 – 50 63 25 – 50 63 – 50 63 25 40 50 63 40 50 63 25 40 50 – 40 40 – 25 Rated short-circuit making current Ima – ring-main feeders – circuit-breaker feeders – transformer feeders. temperature. C The 8DH10 switchgear requires no maintenance (VDE 0670 Part 1000/IEC 60694) For further technical data: please refer to the catalog HA 41. 1.300 C Three-position switch-disconnector with switch positions: CLOSED – OPEN – GROUNDED. One panel block can comprise up to 4 feeders.11 8DH10 switchgear 4/57 4 .2 20 60 50/60 12 28 75 50/60 15 35 95 50/60 17.500 hPa (absolute) 1. C Circuit-breaker panels are supplied with an integrated three-phase current transformer at the cable connection for connection of protection systems. Operation as multi-purpose switch-disconnector with the functions: – switch-disconnector and – make-proof grounding switch C Each 8DH10 switchgear can consist of individual panels (preferably) or panel blocks – depending on the requirements.Medium Voltage 8DH10 switchgear station Rated insulation level Rated voltage Ur kV Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage Ud kV Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage Up kV Rated frequency fr Rated normal current Ir for: – ring-main feeders – transformer feeders depending on the HV HRC fuse link – circuit-breaker feeders – section sectionaliser panels (type LT1. LT2) Rated normal current Ir for – busbar – metering panels Rated short-time withstand current Ik for switchgear with tk = 1 s Hz 7. optionally for digital protection systems or CT-operated protection systems.5 38 95 50/60 24 50 125 50/60 A A A A 400 or 630 200 400 or 630 400 or 630 A A kA 630 (standard).

4/31 Switchgear panel design (example) 46 9 Sockets for voltage detection system 10 Arrangement of busbars 11 Feeder designation label 12 Option: locking device for three-position switch-disconnector 24 15 25 26 54 27 28 29 55 13 Manual operating mechanism for the grounding function 14 Manual operating mechanism for the switch-disconnecting function 15 Lock for cable compartment cover 16 Arrangement of cable connections 17 Busbar system 18 Switchgear vessel. with swing-out cover 3 Switch position indication for switch-disconnecting function “CLOSED – OPEN” 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 11 5 6 8 9 15 4 Switch position indication for grounding function “OPEN – GROUNDED” 61 5 Ready-for-service indicator 6 Rating and type plate 7 Mimic diagram 8 Option: short-circuit/ground-fault indicator 7 51 52 12 13 63 3 4 53 14 23 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Type LS1 (without voltage transformer) Fig. filled with SF6 gas 19 Busbar connection 20 Pressure relief device 21 Busbar compartment 22 Ground busbar with ground connection 10 4/58 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .Ring-main feeder Section Transformer feeder Section 61 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 23 24 15 25 26 27 19 20 21 22 Type RK Circuit-breaker feeder Section 28 29 1 61 31 32 34 23 35 15 36 37 33 11 12 13 14 15 9 16 17 18 10 19 20 21 22 Type TR 27 28 29 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 3 38 5 6 7 10 1 Option: low-voltage cubicle 2 Niche for customer-side low-voltage equipment.

for control cables and/or bus wires 62 Screwed cover 63 Option: lock between three-position switchdisconnector and circuit-breaker 4/59 4 . to EN 50181/DIN EN 50181 as connection type “A“ 59 Option: pluggable 4MT8 voltage transformer at the connection 60 Depth cable compartment cover 61 Cable duct. screwed 43 Option: SIPROTEC bay control unit 44 Low-voltage cubicle (standard) Vacuum circuit-breaker: 45 Opening for the operating crank handle – for closing with manual operation – for emergency stop with motor operation 46 Operating mechanism box with operating mechanism 47 Mechanical ON pushbutton (not applicable with spring-operated mechanism) 48 Mechanical OFF pushbutton 49 Operations counter 50 “Spring charged“ indication 51 Vacuum interrupter 52 Switch position indication 53 Option: lock between vacuum circuit-breaker and three-position switch-disconnector 54 Option: three-phase current transformer (protective transformer) 55 Cable-type slip-on current transformer 56 Pluggable 4MT3 voltage transformer on the busbar 57 Bushing for connecting the pluggable voltage transformers 58 Plug connection acc. cover removed 32 Handle for exchanging the HV HRC fuse insert 33 Lock for HV HRC fuse assembly 34 Cover for the HV HRC fuse compartment 35 Spring-operated / stored-energy mechanism 36 Bushing for cable plug with bolted contact 37 Cable elbow plug with plug-in contact 38 Switch position indication for switch-disconnecting function “CLOSED – OPEN“ with “HV HRC fuse tripped“ or “f-release tripped“. screwed 40 Voltage transformer type 4MR 41 Current transformer type 4MA7 42 Cover to busbar connection compartment.Medium Voltage Billing metering panel. air-insulated Section 61 1 2 40 11 39 6 2 39 41 7 62 42 22 30 Type ME1 23 Three-position switch-disconnector 24 Spring-operated mechanism 25 Bushing for cable plug with screw contact (M16) 26 Option: cable T-plug 27 Cable compartment cover 28 Cable connection compartment 29 Cable support rail 30 Grounding connection for grounding set 31 HV HRC fuse assembly. withdrawable. if applicable 39 Cover for access to the busbar connection and to the instrument transformers.

insulated.Busbars Features C Safe-to-touch due to metallic covers C Plug-in design C Consisting of round-bar copper. No SF6 gas work is required for installation or extension. 4/32 Combination of individual panels with plug-in. 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 10 6 Busbar system 1 End adapter 2 Cross adapter 3 Busbar insulation of silicone rubber 4 Threaded bolt M12/M16 5 Busbar. single-pole. silicone-insulated busbar. 4/33 Plug-in busbar. ∅ 32 mm 6 Stopper Switchgear container 7 Primary enclosure panel 1 8 Primary enclosure panel 2 9 Bushing 10 Capacitive tap at the bushings. Cu. insulated by means of siliconerubber C Busbar connection with cross and end adapters. insulated with silicon rubber C Insensitive to pollution and condensation C Switchgear extension or panel replacement is possible without the need to carry out gas works C Busbar arrangement for the panel blocks within the switchgear vessel filled with gas C Option: screened busbar – Field control with the aid of conductive layers on the siliconerubber insulation – Installation of 4MC7032 current transformers is possible – Independent of the installation height C No gas work C To be installed from the front C Replacement of individual panels possible to the front without having to move panels C Groups of up to 5 panels can be pre-assembled at the factory C Fast installation on site Fig. unscreened version (plan view) 4/60 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . grounded (standard) Fig.

Medium Voltage SIMOSEC modular switchgear up to 24 kV. e. SIMOSEC Switchgear 4/61 4 .g. e. for example. in: C Substations.and routine-tested C Standardized and manufactured using numerically controlled machines C Quality management system according to DIN EN ISO 9001 C More than 400. customer transfer substations.000 switchgear components have been in service for many years all over the world. distribution substations and switching substations of power supply and public utilities C Public buildings such as.250 A C Up to 25 kA Typical uses SIMOSEC switchgear is used for power distribution in distribution systems with feeder currents up to 1.250 A.21.250 A C Busbar currents up to 1. operating mechanisms. hospitals C Industrial plants Typical applications C Wind power stations C High-rise buildings C Airports C Underground stations C Sewage treatment plants C Port facilities C and many other applications Modular design C Individual panels can be freely combined and extended C Option: low-voltage cubicle in two overall heights Reliability C Type. busbar and driving mechanics Re-availability C Three-position switch-disconnector with gas-insulated. e. threeposition switches.: Personal safety C All switching operations executable with the panel front closed C Metal-enclosed. please refer to the catalog HA 41. type-tested and threephase metal-enclosed switchgear for indoor installation: C Up to 2 kV C Feeder currents up to 1. airinsulated. metal-clad or cubicle-type switchgear C HV HRC fuses and cable sealing ends only accessible with grounded feeders C Logic interlock C Capacitive voltage detection system to verify the isolation from supply C Grounding of feeders via makeproof grounding switches possible Operational reliability C Components – such as . C Without cross-insulation of the insulating distances from phase to phase The SIMOSEC switchgear complies with the requirements for mediumvoltage switchgear. extendable Modular design for consumer substations Application SIMOSEC switchgear is factory-assembled. for example. SIPROTEC 4 multifunction protection For further information and data. high-rise buildings. vacuum circuitbreakers – proven for many years C Metal-clad panels (metallic partition between busbar and switchgear as well as between switchgear and cable connection compartment) C Cubicle-type panels with metallic partition between switchgear and busbar compartment C Metal-enclosed three-position switch with gas-insulated switching functions – sealed by welding in the switchgear container for life Photo 4/15 SIMOSEC extensible switchgear in modular construction – and thus no cross-insulation from phase to phase – with welded bushings for cable connection.g.g. maintenancefree arc quenching principle C Metallic partition between busbar compartment and switching devices as well as the cable connection compartment C Separate pressure relief for each compartment C Cable test without isolation of the busbar C Three-phase current transformer installation location for selective disconnection of circuit-breaker feeders Cost-efficiency Low “life-cycle costs“ and high availability during the complete product service life due to: C Three-position switch with gasinsulated arc quenching principle C 3AH vacuum circuit-breaker C Minimum space requirements C Simple extendability of the switchgear C Standard protective devices. train stations.

K-E Rated operating current Ir 1) for feeder and transfer. (acc. K-E for feeder.Common details on electrical data.250 A up to kA 20 25 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 up to kA 20 – 20 – – 20 – – 20 – – 20 up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 for insulation 2) Rated short-time withstand current Ik Rated peak withstand current Ip Rated filling pressure pre 2) 1. (400 A on request) 630 A (standard). LS32 and LS31-U 3AH6* 1. to IEC 60694/VDE 0670 Part 1000) values for gas-insulated containers panels of type TR and ME31-F depending on the max. 1. K1-E 630 A (standard).2 Rated short-duration power-frequency kV 20 withstand voltage Ud Rated lightning surge withstand voltage Up kV 60 12 28 75 15 35 95 17. pressure values.250 A Rated short-circuit making current Ima Transformer panel type TR Rated operating current Ir 1) 3) up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 for feeder 3) 200 A up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 Rated peak withstand current Ip Rated short-circuit making current Ima 3) Inside dimension “e“ for HV HRC fuse-links Circuit-breaker panel type LS Rated operating current Ir 1) mm 292 for feeder for transfer with 4) 292 442 442 442 for panel type LS1 and LS1-U 3AH5* 630 A for panel type LS11 and LS11-U 3AH6* 630 A for panel type LS31. let-through current of the HV HRC fuse-link (ID ≤ 25 kA) inside dimension e = 192 mm. panel tpye RK for feeder. (400 A on request) 630 A (standard). a 100 mm long extension pipe is additionally required for the 292 mm fuse-link 4) With 2) Pressure Table 4/26 Elecrical data of the switchgear panels. The average value over 24 hours is 35 °C max.250 A up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 Rated short-circuit making current Ima Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc 1) Rated for 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers 3) With up to kA 20 25 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 * Type designation of the vacuum circuit-breaker operating currents are defined for ambient temperatures of 40 °C.300 hPa (absolute) at 20 °C Class „Minus 25 indoor“ (–25 °C up to +55 °C) Class „Minus 5 indoor“ (–5 °C up to +55 °C) Minimum operating pressure pme Ambient temperature T for insulation for panels without sedoncary equipment for panels with sedoncary equipment Ring-main panel type RK and cable connection panel type K. panel type K. filling pressure and temperature Rated insulation level Rated voltage Ur kV 7. temperature 4/62 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . panel type K1.500 hPa (absolute) at 20 °C 1.5 38 95 24 50 125 Rated frequency fr Rated operating current Ir of the busbar 1) 50/60 Hz Standard Option for switchgear with tk = 1 s for switchgear with tk = 3 s 630 A 1.

panel type ME1 and ME1-H for feeder as cable connection panel type ME1-K for busbar connection. with 3AH6 * 630 A 630 A 630 A 630 A 1. a 100 mm long extension pipe is additionally required for the 292 mm fuse-link * Type designation of the vacuum circuit-breaker 4) With 2) Pressure Table 4/27 Electrical data of the switchgear panels.250 A 630 A.250 A 630 A. 1.250 A Rated short-circuit making current Ima Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc Electrical service life for 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 up to kA 20 25 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 for 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers: at rated operating current Ir 1) at rated short-circuit breaking current Isc 10. to IEC 60694/VDE 0670 Part 1000) values for gas-insulated containers 3) With panels of type TR and ME31-F depending on the max. 1.2 Busbar grounding panel type SE Rated short-circuit making current Ima Busbar voltage metering panels type ME3 and type ME31-F Rated peak withstand current Ip Rated short-circuit making current Ima 3) Inside dimension “e“ in the panel type ME31-F Billing metering panels type ME1 Rated operating current Ir 1) 3) 12 15 17.5 24 up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 for HV HRC fuse-links 292 mm for transfer.250 A 630 A. with 3AH5 *: on request types LT11 and HF.250 A Sectionalizer panels type LT Rated operating current Ir 1) for for for for for panel panel panel panel panel types LT10 and HF. 1. pressure values. with 3AH6 * types LT2 and LT22 630 A types LT31 and HF. with 3AH5 * type LT1.000 operating cycles 50 breaking operations 35 breaking operations with 3AH6* with 25 kA 1) Rated operating currents are defined for ambient temperatures of 40 °C. temperature 4/63 4 . let-through current of the HV HRC fuse-link (ID ≤ 25 kA) inside dimension e = 192 mm. type HF 630 A. 1. (acc.Medium Voltage 7. The average value over 24 hours is 35 °C max. panel type ME1-S for riser panel.

transformer.250 A Option Type HF BB 375 mm wide Option * Option 3) Option P2 P1 2) Option Cable panels as feeder panels. 630 A. riser and busbar grounding panels Ring-main panels as feeder panels Type RK. with make-proof grounding switch Type K-E. 4/34 Product range (basic range. 375 mm wide Option** Option** alternatively alternatively Option Cable panels as feeder panels. further types available) 4/64 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .Ring-main and cable panels. 500 mm wide Option Option 6) 8) Option Type TR1 500 mm wide Option Option 2) Option Option 1) 3) Option * 1) Ring-main panels as transfer panels for mounting to panels of type ME1… or ME1-H Type RK-U. 375 mm wide Option * Option * 3) Transformer panels as feeder panels Type TR 375 mm wide Option Option Option alternatively Option * Option 1) Option * 1) Type LS1. 630 A Type K. Option 375 mm wide Option** alternatively Option 3) Busbar grounding panels Type SE1 375 mm wide Option** Option 1) Option** Option 1) Fig. Option 500 mm wide Standard: for bus-sectionalization to the right Option: for bus-sectionalization to the left Riser panels 630 A and 1.

250 A ** for cable connection Option Type ME1-K 375 mm wide BB Surge arrester Option P2 P1 2) Standard B: for bus sectionalization to the right Billing metering panels 630 and 1. single-pole. cast-resin-insulated Cable (not included in the scope of delivery) Option 2nd cable (not included in the scope of supply) Billing metering panels 630 and 1.250 A for busbar connection Option 2) Capacitive voltage detection system Fixed point for grounding Type ME1-S 500 mm wide Standard **: for bus sectionalization to the right 2) 2) Insulator-type current transformer 4MA.Medium Voltage Billing metering panels 630 and 1.g.or lefthand end panel P1 and P2 are terminal markings of the current transformer * Up to 12 kV on request ** Connection of 3 cables possible B Option: bus sectionalization to the left Option P2 P1 2) BB For mounting to left. cast-resin-insulated Fixed point for busbar grounding Option alternatively * P1 P2 Option 2) Voltage transformer.or right-hand ring-main panels of type RK-U 4/65 4 . 4MR.250 A ** for busbar connection Option Type ME1-KS 375 mm wide as right.250 A standard Option Type ME1 375 mm wide 4) 3AH5 vacuum circuit-breaker HV HRC fuse Option P2 P1 2) Standard **: for bus sectionalization to the right 5) 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker Grounding switch Three-position switch-disconnector Make-proof grounding switch Billing metering panels 630 and 1. e.

withdrawable Option 3) 5) Option with 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker.250 A as feeder panels Option Option 6) 7) Option alternatively alternatively Option alternatively Option** Type LS31 750 mm wide with 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker. withdrawable Bus sectionalization only possible to the right Option P1 P2 6) 7) 2) 4) Option Option B Option Option Option Option 3) Option Type LS11-U 750 mm wide with 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker.Circuit-breaker panels Circuit-breaker panels 630 A as feeder panels Type LS1 750 mm wide alternatively alternatively with 3AH5 vacuum circuit-breaker. withdrawable Bus sectionalization only possible to the right Option B alternatively P1 P2 6) 2) 5) Option Option Fig. fixed-mounted alternatively Standard: for bus sectionalization to the right Option: for bus sectionalization to the left P1 P2 6) 2) 5) Option 3) Option Type LS31-U 750 mm wide with 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker. or ME1-H Option Type LS1-U 750 mm wide with 3AH5 vacuum circuit-breaker. withdrawable for the connection of 3 cables max. further types available) 4/66 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens l i l . fixed-mounted Option 3) Circuit-breaker panels 1. 4/35 Product range (basic range. (4 cables*) Option 1) Option 3) Option** Option alternatively 2) Option alternatively alternatively Option 2) 5) Option Option 6) Option Option 6) Option 1) Option 1) as transfer panels for mounting to panels of type ME1... Option Option** Option 3) 4) Option Option alternatively 2) 5) Option Option P1 P2 2) Option Option 1) Option 6) Option 1) Type LS32 875 mm wide Option Option alternatively Type LS11 750 mm wide with 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker. or ME1-H Option 3) as transfer panels for mounting to panels of type ME1. withdrawable for the connection of 2 cables max...

cast-resin-insulated Fixed point for grounding 3) Three-phase current transformer 4MC63 .g. . cast-resin-insulated Surge arrester Option Option Option Option 3) 3) Type LT22-W 750 mm wide corresponds to type RK-U with type RK-U alternatively Option P2 2) P1 6) 7) Option P1 and P2 are terminal markings of the current transformer * Up to 12 kV on request ** Connection of 3 cables possible B Option: bus sectionalization to the left BB For mounting to left. e. e.g. cast-resin-insulated 2nd cable (not included in the scope of supply) Voltage transformer. . 4MR.or right-hand ring-main panels of type RK-U 4/67 4 .Medium Voltage Bus sectionalizer panels 630 A with 1 three-position switch-disconnector Type LT2 750 mm wide corresponds to type RK-U with type RK-U Three-position switch-disconnector Capacitive voltage detection system Option Option Three-position switch-disconnector Make-proof grounding switch 2) Insulator-type current transformer 4MA. 4MR. doublepole. single-pole. Cable (not included in the scope of supply) with 2 three-position switch-disconnectors Type LT22 750 mm wide corresponds to type RK-U with type RK-U Option 7) Option Option 6) Voltage transformer.

Ring-main panel as feeder HA41-2393d eps Transformer panel as feeder HA41-2394d eps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 60 2 23 24 19 58 25 18 27 57 20 21 28 61 29 22 22 1 2 60 2 23 24 19 58 26 27 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 59 20 21 61 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 59 34 35 57 34 35 31 31 32 33 33 29 61 22 22 30 Type RT Section 56 30 Type RK Section 23 Billing metering panel HA41-2395e eps 1 Option: low-voltage cubicle 2 Niche for customer-side low-voltage equipment. cover can be screwed off 3 Option: CAPDIS voltage indication system 2 23 24 33 4 Option: short-circuit/ground-fault indicator 5 Option: Ready-for-service indicator for switchgear 6 Switch position indication for switch-disconnecting function “CLOSED – OPEN“ 7 Switch position indication for grounding function “OPEN – GROUNDED“ 8 Feeder designation label 9 Mimic diagram 10 Option: sockets for capacitive voltage detection system (depending on arrangement) 11 Option: “ON – OFF“ momentary-contact rotary control switch for motor drive with local-remote changeover switch for the three-position switchdisconnector 12 Option: Locking device for three-position switch-disconnector 13 Pressure relief device for switchgear 65 14 Manual operating mechanism for the grounding function 15 Manual operating mechanism for the switchdisconnecting function 1 37 2 10 38 60 38 8 9 33 33 16 57 40 40 39 39 16 Rating and type plate 17 Gas-insulated container for switchgear 18 Lock for cable compartment cover 19 Bushing-type insulator for the busbar 20 Bushing-type insulator for the feeder 30 Type ME1 Section Fig. 4/36 Switchgear panel design (example) 4/68 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

for Up > 95 kV) 22 Cable mounting rail with cable clamps (option) for cable fixing 23 Busbar 24 Insulating cap * on the busbar 2 23 24 51 19 58 25 43 64 41 57 50 20 21 28 25 Spring-operated mechanism for three-position switch-disconnector 26 Spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism for three-position switch-disconnector 27 Three-position switch-disconnector 28 Cable connection 29 Cable compartment cover 30 Ground terminal (for position... screwed 39 4MR current transformer 40 4MA7 insulator-type current transformer.g. withdrawable 43 Operating mechanism box 44 Manual operation – for closing with manual operation – for emergency stop with motor operation 1 2 51 5 45 46 44 8 47 10 48 60 11 12 13 14 6 7 15 16 17 64 59 20 21 61 22 49 9 29 61 22 30 Type LS1 Section Circuit-breaker panel (with 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker) HA41-2397d eps 45 Mechanical “OFF” pushbutton 46 Mechanical “ON” pushbutton (not applicable with spring-operated mechanism) 55 2 23 24 52 19 58 25 27 64 50 57 54 43 29 47 “Spring charged” indication 48 Operations counter 49 Switch position indication 50 Option: 4MC63 53 three-phase current transformer 51 Option: SIPROTEC easy 7SJ45 time-overcurrent protection 52 Option: SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62 multifunction protection 53 Cover* for cable connection glands 54 Insulating cap* on the bushing-type insulator 55 Option: Cable duct. only: logic interlocks between circuit-breaker “OPEN” and threeposition switch-disconnector as well as locking device for three-position switch-disconnector 37 Option: part of the low-voltage equipment 38 Cover. vacuum circuit-breaker 41 3AH5 vacuum circuit-breaker. fixed-mounted 42 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker. and LT11. for control cables and/or bus wires 56 Logic interlock for three-position switch-disconnector 57 Grounding busbar 58 Metal cladding of the busbar compartment 59 Metal cladding of the cable connection compartment 60 Cover of the busbar compartment for panel expansion 61 Cable sealing end (not included in the scope of supply) 62 Option: feeder grounding via make-proof grounding switch 33 61 63 or feeder grounding via the vacuum circuit-breaker (= locking device for feeder grounded when circuitbreaker “CLOSED”) 64 Lock for cable compartment cover in circuit-breaker panels 30 65 Cover of the transformer connection compartment * For example for Up ≥ 95 kV.Medium Voltage Circuit-breaker panel (with 3AH5 vacuum circuit-breaker) HA41-2396e eps 21 Insulating collar (e. withdrawable... see dimension drawing) 31 Grounding switch for the cable connection 32 Inspection window 33 Insulators 34 Insulating collar 35 Option: HV HRC fuse-link 36 Option for panel types LS11. Ur ≥ 15 kV 1 60 3 11 36 17 14 15 16 13 64 59 36 2 52 5 6 7 8 9 10 54 20 56 50 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 53 33 62 63 61 22 56 Type LS11 Section 42 4/69 4 .

for rated voltage Ur = 24 kV) 8 Cable sealing end (not included in the scope of supply) *) For standards.250 A HV HRC fuse-link C For transformer panels of type TR and TR1 C For busbar voltage metering panel type ME31-F C HV HRC fuse-links acc.g.g.Busbars C Shock-hazard protection by means of metallic encapsulation C Metal-clad busbar compartment C 3-pole version. – with selectivity – when selected correctly – to upstream and downstream devices C Requirements met as high-voltage switch fuse combination C Selection of HV HRC fuses for transformers C Fuse replacement only possible with a grounded feeder C Option: shunt release at the operating mechanism of the three-position switch-disconnector Photo 4/16 1 Busbar 2 Insulating cap (e.5 kV) on the busbar 3 Bushing-type insulator for the busbar Busbar compartments over 3 panels (example).21 Photo 4/18 HV HRC fuses in the transformer panel type TR. hand. version “medium“ acc. can be screwed from panel to panel C Simple switchgear expansion possible C Consisting of copper: – Fl E-Cu for 630 A – Rd E-Cu for > 630 A up to 1. to DIN 43625 (main dimensions) with striker pin. side view 4/70 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . for Ur > 17. please refer to page 4/43 and catalog HA 41.or motor-operated “HV HRC fuse tripped“ or “f-release tripped“ indication “OPEN“ indication Photo 4/17 Masking frame of a transformer feeder 4 Insulating collar 5 HV HRC fuse (not included in the scope of supply) 6 Grounding switch (rated short-circuit breaking current Ima = 4 kA) for the cable connection 7 Cover for cable lug connection (e. side view “CLOSED“ indication. to IEC 60282/ VDE 0670 Part 4*) – as short-circuit protection in front of transformers.

the operating mechanism has to be switched to the “OPEN” position to charge the spring. Then. Replacement of HV HRC fuse-links C Isolation and grounding of the transformer feeder C Then. the equipment can be grounded using the three-position switch-disconnector and the fuse can.Medium Voltage C Option: “Tripped signal“ of the three-position switch-disconnector in the transformer feeder (transformer switch) for electrical remote signaling with 1 normally open contact (1NO) “HV HRC fuse tripped” When a HV HRC fuse-link has tripped. for example. be replaced. manual replacement of the HV HRC fuse-link 4/71 4 .

2…24 12.2…24 – 8 (1 s) Indoor vacuum switching tube VS 7.5 25…31.5…80 12.4. Product Range Devices for medium-voltage switchgear The comprehensive switchgear device range enables Siemens to supply almost any type of device required for the medium-voltage range of 7.5 16…40 31.2…36 44 urge current strength – – Current and voltage transformers for indoor and outdoor installations Table 4/28 4M 12…36 – Equipment range for medium-voltage switchgear 4/72 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .5 – 16…63 (1 s) HV HRC fuses 3GD 7. 60044-2 C BS 7625.: +49 9131/73 46 54 Device Type Rated voltage Ratedshort-circuit current Rated short-time current (3 s) kV Indoor vacuum circuit-breaker 3AH 7. All components and equipment comply with international and national standards as follows: Vacuum circuit-breakers C IEC 60056.3 Medium Voltage Equipment.1…72 kA 13.5…80 Indoor switchdisconnector 3CJ 12…36 – 20…25 (1 s) Indoor disconnector and grounding switch 3D 12…40. partially IEC 62271-100 C IEC 60694 C BS 5311 Vacuum switches C IEC 60265-1 Vacuum switch/fuse combinations C IEC 60420 Vacuum contactors C IEC 60470 C UL 347 Switch disconnectors C IEC 60129 C IEC 60265-1 HV HRC fuses C IEC 60282 Current and voltage transformers C IEC 60044-1.2 to 36 kV.2…36 31. Table 4/28 presents an overview of products and their main properties.1…25 3TL 7.13 Further information can be obtained at fax no.5…80 – Fuse base 3GH 7.5 7.1…25 13.2…36 kA 13. 7626 C ANSI C57.2…24 – 16…20 Vacuum circuit-breaker/ disconnector unit Indoor vacuum contactors 3AH58 12 13.5 25…31.1…72 NXACT Components for 3AH VCB 3AY2 12…24 12…24 31.5 16…40 (1 s) Outdoor vacuum circuit-breaker Indoor vacuum switch 3AF 3AG 3CG 12…40.

mainly motors with a high rate of operating cycles 630…4. cables.500 1. generators. fuses 800 10.500 25…50 – Equipment manufacturers and retrofitters 1.000…2.000… 30..000 1. transformers 630…3.3…250 – – – Short-circuit protection..000 – 10. 5.000 25 In partially enclosed circuit-breaker switchgear 400…800 1 x 106…3 x 106 0. transformers.000 – – Protection of personnel during maintenance work at the equipment by creating an isolating gap 6.000 – 25…100 All fields of application.000 .000 10.25 x 106…2 x 106 – All fields of application.. such as overhead lines. capacitors. filter circuits. short-circuit limiting Placement of HV HRC fuse-links 400 – – – – – – – Measuring and protecting 4/73 4 . motors.250 10.000 10. cables. switches and gas-insulated switchgear 630 1.000… 30.0000 10.000… 30. motors.000 – 800…1.. arc furnaces 1.000 25…50 Operation at power supply company for almost any switching task All fields of application.500 20 – Cables and overhead lines.000 10.000 10. short-circuit protection required.000 25…100 For circuit-breakers. 2.250…2.Medium Voltage Rated operating current Switching operations mechanical with rated operating with rated fault Fields of application / comment A 800…12. capacitors.000.000… 12.250…2. many operating modes.000 10.000 10. such as overhead lines. transformers.000 10.000 10.

150 A 1. 3. Photo 4/19 3AH5 allround circuit-breaker 24 kV / 16 kA Rated voltage kV Vacuum circuit-breaker (type) For rated short-circuit breaking current1) (rated short-circuit making current) kA 13.250 A 2.5 (80) kA 40 (100) 3AH1 3AH2 3AH1 3AH2 3AH1 3AH2 3AH1 3AH2 3AH3 3AH4 kA 50 (125) 3AH3 kA 63 (160) 3AH3 7.250 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 1.1 kA for 3AH6 1.150 A at 17.g. 2.150 A 1.250 A 2. e. 3AH4 Circuit-breaker for extremely frequent switching operations.8) kA 16 (40) kA 20 (50) kA 25 (63) kA 31. for industrial applications.g. e.250 A to to to to to2) 1. 3AH6 Circuit-breaker with switching poles arranged in line one behind the other.2 3AH2 12 3AH5 3AH5 3AH53) 3AH5 3AH5 3AH2 3AH3 3AH3 15 3AH2 17.500 A 2.1 (32.500 A Rated operating current 1) 2) 3) DC current proportion is 36% (higher values on request) 3.3AH1-6 vacuum circuitbreakers – for universal use Suitable circuit-breakers for every application: 3AH5 No-maintenance allrounder for most standard applications Circuit-breakers of type 3AH1.250 A to 3. 3AH1 Standard circuit-breaker for power utilities and industrial applications to complement the 3AH5 range.500 A 1. in steelworks.000 A 4) 5) 12. for power generation.g.500 A 1.250 A to 4.500 A for 24 kV / 25 kV Table 4/29 The complete 3AH range: electrical values and products 4/74 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . e.250 A to 2.000 A 800 A 800 A to 1.5 kV rated voltage for 3AH2 Up to 2.250 A to 3. 4 and 6 round off the total product range. 3AH3 High-performance circuit-breaker.5 kA instead of 13. 3AH2 Circuit-breaker for frequent switching operations.5 3AH6 4) 3AH6 3AH6 3AH6 3AH5 3AH5 3AH2 3AH3 3AH3 3AH3 3AH3 24 3AH6 4) 3AH6 3AH5 3AH6 3AH5 3AH6 3AH5 5) 3AH2 3AH5 3) 3AH3 3AH4 36 3AH5 3AH3 3AH4 2.

150 A and 4. 3AH7 – single-pole circuit-breaker Applications C Railway applications C Neutral point switch (grounding transformer.500 2.000 operating cycles C Compact design Customer benefit C Cost-saving in the long run due to its long service life and the fact that it requires no maintenance C Space saving due to its compact design C Highly reliable.000 A 17.000 A 17.500 Product range of 3AH47 for single-pole applications Customer benefit C Small dimensions. as applicable in capacitors.000 2.5 kV / 50 and 60 Hz 17.000 A and 12.013 Photo 4/20 3AH38 high-current and generator circuit-breaker Photo 4/21 3AH47 single-pole circuit-breaker 3AH3 818 3AH3 819 3AH3 838 3AH3 838 Table 4/30 17.5 kV / 72 kA / 200 kA / 3. to EN 50163 or IEC 60850 Customer benefit C Optimized life cycle costs C High reliability 4/75 4 .000 A and 12.250 2.500 2.5 kV / 63 kA / 175 kA / 3.5 kV / 16.013 are perfectly suited both for modernizing existing power plants and for initially equipping new power plants. natural gas and steam power plants Features C High switching cycles C No maintenance C Tested in accordance with IEEE C37. thus ensuring the utmost availability of power supply C Flexible use thanks to short delivery times for standard breakers Circuit-breakers for special applications 3AH8 – high current and generator circuit-breaker Applications C High operating and fault currents C Switching of generators in hydropower.150 A and 4. They can be easily installed in switchgear systems.500 2. reactor coils and filter circuits C Steelworks Features C Proven vacuum switching principle C Universal use C Long service life C No maintenance up to 10.5 C C 40 C 50 ISC IN Table 4/31 kA A 25 1. making its installation more flexible C Easy handling thanks to low weight C Long service life C Low life cycle costs Thanks to their compact design and high performance features.000 2.000 A 17.Medium Voltage Applications C Power supply installations with long service life C Industrial installations with high short-circuit currents and frequent switching operations C Switchgear installation companies C Special switching tasks.5 kV / 63 kA / 175 kA / 8. high-current and generator circuit-breakers of type 3AH8 and IEEE C37. coal.000 A Technical data for 3AH38 types UN 27.5 kV / 72 kA / 200 kA / 8.7 Hz C C C C C C 31. ground-fault neutralizer) Features C High operating cycle rates C Low maintenance C Low wear and tear even at frequencies of 16 2/3 Hz C Tested and approved in accordance with EN 50152-1 C Circuit voltage class acc.

25 kA.1 16 20 25 Ima kA 32.Components for 12 kV Up to 2.8 40 50 63 Pole center distance mm 160 160 160 160 Ir A 800 to 1.500 A / up to 40 kA / 1s.250 Table 4/33 Technical data of the 3AH58 vacuum circuit-breaker/disconnector unit Photo 4/23b Disconnector counter-contacts C Compact design makes room for cable connections and instrument transformer in the switchgear cubicle C All operating elements arranged at an ergonomic height C Circuit-breaker and disconnector drive can be accessed from the front Disconnector counter-contacts C Included in the scope of delivery C Lightning surge withstand voltage 75 kV / 85 kV* C Short-time AC withstand voltage 28 kV / 32 kV* C Short-circuit time 3s * Across the isolating gap Photo 4/23a 3AH5 804-2.2/12 kV 210 mm pole center distance With 3AH5 circuit-breaker – 12 kV 210 mm pole center distance Components for 24 kV Up to 2. For cubicle widths of 1.250 800 to 1.250 800 to 1.250 A Customer benefit C Time savings due to less installation work required compared with installing single components C Disconnector counter-contacts included in the scope of delivery 4/76 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 1.250 A Table 4/32 Technical data and product range Components for 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers Applications C As cartridge or truck for switchgear C Components for the switchgear installation company Features C Components based on 3AH circuit-breaker C Free choice of components ranging from counter-contacts and bushings to truck and complete cartridge C Tested components Customer benefit C Everything from a single source C Quick to use 3AH58 vacuum circuit-breaker/ disconnector unit – a powerful combination Applications C In partially enclosed circuit-breaker installations Features C Combined switching and disconnecting function using a 3AH5 vacuum circuit-breaker and 3DC disconnector C Disconnector mechanically interlocked with the circuit-breaker C Compact design in fixed mounted installations C Factory-tested circuit-breaker/ disconnector unit Rated voltage kV 12 ISC kA 13.000 mm: With 3AH1 circuit-breaker – 24 kV 275 mm pole center distance With 3AH5 circuit-breaker – 24 kV 275 mm pole center distance Photo 4/22 Switchgear 12 kV.500 A / up to 25 kA / 1s.250 800 to 1. For cubicle widths of 800 mm: With 3AH1 circuit-breaker – 7. 12 kV/25 kA/1.

type 3AJ Photo 4/25 NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker module.5 1.500 NXACT 3AK to 15 to 38 to 110 to 50 / 60 to 50 to 125 to 50 to 4. Applications C For switchgear installation companies Features C Combination of vacuum switching technology with further advanced functions C Disconnector.000 Customer benefit Increased productivity due to C Easy planning C Easy installation C Minimum mounting and commissioning expense C Immediately ready to use after delivery C Clear and transparent operating front panel 4/77 4 .) Rated operating current Table 4/34 Technical data NXACT 3AJ kV kV kV Hz kA kA kA A 12 – 24 28 – 50 75 – 125 50 / 60 to 31. locks and operating panel integrated in the module C Pre-tested and ready-to-install delivery C All operating elements located at the switchgear front panel Rated voltage Rated short-time AC voltage Rated lightning surge voltage Rated frequencyz Rated short-circuit breaking current (max. type 3AK NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker module NXACT combines the advantages of vacuum switching technology with additionally integrated functions.) Rated short-circuit making current (max. 3 seconds (max.250 / 2. grounding switch drive.) Rated short-time current.5 to 80 to 31.Medium Voltage Photo 4/24 NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker module.

5 50 / 60 170 70 25 / 31.000 3AF0/3AG0 vacuum circuit-breaker for outdoor installations up to 40.5 63 / 80 1.3AF01 Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated lightning surge withstand voltage Rated AC withstand voltage Rated short-circuit breaking current Rated short-circuit making current Rated operating current Table 4/35 Technical data 3AG01 12 50 / 60 75 28 25 63 1.600 kV Hz kV kV kA kA A to 40. arc furnaces) Photo 4/26 3AF/3AG vacuum circuit-breakers 4/78 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Applications C Switching of three-phase motors C Switching of capacitors C Switching of ohmic loads (e.5 kV Applications C In particular for use in power supply companies C Can be used even in difficult climatic environments C For almost every switching task Features C Proven vacuum switching tubes in porcelain insulators C High electrical and mechanical service life C Suitable for short-time interruptions C Gas.or air-insulated versions available Customer benefit Optimized life cycle costs due to C Low mounting and commissioning expense C Minimum maintenance expense C Installation possible at any location Photo 4/27 3TL8 vacuum contactor Photo 4/28 3TL6 vacuum contactor 3TL vacuum contactors – designed for continuous operation Vacuum contactors are 3-pole contactors for medium-voltage installations with an electromagnetic drive that features high switching frequencies and unlimited ON periods.600 / 2.g.

35) Rated making current Rated breaking current Mechanical life of the contactor Mechanical life of the vacuum switching tube Electrical life of the vacuum switching tube (nominal current) Table 4/36 Technical data 3TL81 kV Hz A 7.500 3.600 3 · 10 6 2 · 106 4. such as nuclear fusion Photo 4/29 Vacuum switching tubes in seal-soldering technology Tubes for vacuum circuit-breakers Rated voltage Rated operating current Rated short-circuit breaking current Tubes for vacuum contactors Rated voltage Rated operating current Table 4/37 kV A kA 7.200 1 · 10 6 0.5 630 to 4.500 3.2 to 40.5 to 80 kV A 1 to 24 400 to 800 Product range (extract) – Tube ratings for circuit-breakers/contactors Features C Small designs C High breaking and operating currents C High operating cycle rates Customer benefit C A suitable solution for every application C Long-term supply security 4/79 4 . we are pleased to complement our comprehensive standard product range with tailormade.5 kV.600 1 · 10 6 1 · 10 6 operating cycles operating cycles operating cycles 0.2 50 / 60 400 3TL61 7. to utilization category AC-4 (cos ϕ = 0.5 · 10 6 Features C Small dimensions C High electrical service life up to 1 million operating cycles C No maintenance required Customer benefit Increased productivity due to C High reliability and availability C Flexible mounting positions.5 · 10 6 0.2 3TL65 12 3TL71 24 450 400 800 A A 4.000 3. vertical or horizontal Vacuum switching tubes – utmost switching capacity in extremely compact designs Vacuum switching tubes for medium voltage are supplied by Siemens for all applications on the international power market ranging from 1 kV to 40. On demand.000 12.200 1 · 10 6 1 · 10 6 4.25 · 106 4. Applications C Vacuum circuit-breakers C Vacuum load interrupters C Vacuum contactors C Transformer tap changers C Circuit-breakers for railway applications C Auto-reclosers C Special applications.25 · 10 6 1 · 10 6 0.Medium Voltage Vacuum contactor type Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated operating current Switching capacity acc.000 3. specific customer solutions.

250 1.15) A 10 10 10 10 A 800 800 800 800 A 63 63 63 63 A 2.15) Induktives Switching capacity (cos ϕ ≤ 0.000 10. IEC 60420 and VDE 0670 Part 301.Rated voltageg Rated lightning surge withstand voltage.250 – A 5.000 10.500 1.2 60 12 75 15 95 24 125 kA 50 50 50 40 kA 20 20 20 16 A A 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 3CG vacuum load interrupter suited for very high operating cycle rates 3CG vacuum switches are multipurpose load interrupters.000 electrical operating cycles C No maintenance required Customer benefit C Optimization of operating costs due to high operating cycle rates C Very economical C High availability C Highly reliable due to proven vacuum switching technology Rated no-load transformer breaking current Rated no-load capacitor breaking current Rated cable-charging breaking current Rated breaking current for locked motors Transfer current acc. motors or capacitors in industrial applications Features C In compliance with IEC 60265-1.000 A 2. 800 A kV kV 7.000 2.000 10.600 1. Applications C Frequent switching of electric loads C In particular for switching transformers. list 2 Rated short-circuit making current Rated short-time current (3s) Rated operating current Rated closed-loop breaking current Photo 4/30 3CG vacuum switch for 12 kV.000 3.600 1.250 Switching capacity under ground fault conditions: – Rated ground fault A breaking current – Rated cable-charging A breaking current under ground fault conditions – Rated cable-charging A breaking current under ground fault conditions with with superimposed load current Operating cycles with rated operating current Table 4/38 630 63 630 63 630 63 630 63 63 + 800 63 + 800 63 + 800 63 + 800 10.500 1.000 3CG vacuum circuit-breaker ratings 4/80 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .000 2. to IEC 60420. inductive switching capacity (cos ϕ ≤ 0. tested in combination with HV HRC fuses C Rated currents up to 800 A C Up to 10.

In addition.Medium Voltage 3CJ2 switch disconnector for daily use Indoor switch disconnectors.000 630 – 2. Photo 4/31 3CJ1 switch disconnector Photo 4/32 3DC disconnector Rated voltage Rated short-time current (1s) Rated short-circuit making current Rated operating current Table 4/39 kV kA kA 12 25 63 17. type 3CJ2.5 20 – 31.5 25 63 24 25 50 36 20 25 A 630 630 630 630 Ratings for 3CJ2 switch disconnectors Rated voltage Rated short-time current (1s) Rated surge current Rated operating current Table 4/40 kV kA 12 20 – 63 24 20 – 31. are multi-purpose switch disconnectors that comply with the relevant standards in their basic versions and when combined with (makeproof) grounding switches.5 kA 40 – 160 40 – 80 50 – 80 80 A 630 – 3. to IEC 60420 Customer benefit C High operator safety C Easy installation C Easy handling C Reliability and safety 3D grounding switch and disconnector 3D grounding switches and disconnectors are well suited for indoor installations up to 40. robust construction C Can be used in difficult climatic environments C Mechanical service life up to 5. our product range includes makeproof grounding switches for 12 kV and 24 kV with a rated short-circuit making current of 50 kA or 40 kA.5 40.5 36 20 – 31.250 – 2.000 operating cycles Customer benefit C Utmost safety for works at switchgear installations C Easy handling 4/81 4 .5 kV.500 Ratings for disconnectors and grounding switches Applications C To protect personnel when working at equipment Features C Utmost reliability and operating safety C Simple. for rare switching of loads C Switching of distribution transformers Features C Multi-purpose switch disconnectors complying with the relevant standards C Can be combined with make-proof grounding switches C Welded basic frame C Isolating blades C Robust arc quenching chambers C Switching angle is always 90° C Can also be supplied as Class B and acc.000 1. Applications C In power distribution.500 630 – 3.

3 – 160 24 31. motors and capacitors for example C Can be combined with load interrupter switches Features C Fuse base for fuse-link.5 6.3 – 100 36 31. Applications C Short-circuit protection in medium-voltage installations C Protection of transformers.3GD high-voltage high-rupturingcapacity fuses High-voltage high-rupturing-capacity (HV HRC) fuses are used for shortcircuit protection. dry-type transformers and cable networks up to 15 kV Special arrester to protect rotating machines and furnaces up to 42 kV Plastic or porcelain enclosure Very high energy absorption capacity Stable and self-contained construction for type 3EE2 Extremely high short-circuit strength (types 3EF3 and 3EE2) 4/82 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .2 63 – 80 6.2 44 400 12 44 400 24 44 400 36 44 400 Product range and rating data Customer benefit C Provides safety due to reliable detection of fault currents C 3E surge arrester Applications C Industry C Power plants Features C Protects the insulators of plants or plant sections against excessive voltage stress C Overvoltage limiter to protect C C C C high-voltage motors.5 – 40 6.6 / 7. type 3GD Photo 4/34 3GH fuse base with HV HRC fuse-links 3GD HV HRC fuse-link Rated voltageg Rated short-circuit breaking current Rated operating current 3GH fuse base Rated voltage Surge current withstand strength Rated current Table 4/41 kV kA kA 7. can be supplied as 1-pole or 3-pole version C Cuts short-circuit currents to low values Customer benefit C Reliable protection of connected consumers C Thanks to its current-limiting function.3 – 250 12 40 – 63 6. more inexpensive consumers can be used 4M instrument transformers for safe measurements Applications C In all types of electrical installations Features C Measurement of electrical quantities in electrical installations C Transformation of currents or voltages into quantities that are better suited for protective devices C Disconnection of high or low voltage C For indoor and outdoor installations C Comprehensive product range: can be supplied in compliance with every relevant standard C Manufactured using state-of-the art cast-resin technologies C Partial discharge level is below the test values required by IEC Photo 4/33 HV HRC fuse.3 – 40 kV kA A 3.

2. 100/0. 60/0. 25/0. 4MR6 indoor.2. single and two-pole.5. 50/0. 150/0.000 3 150 – 3.5 to 42 10 50 to 300 kV kA kA 3. 150/1 180/0. 30/0.5. 400/1 230/4* 230/4* 230/4* 500/9 4MS4 60/0.5. 200/1 100/0. 400/1 * Higher values on request Table 4/42 Product range of current and voltage transformers 3EF For networks Rated discharge surge current Short-circuit current Table 4/43 3EH2 4.000 Secondary changeover 4 4ME1 current transformer for outdoor installations Voltage transformers 5 – 1. 100/0.2.7 to 42 10 16 3EE2 4.5. small model 4MR5.5.5.2.2.2. because the protective characteristics of arresters are relatively unsusceptible to steep-edge surges 12 24 36 52 36 30/0. of cores Primary or secondary changeover Secondary changeover Secondary changeover 3 1.000 4 1. 100/0. 200/1 Photo 4/36 3EE2 surge arrester Customer benefit C Lower protective level than in traditional arresters C Universal solution for an effective protection of high-voltage motors. 50/0. 100/0. 100/1 12 24 36 30/0.2. 100/1 20/0.Medium Voltage Current transformers 4MA7 insulator-type current transformer 4MB1 insulator-type current transformer 4MC2 bushing-type current transformers 4MC3 bushing-type current transformers Photo 4/35 4MA block-type current transformer Ur (kV) 12 24 36 12 24 12 24 36 12 24 36 12 24 36 52 Ur (kV) Ir (A) 10 – 2. 200/1 45/0.2. large model 4MS outdoor.000 – 10.5. 200/1 75/0. 4MR2 indoor.5. single-pole 12 24 20/0.5. 200/1 350/6* 50/0.2.2.500 – 6.200 Primary or secondary changeover 3 Rating of the measuring winding (VA)/class Thermal limit rating of ground-fault detection winding (VA / A) 230/4* 4MR1.5.500 Changeover option No. single and two-pole.6 to 15 1 1 to 40 Surge arresters – technical data and product range 4/83 4 .

Return of investment can often be achieved within less than two years. and thus. This makes power quality management a very interesting topic. operating permits for the connection of such plants can be obtained. POWERCOMP systems are Photo 4/37 2-MW SIPLINK system at the municipal utilities of Ulm in Germany modularly designed and can be used in the voltage range of 3 kV to 36 kV. Power supply systems with differing parameters can thus be coupled. the medium-voltage DC transmission system.4 PQM®– Power Quality Management and Load Flow Control The future of the rapidly changing global power distribution markets lies in the form of power grid operations. are the logical choice to meet these challenges. By utilizing systems for reactive power compensation that are tailored to meet customer requirements. For this reason. POWERCOMP are products and systems that ensure high power quality of an industrial or public medium-voltage supply grid. such as static and dynamic compensation equipment and network couplings based on power electronic components. In the event of significant load fluctuations. the price of the power quantities delivered will be reduced. 4/84 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . power supply companies define the exact power factor as the ratio between active power to be transmitted and the apparent power. SIPLINK. New technologies. Powerful filter circuit systems reduce effective harmonic currents of speed-controlled large drives. Innovative solutions for power supply Most consumers don’t just draw active power from the grid but also reactive power which is somewhat erratically transmitted to the consumer. costs can be saved by optimizing power procurement.4. in their supply contracts. Switching high currents. dynamic compensation systems using thyristor valves or IGBT modules ensure a stable supply voltage. allows economical power exchange at the medium voltage level by using power electronics. measures to be taken by power quality management and handling short circuits remain the major tasks in this context. the load flow during power transmission is controlled and a constant supply of voltage is maintained through the provision of reactive power. Any deviation is on account of the customer.

Applications in the field of power quality management initially require comprehensive measurements of power and harmonic ratios. POWERCOMP compensation systems for medium voltage Compact. Thanks to the use of intelligent load flow controls. This analysis helps to develop and implement the proper PQM solution even for highly complex and sensitive networks. above all. performance. to be paid by the customer Input power from the tuning capacitor Active power P Reactive power Q Required apparent power S Fig. Subnetworks with deviating parameters can also be connected.and costoptimized power procurement is now attainable. intelligent and expandable – this characterizes POCOS®. Such applications 4/85 4 . taking numerous consumer and load requirements into account. By means of a specially developed program. a system which is. Extensive experience from use of this system the world over is continually being channeled into its further development. suitable for use in medium-voltage installations that require a compensation system for a certain technical process or for reasons of ambitious customer specifications. which means that their voltage stability and quality can thus be positively influenced. these data are evaluated in a network analysis that simulates real conditions. 4/37 Definition of electric power types – compensation Photo 4/38 Outdoor installation are gaining ground in the context of growing cost pressure and the widespread use of electronic modules and power electronics for automating and control tasks.Medium Voltage Input power supplied by the power supply company. Photo 4/39 Compact compensation unit State-of-the art power electronics provide efficient and cost-effective options for optimizing power supply and power quality. which are taken using high-tech measuring instruments.

For further information please contact: SIPLINK@ptd. SIPLINK controls the load flow during power transmission and ensures optimal voltage stability by a controlled output of reactive power. frequencies and phase angles. this type of compensation system has been installed at every voltage level all over the world. for example. cement. The SIPLINK can also be used to supply a separate network without a power generating set of its own. Compact compensation systems are not necessarily suited to every type of application. dynamic compensation systems do the job. Besides the basic model for indoor installation. Typical examples are test bays (for 60 Hz or surge voltage generation). operation and total plant service life. In this case. systems for outdoor installation are also available. In order to do so. it may be more reasonable to use conventional systems with capacitors or filter circuits. For further information please contact: POWERCOMP@ptd. in particular if network parameters that differ from the distribution system are required.Photo 4/40 SIPLINK ship Wherever fast load changes result in a dynamic impact on the voltage at the point of connection.com Photo 4/41 Transformer/container model As required. Their dynamic reactive-power compensation function can be combined with an activepower filtering function. a high compensation effect is achieved owing to the use of vacuum switchgear. For the primary industry (including paper.com SIPLINK Closed-loop controlled load flow for power systems with special requirements With SIPLINK (Siemens Multifunctional Power Link). several units can be operated side by side. Fast changing load characteristics of arc furnaces and mill trains affect the system voltage as much as. Individual plant sections with different requirements to power quality and safety of supply can also be operated isolated from the general power supply using SIPLINK. or shipyards and connection points in harbors for the supply of on-board networks of ships. neutral point connections. Choked or nonchoked options are feasible. In some cases. Long-standing experience and comprehensive process knowledge about industrial power supply systems guarantee economical solutions that take customer needs into account. the connected networks may even feature different voltage levels. 4/86 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . or wherever a highly sensitive voltage control is required.siemens.siemens. which allows networks to be linked that still remain electri- cally isolated. chemical and glass). SIPLINK uses technology that is based on self-commutated IGBTs. the dynamic load characteristics in traction systems. Siemens has developed a technology for mediumvoltage direct current transmission that – depending on the application and configuration of an existing supply system – can be utilized by power supply companies and industrial plant operators alike to make tremendous savings in terms of costs of investment. Despite the extremely compact design. steel. optimized capacitors and iron-core reactors.

These decisions must focus on the specific process requirements of the press shop.4 kV HB 0.Medium Voltage 4.4 kV 0.4 kV 20 kV 20 kV 20 kV Fig. decisions must be made regarding the power system design. ratings and operating mode. During the planning of a power supply system. This know-how will be detailed on the basis of process-related power supply planning for a car manufacturing plant.4 kV 0. body shop.4 kV G 3~ 0.4 kV) to supply production processes in an automotive manufacturing plant 4/87 4 . This means that both a thorough knowledge of the relevant industrial technology is required and comprehen- sive know-how about the equipment and systems under consideration. each individual problem can be faced in various ways: by means of technical solutions that feature specific technical advantages.5 Planning of Systems for Primary and Secondary Power Distribution Exemplified by the Automotive Industry When power supply systems are planned. The following requirements shall be met: C Covering a process-oriented power demand Process flow Press shop PR Store Body shop BS Paint shop PS Store Final assembly FA Store Compressor system CS Auxiliary facilities Heating and boiler system HB Social & administrative building AB Transformer Main substation switchgear Paint shop switchgear BS PR 110/20 kV 0.4 kV PS / System 2 UPS M6 M10 6 kV 110/20 kV FA 0. Requirements to the power supply system set by the process The process flow in an automotive manufacturing plant determines the requirements to the electric power system. 4/38 Model network (110/20/6/0. paint shop and the final car assembly.4 kV CS M1 M5 PS / System 1 AB 0. Network and plant engineering solutions for the opti- mum fulfillment of requirements placed on the power supply of a car manufacturing plant will be demonstrated here.

Optimum power system and plant configuration The power supply for the production halls in a car manufacturing plant is distributed by means of medium-voltage load center systems. Most favorable operating mode from the point of view of power engineering – medium voltage (MV) The operating mode of the MV power system is determined by the type of neutral point connection. 4/39 Load center network in combination with a TN-C-S system built from busbar trunking systems accordance with DIN EN 61330 (VDE 0670 Part 611):1997-08. The PEHLA-tested transformer load center substation (TS station). has proven itself as an economical and safe element in distributed power supply. a network configuration as shown in Fig. These high-current busbars and busbar trunking systems replace the typical line network and its main and subdistributions that used to supply the consumers.MV TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 C Ensuring a high degree of supply safety by mastering the (n-1) principle C Ensuring high power quality in accordance with DIN EN 50160:2000-03 (properties of the supply voltage) and DIN EN 61000-2-4 (VDE 0839 Parts 2-4):2003-05 (EMC level) C Ensuring a high degree of safety for man and machinery under normal operating conditions as well as under fault conditions C High adaptability to changing manufacturing processes C Reduction of operating costs due to low maintenance expense and low power losses C Simple operatability and operatorfriendly systems alike In automotive manufacturing plants. 4/38 has proved its worth with regard to technically and economically efficient implementation of these requirements. 4/39 and 4/40). tested in MEB 3 L1-L3 3 MEB 3 MEB 3 MEB PEN LV 3 N 3 High-current busbar system 5 A“≤ 16 mm2 3 A ≥ 25 mm2 L1-L3 N PE L1-L3 N PE Busbar trunking system TS1…TS4 Load center substations distributed in the production area MEB Main equipotential bonding Fig. which are equipped with cast-resin transformers. Every MV load center system is operated in combination with a low-voltage system built from high-current busbars and busbar trunking systems (Fig. The most important types of neutral point connection in MV systems according to DIN VDE 0101 (VDE 0101):2000-01 are as follows: C Isolated neutral C Ground fault compensation or resonant neutral grounding (RESPE) C Low-resistant neutral grounding (NOSPE) 4/88 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . is provided by a load-switchfuse combination which is rated and selected according to the criteria given in IEC 62271-105:2002-08 or DIN EN 60420 (VDE Part 303):1994-09. Protection for the TS stations. The relevant standard for the selection of the high-voltage high rupturing capacity fuses (HV HRC fuses) is DIN VDE 0670-402 (VDE 0670 Part 402):1998-05.

4/89 4 . As far as the type of connection to ground of the system power source and the type of connection to ground of the conductive parts in the electric consumer system are concerned. 4/40 Load center network in combination with a TN-S system built from busbar trunking systems Most favorable operating mode from the point of view of power engineering – low voltage (LV) The system types suitable for operation as LV systems are defined in IEC 60364-1:2001-08 or DIN VDE 0100-300 (VDE 0100 Part 300):1996-01. MV TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 MEB MEB MEB MEB 3 L1-L3 TL 3 TL 3 TL 3 TL PE PEN LV 3 3 High-current busbar system L1-L3 N PE L1-L3 N PE Busbar trunking system TS1…TS4 Load center substations distributed in the production area MEB Main equipotential bonding TLPE/PEN Isolating link (bridge only in one load center substation) Fig. The following advantages are decisive for this trend: C (n-1)-redundant network design allows selective disconnection of 1-pole faults C Protective disconnection of the fault location is carried out without interrupting the power supply C Clearly defined protective trippings and changes of the switching status enable integrated power automation C Low-resistant grounded neutral operation (resistance) prevents high transient long-term operating overvoltages C Danger of fault expansion and double ground faults is eliminated C Short tripping times limit follow-up damages of ground faults at the fault location The operating experience gathered with NOSPE networks used in plants of Volkswagen AG. distinctions can be made between IT. TT and TN systems. BMW AG is another automotive manufacturer that has decided in favor of low-resistant neutral grounding of the 20-kV power system to be installed in their new plant at Leipzig. Adam Opel AG and DaimlerChrysler AG confirms the advantages of low-resistant neutral grounding.Medium Voltage There is a general tendency towards replacing resonant grounding of the neutral point by low-resistant neutral grounding in MV cable networks in the automotive industry.

4kV 1250kVA 6% UN = 400 V S“k = 55 MVA ∆u‘ = 1.2 % 100 0. 4/40 is not backed up by national or international standards. the form of design represented in Fig.4 0. higher requirements are placed on electromagnetic compatibility in order to prevent any negative impact on the production process by electromagnetic interference of communication and information technology systems. LV systems for the automotive industry have so far been designed exclusively as TN-C-S systems. a TN-S system is only feasible if the PEN conductors or the individual supply circuits can be grounded at a central point.4kV 1250kVA 6% TS2 20/0.3 0. an LV system conforming to VDE can only be designed as TN-C system with common neutral and protective conductor (PEN conductor). only Adam Opel AG has operated a multiple-supply LV system as TN-S system.2 10-1 10-1 100 101 15 Load operations/min 102 103 [min-1] 104 n Fig.4kV 1250kVA 6% TS3 20/0. Until a valid standard has been adopted. In multiple-supply LV systems. it is the sole responsibility of the switchgear installer or plant operator. 4/41 LV system rating in a press shop according to the voltage changes ∆u’perm as a function of the frequency n 4/90 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .TS2 20/0. too. Only at a lower level can a TN-S system be built with a separate neutral conductor (N conductor) and protective ground conductor (PE conductor).6 0. For distributed transformer infeeds (highcurrent busbar). In a modern automotive manufacturing plant.8 0. At present. An EMCsuitable LV system with a continuously de-energized PE conductor must be designed as TN-S system. So far.2 % ~ M5 3~ 160 kW Press 5 ~ M2 3~ 160 kW Press 2 M1 M4 3~ 160 kW Press 4 M6 3~ 115 kW Try-out press M1 M2 3~ 160 kW Press 2 M5 3~ 160 kW Press 5 The TN system is the preferred system type for supplying power to automotive manufacturing plants. 250 kW Special press 280 kW Special press Press line 1 Average cycle time for pressing the body parts T = 4s (n = load operations/min) 101 Press line 2 ∆u‘zul [%] 3 2 ∆u‘ = 1. Consequently.

The optimum degree of choking p depends on the harmonic contents of the vth order (v = 5. 4/91 4 . Paint shop Paint shop processes are characterized by high load densities and long ON periods of the consumers. voltage changes due to surge-type loads must be limited in such a way that the operational safety of consumers is not endangered and the optical stress on the human eye by current fluctuations in the lighting system remains within reasonable limits. A favorable solution in terms of power engineering proves to be the use of capacitors with a rated voltage of 480 V ≤ Um ≤ 525 V. For rating the welding network.Medium Voltage Process-dependent particularities for the design of subsystems – press shop In the press shop. observance of the permissible compatibility level for harmonic contents has been verified by measurements in several 400-V welding networks in the automotive industry. For the non-choked compensation method. Another requirement for the LV system in the press shop is for the permissible compatibility levels for harmonic contents to be observed as defined in DIN EN 61000-2-4 (VDE Parts 2-4):2003-05. inductorcapacitor units with a choking degree between p = 6% and p = 7% are mainly used. 23 and 25 for 3-phase bridge circuits) that are mostly present. L2-L3 (Fig. intermittent burden on the power system. merely of minor importance. compensation can normally be made non-choked. the compensation system of the switchgear substations must normally be inductor-type. as they generate harmonics of the vth order. As important as the observance of the permissible compatibility levels for harmonic contents according to DIN EN 61000-2-4 (VDE 0839 Parts 24): 2003-05 is the strict fulfillment of safety-of-supply requirements set by the painting process itself. 7. a large number of motorized press drives are installed for forming metal sheets into body parts. the thermal equivalent current is. the identical power factor cosϕ and the same relative ON period OP. 4/42). the different welding machine types are combined into one uniform equivalent welding machine with an identical peak welding current Iw. Body shop Connection of the welders in the 400-V system of the body shop is carried out in groups by a symmetric distribution to the phase conductors L1-L2. The calculation is performed by means of the thermal equivalent current method by establishing the square average. To maintain these levels. however. Therefore. This probability peak load calculation provides the required indicator for evaluating the power supply quality in the body shop. To apply the Bernoulli formula. the equipment in the welding circuit must be rated according to its thermal equivalent current. In practice. What is particularly typical is the negative impact on power quality caused by the rectifiers for the electro-dipcoating or cataphoretic painting process. The individual power output of these drives is relatively high compared to the total power demand of the press shop and it puts a surgetype. 19. these rectifiers are preferably supplied directly from the MV system via separate transformers. > 10%). a probability calculation based on binomially distributed welding currents. 4/41. Another quality indicator is the scrap rate for voltage-related faulty weldings λ(∆u’perm. The permissible limit value for this scrap rate is λperm = 1‰. 13. In the body shop. L1-L3. 11. In order to relieve the LV system from harmonic impact. the machines for welding the body parts connected in the circuit do not constitute a continuous load. Another system perturbation is caused by the thyristor controllers of the press drives. Due to their intermittent operating mode. The thermal equivalent current must be calculated as a sequence of accidentally overlapping welding pulses. The probability calculation of these voltage dips is again based on the binomial distribution. Owing to the short-circuit power of the network. What is vital for quality-responsive welding of the body parts is the presence of voltage dips that do not exceed a limit ∆u’ = 10% in the statistic mean. An example of how to meet this power quality requirement is shown in Fig. What is more important are the voltage dips caused by the accidentally overlapping welding pulses. 17.

Power demand is largely influenced by the simultaneity factor g. Final assembly The connected power of the consumers in the final car assembly is relatively low as compared to the nominal power of the supplying transformers. In this type of connection. 4/39) or TN-S system are designed with identical cross sections as a matter of principle. the power factor cos ϕ and the efficiency η. 4/42 This includes the uninterruptible handling of the single fault by a protective disconnection of the fault location from supply. The current harmonic whereby v = 3 is particularly distinctive. L2. Welding machine group Number of welders Peak welding current is Relative ON period OP OP = i L1–L2 90 800 A 8% i L1–L3 90 i L2–L3 90 ts 100. all current harmonics of the order v that can be divided by 3 add up in the neutral conductor N. the degree of utilization a. there is no binding standard for the design of a multiple-infeed LV system as TN-S system. To prevent thermal overload caused by current harmonics. Cast-resin transformers at the TS station provide an instantaneous standby or “hot” redundancy to handle such single faults. In addition. L3). neutral conductor (N) and PEN conductor of the TN-C-S system (Fig. In the final assembly plant section. An EMC-suitable LV system with a continuously de-energized protective conductor (PE) must be designed as TN-S system. Summary The load center network in combination with a TN system consisting of busbar trunking systems is the ideal network configuration for the power supply of production halls in an automotive manufacturing plant. The rating of the supply networks for the processes handled in the production halls results in engineering differences such as the number and size of the supplying transformers and the method of compensation. the phase conductors (L1. with welding time ts and cycle time T T Operation of welding machines arranged in groups in the 0. For this reason. a standby supply is provided for sensitive and fail-critical consumers.Q1 L1 L2 L3 PEN PE L1 L2 L3 PEN PE Q2 Q3 Q4 2. Currently. Low-resistant neutral point grounding is most advantageous for MV system operation. a large proportion of the nonlinear consumers is single-phase con- 4/92 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . the maximum power demand of all consumers in the grid is important for system rating.4 kV power system of the body shop (TN-S system) Fig. There is only a unanimously optimum solution for the design and operation of the supply networks.500 A high-current busbar L1 L2 L3 N PE 800 A busbar trunking systems i nected between phase conductor (L1vL2vL3) and neutral conductor (N).

Medium Voltage 4/93 4 .

.

Transformers chapter 5 .

Parts 1 to 5. Important additional standards C DIN 42500. rated power and voltage level. Distribution transformers are within the range from 50 to 2.5 Transformers Transformers are one of the primary components for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy. Therefore they also satisfy the requirements of IEC Publication 60076. 36 kV. operating voltage kV ≤ 36 ≤ 36 0.e. they distribute the electrical energy to the consumers by feeding from the highvoltage into the low-voltage distribution network.500 kVA and max. HD 428: oil-immersed three-phase distribution transformers 50–2500 kVA C DIN 42523.5 0. DIN VDE 0532 “Transformers and reactors” and the “Technical conditions of supply for three-phase transformers” issued by VDEW and ZVEI. Their design mainly results from the range of application. Rated power MVA Oil distribution transformers GEAFOL cast-resin transformers Table 5/1 Transformer types Max. Only the US (ANSI/NEMA) and Canadian (CSA) standards differ from IEC by any substantial degree. In the last stage. HD 538: three-phase dry-type transformers 100–2500 kVA C DIN 45635 T30: noise level C IEC 60289: reactance coils and neutral grounding transformers C IEC 60076-10: measurement of noise level C IEC 60076-11: dry-type transformers C RAL: coating/varnish 5/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Transformers with a rated power up to 2.05 – 2.5 MVA and a voltage up to 36 kV are referred to as distribution transformers. These are designed either as liquid-filled or as dry-type transformers. together with the standards and specifications (HD and EN) of the European Union (EU). i. The scope of transformer types extends from generator transformers to distribution transformers. all transformers of higher ratings are classified as power transformers. Enquiries should be directed to the manufacturer where other standards and specifications are concerned. construction.10 – 40 General standards and specifications The transformers comply with the relevant VDE specifications.

C 20 °C average in any one year. 5/3 5 . Higher ambient temperatures require a corresponding reduction in temperature rise.0% reduction of rated power for each 1 K above standard temperature conditions. Site altitudes above 1000 m necessitate the use of special designs.5% surcharge for each 1 K above standard temperature conditions. For every 100 m above the permissible altitude of installation. If two ratings are shown. For cast-resin transformers. as defined in IEC 60076-1. Altitude of installation The transformers are suitable for operation at altitudes up to 1000 metres above sea level. 5/1 Dy1 I iii III ii i 1 Yd1 I 1 i ii II II III iii Dy5 I ii III i 5 Yd5 iii II III ii I iii i 5 II Dy11 11 i I Yd11 11 i II I ii III iii III ii iii II Most commonly used vector groups Whereby the standard ambient temperatures are defined as follows: C 40 °C maximum temperature. C 30 °C average on any one day. C –5 °C lowest temperature indoors. C –25 °C lowest temperature outdoors. forced-air cooling (ONAF or FA) in one or two steps is applicable.5%. Forcedair cooling (AF) is also applicable. if several taps are provided). natural air cooling (AN) is standard. 0. the rated power for oil-immersed transformers is to be reduced by approx. Temperature rise In accordance with IEC 60076. the standard temperature rise for oil-immersed power and distribution transformers is: C 65 K (average winding temperature measured by the resistance method) C 60 K maximum oil temperature (measured by thermometer) The standard temperature rise for Siemens cast-resin transformers is C 100 K (insulation class F) at HV and LV winding. 0.Transformers Electrical Design Power ratings and type of cooling All power ratings in this guide are the product of rated voltage (noload voltage times phase-factor for three-phase transformers) and rated current of the line side winding (at center tap. Fig. expressed in kVA or MVA. If only one power rating and no cooling method are shown. These adjustment factors are applicable up to 15 K above standard temperature conditions. and thus affect price or rated power as follows: C 1.4% and for drytype transformers for approx. or C 1. natural oil-air cooling (ONAN or OA) is implied for oilimmersed transformers.

150 or 330 degrees standard (Dy1. Overloading Overloading of Siemens transformers is guided by the relevant IEC 60354 “Loading guide for oil-immersed transformers” and the (similar) ANSI C57. Dy5. this must be stated in the inquiry. Connections and vector groups Distribution transformers The transformers listed in this manual are all three-phase transformers with one set of windings connected in star (wye) and the other one in delta. The following special tests are optional and must be specified further in the enquiry: C Lightning-impulse voltage test (LI test). load losses are reduced by 15%. C Rated power increases by 20%. as follows: Conversion to 60 Hz – possibilities All ratings in the selection tables of this guide are based on 50 Hz operation. Test voltages Power-frequency withstand voltages and lightning-impulse withstand voltages are in accordance with IEC 60076-3. C All technical data remain identical. whereby the neutral of the star-connected winding is fully rated and brought to the outside. namely +10% of the total losses. If optimized and/or guaranteed losses without tolerances are required.92 “Guide for loading mineral-oilimmersed power transformers. The primary winding (HV) is normally connected in delta. Paragraph 5. full-wave and choppedwave (to be specified) C Partial discharge test C Heat-run test at natural or forced cooling (to be specified) C Noise level test C Peak short-circuit test. The electrical offset of the windings in respect to each other is either 30. but no-load losses increase by 30% and noise level increases by 3 dB. For 60 Hz operation.Transformer losses and efficiencies Losses and efficiencies stated in this manual are average values for guidance only. all other parameters remain identical. or +15% of each component loss. the secondary winding (LV) in wye. C Temperature rise is reduced by 10 K. Test certificates are issued for all of the above tests on request. Other vector groups as well as single-phase transformers and autotransformers on request. 5/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Dy11). They are applicable if no loss evaluation figure is stated in the inquiry (see following chapter) and they are subject to the tolerances stated in IEC 60076-1. provided that the tolerance for the total losses is not exceeded." Routine and special tests All transformers are subjected to the following routine tests in the factory: C Measurement of winding resistance C Measurement of voltage ratio and check of polarity or vector group C Measurement of impedance voltage C Measurement of load loss C Measurement of no-load loss and no-load current C Induced overvoltage withstand test (windings test) C Separate-source voltage withstand test (AC test voltage) C Partial discharge test (only GEAFOL cast-resin transformers). the following options apply: C Rated power and impedance voltage are increased by 10%. price is reduced by 5%. Table II.” Overloading of GEAFOL cast-resin transformers according to IEC 60905 "Loading guide. all other parameters remain identical. all other parameters remain identical (this layout is not possible for cast-resin transformers).

Cost of no-load loss CP0 = Ce · 8760 h / year · P0 amount ––––––– year amount ––––––– kWh Ce P0 = energy charges = no-load loss [kW] C. The ventilation system must be large enough to fulfil the recommendations for the maximum temperatures according to IEC. the added cost of lossoptimized transformers can in most cases be counterbalanced by savings in power consumption in less than three years. Cost of load loss CPk = Ce · 8760 h / year · α2 · Pk α Pk amount ––––––– year constant operating load = –––––––––––––––––––––––– rated load = copper loss [kW] D. making the following assumptions: C The transformers are operated continuously C The transformers operate at partial load. taking the project-specific evaluation factors of a given customer into account. Low-loss transformers use more and better materials for their construction.a. A. 5/5 5 . this is especially important. Cost resulting from demand charges CD = Cd (P0 + Pk) amount ––––––– year amount –––––––– kW · year Cd = demand charges Table 5/2 Cost examination for transformer selection Table 5/2 gives a simplified method for a quick evaluation of different quoted transformer losses.Transformers Transformer cell (indoor installation) The transformer cell must have the necessary electrical clearances when an open-air connection is used. In case of distribution and power transformers. but this partial load is constant C Additional cost and inflation factors are not considered C Demand charges are based on 100% load. = depreciation period in years Transformer loss evaluation The sharply increased costs of electrical energy have made it almost mandatory for buyers of electrical machinery to carefully evaluate the inherent losses of this equipment. which operate continuously and most frequently in loaded condition. By stipulating loss evaluation figures in the transformer enquiry. Capital cost Cp · r CC = –––––– 100 amount ––––––– year Cp = purchase price r= q= p n p · qn –––––– qn – 1 = depreciation factor p –––– + 1 = interest factor 100 = interest rate in % p. As an example. the manufacturer receives the necessary information to offer a loss-optimized transformer rather than the low-cost model. B. therefore their purchase price is higher. Detailed loss evaluation methods for transformers have been developed and are described accurately in the literature.

...........800 · 13.. Cost of load loss (CPk) based on the copper loss (Pk)..13 €/kWh € Cd = 179 ––––––– kW · year α = 0. Demand charge....a.. the equivalent annual load factor (α)........790/year CP0 = 0......7 = € 1. To demonstrate the usefulness of such calculations....13 · 8760 · 2.700 per year pays for the increased purchase price in less than one year. Depreciation factor r = 13....The total cost of owning and operating a transformer for one year is thus defined as follows: A......6 = € 2..7 + 17) = € 3.300 · 13......64 ·20 = € 14.... These individual costs are calculated as shown in Table 5/2.............6 + 20) = € 4...936/year CPk = 0..... the interest rate (p).. Cost of no-load loss (CP0) based on the no-load loss (P0)... Equivalent annual load factor ...6 kW Pk = 20 kW Cp = € 12800 12..........390/year C0 = 179 · (1. and neglecting the effects of inflation on the rate assumed. and energy cost (Ce) C.. Energy charge .......13 · 8760 · 0..580/year C0 = 179 · (2..600 kVA distribution transformer 5/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens ...... Loss-optimized transformer P0 = 1.. and the depreciation period (n) B.....13 · 8760 · 0..961/year CPk = 0.........8 A.......... Low-cost transformer P0 = 2......350/year Total cost of owning and operating this transformer is thus: € 19.......000/year CP0 = 0. and the total power loss.99 Cd = –––––––––––––– 100 = € 1.. Table 5/3 Example: 1....64 ·17 = € 12. Demand charges (Cd) based on the power demand set by the power supply company.....045/year Total cost of owning and operating this transformer is thus: € 23.....676/year no-load loss load loss purchase price The energy saving of the optimized distribution transformer of € 3...... Capital cost (CC) taking into account the purchase price (Cp)...99 Cd = –––––––––––––– 100 = € 2.....99 Ce = 0... Interest rate ... using factors that can be considered typical in Germany.13 · 8760 · 1. Depreciation period..7 kW Pk = 17 kW Cp = € 14300 14..376/year no-load loss load loss purchase price B. the following arbitrary examples are shown. and energy cost (Ce) D........ n p = 20 years = 12 % p......

the TUMETIC transformer is lower than the TUNORMA®transformer. copper band or aluminum band. Oil level changes due to thermal cycling affect the conservator only. The insulation has a high disruptive strength and is temperature-resistant.5 %/0. Generally. These transformers are always shipped completely filled with oil and sealed for their lifetime. TUNORMA distribution transformers with conservator This is the standard distribution transformer design in all ratings. Silicone oil or synthetic liquids are available (on request) C Standard coating for outdoor installation.000 kVA are preferably of the corrugated steel design. three-phase. whereby the maximum operating pressure remains at only a fraction of the usual. This improves the ageing properties of the oil to the extent that no maintenance is required on these transformers for their lifetime.g. whereby the sidewalls are formed on automatic machines into integral cooling pockets. Tank bottom and cover are fabricated from rolled and welded steel plate.500 kVA and 170 kV LI this is the standard sealed-tank distribution transformer without conservator and gas cushion. Bushings can be exchanged from the outside without draining the oil below the top of the active part. or humidity from contact with the insulating oil. Coatings for special applications (e. This design has been in successful service since 1973. Suitable spot welds and braces render the required mechanical stability. The hermetically sealed system prevents oxygen. A special TUMETIC protection device has been developed for this transformer. oil expansion is taken up by the flexible corrugated steel tank (variable volume tank design).4 kV distribution transformer Tanks from 50 kVA to approximately 6. The oil level in the tank and the top-mounted bushings is kept constant by a conservator vessel or expansion tank mounted at the highest point of the transformer. Photo 5/1 Cross section of a TUMETIC three-phase distribution transformer Photo 5/2 630 kVA. 5/7 5 . in aggressive environments) are available Tank design and oil preservation system TUMETIC® sealed-tank distribution transformers In ratings up to 2. The TUMETIC transformer is always completely filled with oil. core-type C Windings consisting of copper section wire. nitrogen. The ambient air is prevented from direct contact with the insulating oil through oil traps and dehydrating breathers. thus guaranteeing a long service life C Designed to withstand short circuit for at least 2 seconds (IEC) C Oil-filled tank designed as tank with strong corrugated walls or as radiator tank C Transformer base with plain or flanged wheels (skid base available) C Cooling/insulation liquid: Mineral oil according to VDE 0370/IEC 60296(3).Transformers Mechanical Design General mechanical design for oilimmersed transformers C Iron core made of grain-oriented electrical sheet steel insulated on both sides. TUNORMA 20 kV ± 2.

Insulated plug connectors (Photo 5/4) For substation installations. Suitable for single-core or three-phase cables with solid dielectric insulation. three basic insulated terminal systems are available. Besides the open bushing arrangement for direct connection of bare or insulated wires. These can accommodate either HV. insulated busbars or throat-connected switchgear cubicles are connected via standardized flanges on steel terminal enclosures. Fiberglass-reinforced epoxy partitions are available between HV and LV bushings if flange/flange arrangements are chosen. plus protection against drip. or for both. Fully enclosed terminal box for cables (Photo 5/3) Available for either HV or LV side. LV or both bushings. with or without stress cones. Removal of transformer by simply bending back the cables. Cable installation through split cable glands and removable plates facing diagonally downwards. Horizontally split design in degree of protection IP 44 or IP 54 (totally enclosed and fully protected against contact with live parts. all terminal system combinations listed in Table 5/4 are possible. Apart from open-type arrangements of the bushings. Photo 5/3 Fully enclosed cable connection box Photo 5/4 Grounded metal elbow plug connection HV Cable box Cable box Flange Flange LV Cable box Flange Cable box Flange connection boxes Cable box Elbow connector Elbow connector Table 5/4 Flange Possible combinations of connection systems Photo 5/5 Flange connection for switchgear and bus ducts Flange connection (Photo 5/5) Air-insulated bus ducts. splash or spray water). suitable HV can be applied using insulated elbow connectors in LI ratings up to 170 kV. Multiple cables per phase are terminated on auxiliary bus structures attached to the bushings. 5/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .Connection Systems Distribution transformers All Siemens transformers have topmounted HV and LV bushings according to DIN in their standard version.

Installed in the connecting pipe between tank and conservator and responding to internal arcing faults and slow decomposition of insulating materials. Photo 5/8 Magnetic oil level indicator Photo 5/6 Double-float Buchholz relay Photo 5/7 Dial-type contact thermometer Dial-type contact thermometer (Photo 5/7) Indicates actual top-oil temperature. The relay is actuated either by pressure waves or gas accumulation or by loss of oil below the relay level. Up to four separately adjustable alarm contacts and one maximum pointer are available. Sensor mounted in well in tank cover. Devices supplied with limit (position) switches for high. Additionally. backup function of oil alarm.and low-level alarm are available.Transformers Accessories and Protective Devices Accessories not listed completely. gas samples can be drawn directly at the relay with a small chemical testing kit. Separate contacts are installed for alarm and tripping. Magnetic oil level indicator (Photo 5/8) The float position inside of the conservator is transmitted magnetically through the tank wall to the indicator. Discoloring of two liquids indicates either arcing by-products or insulation decomposition products in the oil. Double-float Buchholz relay (Photo 5/6) For sudden pressure rise and gas detection in oil-immersed transformer tanks with conservator. 5/9 5 . Readable from the ground. No change in color indicates an air bubble. These instruments can also be used to control forced-cooling equipment. Installed to be readable from the ground. Deviations are possible. In case of a gas accumulation alarm.

Photo 5/12 Pressure relief device 5/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .Photo 5/9 Protective device for hermetically sealed transformers (TUMETIC) Photo 5/10 Dehydrating breather Photo 5/11 Dehydrating breather Protective device for hermetically sealed transformers (TUMETIC) (Photo 5/9) For use on hermetically sealed TUMETIC distribution transformers. Reseals positively after operation and continues to function without operator action. Pressure relief device (Photo 5/12) Relieves abnormally high internal pressure shock waves. Mounted directly at the (permanently sealed) filler pipe of these transformers. Dehydrating breather (Photos 5/10. Easily visible operation pointer and alarm contact. Gives alarm upon loss of oil and gas accumulation. The dehydrating breather contributes to safe and reliable operation of the transformer. 5/11) A dehydrating breather removes most of the moisture from the air which is drawn into the conservator as the transformer cools down.

B and C) were specified. the listings D and E.3. 5/3 is the preferred design. B’ and C’) for no-load losses (P0) and corresponding sound levels. For load losses. DIN 42500 specifies the combinations A-C’. There were also three listings (A’. from 50 kVA to 2. Losses The standard HD 428. pairs of values were proposed which. The combinations B-A’ (normal losses) and A-C’ (reduced losses) are approximately in line with previous standards. Transformers of this kind with additionally reduced impedance especially economical (maximum efficiency > 99%).1. the listings D’ and E’ were specified. Um to 24 kV. For high voltages up to 24 kV and a rating up to 2. C-C’ and B-A’ as being most suitable. Standard Rated power Rated frequency HV rating Taps on HV side LV rating DIN 42500 50–2500 kVA 50 Hz up to 36 kV ± 2. please see the aforementioned section on “Transformer loss evaluation.5 % or 2 x ± 2.1 12 24 36 Table 5/6 Lightning impulse test voltage AC test voltage kV kV – 75 125 170 Insulation level (IP 00) 3 28 50 70 for no-load losses.S1 (= DIN 42500. the conservator is fitted at the vertical side just above the low-voltage bushings. in the national standard. Due to the different requirements. In order to find the most efficient transformer.500 kVA. three different listings (A. For load losses (Pk). In addition. there is the C-C’ combination. Standard HD 428.S1 (= DIN 42500-3) specifies the losses for oil distribution transformers up to Um = 36 kV. permit one or several combinations of losses. The higher costs of these transformers are counteracted by the energy savings which they make.” 5/11 5 .500 kVA (and with high voltages > 24–36 kV and a rating up to 800 kVA). Part 1) applies to three-phase oil-immersed distribution transformers 50 Hz.5 % 400 – 720 V (special designs for up to 12 kV can be built) HV winding: delta LV winding: star (up to 100 kVA: zigzag) Connection Impedance voltage at rated current 6 % at (4 % only up to 630 kVA rated power and HV rating up to 24 kV) ONAN IP 00 RAL 7033 (other colors are available) Cooling Protection class Final coating Table 5/5 TUMETIC and TUNORMA three-phase oil-immersed distribution transformers Um kV 1.Transformers Technical Data of TUNORMA and TUMETIC Distribution Transformers Note: The tank with strong corrugated walls represented in Fig.

Fig. 10 Lashing lug Notes: Tank with strong corrugated walls shown in illustration is the preferred design. 10 Lashing lug 11 Oil filler neck 12 Provision for mounting protective device Fig.12 11 10 3 8 2N 2U 2V 2W H1 7 9 2 8 E 2 3 6 7 8 Oil drain plug Thermometer pocket Adjustment for off-load tap changer Rating plate (relocatable) Grounding terminals 1U 2U 1W B1 6 A1 9 Towing eye. 30 mm dia. 5/2 TUMETIC distribution transformer (sealed tank) 4 5 1 10 H1 3 8 2N 2U 2V 2W 1U 2U 1W B1 7 9 2 1 2 3 4 5 Oil level indicator Oil drain plug Thermometer pocket Buchholz relay (optional extra) Dehydrating breather (optional extra) 6 A1 8 E 6 Adjustment for off-load tap changer 7 Rating plate (relocatable) 8 Grounding terminals 9 Towing eye.500 kVA (and with HV ratings > 24–36 kV and rated power up to 800 kVA). With HV ratings up to 24 kV and rated power up to 2. 5/3 TUNORMA distribution transformer (with conservator) 5/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . the conservator is fitted on the long side just above the LV bushings. 30 mm dia.

5380-3CA B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-D´ B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-D´ B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-D´ B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-D´ Pk 75* W 1350 1100 875 1350 1100 875 1450 2150 1750 1475 2150 1750 1475 2350 3100 2350 2000 3100 2350 2000 3350 3600 2760 2350 3600 2760 2350 3800 LPA dB 42 34 34 42 34 33 x 45 35 35 45 35 35 x 47 37 38 47 37 37 x 48 38 38 48 38 38 x LWA dB 55 47 47 55 47 47 52 59 49 49 59 49 49 56 62 52 52 62 52 52 59 63 53 53 63 53 53 61 A1 kg 340 400 420 370 430 480 500 500 570 600 520 600 640 660 620 700 760 660 730 800 900 720 840 900 800 890 950 1000 350 430 440 380 460 510 x 500 570 620 530 610 680 x 610 690 780 640 730 820 x 710 830 920 780 910 980 x B1 mm 980 660 660 660 660 660 685 710 660 660 660 685 690 695 780 710 660 660 695 695 710 800 680 660 660 820 755 705 800 660 660 660 660 660 685 710 660 660 660 685 690 695 780 710 660 660 695 695 710 800 680 660 660 820 755 705 800 TUMETIC E mm 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 x x x x W 190 125 125 190 125 125 230 320 210 210 320 210 210 380 460 300 300 460 300 300 520 550 360 360 550 360 360 600 mm 860 1210 1085 1210 1085 1220 1095 1315 1235 1300 1220 1385 1265 1530 825 1045 835 760 860 985 860 860 24 4 4 4 880 1100 1000 x 36 100 12 6 4 4 4 1090 1020 980 1030 980 930 1275 1110 1315 1145 1320 1150 1360 1245 1400 1280 1425 1305 1600 24 4 4 4 1020 1140 1030 1030 960 1060 1050 x 36 160 12 6 4 4 4 1140 1140 1130 1010 985 1085 1150 1150 1030 930 1350 1185 1390 1220 1380 1215 1440 1320 1540 1420 1475 1355 1700 24 4 4 4 1120 1120 1120 x 36 (200) 12 6 4 4 4 1190 1190 1070 1120 1130 1130 1290 1290 1110 1230 1080 1180 1250 x 1450 1285 1470 1300 1450 1285 1595 1425 1630 1460 1595 1430 1700 24 4 4 4 36 6 Dimensions and weights are approximate values. x: On request * Related to 75 °C Table 5/7 Selection table for oil-immersed distribution transformers from 50 to 2.4744-3RB ... Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized...5244-3TA .4744-3LB .4767-3LB ..Rated power Max.....5344-3TA .5267-3TA .5044-3RB .5267-3RA .5044-3LB ..500 kVA 5/13 5 .5367-3TA .. rated voltage HV side Impedance voltage Type Combination of losses acc.5367-3RA ...5080-3CB ..5344-3RA .4744-3TB ..5280-3CA ... 4HB.5367-3LA ..5067-3TB ..5344-3LA .4780-3CB .5044-3TB .5267-3LA ...4767-3RB ..5067-3RB ..5067-3LB ..... ..5244-3LA .5244-3RA . to No-load losses Load losses Sound Sound Total weight Length Dimensions Width Height Rollerto-roller distance (centers) pressure power level 1 m level tolerance TUNORMA TUNORMA TUNORMA TUNORMA TUNORMA H1 mm TUMETIC TUMETIC TUMETIC TUMETIC CENELEC + 3 dB Sn kVA 50 Um kV 12 Uz % 4 4 4 P0 4JB.4767-3TB ...

5444-3LA .5644-3RA ..5580-3CA ... x: On request * Related to 75 °C Table 5/8 Selection table for oil-immersed distribution transformers from 50 to 2.5467-3RA ...5667-3LA . Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized.5780-3CA B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-E´ B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-E´ B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-E´ B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-E´ Pk 75* W 4200 3250 2750 4200 3250 2750 4250 5000 3850 3250 5000 3850 3250 5400 6000 4600 3850 6000 4600 3850 6200 7100 5450 4550 7100 5450 4550 7800 LPA dB 50 40 40 49 39 40 x 50 40 40 50 40 40 x 52 42 42 52 42 42 x 53 42 43 53 42 43 x LWA dB 65 55 55 65 55 55 62 66 56 56 66 56 56 64 68 58 58 68 58 58 65 69 59 59 69 59 59 66 A1 kg 830 940 820 920 B1 mm 810 670 690 800 760 715 800 820 820 820 840 820 820 960 930 820 820 940 820 820 990 840 890 820 835 835 820 1030 810 820 700 760 680 710 x 820 820 820 840 820 820 x 930 820 820 940 820 820 x 840 890 820 850 820 820 x TUMETIC E mm 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 x x x x W 650 425 425 650 425 425 650 780 510 510 780 510 510 760 930 610 610 930 610 610 930 1100 720 720 1100 720 720 1050 mm 1300 1300 1260 1260 1220 1220 1340 1340 1140 1190 1220 1340 1350 x 1450 1285 1480 1415 1530 1310 1620 1450 1675 1510 1640 1475 1680 1050 1070 920 900 24 4 4 4 1010 1010 1120 1140 1100 980 x 960 36 (315) 12 6 4 4 4 1440 1330 1400 1250 1380 1260 1450 1350 1410 1270 1395 1290 1420 x 1655 1385 1690 1415 1665 1390 1655 1510 1755 1610 1675 1540 1700 1120 1100 1240 1260 1050 1030 1170 1150 1250 1280 1220 x 24 4 4 4 36 400 12 6 4 4 4 1180 1160 1320 1310 1470 1470 1240 1220 1370 1350 1490 1520 1480 x 1470 1390 1400 1360 1410 1390 1570 1570 1475 1400 1440 1400 1470 x 1700 1425 1700 1430 1695 1420 1655 1510 1760 1615 1765 1540 1830 24 4 4 4 36 (500) 12 6 4 4 4 1410 1380 1650 1620 1700 1710 1460 1440 1650 1620 1860 1910 1680 x 1500 1430 1560 1550 1500 1470 1470 1530 1495 1420 1535 1500 1510 x 1710 1440 1745 1470 1745 1470 1755 1610 1815 1665 1860 1645 1900 24 4 4 4 36 6 Dimensions and weights are approximate values.5567-3LA .5644-3LA .5580-3CA ..Rated power Max.....5744-3TA .5467-3TA .5444-3TA ...5544-3TA ..5567-3RA ....5644-3TA ...5467-3LA .5444-3RA ..5567-3TA .500 kVA 5/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens ..5767-3RA ...5744-3RA ..5744-3LA . . 4HB.5544-3RA .. rated voltage HV side Impedance voltage Type Combination of losses acc.5667-3RA .5767-3LA ...5667-3TA .. to No-load losses Load losses Sound Sound Total weight Length Dimensions Width Height Rollerto-roller distance (centers) pressure power level 1 m level tolerance TUNORMA TUNORMA TUNORMA TUNORMA TUNORMA H1 mm TUMETIC TUMETIC TUMETIC TUMETIC CENELEC + 3 dB Sn kVA 250 Um kV 12 Uz % 4 4 4 P0 4JB.5480-3CA .5544-3LA ....5767-3TA .

rated voltage HV side TUNORMA TUMETIC Impedance voltage Type Combination of losses acc..5944-3SA ..5967-3PA .. to CENELEC No-load losses Load losses Sound Sound Total weight Length Dimensions Width Height Rollerto-roller distance (centers) TUNORMA TUNORMA TUNORMA TUNORMA H1 mm 880 820 820 890 870 830 860 870 820 880 830 880 x 1755 1585 1785 1510 1860 1520 1920 1685 1740 1400 1840 1500 1810 1595 1910 1695 1940 1725 1760 1610 1810 1595 1840 1625 1940 x pressure power level 1 m level tolerance TUMETIC TUMETIC TUMETIC + 3 dB Sn kVA 630 Um kV 12 Uz % 4 4 4 6 6 6 P0 4JB..5867-3UA .5867-3PA .5944-3PA .500 kVA 5/15 5 ..6044-3PA . Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized.5867-3RA . 4HB.5844-3LA .5844-3SA .5844-3TA ....5867-3TA .5944-3UA ..6080-3CA B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-E´ B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-E´ B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-E´ Pk 75* W 8400 6500 5400 8700 6750 5600 8400 6500 5400 8700 6750 5600 8800 10700 8500 7400 10700 8500 7400 11000 13000 10500 9500 13000 10500 9500 13000 LPA dB 53 43 43 53 43 43 53 43 43 53 43 43 x 55 45 44 55 45 44 x 55 45 45 55 45 45 x LWA dB 70 60 60 70 60 60 70 60 60 70 60 60 67 72 62 62 72 62 62 68 73 63 63 73 63 63 68 A1 kg 1660 1660 1850 1810 2000 1990 1750 1760 1950 1920 2160 2130 1690 1650 1940 1920 2100 2130 1730 1720 1970 1960 2240 2210 1950 x B1 mm 880 835 820 890 870 830 860 870 820 880 830 880 1080 TUMETIC E mm 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 x x W 1300 860 860 1200 800 800 1300 860 860 1200 800 800 1300 1450 950 950 1450 950 950 1520 1700 1100 1100 1700 1100 1100 1700 mm 1680 1480 1495 1420 1535 1380 1720 1560 1665 1600 1670 1560 1665 1640 1685 1680 1600 1490 1780 1580 1645 1640 1740 1670 1740 x 24 4 4 4 6 6 6 36 800 12 6 6 6 6 1990 1960 2210 2290 2520 2490 2000 1950 2390 2340 2590 2550 2400 x 1780 1540 1720 1830 1760 1710 1720 1710 1760 1710 1770 1700 1800 x 1000 1000 900 920 960 920 1905 1660 1935 1630 1975 1730 1885 1670 1945 1730 1985 1780 2030 24 6 6 6 1000 1000 960 930 1100 960 930 x 36 1000 12 6 6 6 6 2450 2640 2660 2610 2800 2750 2530 2720 2750 2690 2830 2810 2850 x 1790 1630 1830 1830 1830 1830 1830 1670 1790 1740 1725 1770 2120 x 1000 1000 1040 1040 1040 1040 1090 1010 1050 1050 990 1160 990 x 2095 2070 2025 1770 2105 1840 2095 2120 2055 1840 2065 1850 2220 24 6 6 6 36 6 Dimensions and weights are approximate values.6044-3UA ...6044-3SA .5967-3SA .Transformers Rated power Max.5844-3RA ..5880-3CA .6067-3UA ... x: On request * Related to 75 °C Table 5/9 Selection table for oil-immersed distribution transformers from 50 to 2.5967-3UA ...5867-3LA ....5844-3UA .... ...5867-3SA ....5844-3PA .6067-3SA .6067-3PA ...5980-3CA .

.6380-3CA .. Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized....6367-3PA .Rated power Max.6444-3PA ..6280-3CA .6244-3PA ......6180-3CA .6244-3SA . 4HB.6444-3SA .. to No-load losses Load losses Sound Sound Total weight Length Dimensions Width Height Rollerto-roller distance (centers) pressure power level 1 m level tolerance TUNORMA TUNORMA TUNORMA TUNORMA TUNORMA H1 mm TUMETIC TUMETIC TUMETIC TUMETIC CENELEC + 3 dB Sn kVA (1 250) Um kV 12 Uz % 6 6 6 P0 4JB.6144-3UA ..6144-3SA ..6444-3UA .6267-3UA .6344-3UA . x: On request * Related to 75 °C Table 5/10 Selection table for oil-immersed distribution transformers from 50 to 2...6167-3SA .6367-3UA .6344-3PA ....6267-3SA .6467-3UA . rated voltage HV side Impedance voltage Type Combination of losses acc..6167-3PA ..500 kVA 5/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .6167-3UA .6467-3PA ...6144-3PA ..6267-3PA ...6480-3CA B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-E´ B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-E´ B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-E´ B-A' A-C' C-C' B-A' A-C' C-C' E-E´ Pk 75* W 16000 13200 11400 16000 13200 11400 16400 20000 17000 14000 20000 17000 14000 19200 25300 21200 17500 25300 21200 17500 22000 29000 26500 22000 29000 26500 22000 29400 LPA dB 56 46 46 56 46 46 x 57 47 47 57 47 47 x 58 49 49 58 49 49 x 61 51 51 61 51 51 x LWA dB 74 64 64 74 64 64 70 76 66 66 76 66 66 71 78 68 68 78 68 68 75 81 71 71 81 71 71 76 A1 kg 2900 3080 3100 3040 3340 3040 2950 3200 3190 3120 3390 3330 3360 x B1 mm 1260 1100 990 990 TUMETIC E mm 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 x x x x W 2100 1300 1300 2100 1300 1300 2150 2600 1700 1700 2600 1700 1700 2600 2900 2050 2050 2900 2050 2050 3200 3500 2500 2500 3500 2500 2500 3800 mm 1930 1850 1810 1780 1755 1720 2020 1780 1840 1810 1810 1780 2150 x 2110 2070 2145 1880 2235 1970 2110 2220 2115 1900 2245 2030 2350 1015 1000 1260 1100 1060 1060 1015 1250 990 x 24 6 6 6 36 1 600 12 6 6 6 6 3450 3590 3640 3590 3930 3880 3470 3690 3670 3850 4010 3950 3930 x 1970 1870 2030 1760 2020 1900 2070 1830 2030 2000 2000 1850 2170 x 1220 1140 1080 1090 1110 1100 1280 1120 1230 1070 1030 1030 1340 x 2315 2095 2315 2010 2395 2070 2335 2320 2265 2120 2305 2010 2480 24 6 6 6 36 (2 000) 12 6 6 6 6 4390 4450 4270 4430 4730 4710 4480 4500 4290 4490 4910 4840 5100 x 2100 1890 2080 1840 2020 1730 2020 1860 2190 2030 2110 1980 2260 x 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1380 x 2555 2540 2455 2250 2495 2170 2655 2660 2425 2280 2475 2180 2560 24 6 6 6 36 2 500 12 6 6 6 6 5200 5090 5150 5110 5790 5660 5420 5220 5260 5220 5640 5470 5900 x 2115 2030 2195 1950 2190 2190 2115 2030 2195 2030 2160 2080 2320 x 1345 1330 1345 1330 1330 1330 1335 1330 1335 1335 1330 1330 1390 x 2685 2550 2535 2450 2565 2240 2785 2675 2585 2580 2605 2305 2790 24 6 6 6 36 6 Dimensions and weights are approximate values..6344-3SA .6367-3SA . ..6244-3UA ..6467-3SA ..

etc. HV tapping links on low-voltage side for adjustment to system conditions. such as oil-collecting pits.000 kVA and LI values of over 200 kV are full substitutes for oil-immersed transformers with comparable electrical and mechanical data. Flame-retardant inorganic insulating materials are used throughout. 40. See enlarged detail in Fig. resulting in low noise emissions HV winding Consisting of vacuum-potted single foil-type aluminum coils. 5/17 5 . HD 538 and DIN 42523. flame-resistant and selfextinguishing Clamping frame and truck Rollers can be swung around for lengthways or sideways travel Cross-flow fans Permitting up to 50% increase in the rated power Temperature monitoring By PTC thermistor detectors in the LV winding Paint finish on steel parts Multiple coating. tropicalized. 5/5 LV winding Made of aluminum band. Special version: available on request at extra charge Three-leg core Made of grain-oriented.. Bottom at LV side. GEAFOL transformers are designed for indoor installation close to their point of use. for optimal station design. fire-extinguishing equipment. reconnectable in de-energized state To insulate core and windings from mechanical vibrations. 5/4 GEAFOL cast-resin dry-type transformer GEAFOL Cast-Resin Dry-Type Transformers Standards and regulations GEAFOL cast-resin dry-type transformers comply with IEC 60076-11. moisture-proof.Transformers LV terminals Normal arrangement: Top or. Turns firmly glued together by means of insulating sheet wrapper material Insulation: Mixture of epoxy resin and quartz powder Makes the transformer maintenance-free. low-loss electrolaminations insulated on both sides Resilient spacers HV terminals Variable arrangements. are omitted. CENELEC HD 464. Advantages and applications GEAFOL distribution and power transformers in ratings from 100 to approx. which is often at the load center. fire walls. RAL 5009. On request: Two-component varnish or hot-dip galvanizing (for particularly aggressive environments) Environmental category E2 Climatic category C2 (If the transformer is installed outdoors. so that all restrictions applying to oil-filled electrical equipment. degree of protection IP 23 must be assured) Fire class F1 Fig.

This reduces civil works. on ships. As converter transformers for variable-speed drives they can be installed together with the converters at the drive location. They have similar noise levels to comparable oil-filled transformers. By virtue of their design. in groundwater protection areas. they are also frequently cost-competitive. GEAFOL transformers are fully LIrated. in wind power stations. GEAFOL transformers have been in successful service since 1965. 8 8 U 7 6 5 4 6 4 3 3 2 2 1 7 Runddrahtwicklung 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 Folienwicklung U 2 4 6 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 3 5 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Fig. in food processing plants etc. Taking the above indirect cost reductions into account. Often they are combined with their primary and secondary switchgear and distribution boards into compact substations that are installed directly at their point of use. on offshore cranes and platforms. 5/5 High-voltage encapsulated winding design of GEAFOL cast-resin transformer and voltage stress of a conventional round-wire winding (above) and the foil winding (below) 5/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .GEAFOL transformers are also installed where oil-filled transformers must not be used: inside buildings. cable costs. A lot of licences have been granted to major manufacturers throughout the world since. GEAFOL transformers are almost completely maintenance-free for their lifetime. in tunnels. and installation costs. transmission losses.

The external star or delta connections are made of insulated copper connectors to ensure an optimal installation design. In a conventional round-wire winding. The foil windings combine a simple winding technique with a high degree of electrical safety. are used. interleaved with high-grade polypropylene insulating foil. Through the single-sheet winding design. Fire safety GEAFOL transformers use only flame-retardant and self-extinguishing materials in their construction. a low-voltage winding and a high-voltage winding. After the source of ignition is removed. Internal arcing from electrical faults and externally applied flames do not cause the transformers to burst or burn. Connections are submerged-arc-welded to the aluminum sheets and are extended as aluminum busbars to the secondary terminals. the transformer is self-extinguishing. Part 6 (corresponding to HD 464). The environmental safety of the combustion residues has been proven in many tests. E1 and E2) and for the climatic category (code number C1. Result: a high AC voltage and impulse-voltage withstand capacity. Why aluminum? The thermal expansion coefficients of aluminum and cast-resin are so similar that thermal stresses resulting from load changes are kept to a minimum (see Fig. Categorization of cast-resin transformers Dry-type transformers have to be categorized under the sections listed below: C Environmental category C Climatic category C Fire category These categories have to be shown on the rating plate of each dry-type transformer. and are potted in a vacuum furnace with a mixture of pure silica (quartz sand) and specially blended epoxy resins. specially designed sheet-metal enclosures are available. 5/19 5 . which could negatively influence the mechanical stability of the cast-resin molding material. The insulation is subjected to less electrical stress than in other types of windings. LV winding The standard low-voltage winding with its considerably reduced dielectric stress is wound from single aluminum sheets with interleaved castresin impregnated fiberglass fabric. Product conformity to the properties laid down in the standards for ratings within the approximate category relating to environment. the interturn voltage can add up to twice the interlayer voltage. The assembled and connected individual coils are placed in a heated mold. The specifications for fire class F2 are determined by agreement between the manufacturer and the customer. The tests of fire behavior (fire class code numbers F0 and F1) are limited to tests on a duplication of a complete transformer. and show excellent ageing properties under all indoor operating conditions. they are to be carried out on complete transformers. According to this standard. The assembled coils are then ovencured to form uniformly bonded solid cylinders that are impervious to moisture. The only connections to the outside are copper bushings. 5/5). The resulting high-voltage windings are fire-resistant. which are internally bonded to the aluminum winding connections. It consists of a core leg. No additional substances. while in a foil winding it never exceeds the voltage per turn because a layer consists of only one winding turn. humidity. such as aluminum oxide trihydrate. C2) in DIN VDE 0532. moistureproof. This design has been approved by fire safety officers in many countries for installation in buildings where people are generally present and in other areas. excellent dynamic stability under short-circuit conditions is achieved. climate and fire behavior has to be proven by means of tests. For outdoor use.Transformers HV winding The high-voltage windings are wound from aluminum foil. corrosion-proof. These tests are described for the environmental category (code number E0.

ing temperatures are not exceeded for extended periods of time. The results for our GEAFOL transformers are something to be proud of: C Environmental category E2 C Climatic category C2 C Fire class F1 This good behavior is solely due to the GEAFOL cast-resin mix which has been used successfully for decades. Special versions can be provided for 3. Insulation class and temperature rise The high-voltage winding and the low-voltage winding utilise class F insulating materials with a mean temperature rise of 100 K (standard design). Sufficient ventilation must be provided by the installation location or the enclosure. Additional dialtype thermometers and Pt100 are available too. The transformers need to be protected against direct sunlight. Otherwise forced-air cooling must be provided by other equipment. (Dimensions increase by approximately 200 mm in length and width. Temperature monitoring Each GEAFOL transformer is fitted with three temperature sensors which are installed in the LV winding.6 kV operating voltages of the LV winding and higher. Siemens has carried out a lot of tests.) Short-time overloads are uncritical as long as the maximum wind- 5/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . The PTC thermistors used for sensing are selected for the hot-spot winding temperature. Overload capability GEAFOL transformers can be overloaded permanently up to 50% (with a corresponding increase in impedance voltage and impedance losses) if additional cross-flow fans are installed. Each wire and terminal is identified and a wiring diagram is permanently attached to the inside cover of this terminal box. Photo 5/13 Flammability test of cast-resin transformer Installation and enclosures Indoor installation in electrical operating rooms or in various protective enclosures is the preferred method of installation. Additional sets of sensors can be installed for them and for fan control purposes. Auxiliary wiring is run in a protective conduit and terminated in a central LV terminal box (optional). sandstorms and against water. Solid-state tripping devices can be supplied separately on order.

In order to recycle these valuable materials. Primary cables are usually fed to the transformer from trenches below. but can also be connected from above. insulated plug-type elbow connectors can be supplied for the highvoltage side with LI ratings up to 170 kV. Secondary terminals are aluminum flat pad connections with bores.and low-voltage switchgear cabinets. Recycling of GEAFOL transformers In GEAFOL cast-resin transformer types. frame and truck. these parts can normally be removed and post-processed with little effort.Transformers Photo 5/14 GEAFOL transformer with plugtype cable connections Photo 5/15 Radial cooling fans on GEAFOL transformer for AF cooling Photo 5/16 GEAFOL transformer in protective housing to IP 20/40 Instead of the standard open terminals. 5/21 5 . once the upper clamping structure has been dismantled and the top core yoke has been pulled out. the high-voltage and low-voltage coils form firm tubes owing to electrical and mechanical advantages and production-specific requirements. Secondary connections can be made by multiple insulated cables or by busbars. It is common practice to recycle the main mass portions consisting of iron core. from either below or above. or for indoor compact substations in conjunction with high. A variety of indoor and outdoor enclosures in different safety classes are available for the transformers alone.

1 12 24 36 Table 5/12 Lightning impulse test voltage AC test voltage kV kV – 75 95** 145** Insulation level 3 28 50 70 2U 2V 2W 2N H1 A1 * Power ratings > 2.000 kVA* 50 Hz up to 36 kV LV rating up to 780 V (special designs for up to 20 kV are possible) Tappings on HV side Connection ± 2. Technical Data.GEAFOL Cast-Resin Selection Tables. 5/6 GEAFOL cast-resin transformer E B1 5/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Dimensions and Weights Standard Rated power Rated frequency HV rating DIN 42 523 100–20.5 % HV winding: delta LV winding: star 4– 8 % Impedance voltage at rated current Insulation class Temperature rise Color of metal parts HV/ LV = F / F HV/ LV = 100/100 K RAL 5009 Table 5/11 GEAFOL three-phase transformers Um kV 1.5 MVA upon request ** Other levels upon request Fig.5 % or 2 x ± 2.

5464-3DA .500 kVA 5/23 5 .5244-3CA .5044-3DA ..5264-3HA .5464-3CA .5264-3GA . Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized.5244-3DA .5444-3DA .5264-3DA .5044-3CA .5464-3HA .5444-3CA .5244-3GA .5064-3GA .5064-3CA .5444-3GA .5475-3DA Pk 75* W 1600 1600 2000 2000 1500 1500 1800 1800 2300 2300 2300 2300 2200 2200 2500 2500 3000 3000 2900 2900 2900 2900 3100 3100 3800 Pk 120** LPA W 1900 1900 2300 2300 1750 1750 2050 2050 2600 2600 2700 2700 2500 2500 2900 2900 3500 3400 3300 3300 3300 3300 3600 3600 4370 LWA dB 59 51 59 51 59 51 59 51 62 54 62 54 62 54 62 54 65 57 65 57 65 57 65 57 65 GGES kg 630 760 590 660 750 830 660 770 770 920 750 850 910 940 820 900 1040 1170 990 1120 1190 1230 990 1180 1700 A1 mm 1210 1230 1190 1230 1310 1300 1250 1300 1220 1290 1270 1300 1330 1310 1310 1350 1330 1330 1350 1390 1390 1400 1360 1430 1900 B1 mm 705 710 705 710 755 755 750 755 710 720 720 725 725 720 725 765 730 730 740 745 735 735 735 745 900 H1 mm 835 890 860 855 935 940 915 930 1040 1050 990 985 1090 1095 1075 1060 1110 1135 1065 1090 1120 1150 1140 1160 1350 E mm without wheels without wheels without wheels without wheels without wheels without wheels without wheels without wheels 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 520 W 440 320 360 300 600 400 420 330 610 440 500 400 800 580 600 480 820 600 700 570 1050 800 880 650 1300 dB 45 37 45 37 45 37 45 37 47 39 47 39 47 39 47 39 50 42 50 42 50 41 50 41 50 24 4 4 6 6 160 12 4 4 6 6 24 4 4 6 6 250 12 4 4 6 6 24 4 4 6 6 36 6 Dimensions and weights are approximate values. valid for 400 V at the secondary side.Transformers Rated power Max.5264-3CA . rated voltage HV side Impedance voltage Type No-load losses Load losses Load losses Sound pressure level 1 m tolerance + 3 dB Sound power level Total weight Length Dimensions Width Height Rollerto-roller distance (centers) Sn kVA 100 Um kV 12 Uz % 4 4 6 6 P0 4GB.5244-3HA . * Related to 75 °C ** Related to 120 °C Table 5/13 GEAFOL cast-resin transformer for 100 to 2.5044-3GA . The vector group is either Dyn 5 or Dyn 11. .5064-3HA .5064-3DA .5444-3HA .5464-3GA .5044-3HA .

5764-3CA . .5775-3DA Pk 75* W 3300 3300 3400 3400 3400 3400 3600 3600 4500 4300 4300 4300 4300 3900 3900 4100 4100 5100 4900 4900 5600 5600 4800 4800 5000 5000 6000 Pk 120** LPA W 3800 3800 3900 3900 3900 3900 4100 4100 5170 4900 4900 4900 4900 4500 4500 4700 4700 5860 5600 5600 6400 6400 5500 5500 5700 5700 6900 LWA dB 67 59 67 59 67 59 67 59 67 68 60 68 60 68 60 68 60 68 69 61 69 61 69 61 69 61 69 GGES kg 1160 1320 1150 1290 1250 1400 1190 1300 1900 1310 1430 1250 1350 1410 1570 1350 1460 2100 1520 1740 1470 1620 1620 1830 1580 1720 2600 A1 mm 1370 1380 1380 1410 1410 1440 1410 1460 1950 1380 1380 1410 1430 1440 1460 1480 1480 2000 1410 1450 1460 1490 1500 1540 1540 1560 2050 B1 mm 820 820 830 830 820 825 825 830 920 820 820 825 830 825 830 835 835 920 830 835 845 845 835 840 850 850 940 H1 mm 1125 1195 1140 1165 1195 1205 1185 1195 1400 1265 1290 1195 1195 1280 1280 1275 1280 1440 1320 1345 1275 1290 1330 1350 1305 1320 1500 E mm 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 W 980 720 850 680 1250 930 1000 780 1450 1150 880 1000 820 1450 1100 1200 940 1700 1350 1000 1200 980 1700 1270 1400 1100 1900 dB 52 43 51 43 51 43 51 43 51 52 44 52 44 52 44 52 44 52 53 45 53 45 53 44 53 45 53 24 4 4 6 6 36 400 12 6 4 4 6 6 24 4 4 6 6 36 (500) 12 6 4 4 6 6 24 4 4 6 6 36 6 Dimensions and weights are approximate values.5544-3CA .5664-3GA .5644-3DA .5764-3HA .5564-3GA .5664-3DA .5744-3DA .5544-3GA . The vector group is either Dyn 5 or Dyn 11.5664-3CA .5544-3DA . valid for 400 V at the secondary side.5644-3GA .5544-3HA .5664-3HA . rated voltage HV side Impedance voltage Type No-load losses Load losses Load losses Sound pressure level 1 m tolerance + 3 dB Sound power level Total weight Length Dimensions Width Height Rollerto-roller distance (centers) Sn kVA (315) Um kV 12 Uz % 4 4 6 6 P0 4GB.5564-3DA .5675-3DA .5564-3HA ..5744-3HA .5564-3CA .5644-3HA .5764-3DA .5644-3CA .500 kVA 5/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .5744-3CA .Rated power Max. Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized.5575-3DA . * Related to 75 °C ** Related to 120 °C Table 5/14 GEAFOL cast-resin transformer for 100 to 2.5764-3GA .5744-3GA .

5944-3GA .5944-3DA .500 kVA 5/25 5 .5864-3DA .5864-3GA .Transformers Rated power Max.6044-3GA .6064-3HA .6044-3CA .5964-3CA .5975-3DA .5844-3CA .5864-3HA .5944-3CA .6044-3DA . valid for 400 V at the secondary side.5844-3GA .5964-3HA .6064-3DA .6064-3GA .5864-3CA .6044-3HA .5844-3HA . The vector group is either Dyn 5 or Dyn 11.5964-3DA .5844-3DA .. * Related to 75 °C ** Related to 120 °C Table 5/15 GEAFOL cast-resin transformer for 100 to 2.5944-3HA .6075-3DA Pk 75* W 6400 6400 6400 6400 6000 6000 6400 6400 7000 7800 7800 7600 7600 7500 7500 7900 7900 8200 2200 1650 2000 1500 2400 1850 2300 1750 3000 Pk 120** LPA W 7300 7300 7400 7400 6900 6900 7300 7300 8000 9000 9000 8700 8700 8600 8600 9100 9100 9400 10200 10200 9700 9700 10000 10000 10500 11000 10900 LWA dB 70 62 70 62 70 62 70 62 70 72 64 72 64 72 64 71 64 72 73 65 73 65 73 65 73 65 73 GGES kg 1830 2070 1770 1990 1860 2100 1810 2050 2900 2080 2430 2060 2330 2150 2550 2110 2390 3300 2480 2850 2420 2750 2570 3060 2510 2910 3900 A1 mm 1510 1470 1550 1590 1550 1600 1580 1620 2070 1570 1590 1560 1600 1610 1650 1610 1630 2140 1590 1620 1620 1660 1660 1680 1680 1730 2200 B1 mm 840 835 860 865 845 850 855 860 940 850 855 865 870 845 855 860 865 950 990 990 990 990 990 990 990 990 1050 H1 mm 1345 1505 1295 1310 1380 1400 1345 1370 1650 1560 1640 1490 1530 1580 1620 1590 1595 1850 1775 1795 1560 1560 1730 1815 1620 1645 1900 E mm 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 820 W 1500 1150 1370 1150 1950 1500 1650 1250 2200 1850 1450 1700 1350 2100 1600 1900 1450 2600 2200 1650 2000 1500 2400 1850 2300 1750 3000 dB 54 45 54 45 53 45 53 45 53 55 47 55 47 55 47 55 47 55 55 47 56 47 55 47 55 47 55 24 4 4 6 6 36 (800) 12 6 4 4 6 6 24 4 4 6 6 36 1000 12 6 4 4 6 6 24 4 4 6 6 36 6 Dimensions and weights are approximate values.6064-3CA .5875-3DA . Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized. rated voltage HV side Impedance voltage Type No-load losses Load losses Load losses Sound pressure level 1 m tolerance + 3 dB Sound power level Total weight Length Dimensions Width Height Rollerto-roller distance (centers) Sn kVA 630 Um kV 12 Uz % 4 4 6 6 P0 4GB.5964-3GA . .

6144-3DA .500 kVA 5/26 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens ..6444-3HA .6144-3HA .6444-3DA .6364-3DA .6375-3DA . rated voltage HV side Impedance voltage Type No-load losses Load losses Load losses Sound pressure level 1 m tolerance + 3 dB Sound power level Total weight Length Dimensions Width Height Rollerto-roller distance (centers) Sn kVA (1250) Um kV 12 Uz % 6 6 P0 4GB.6244-3HA .6464-3HA . The vector group is either Dyn 5 or Dyn 11.6244-3DA .6175-3DA .6344-3HA . valid for 400 V at the secondary side.6164-3DA .6264-3HA .Rated power Max.6464-3DA .6344-3DA .6364-3HA . . Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized. * Related to 75 °C ** Related to 120 °C Table 5/16 GEAFOL cast-resin transformer for 100 to 2.6275-3DA .6164-3HA .6475-3DA Pk 75* W 9600 10500 10000 10500 11000 11000 11400 11800 12300 12700 14000 14500 14500 14900 15400 17600 18400 17600 18000 18700 Pk 120** LPA W 11000 12000 11500 12000 12600 12500 13000 13500 14000 14600 16000 16500 16500 17000 17700 20000 21000 20000 20500 21500 LWA dB 75 67 75 67 75 76 68 76 68 76 78 70 78 70 78 81 71 81 71 81 GGES kg 2900 3370 3020 3490 4500 3550 4170 3640 4080 5600 4380 5140 4410 4920 6300 5130 6230 5280 6220 7900 A1 mm 1780 1790 1820 1850 2300 1840 1880 1880 1900 2500 1950 1990 2020 2040 2500 2110 2170 2170 2220 2700 B1 mm 990 990 990 990 1060 995 1005 995 1005 1100 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 H1 mm 1605 1705 1635 1675 2000 2025 2065 2035 2035 2400 2150 2205 2160 2180 2400 2150 2205 2160 2180 2400 E mm 820 820 820 820 520 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 W 2400 1850 2700 2100 3500 2800 2100 3100 2400 4300 3600 2650 4000 3000 5100 4300 3000 5000 3600 6400 dB 57 49 57 49 57 58 50 58 49 58 59 51 59 51 59 62 51 61 51 61 24 6 6 36 1600 12 6 6 6 24 6 6 36 (2000) 12 6 6 6 24 6 6 36 2500 12 6 6 6 24 6 6 36 6 Dimensions and weights are approximate values.6264-3DA .

Transformers 5/27 5 .

6 Low Voltage 6.4 Maximum-Demand Monitors .5 Switches.3 Modular Devices 6. Outlets and Electronic Products 6.1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Distribution Systems 6.6 SIMOCODE pro – Motor Management Systems for Constant-Speed Motors in the Low-Voltage Range 6.2 Protective Switching Devices and Fuse Systems 6.

Low Voltage chapter 6 .

300 A (e. The high reliability and availability of the system ensures a faultless operation on an economical basis.6 Low Voltage One important element of the Totally Integrated Power philosophy for power distribution by Siemens (see Chapter 3) is its comprehensive protection scheme. Especially in commercial or institutional buildings. Components of the integrated Siemens protection scheme C Low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems from 6. C and D C Monitoring systems for undervoltage and overvoltage protection C Fuse switch-disconnectors for safe isolation and disconnection C Switching operations handled safely with conventional techniques or automated processes via main and EMERGENCY stop switches. ALPHA) down to 63 A (e. with a guaranteed uniform quality standard. Examples for this are airports or railway stations. SENTRON® 3VL). The components have been certified in accordance with all international standards and can therefore be used all over the world. i.g. Siemens is setting new standards with respect to safety. in industry and in infrastructural projects. control and signaling devices C Optimization of the power distribution by way of remote signaling. modular. These products that stand for reliable Siemens high-performance technology have been included in the Totally Integrated Power system. SIVACON®. A protection system whose components are coordinated in an optimal way has been part of the Siemens product philosophy for a long time. communication and control via bus systems 6/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . operator units.g. fuse systems (LV HRC. The result is an integrated protection scheme from the main distribution board to the consumer.e. SIMBOX®) C SIVACON busbar trunking systems for safe power distribution from 25 A up to 6. based on national and international standards. switching.300 A C Protective switching devices and fuse systems for overload. provides this high safety level. in production sites and administrative buildings. shortcircuit and fire protection by way of circuit. DIAZED® and NEOZED®) and miniature circuit-breakers C Residual-current-operated circuitbreakers for personnel and fire protection C Lightning current and surge arrester of the Classes B. Only an integrated protection scheme with systems and products from one manufacturer.breakers (e. the highest safety requirements for systems and persons have to be met. As a leading manufacturer of technology.g.

stand-alone) C Number of front operating panels Type of device installation C Fixed installation C Plug-in C Withdrawable unit C Snap-on mounting on standard mounting rail Application C Eight different types of application Medium voltage Low voltage e. lighting and air conditioning. actuators and devices for heating.1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Distribution System General Low-voltage switchgear and distribution boards form the link between the equipment for the generation (generators). An overview of the available program of the Siemens low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems is shown in Fig.Low Voltage 6. 6/1.g 230/ 400 V 6300 A Distribution system Enclosures Busbar trunking systems 3200 A 630 A M 400 A 160 A M M 63 A M M Fig. and the loads. 6/1 Product range of low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems (European technology) 6/3 6 .g. In Table 6/2. solenoid valves. overhead lines) and transformation (transformers) of electrical energy on the one hand. and information technology on the other hand. motors. the essential selection criteria are summarised in the following four areas: Currents C Rated currents of the busbars C Rated currents of the power supply C Rated currents of the feeders C Rated peak withstand current Ipk of the busbars Degree of protection and installation C Degree of protection C Protection against electric shock (safety class) C Material of the enclosure C Type of mounting (wall-mounting. transmission (cables. e.

control systems. the tapoff units include the appropriate communications equipment in addition to the required protective devices. ALPHA ALPHA 630 SIVACON SIVACON SIVACON NF CEI SIMBOX LC. The various construction types of switchgear and distribution boards do not show any strict discrimination features. distribution boards for lighting.Types of construction Small distribution board Wall-mounted distribution board Floor-mounted distribution cabinet < 630 A High-power distribution board > 630 A Power Center Busbar trunking system Table 6/1 DIN VDE SIMBOX 63 ALPHA 160 / 400. special requirements for low-voltageswitchgear assemblies which can be operated by non-specialists. EN 60 439 in a locally preferred type in accordance with DIN/VDE. the operator’s type of application will be decisive for the designation. EN 60 439-3/IEC 60 439-3/ VDE 0660 Part 504 Low-voltage switchgear assemblies. heating. Therefore. EN 60 439-2/IEC 60 439-2/ VDE 0660 Part 502 Low-voltage switchgear assemblies. Tap-off units can be installed at suitable positions in the trunking. 6/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . EN 60 439-4/IEC 60 439-4/ VDE 0660 Part 501 Low-voltage switchgear assemblies (point-to-point distribution boards). power distribution and automation are implemented in an object-oriented. which are again supplied by the main distribution board. power is transmitted to the immediate vicinity of the consumers. They are also used as rising mains in high-rise buildings to supply the floor distribution boards. The downstream motor control centers. In these applications. which makes these systems most suitable for consumers which need to be reinstalled at different locations frequently. only the two terms “main distribution board” and ”subdistribution board” are used to give an example of a low-voltage system in an industrial plant (Table 6/2). Main or subdistribution board In order to prevent these problems with regard to the definition of terms. special requirements for low-voltage switchgear assemblies which can be operated by non-specialists EN 60 439-3/IEC 60 439-3/ VDE 0660 Part 504 Low-voltage switchgear assemblies (point-to-point distribution boards). Busbar trunking systems supply and distribute electrical power in industrial facilities and buildings. The necessary switching. air conditioning. special requirements for construction site distribution boards. workshops. special requirements for busbar trunking systems. protective and measuring devices are combined centrally in the switchgear or distribution board for that. Busbar trunking systems can communicate. the manufacturer and the operator use different terms for the same product. Point-to-point distribution board ”Point-to-point distribution board” is the designation for all switchgear and distribution boards which supply the electrical energy radially via cables and leads from the ”point-to-point” distribution board to the remotely arranged consumers. Busbars (point-to-point distribution) With ”busbar trunking systems” . In this combination. SIMBOX Universal ALPHA Universal ALPHA Universal SIKUS Universal SIKUS Universal HC SIVACON BS ALPHA 400 SIVACON SIVACON SIVACON Low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems in compliance with EN 60439 / IEC 60439 The low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems described comply with the following standards: EN 60 439-1/IEC 60 439-1/ VDE 0660 Part 500 Low-voltage switchgear assemblies. The consumers are connected to the busbar trunking system via tap-off units with or without fuse protection and short spur lines or cables. In most cases. the main distribution board is supplied directly via one transformer per busbar section. type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies. Types of construction All distribution boards in accordance with IEC 60 439. etc. are part of the subdistribution boards. decentralized manner.. Here. NF/CEI and BS.

SK 3= Safety extra-low voltage 4) 1 3 5 7 Main switchgear station Light and energy distribution system Distribution cabinet Reactive power compensation 2 4 6 8 Main distribution board Subdistribution board Motor distribution board Control 5) 6) SIKUS Klassik SIMBOX Universal WP Table 6/2 Selection criteria for low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems 6/5 6 .0005)/ 630 A. 8HP 8GD. IP54 250 kA IP54 187 kA IP30.Low Voltage Type of distribution board Max.300 A 5. PEC Metal Metal Metal Metal Type of application4) 1. 7.000 A 630 A 6. snap-on ted2). rated current of outgoing feeders Rated peak current Ipk of busbars up to Degree of protection Switchgear Point-to-point distribution board Distribution systems Point-to-point 2. BD01. BD2. 3. 5.000 A Line 7.or wall.Wall mounted. plug-in.000 A 2. 4. standalone or double front Wall or stand-alone Floor. 4. plug-in.300 A 6.Fixed mounted2). 8 2. 6. ALPHA Stratum 1) 2) 3) Special version for shipbuilding IP66 Option: withdrawable circuit-breaker Safety class: SK 1 = Protective ground connection. snap-on mounting mounting mounting Option Tap-off units with plug-in technology Outgoing feeders with or without fuses Mounting type (indoors) Wall or stand-alone Wall. LD.000/630 A 630 A 6.000 A 3. ted2). 8 SIVACON 8PS Systeme CD-K.200 A 2000 A 630 A 6. 2.or stand-alone surfacemounted 1 1 Wall Suspended from ceiling. 8 System type SIVACON 8PT. wall-mounted. 8GS…. or flush. SK 2 = Protective insulation. 2. 2.400 A 6.300 A 6. 1.0005)/ 630 A. 8GB. IP41 IP54 80 kA 68 kA bis IP656) 80 kA IP651) 286 kA IP34– IP68 Device mounting type Fixed moun.300 A 3.200 A 2. 4.Fixed mounted2). ALPHA. 2. 6. snap-on ted2). 4.Fixed moun. SIVACON 8PV SIVACON 8PT. 5. 8HU SIKUS SIKUS Universal HC Universal 8GK. sub-floor mounted 1 or 2 Operating front panels (quantity) Protection against electric shock3) Enclosure material 1 1 or 2 1 1 SK 1 SK 1 SK 1 SK 1 SK 2 SK 1 Molded plastic Metal 2.300 A 375 kA Max. 7 1. 8 1. LX.200 A 630 A 2. 5.300 A 3. 4. ted2).Fixed moun. rated current of busbars Max. 3. SK 2 SK1 Molded plastic Molded plastic Aluminum Metal 3. plug-in withdrawable withdrawable Fixed moun. 7 2. 4. 6. 3. rated current of supply Max. 6.000 A 5.

Busbar trunking systems are increasingly replacing connecting cables in the field of power transmission.000 A. Busbar trunking systems have proved their worth in power transmission over decades. in walls or ceilings is an impediment to flexibility requirements. Moreover. It covers a current range of 25 A to 6. this type of cable laying is both costly and time-consuming. They are installed between the transformers and the main distribution boards. ventilated) LX (800 A – 6.1. cables must be connected in parallel. cast) Power transmission Between the transformer and the low-voltage switchgear. Here. the installation of cable trays is expensive. busbar trunking systems are power transmission systems which constitute a type-tested system even when used as combined systems. too.1 SIVACON 8PS – Busbar Trunking Systems What are busbar trunking systems? Busbar trunking systems are the linking element between transformer and power consumer. The new SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking system is a well proven system and the market leader in its field. busbar trunking systems are an elongated busbar system (line distribution) of a point-to-point distribution board.250 A) LD (1. This adjustment can be carried out as required within a system-related grid. and also connect the subdistribution boards. 6/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . They are used for power transmission and distribution. They have been properly designed for this task as specified in their technical data. individual consumer taps are no longer connected rigidly to the system of busbars. Owing to the high short-circuit power and resulting short distances of cable supPhoto 6/1 SIVACON 8PS – the right solution for every application ports. With high currents in particular. The system is divided into 6 subsystems: CD-K (25 A – 40 A) BD01 (40 A – 160 A) BD2 (160 A – 1. a variable line distribution system is created for line supply and/or area-wide power supply. sandwich-type) and PEC (800 A – 6. The traditional. radial power installation with fixed wired cables and lines is no longer up to the state of the art.6. meaning it is suitable for any given application. Today. as is the case with point-to-point distribution. they are the first choice in this field of application.000 A. not to mention problematic on account of the imbalanced power distribution. on trays. including the feeder lines for power distribution to the consumer locations – busbar trunking systems with flexible tap-off units are used here.300 A. They can be used economically and ensure safe and reliable power transmission. This way. In contrast to this. busbar trunking systems transmit electrical power by means of system components. but can be flexibly adjusted to changing tasks via appropriate tap-off units. It is far too rigid for automated production sites.100 A – 5. Cable laying in ducts.300 A. Power distribution In terms of pictorial projection. with almost no other system being a real alternative.

an interruption is only feasible. This makes busbar trunking system an interesting investment into the future. and in central processing of recorded consumption and operating data on the other hand.e. i. relocation and extension under voltage. intelligent power distribution concepts open up new savings potential and reduce the number of interfaces to the automation world. Any modification must be achievable quickly and cost-saving. flexibility and transparency of automated systems for building power supply and industrial applications make the trend towards decentralized power distribution and automation an irreversible process. but is also crucial for production sites that work in multi-shifts around the clock. Rearrangements of machinery and restructuring of existing plant facilities call for a flexible adjustment of the power supply installation systems. in very narrow time slots. Communication-capable busbar trunking systems The growing requirements to the economic efficiency. with a busbar track that has not been isolated from supply. This way. in particular in automated production. decentralized power distribution and distributed automation – in an integrated range of products: system networking results in a high degree of transparency on the one hand. expensive interruptions of operation are avoided. Busbar trunking systems are particularly geared to these requirements. Even completely new supply lines can be built up by reutilizing existing system components.Low Voltage Readjustment made easy Readjustments are indispensable in modern production sites. Photo 6/3 Control of supply with the BD01 system Photo 6/2 Lighting control with BD01 and CD-K systems Consumer tap-off units must therefore be designed that allow for power tapping. An area-wide power supply can be planned ahead. SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking systems supply and protect consumers in a distributed manner. which means right on the spot. Here. A recent development is the concept of combined. 6/7 6 . Retrofitting and re-equipping without interrupting the production process is not only important for a continuous supply of electricity. In this electrifying context. if at all. When modifications have been scheduled. the consumer tap-off units are taken to the new location of the machinery and simply readjusted at the existing system of busbars.

100 A. 1 m from one side or both sides C Rated current of the consumer taps up to 16 A. fast installation of the power distribution and automation system. 63 A.250 A C Conductor material: aluminum. 125 A. Short planning and configuration times. IP55 C Spacing of consumer taps: either 0. easy commissioning and a high degree of flexibility in terms of modified area utilization are measurable advantages of communication-capable busbar trunking systems. CD-K C Rated current: 30 A. 630 A. 800 A 1. 2 x 25 A. 250 A. IP55 C Spacing between consumer taps: 0. IP55 for power transmission C Spacing of consumer tap-off units: 0.5 m each.5 m each from both sides C Rated current of the consumer tap-off units up to 630 A 6/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 315 A 400 A. The bus systems PROBUS-DP AS-Interface and . 1. 2 x 40 A C Conductor material: copper C Rated operating voltage: 400 V C Degrees of protection: IP54. and copper for 160 A C Rated operating voltage: 400 A C Degrees of protection: IP54. 160 A C Aluminum as conductor material for up to 125 A. copper C Degrees of protection: IP52/54. 500 A.000 A. 40 A. These flexible modules enable the combination of different solution packages for specific customer requirements.5 m or 1 m from one side C Rated current of the consumer tapoff units up to 63 A BD2 C Rated current: 160 A.Photo 6/4 CD-K system Photo 6/5 BD2 system Photo 6/6 LX system Photo 6/7 BD01 system Photo 6/8 LD system Photo 6/9 PEC system The concept of communication-capable busbar trunking systems is based on tap-off units which are complemented by communication-capable device units. with or without fuse C Codeable tapping points BD01 C Rated current: 40 A. instabus EIB constitute the communications basis.

copper 3. optionally 200% conductor 4. IP54 IP54. 1.000 A. 2. 5.400 A. copper.250 A C Tap-off units with fuse switchdisconnectors up to 630 A PEC C Rated current: 800 A. 1. aluminum. 2.400 A. 1.000A C Rated current for degree of protection IP54 and Cu conductors: 1. 4.250 A.000 A.000 A.000 V C Degrees of protection: IP66. 4.200 A C Tap-off units with circuit-breakers up to 1. Approvals (system-specific) GL – Germanischer Lloyd LR – Lloyd's Register Of Shipping ABS – American Bureau Of Shipping BV – Bureau Veritas DNV – Dansk Norske Veritas RINA – Registro Italiano Navale SABS – South Africa GOST-R – Russia 6/9 6 . Clean Earth. 2. 1. 5.600 A.400 A. IP68 (140 h) LD C Rated current for degree of protection IP34 and Al conductors: 1. 3. 2.600 A. 1. 4. PE enclosure 5. IP54 with additional unit.200 A. 1.400 A. 5. 3. IP55 for power transmission up to 3. PE enclosure 4.000 A.600 A. 3. This test includes dielectric tests which are performed to ensure proper insulation.600 A.600A C Rated operating voltage: 1. 2. as parallel systems 3.600 A. 1. 6. 5.800 A. 2. 2. copper.200 A.000 A.000 A. 5. 1.500 A. aluminum. 3. IP55 Tap-off unit.000 A C Conductor material: copper C Rated operating voltage: 1.200 A. 3.250 A.500 A. 4. 1.500 A. 2.000 A. live adjustment up to 16 A BD01 (40 A – 160 A) IP54. 2. 1.700 A C Rated current for degree of protection IP34 and Cu conductors: 2. 3. copper Trunking unit.500 A.100 A.250 A no live adjustment) PEC (800 A – 6000 A) Table 6/3 Technical data IP66. aluminum. IP68 type-tested for a duration of 140 days C Tapping points feasible for the installation of customer-specific tap-off units Every element of the SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking system is tested prior to delivery.500 A.000 A C Rated current for degree of protection IP54 and Al conductors: 900 A.250 A C Tap-off units with switch disconnectors with fuse up to 630 A LX C Rated current: 800 A. copper C Rated operating voltage: 690 V C Degrees of protection: IP54. 1.000 A. The entire SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking system is manufactured and tested in compliance with ISO 9001. 5.750 A.400 A.000 A.Low Voltage Ratings CD-K (25 A – 40 A) Conductors 2. IP55 up to 630 A LD (1100 A – 5000 A) LX (800 A – 6300 A) 4.000 V C Degrees of protection: IP34. 3. 1. IP54 C Tap-off units with circuit-breakers up to 1.000 A. 1.000 A.000 A. 2 x 4. copper up to 1. aluminum.000 A. 3.300 A C Conductor material: aluminum. 2. 4. 1. degree of protection IP54. 4.500 A.700 A. IP55 up to 63 A BD2 (160 A – 1250 A) IP52. 6. 2.250 A up to 630 A (up to 1.000 A. 2.200 A. copper.000 A. 4. IP55 IP34. Standards All SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking systems constitute type-tested switchgear assemblies (TTA) in compliance with IEC 60439-1 and -2. 6.

Photo 6/10 tap-off unit Photo 6/11 BD2 angular element Photo 6/12 Communication-capable BD2 tap-off unit 1: Straight trunking unit 2: Tap-off unit 3: Transformer infeed 4: Connection to SIVACON 8PT/8PV 5: Directional change element 6: Clamp connection. fastener Photo 6/13 Block diagram of busbar trunking systems 6/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

6/5).2 SIVACON Low-Voltage Switchgear – Economical. The prerequisite for a reliable supply system is high availability. The power distribution in a system is usually implemented via a main switchgear station (power center or main distribution board) and a number of sub.g. they comply with the requirements of C IEC 60439-1 C DIN EN 60439-1 C VDE 0660 Part 500 and additionally C DIN EN 50274 (VDE 0660 Part 514). in the chemical. heating air conditioning. transmission (cables. motors. VDE 0660 Part 500 Supplement 2 (arcing fault). Withdrawable design Fixed-mounted design Fig. lighting and air conditioning on the other hand. workshops. solenoid valves. etc. i. the lowvoltage switchgear is especially important both for public supply systems and for industrial plants. e.300 A: C as main switchgear (power center or main distribution board) C as motor control center C as subdistribution board Thanks to the many options to combine SIVACON 8PV boards due to their modular design. overhead lines) and transformation (transformers) of electrical energy on the one hand. Since the majority of the applications is supplied with low voltage. actuators and devices for heating.1. All modules used are type-tested (TTA*).) ≤ 100 A Control unit 6. It is characterized by a high degree of personnel and system safety and can be used on all power levels up to 6. flexibility for process-related adaptations and high control and operating reliability of the switchgear. Flexible and Safe Introduction Low-voltage switchgear forms the link between the equipment for the generation (generators).000 A LT Power supply Main distribution board Circuit-breakers as feeders tho the subdistribution boards Connecting cables ET ≤ 630 A ≤ 630 A M M M ST ≤ 100 A ≤ 630 A ≤ 100 A M M M M M FT Photo 6/14 SIVACON 8PV low-voltage switchgear Motor control center 1 in withdrable design for production/manufacturing plants CBS Circuit-breaker design PS Plug-in design Motor control center 2 in withdrable design for production/manufacturing plants WS FS Subdistribution boards for auxiliary system (lighting. mineral oil and capital goods industry as well as in public and private buildings. DIN EN ISO 9001/14001 certification. demand.meeting and type-tested switchgear assembly (see Photo 6/14) which is used in power distribution.e. 6/2 Example for the structure of a low-voltage system in an industrial company SIVACON 8PV for the process industry The SIVACON® 8PV low-voltage switchgear is an economical. and the consumers.Low Voltage ≤ 4 MVA ≤ 690 V Cable or busbar system ≤ 6. * Type-tested switchgear assembly 6/11 6 .300 A 3 AC 50 Hz ≤ 5. all requirements can be met with fixed-mounted and plug-in as well as with withdrawable designs.or motor control centers (see Fig. IEC 61641.

000 A up to 110 kA up to 50 kA Features of a SIVACON 8PV switchgear station C Type-tested standard modules C Space-saving base areas starting from 400 x 400 mm C Solid wall design for safe panel-to-panel separation C Highest packing density with up to 40 feeders per panel C Standard operator interface for all withdrawable units C Test and disconnected position with door closed C Visible isolating gaps and points of contact C Variable busbar positions at the top or at the rear C Cable/busbar connection from above or below Description Panel structure The cabinet is structured in a modular grid based on one modular spacing (1 M) corresponding to 175 mm. Basically.000 A up to 143 kA up to 65 kA up to 6. EN 60 529: Tabl 6/4 Technical data 1.Rated insulation voltage Ul Rated operational voltage Ue Rated currents for busbars (3. The effective device installation space has a height of 1. 6/3 Panel structure Cable/busbar connection compartment Cross-wiring compartment 6/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . up to 1. 6/3): C Busbar compartment C Device compartment C Cable/busbar connection compartment C Cross-wiring compartment Main busbar system The main busbar system with busbar cross sections for rated currents up to 6.600 A up to 630 A IP 20 up to IP 54 400 400 600 600 400 400 400 [mm] Busbar compartment Device compartment Fig. with IEC 60 529. N or PEN conductors.300 A up to 1. 6/7) and consists of the three phase conductors L1 to L3 and the PE.750 mm = 10 M.300 A up to 250 kA up to 100 kA up to 6.300 A can be used variably (see Fig.and 4-pole): Main horizontal busbars Rated current Rated peak withstand current Ipk Rated short-time withstand current Icw Vertical busbars for circuit-breaker design Rated current Rated peak withstand current Ipk Rated short-time withstand current Icw for fixed-mounted and plug-in design Rated current Rated peak withstand current Ipk Rated short-time withstand current Icw for withdrawable design Rated current Rated peak withstand current Ipk Rated short-time withstand current Icw Switchgear rated currents Circuit-breakers Outgoing feeders Motor feeders Degree of protection in acc.000 V up to 690 V up to 6.300 A up to 250 kA up to 100 kA up to 2. a panel is subdivided into four functional compartments (see Fig.

The cross-wiring compartment is located above the device compartment. Icw up to 100 kA stand-alone. Icw up to 100 kA stand-alone.300 A.000 A. These withdrawable units are available in sizes 1/4 (11 kW). 2 (75 kW) 3 (160 kW). a withdrawable circuit-breaker technology offers the optimum for plant availability.000 mm mm mm mm mm Table 6/5 Ciruit-breaker panel width Circuit-breaker design The circuit-breaker panels have separate functional areas for the device compartment.000 A.300 A Panel width 400 500 600 800 1. Photo 6/15 Circuit-breaker panel with withdrawable type SENTRON 3WL. cross-wiring compartment and cable/busbar connection compartment (Photo 6/15). 1/2 (18. Icw up to 100 kA on the wall or standalone from below and/or above main/sub-distribution board or integrated motor control center Position of the main busbar system: Busbar current: G Mounting: Cable entry: Use: center top In up to 6.600 A 2.200 A 6. 2200 2200 Busbar current: 6/13 6 . 6/4 Construction variants of SIVACON 8PV low-voltage switchgear stations by virtue of the variable position of the main busbar system Operating side Busbar Rated breaker current In In In In In up up up up up to to to to to 1. double front from below and/or above main/sub-distribution board or integrated motor control centre in double-front version G 2200 G G Mounting: Cable entry: Use: 400 1000 Position of the main busbar system: Busbar current: Mounting: Cable entry: Use: at the rear (top and/or bottom) In up to 4.000 A 1. Consumer or motor feeders can be replaced or whole compartments can even be rearranged without that the switchgear must be disconnected from supply (Photo 6/16). 1 (37 kW). Icw up to 50 kA on the wall or stand-alone from below motor control centre sub-distribution board Position of the main busbar system: center (top and/or bottom) In up to 4. 4 (250 kW). such as changes in the motor power or switching new consumers into supply.Low Voltage Position of the main busbar system: Busbar current: Mounting: Cable entry: Use: at the top In up to 2.5 kW). The panel width is determined by the rated current of the SENTRON WL circuit-breaker (Table 6/5).600 A rated current Photo 6/16 Panel with motor assemblies Withdrawable design If requirements change frequently. the cable/busbar connection compartment below. 1. as often demanded by industrial processes. Withrawable units equipped with the communication-capable SIMOCODE motor protection and control units enable a cost-effective interfacing to the worlds of automation.500 A 3.000 A. double front from below and/or above power center 2200 G G 600 1200 G Device installation space Fig. Supply from above results in a mirror-image arrangement.

they can easily be replaced once the equipment has been disconnected from supply. Modular functional units can be combined in the panel as required and if necessary. The capacitor units are designed with fuse switch-disconnectors (Photo 6/19). Reactive power compensation Depending on the type of load. Plug-in technology Consumer feeders up to 45 kW and outgoing circuit-breaker units up to 100 A. or short standstill times do not result in exceptional costs. 250 kvar. The banks are 50 mm (125 A). Photo 6/20 Withdrawable unit equipped with SIMOCODE In such cases. In-line technology. with or without reactors) are provided for reactive power compensation. In certain applications.g.Photo 6/17 Panel with pluggable in-line switch disconnectors and plug-in modules Photo 6/18 Fixed-mounted panel with modular functional units Photo 6/19 Reactive power control unit. Fixed-mounted design Photo 6/21 Plug-in module Plug-in technology Thanks to their compact design. choked Owing to the plug contacts at the feeder side (Photo 6/21 Plug-in module). pluggable banks and plug-in modules make it possible to construct a panel at low costs and save space (see Photo 6/17). choked or non-choked control units (i. the fixed-mounted design (Photo 6/18) offers excellent economy.e. plugged In-line switch-disconnectors with fuses for outgoing cables up to 630 A. high reliability and sufficient flexibility. this technology enables fast replacement without the switchgear having to be isolated from supply. there is no need to replace components when the switchgear has not been disconnected from supply. it may be necessary to mount a fan assembly (reinforcement of convection). in building installation systems. Depending on the power installed and the ambient temperature. 100 mm (250 A) or 200 mm (400 A / 630 A) high. The plug-in modules are 50 mm (11 kW) and 100 mm (45 kW) high. 6/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . e.

as a fixedmounted unit as well as a plug-in and withdrawable unit design.400 A. flexible and cost-effective solution for you.000 V up to 690 V up to 3. SIVACON 8PT is available throughout the world and can be used at all power levels up to 7. Photo 6/22 SIVACON 8PT low-voltage switchgear.100 A up to 110 kA up to 50 kA up to 2.000 V up to 690 V Top Rated insulation voltage Ul Rated operating voltage Ue Rated currents for busbars Main horizontal busbars Rated current Rated peak withstand current Ipk Rated short-time withstand current Icw For circuit-breaker technology Vertical busbars Rated current Rated peak withstand current Ipk Rated short-time withstand current Icw For fixed-mounted design Rated current Rated peak withstand current Ipk Rated short-time withstand current Icw For in-line plug-in design Rated current Rated peak withstand current Ipk Rated short-time withstand current Icw Rated currents switchgear Circuit-breakers Outgoing feeders Degree of protection in acc. 2.200 6/15 6 .200 600 2.400 A up to 375 kA up to 150 kA up to 3. EN 60529: Dimensions (mm) Height Depth Table 6/6 Technical data 1. Your advantage: ”SIVACON Technology Partner” These are qualified and permanently audited switchgear manufacturers close to your company who were chosen by Siemens.400 A up to 163 kA up to 65 kA up to 2. C Safety and proven quality for every system by type testing C Siemens switchgear for reliable operation C Worldwide presence through “SIVACON Technology Partner“ C High flexibility for economical solutions up to 3. This is a fast.200 A Busbar system Rear (top.150 A 110 kA 50 kA up to 1.300 A up to 250 kA up to 100 kA up to up to up to 1.200 600 to 1.000. you will always benefit from Siemens know-how on conditions that can only be offered by a local sales partner. up to 3.200 A up to 187 kA up to 85 kA up to 7.200 A up to 187 kA up to 85 kA up to 6. This way.e. As a power distribution board.300 A up to 630 A IP30 to IP54 IP30 to IP54 2.100 A up to 163 kA up to 50 kA The exclusive use of high-quality Siemens switchgear ensures a long service life and reliable operation. it takes into account the demand for standard solutions from one manufacturer and for local production and the resulting advantages in terms of financing and procurement close to the plant. i.200 A up to 630 A up to 6. SIVACON 8PT is tailored to the needs of the world market. with IEC 60529. bottom) 1. busbar at the rear.Low Voltage SIVACON 8PT for the infrastructure market Introduction The SIVACON 8PT low-voltage switchgear is the standard solution for building and industrial installations.

6/5): C Busbar compartment C Device compartment C Cable/busbar connection compartment C Cross-wiring compartment C Cable routing compartment Main busbar system The main busbar system with busbar cross sections for rated currents up to 7.600 Busbar compartment Device compartment Cable/busbar connection compartment Cross-wiring compartment (for control cables and contact conductors) Cable routing compartment for cables from above Panel structure Generally.and 4-pole busbar system up to 7.e. VDE 0660 Part 500.All of the modules used are type-tested (TTA). VDE 0660.400 A C Rated withstand current Ipk up to 375 kA C Deep switchgear compartment for universal installation C Modular structure of device compartments C Single-front and back-to-back installation C Cable/busbar entry from above or below C Cable connection from the front or rear Description [mm] Photo 6/23 SIVACON 8PT low-voltage switchgear.400 A can be used in various ways (Fig.20 1 0 80 / 00 0 1. 6/6) and consists of the three phase conductors L1 to L3 and the PE. a panel is divided into five functional units (Fig. Supplement 2 (arcing fault) C Quality management DIN EN ISO 9001 C Environmental management DIN EN ISO 14001 Features of a SIVACON 8PT switchgear. 0 60 / 00 0 1. Fig. Part 500 C IEC 61641. busbar at the top. N or PEN conductors.0 .400 A C Type-tested standard modules C (TTA) C Standardized busbar position at the top of the panel C 3. i.0 .20 1 0 80 2.200 2.400 A 0/ 80 000 1. up to 7. 6/5 Panel structure 6/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . up to 7. they comply with the requirements of C IEC 60439-1 C DIN EN 60439-1. busbar at the top.

Max. short-circuit strength: Ipk 375 kA Icw 150 kA With cable connection from above.400 A 2200 1700 PE 800/ 1000 600 L1 L2 L3 N/PEN Max.000 mm. Max. L1 L2 L3 N/PEN 2600 1700 200 Bedienfront PE Fig. the depth of the frame is 800 mm or 1.400 A Max. Modifications and adjustments necessary for operation can be easily performed. rated current (35 °C): Ventilated 4.400 A Unventilated 5.000 A Unventilated 2. the depth of the frame is 1. 1000/ 1200 800 L1 L2 L3 N/PEN Various panel versions are available depending on function.400 A The frames are 800 mm deep and suitable for wall or rear mounting. Bedienfront Busbar system up to 4.200 A The frames are 600 mm deep and suitable for wall or rear mounting.000 mm or 1. short-circuit strength: Ipk 200 kA Icw 80 kA With cable connection from above.950 A 2200 1700 Photo 6/24 Circuit-breaker panel with withdrawable type circuit-breakers Max. fuse switch-disconnectors or switchable fuse switchdisconnectors.Low Voltage Busbar system up to 3.000 mm or 1. rated current (35 °C): Ventilated 3. Modular feeders The modular outgoing feeders enable efficient installation (Photo 6/25). rated current (35 °C): Ventilated 7. L1 200 1000/ 1200 800 L2 L3 N/PEN Max. the panels for outgoing feeders in fixedmounted design are equipped with circuit-breakers. short-circuit strength: Ipk 250 kA Icw 100 kA With cable connection from above. Bedienfront Circuit-breaker technology Circuit-breaker technology (Photo 6/24) comprises panel types which are exclusively used for the supply of the switchgear and for outgoing feeders and couplings. switchgear rated current and necessary shortcircuit strength. the depth of the frame is 1.200 mm. PE 200 300 Busbar system up to 7.200 mm. Fixed-mounted design Depending on the requirements.200 A Unventilated 2.000 A The frames are 800 mm deep and suitable for wall or rear mounting. 6/6 Location of the main busbar system 6/17 6 .

in-line plug-in design Photo 6/29 Reactive power control unit. Switchable in-line fuse switchdisconnectors The in-line fuse switch-disconnectors make for optimum packing density thanks to their compact design and their modular structure (Photo 6/27). non-choked Reactive power compensation The panels for central reactive power compensation (Photo 6/29) ease the load on transformers and cables. In-line plug-in design Panels that provide for outgoing feeders (Photo 6/28) to be plugged in and arranged in line represent a lowpriced alternative to the withdrawable design.Photo 6/25 Fixed-mounted panel with outgoing feeders. which provides single compartments for each circuitbreaker. Depending on the load structure. modular design Photo 6/26 Fixed-mounted panel with outgoing feeder cables. Photo 6/28 3NJ6 fuse switch disconnectors. compartment design Photo 6/27 Fixed-mounted panel with switchable in-line fuse switch-disconnectors Outgoing cable feeders in compartment design This technology. 6/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . these panels facilitate easy and quick retrofitting or replacement without switchgear shutdown. By virtue of the supply-side plug-in contact and their compact design. 500 kvar. they are equipped with choked or non-choked capacitor modules. ensures a higher degree of operator and system safety (Photo 6/26). reduce transmission losses and save electricity costs.

or in IP 30 with protective cover without door. Doors can optionally be hinged left or right. powder- coated sheet steel and meets the requirements of safety class 1 (protective earth conductor). Their enclosure consists of a robust frame with holes. They can for instance be used as main and subdistribution boards in administrative and functional buildings. components and doors. The busbars can be arranged vertically or horizontally in the cabinets. with protective earth conductor. base and rear plate. The cabinet is made of electroplated. The cabinets can be equipped with Siemens circuit-breakers and modular devices on mounting rails. in industrial plants and commercial buildings as well as in public buildings such as schools or hospitals. With assembled doors. The enclosure can be equipped as required with matching assemblies. the enclosures have the degree of protection IP 55 as a standard. and depending on their width.1. improving escape ways in narrow operator rooms. A fully developed and harmonized product range of assembly kits for fixed mounting and withdrawable units is available. All cabinet versions are modularly designed. The enclosures can be matched with busbar systems for rated currents up to 6. The door opening angle is 180°.3 SIKUS Universal and SIKUS Universal HC Systems for the Switchgear Manufacturer Product and system description Product description The single and modular distribution boards of the SIKUS® system comply with the relevant regulations.Low Voltage Bild 6/30 SIKUS Universal HC Bild 6/31 SIKUS Universal 6. a single or double door. 6/19 6 . Cabinets in component kits The cabinet has not been assembled and is put together by the switchgear cabinet installer. and in degree of protection IP 55 with protective cover and sealed door. a sealing between the frames is required to attain IP 55. Doors which feature four-point locking and door lock can be mounted on all sides of the individual cabinets as well as of the cabinet assemblies.300 A. When individual cabi. Available designs and assemblies All cabinet versions are available in safety class 1. and side parts. including roof.nets are lined up.

Environmental aspects The plastic materials used are free of halogen and PVC and can be recycled. 6/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . four-point locking and double-bit key with 3-mm pin C Door-opening angle 180°. He has to observe the specific instructions for the Siemens switchgear to be built in when he performs an installation. DIN EN 60439 Part 1 (VDE 0660 Part 500). doors to be hinged left or right C Doors to be mounted at all cabinet sides C Fixing with thread-forming screws. C limit the possibility of accidental arc flashover and C protect the equipment from the transition of solid objects from one panel to another. Cabinet panel versions C Unequipped panels C Panel with mounting plate for any devices C Panel with assembly kit for circuit-breakers C Panel with standard mounting rails for modular devices C Panel with assembly kit for switch disconnector C Panel with assembly kit for LV HRC fuse switch-disconnector C Panel with assembly kit for LV HRC in-line fuse switch-disconnectors C Panel with assembly kit for compensation modules C Panel with assembly kit for 19” system expansion Features at a glance C Modular component principle for the creation of a great variety of cabinet combinations for standalone and line-up installation C High quality and safety standards C Flexible expansion with manifold assembly kits and accessories C Easy to install due to modular kit system C Safe contacting due to grounding scheme and thread-forming screws C The matching design for every requirement C Appealing design Type testing The type-tested modular SIKUS distribution boards meet the requirements with regard to C Temperature-rise limit C Dielectric strength C Short-circuit strength C Effectiveness of the protective earth conductor C Clearance in air and creepage distances C Mechanical functions C Degree of protection When installing an electrical system. Interior compartmentalization Partitions C prevent any contact between the energized parts of adjacent functional switching panels. C protective measures has then to be performed by the manufacturer (switchgear installer). He is obliged to sign the corresponding test record.Design and test requirements SIKUS Universal and SIKUS Universal HC distribution boards have been approved as type-tested low-voltage switchgear assemblies (TTA) in accordance with IEC 60439-1. All parts mounted with this fixing method are thus included in the protective measure. the switchgear installer as the manufacturer has to observe the standards IEC 60439-1. Modular system and component design Stable cabinet frames with 25-mm hole grid in accordance with DIN 43660 including C System-specific frame coverings C Cable entry from top or bottom C Vertical or horizontal busbar arrangement C Base frame accessible from four sides C Cabinet-high doors with espagnolette lock. DIN EN 60 439 Part 1 (VDE 0660 Part 500) and the instructions of the system supplier. electrical functions. cadmium or lead. Routine testing for C wiring. The paints used don’t contain any solvents. The constructor of a switchgear station is normally the switchgear installer. C insulation.

000 690 6.000/III.200 DIN VDE 0110 1. AC 2 and 3. to DIN EN 60 529 Level of pollution Ambient temperature Relative humidity Altitude of installation Enclosure Plastic parts Surface of metal parts Color Locking system °C % m 3 40 50 at 40 °C 2. 600/IV 8 Overvoltage category Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Clearances in air and creepage distances Rated insulation voltage Ul Rated operational voltageUe Rated current.000 35 (24-h average) 50 at 40 °C max. AC 4. 2000 (above sea level) frame and doors made of 2-mm sheet steel without halogens and PVC electroplated and powder-coated RAL 7035.Low Voltage Technical data STRATUM 3200 SIKUS Universal SIKUS 3200 V kV 1. 600/IV 8 SIKUS Universal HC 1.300 kA kA kA kA up to 220 up to 100 up to 176 up to 80 degree of protection 1 (protective ground conductor) 3.000 690 3. AC 2 and 3. IP 55 with protective cover and sealed door 3 220 100 safety class 1 3. DC IP 30 Degree of protection acc. light gray (other RAL color on request) 2-/4-point locking with built-in espagnolette lock and double-bit key 3-mm pin Table 6/7 Technical data 6/21 6 . main busbars Short-circuit strength Main busbars Ipk Icw (1 s) Multi-terminal busbars Ipk Icw (1 s) Protective measure Number of conductors in the busbar run V V A DIN VDE 0110 1. DC IP 30 with protective cover without door.000/III. AC 4.

powder-coated and in safety class 2 with total insulation. configuration. assemblies of the 3VL molded-case circuit- breaker series. a great variety of configurations is possible. 630 A. Photo 6/33 ALPHA 630 DIN. The standard mounting rail tier spacing amounts to 125 + 150 mm. The rated current maximum amounts to 630 A 40 mm or 60 mm busbar systems with dimensions up to 30 x 10 mm can be installed. design standard: BS The materials used are environmentally compatible. system components and accessories. Color: RAL 7035 light gray (further RAL colors on request). small parts and screws chromated 6/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .1. The construction is based on international specifications and installation preferences. calculation. Degree of protection IP 55 can be attained. EN and VDE specifications C Type-tested cabinets in accordance with DIN EN 60 439-1/3 C Degree of protection IP 55 can be attained with door C Safety class 1 (protective ground conductor) or safety class 2 (total insulation) are available C High-quality surface finish: Cabinets and enclosures made of electroplated and powder-coated sheet steel. Enclosure Material: Sheet steel. Application As main and subdistribution boards in functional. A pre-assembled kit consists of an equipment rack. functional. We recommend using a batterydriven screwdriver. free of halogens and recyclable.4 Floor-Mounted ALPHA 630 Universal. assemblies for mounting the switchgear and modular devices. ordering and installation. system components made of sendzimir-galvanized sheet steel. of size NH3. The distribution board components are designed in such a way that all switchgear and modular devices can be installed using only a screwdriver. e. electroplated. The largest switchgear that can be installed are the LV HRC fuse switch-disconnectors. supports and the corresponding front cover. are available. Features C System design conforms to relevant DIN. Assembly kits Made of sendzimir-galvanized sheet steel for a wide range of configurations. The system components and assemblies can also be supplied in kit form for individual distribution board construction. All components are typetested (TTA). design standard: NF CEI . 63 A up to 630 A. modular devices or terminal blocks. For fuseless incoming/outgoing circuits. The transparent system design enables easy planning. commercial and industrial buildings.6. for switchgear. System A distribution board system comprises an enclosure. commercial and industrial buildings. The distribution boards and components are modularly designed and constructed. ALPHA 630 DIN Distribution Boards Description The ALPHA floor-mounted distribution board can be used as main and subdistribution board in administrative. With just a few standard components. Can be used as control cabinet with cabinet-high mounting plate (see accessories). Photo 6/32 ALPHA Universal.g.

environmentally compatible packing Busbar holder spacing: 400 mm. environmentally compatible packing Tier spacing of mounting rail mm 125. safety class 1 with protective ground or safety class 2 with total insulation connection IP43 / 55 IP30 / 43 / 55 150. 40 to 60 Hz.000 above sea level acc.3 (3-pole)1). 40 to 60 Hz. 2. 150 Modular width Level of pollution Ambient temperature Relative humidity Altitude of installation Type-tested switchgear assembly (TTA) Enclosure Plastic parts Surface of metal parts Color Locking system Packing 1) 18 mm is 1 MW 3 35 (24-h average) % 50 at 40°C m max.000 above sea level EN 60439-1 sheet steel environmentally compatible. to DIN EN 60529 ALPHA 630 DIN III kV 6 DIN VDE 0110 V 690 V 690 ALPHA 630 Universal III 6 DIN VDE 0110 69 690 690. recyclable electroplated and powder-coated RAL 7035 light gray 3-point locking with built-in espagnolette and double-bit key with 3-mm pin in impact-proof.Low Voltage Technical data Overvoltage category Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Clearances in air and creepage distances Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated operational voltage Ue Rated voltage Rated current Rated peak short-circuit current Ipk Rated short-time current Icw/1s Protective measure Degree of protection acc. busbar 30 mm x 10 mm Table 6/8 Technical data 6/23 6 . to DIN EN 60439-1 (VDE 0660 Part 500) and DIN EN 60439-3 (VDE 0660 Part 504) sheet steel environmentally compatible. for built-in devices 630 53 25 V AC 690. 2. recyclable electroplated and powder-coated RAL 7035 light gray 3-point locking with built-in espagnolette lock lock and double-bit key with 3-mm pin in impact-proof. 200 18 mm is 1 MW 3 35 (24-h average) 50 at 40°C max. for built-in devices A 630 kA up to 61. current flow time 30 ms kA 20 safety class 1 with protective ground conductor.

The construction is based on international standards. commercial and residential buildings. Being a complete product system. The distribution boards and components are modularly designed. All components to be integrated into the cabinet are designed in such a way that their installation merely requires a screwdriver. The materials used are environmentally compatible and recyclable. system components and accessories.5 Wall-Mounted ALPHA 400/600. 40-mm/60-mm busbar systems can be mounted. Cabinets with doors feature degree of protection IP43. ALPHA Universal and ALPHA 400 Stratum Distribution Boards Description The wall-mounted distribution board system for a rated current of up to 400 A can be used as a main or subdistribution board in industrial. assembly kits for mounting the switchgear and modular equipment. calculation. System A distribution board system comprises an enclosure. without PVC and halogens. a variety of configurations is possible. functional. order processing and installation. CEI The transparent system design of the Siemens distribution board range enables easy planning. the wall-mounted distribution board range includes cabinets with 6 to 9 rows. With just a few standard components. configuration. fully recyclable plastics C Sturdy sheet-steel stays in the scope of supply C Comprehensive range of pressembled kits C Front cover with sealable 90° quick-release locks C Doors with foamed sealing as standard 6. The product range comprises cabinets designed as safety class 1 with PE connection or safety class 2 with total insulation. The system components and assemblies can also be supplied in kit form for individual board construction. administrative.C Replaceable locking systems (accessories) C Built-in double-bit key with 3-mm pin C Doors can be hinged on the right or left C Door opening angle 180° C Modular design allows transparent planning C 125 and 150 mm tier spacing of the mounting rail in accordance with DIN 43870 C Ample wiring space behind the mounting rail C Distortion-resistant equipment racks and front covers C Environmentally compatible. Enclosures are available both for surface mounting and for flush mounting. All components are type-tested (TTA). 150 or 200 mm. 6/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .1. The mounting rail tier spacing is 125. Photo 6/34 ALPHA Universal design standard: NF. Several assembly kits from the SIKUS floor-mounted product range are identical in design.

modular devices or terminal blocks.Low Voltage C C C C C C C C Photo 6/35 ALPHA 400 design standard: DIN VDE Photo 6/35 ALPHA 400 stratum design standard: BS C C C C C Enclosure Material: Electroplated sheet steel. The largest switchgear that can be mounted are LV HRC fuse switch-disconnectors of size NH2. Application The SIKUS wall-mounted distribution board can be used as main and subdistribution board in industrial. powder-coated and. small parts and screws chromated Replaceable locking systems (accessories) Doors can be hinged on the right or left Door opening angle 180° Modular design allows transparent planning Ample wiring space behind the mounting rail 2 cable entries top and bottom per panel width Distortion-resistant equipment racks and front covers Environmentally compatible. without PVC and halogens. With its cabinethigh mounting plate. C Type-tested cabinets according to DIN EN 60 439-1 (VDE 0660 Part 500) and DIN EN 60439-3 (DIN VDE 0660 Part 504) C Robust sheet-steel enclosure C Available in safety class 1 (protective ground conductor connection) or safety class 2 (total insulation) C High-quality surface finish: distribution boards and enclosure made of electroplated sheet steel with powder coating. e. system components made of sendzimir galvanized sheet C C steel. 3VL circuitbreakers up to 400 A can be mounted. with total insulation Color: light gray. 400 A. commercial and residential buildings. the wallmounted distribution boards can also be used as control cabinets. in safety class 2. functional. fully recyclable plastics Sturdy sheet-steel stays Comprehensive program of preassembled kits Front cover with sealable 90° quick-release locks Assemblies can be installed and removed over entire height Kits mounted on stays can be removed for configuration and wiring purposes Installation facilitated by components with keyhole fixing and quick-release locks Doors with foamed sealing as standard 6/25 6 .g. for switchgear. Additionally. traffic white. administrative. EN and VDE specifications. Features C System design conforms to relevant DIN. RAL 7035 (ALPHA Universal). RAL 9016 (ALPHA 160/400) Installation using auxiliary frames and kits Sendzimir-galvanized sheet steel for a wide range of configurations.

environmentally in impact-proof.3 (3-pole)1). environcompatible packing compatible packing mentally compatible packing 1) Busbar holder spacing: 400 mm. 40 to 60 Hz. for built-in devices up to 400 17 690 690 690. 40 to 60 Hz. 2. to DIN EN 60439-1 (VDE 0660 Part 500) and DIN EN 60439-3 (VDE 0660 Part 504) sheet steel electroplated and powder-coated RAL 9016 traffic white 2-point locking with built-in espagnolette lock and doublebit key with 3-mm pin 200 18 mm is 1 MW 3 35 (24-h average) 50 at 40°C max.Technical data Overvoltage category Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Clearances in air and creepage distances Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated operational voltage Ue Rated voltage V V V AC kV ALPHA 400/160 DIN III 6 ALPHA 125 Universal III 6 ALPHA 400 STRATUM III 6 DIN VDE 0110 DIN VDE 0110 DIN VDE 0110 690 690 690. to DIN EN 60529 Tier spacing of mounting rail Modular width Level of pollution Ambient temperature Relative humidity Altitude of installation % m 3 mm 4/5 4/5 IP43 IP30 / 43 IP40 125/150 18 mm is 1 MW 3 35 (24-h average) 50 at 40°C max. 2. 2. 40 to 60 Hz. for built-in devices up to 400 17 Rated current Rated peak short-circuit current Ipk Rated short-time current Icw /1s Protective measure A kA kA – 10 / 0.1s safety class 1 with protective ground connection or safety class 2 with total insulation 4/5 safety class 1 with protective ground connection safety class 1 with protective ground connection Number of conductors on the busbar track Degree of protection acc.000 above sea level acc.000 above sea level EN 60439-1 EN 60439-3 – 18 mm is 1 MW 35 (24-h average) 50 at 40°C max. for built-in devices up to 400 up to 61.000 above sea level EN 60439-1 Type-tested switchgear assembly (TTA) Enclosure Surface of metal parts sheet steel electroplated and powder-coated RAL 7035 light gray 2-point locking with built-in espagnolette lock and doublebit key with 3-mm pin sheet steel electroplated and powder-coated RAL 7035 light gray 2-point locking with built-in espagnolette lock and doublebit key with 3-mm pin Color Locking system Packing in impact-proof. busbar 30 mm x 10 mm Table 6/9 Technical data 6/26 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . current. flow time 30 ms 20 690 690 690. environmentally in impact-proof.

preassembled empty cabinets for flush and surface mounting. ordering. calculation. Based on the wall-mounted ALPHA 400-DIN. ALPHA SELECT is available as a planning tool for electricians. Meter cabinets and their components are modularly designed. The transparent system design enables easy planning. metering kits can be mounted in any Siemens installation system featuring a depth of 210 mm. equipping and installation of components and complete cabinets.Low Voltage 6. ALPHA cable inlet boxes and cable connection boxes are provided. an identical modular system has been created that conforms to all of the current technical supply conditions and provides a great variety of options in terms of enclosure design. the system also includes meter cabinets for damp rooms featuring IP55. Besides the customary meter cabinets. planning engineers and electrical wholesalers. and a comprehensive range of accessories. delivery. measured and distributed. project- specific mounting and equipping options. which are offered in degree of protection IP43. A special emphasis has been placed on meeting regionally differing requirements of power distribution system operators and local installation practice. accessories. degree of protection and equipment to be integrated.6 ALPHA-ZS Meter and Distribution Cabinets for Germany Overview For universal use in residential and non-residential buildings. 6/27 6 . For internal measurements. individual combinations of empty cabinets and rapid mounting kits can be planned. the options for planning and erecting larger metering and distribution cabinet systems are manifold. The system includes empty cabinets as flat packs for surface mounting (delivered in components for self-assembly). Thanks to the universal system design and numerous combination possibilities with the distribution board system ALPHA 400-DIN. Design Modular meter cabinets of the ALPHA 400-ZS series consist of the following system components: empty cabinets in four heights and five widths. cabinet-high rapid mounting kits (RMK) for extremely fast equipping and wiring.1. Benefit C Identical with ALPHA 400-DIN distribution board C Planning conforms to current technical supply conditions and requirements of power distribution system operators C Short installation times C Low storage expense Field of application ALPHA 400-ZS meter cabinets can be used wherever electric energy is to be supplied. RMKs in three different widths. To complete these systems. It helps to speed up planning and quickly determines prices for distribution boards and meter cabinets. Siemens offers the new ALPHA 400-ZS meter cabinets. The search criteria town. scope of delivery. so that few standard components are sufficient to create an optimum of diverse. postal code and responsible power distribution system operator can be used to find a product range of complete meter Photo 6/37 Meter cabinet with three panels cabinets and installation examples that meets the given requirements. transportation. In addition.

Fig. 6/7 ALPHA meter cabinet. assembly drawing 6/28 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

Selection criteria Installation Small distribution boards are offered for flush and surface mounting. they can be categorized as suitable for flush-mounting as wall distribution boards (filament testing up to 650°C) and for hollowwall installation (filament testing up to 850°C). they can be used close to the load center both in residential and institutional buildings. DIN 43871 and IEC 60439-3 standards. Standards SIMBOX small distribution boards comply with DIN VDE 0603. Mounting depth The distribution boards can be equipped with modular devices such as MCBs and RCCBs.7 SIMBOX Small Distribution Boards Application Small distribution boards are suitable for all types of applications in electrical buildings installations as subdistribution boards or floor distribution boards. According to different requirements to their fire safety.g. Size Depending on your space requirements for built-in devices and wiring. above all. filament testing at temperatures from 650° to 950°C) or the protection against non-permissible voltages on the enclosures (safety class III). This ensures the compliance with standard measures and. Thanks to their low mounting depth. safe operation due to the observance of fire safety regulations (e.to 4-row versions of small distribution boards.Low Voltage 6. or in commercial buildings and shops.1. Mounting rail spacing can vary between 125 mm and 150 mm. such as schools. you may choose from 1. up to a 70 mm Photo 3/38 SIMBOX 63 for flush-mounting / hollow-wall installation Photo 6/39 SIMBOX 63 hood-type small distribution board Photo 6/40 SIMBOX WP Photo 6/41 SIMBOX Universal LC 6/29 6 .

ranging from degree of protection IP30 (residential buildings) to IP 55 (splash-water protected – industrial. Above that.or 55 mm device mounting depth for snap-on fixing on the 35 mm x 7. Photo 6/42 Comb Photo 6/43 Door frame in low relief 150 mm mounting rail spacing SIMBOX LC and SIMBOX WP provide for additional wiring space owing to a mounting rail spacing of 150 mm. Appealing design Designed by Guigiaro: SIMBOX LC owes its attractive look to the Italian designer Giugiaro. Degree of protection You may choose between small distribution boards for a variety of applications. Terminal block The terminal block with an inclination of 20° is easily visible and allows uncomplicated cable entry. The cables are simply inserted and you can do without the cumbersome and imprecise knocking out of the cable entry glands. Low in relief Flush-mounted SIMBOX 63 types almost disappear in the wall and can be concealed by a picture if desired. commercial and functional buildings) System advantages Easy installation ”Comb”: The soft and flexible teeth at the sliding flange help to make wiring a quick and convenient action. strain relief clamps ensure perfect control and secure seating of the N and PE conductors. who is one of the best known industrial and consumer goods designers.5 mm standard mounting rails in accordance with DIN EN 50022. 6/30 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

the SMS Universal rapid wiring system is available for many types of application: C For the installation of luminaires. Supply connection System power is supplied via a feeder.Low Voltage 6. to strip them and to make the terminal connections at the construction site.. there is no waste and the cables can always be used again for later modifications. Solid conductors of 1.. C Temporary design installations. The 5-pole first connection with strain relief (socket version) is designed for screw connection. Depending on the requirements and the application intended. Since all of the cables are equipped with plug-in connectors at the connection and distribution points. Furthermore. In contrast to conventional electrical installations. 230 V. skirting-boards.5 mm2 can be connected.5 mm2. It facilitates the installation at the construction site and saves time and costs. in false ceilings.. camping .1. modified or retrofitted simply by plugging in the components.5 to 2. Compared to conventional installations. furniture . Solid or stranded conductors of 1. the installation can be designed. hollow walls. trade fairs.8 SMS Rapid Wiring System Application As the components of the SMS Universal rapid wiring system are already pre-assembled at the factory.5 mm2 or finely stranded ones of 1.5 mm2..5 to 2. cellular floors as well as in ductings for electrical installations. The 3-pole first connection with strain relief can be made with screwless terminals.5 mm2 with end sleeves can be connected. Plugging in saves considerable installation time. this system is less expensive. 6/8 Overview of SMS rapid wiring system 6/31 6 . You only have to make the initial connections of the system infeed. the installation of a line network is completely flexible. it is no longer necessary to cut the cables to length.g. for example NYM 5 x 2. the system provides rapid and efficient wiring in ceiling plenums. 230/400 V or 3 x 2. operated via conventional switches/pushbuttons C For the installation of shielded contact outlets in sill-type trunkings C For installations in false and cellular floors. e. Plug-in connectors The housings of the screw-type plugin connectors can be opened by re- APM 610 switching devices SMS Universal Kombi (instabus EIB) SMS Universal Fig.

luminaires for sheet strengths of 0. The N conductor is a leading conductor with regard to the phase conductors. All of the device terminals are lockable. 2.5 mm2/2. IEC 320 C Cost-saving wiring and therefore less expensive than the conventional installation C To be used in ambient temperatures of up to 45°C C Connectors are non-interchangeable through coding C Reusable C Cutting to length and termination can be performed at the device C The system is also available for an instabus EIB installation with integrated bus line. Connection for finely stranded conductor 0. and the grounding sign U. and have two outgoing 3-pole conductors. 3.or 5-pole prefabricated cables similar to H05VV-F. Connecting cables 3 x 1.5 to 1. Cover The covers can be used to seal outgoing terminals (socket parts) which are not used in order to raise the degree of protection of the plug-in system from IP 20 to IP 40.5 mm2 They consist of a 3-pole pre-fabricated H05VV-F cable.5 mm.5 to 1. for example: for the 5-pole plug-in connector 1. Distribution box The distribution box consists of a housing with an integrated circuit either for 1 series circuit or 1 pushbutton circuit with 2 connected outputs for luminaires and 1 output for a power outlet. T-distributors are suitable for 3-pole through-wiring of luminaires. The 5-pole through-wiring is marked as phase conductor with the terminal designation 1. the PE conductor in turn is a leading conductor with regard to the N conductor. 6/32 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . N. Features C Suitable for wiring in all types of structural hollow spaces C Easy and straightforward planning C Fast. every 3. if necessary. with DIN VDE 0625. 3. you will find the identification of the conductors. 2 x 5-pole and 6 x 3-pole distribution blocks are suitable for 5-pole through-wiring and have 3-pole outgoing terminals. Distribution blocks It is possible to through-connect and branch off to the electricity consumers via plug-in distribution blocks with one incoming and several outgoing terminals. Device connection without screws (snap-in) Can be snapped into the device cutouts of the consumer devices. Available as 3-pole socket (output) or plug (input).and 5-pole distribution block has an integrated provision for fixing. Opening up the hinged housing parts will make the shock-hazard protected screw terminals accessible for conductor connection. with factory-crimped plug and socket. e. The construction of the plug-in connector guarantees non-interchangeability so that it is impossible to connect other plug-in systems. On the upper half of the housing. With the exception of the T-distribution. EN 60 320. The outgoing terminals are designed as socket parts (coupling). 2.g.5 mm2. for example. simple and time-saving installation (simply plug in) C Flexible with regard to modification and retrofitting C All of the plug connectors can be plugged and unplugged while the system is energised in acc.leasing two locating levers (opposite each other) with a screwdriver. 4. with factorycrimped plug or socket and free ultrasonically compacted core ends for further fabrication. Locking The socket and plug parts of extension and connection cables have a locking device to form a fixed connection in accordance with DIN VDE 0628. Extension cables They consist of 3-. 4. 6 and 8 m). They are available in standard lengths (2. Two connections per pole are possible.

16 A 6/33 6 .Low Voltage SMS Universal installation with central ON/OFF 20 3 11 20 20 11 6 10 11 20 14 20 11 11 8 20 15 8 20 11 11 20 11 10 7 15 Through-wiring. circuitry with central ON/OFF. without screws Distribution block.5 mm2. 4 x 3-pole Extension cable 3 x 2. without screws Fig. 230 V AC plug-in connector.5-mm2-Einspeiseleitung geschaltet 3 6 7 8 10 Plug-in connector. 3-pole. plug Snap-in connector. 6 x 3-pole Distribution block. direct connection Luminaires with snap-in connector for T-distribution 11 NYM 3 x 2. with snap-in plugs/sockets integrated in the luminaire Extension cable 3 x 1. socket Connection cable. socket-type. 6/9 Installation of luminaires with SMS Universal in false ceilings. 3 x 1.5 mm2.5 mm2. 3-pole. plug and socket Connection cable 3 x 1. plug and socket 11 14 15 20 Through-wiring. 4 x 3-pole T-distributor.5 mm2.

garage door controls with LOGO!® mini control). C Uneqiupped enclosure with mounting plate for any kind of device installation C Molded-plastic enclosure with assembly kits for: – modular devices with snap-on fixing (e. in building-site power distributions.g. 100 A to 630 A (e. with transparent or non-transparent cover.g. 63 A to 250 A (e. 5SB.g. 3KE) – load transfer switches.g. Photo 6/44 8HP insulated distribution system Product range Any combination of five enclosure sizes. 5SY miniature circuitbreaker) – DIAZED and NEOZED fuse links (e. functional and residential buildings.9 8HP Insulated Distribution System – High Performance due to Modular Design Brief description The 8HP insulated distribution system is a type-tested modular system for the fast and efficient construction of totally insulated power distributions.g. or sewage plants. The modularly designed system is suitable as a housing for small distribution boards and controls (e.g. 3NA) – fuse switch-disconnectors. 3KA. on ships. 3VF) C Special design for use on ships 6/34 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 400 A to 1000 A (e. 3KL) – switch-disconnectors.g.6. 63 A to 630 A (e.1. 250 A to 630 A (e. 3NP) – switch-disconnectors with fuses. steelworks and quarries). in paper factories. 3KE) – parallel switches. 3KE) – circuit-breakers. Resistance against corrosive atmosphere makes it perfectly suitable for use in the chemical industry. The fireproofing test also permits use in coal mines and lignite open strip mines. Minimum space requirements due to high density of assemblies and a flexible adaptation to constructive requirements at the site of installation allow customer requirements to be met perfectly.g. 63 A to 800 A (e. Areas of application The type-tested (TTA) insulated 8HP distribution system is used as a lowvoltage main and sub-distribution board in industrial. 5SE) – NH00 to NH3 fuse bases (e. The high degree of protection IP 65 (special version in IP 66) allows the distribution board to be used in damp or dusty environment (e.g.g.g.

5 307 307 307 307 614 614 [mm] Fig. chemical industry) High degree of personnel protection and system availability Use as system component for export to USA Also suitable for use in areas with earthquake hazard and in civil emergency rooms C Resistant against corrosion and contaminants C Total insulation C UL approval C IAB and BfZ test Table 6/10 Features 614 6/35 6 . with transparent or non-transparent cover C Type-tested switchgear assembly (TTA) C High degree of protection IP 65 (IP 66) Creation of TTA-tested power distributions Use in dusty or humid environment (also on ships) Suitable for use in corrosive atmosphere (e.5 153. 6/10 Delivery range: 5 housing sizes in any combination.Low Voltage 307 460.g.

In combination with oxygen or air. the residual-current-operated circuit-breaker with a rated fault current of ≤ 300 mA ensures extensive protection. they can be easily adjusted to changing requirements at any time. A fault clearance by line-side overcurrent protective devices such as fuses or circuit-breakers is not always guaranteed at relatively low currents. a thermal load of only 60 W might lead to an ignition.6. generators and transformers when faults occur. also be connected to a power management system. The SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers can be used in every country all over the world and work reliably in accordance with every electrical standard. The high reliability and availability of the individual components. safety for human beings and machines is becoming more and more important. This is only possible if all individual products and systems are well coordinated and are able to exchange important information. Here too. Individual system components Circuit-breakers are responsible for the protection against overload and short circuits in systems. They can also be used as incoming and outgoing feeder circuits in distribution boards as well as main and EMERGENCY STOP switches in connection with lockable rotary operating mechanisms.e. with the guarantee of a uniform quality standard based on national and international regulations and standards can ensure this high safety level. Siemens circuitbreaker devices and fuse systems provide optimum prerequisites for complete system protection and thus for safe and reliable operation in modern power supply systems. and the best possible protection in case of direct contact (with rated fault current ≤ 30 mA). Siemens residual-currentoperated circuit-breakers provide optimum protection against hazardous shock currents in case of indirect contact. The demands on electrical power supply in industry. ensures an economic and fault-free operation for many years. i. motors. The demand for more comfort is combined with the desire for improved security and reduced downtimes. Only perfectly adjusted components and products from a single source.2 Circuit-Breaker Devices and Fuse Systems Due to increasingly complex processes. Thanks to their modular design and modular accessories. 6/36 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Via PROFIBUS-DP they can . residential and functional buildings are increasing. and thus the whole system. Fire protection Short circuits and ground faults are especially fire-hazardous if relatively high resistances occur in the fault circuit at the arc. This is carried out via a device-internal bus interface or by mountable accessories and binary inputs. Personnel protection and fire protection with residual-currentoperated circuit-breakers Personnel protection Damages to the insulation might result in fault states which require additional measures according to DIN VDE 0100 against excessive shock currents.

Moreover. This prevents damage to increasingly expensive and sensitive devices and systems. installation safety and extremely reduced installation times. as EMERGENCY STOP and repair switches in distribution boards. In the open position they comply with the conditions determined for disconnection. increased operator safety. Siemens circuit-breakers and fuses provide the best conditions for protecting cables and lines against overload and short circuit. personnel protection has highest priority. switching overvoltages and overvoltages caused by strikes of lightning. 6/37 6 . miniature circuit-breakers and residual-current-operated circuit-breakers ensures comprehensive system protection as regards short-circuit. The new 5SY circuit-breaker product range with its components based on the complete breaker range for all important functions really offers you many advantages. fuses. Thus. The circuit-breaker product range is rounded off by mountable residualcurrent-operated circuit-breaker blocks which integrate the residualcurrent protective function into the device as a whole.g.. or commercial. institutional and residential buildings.Low Voltage Cable and line protection with circuit-breakers and fuses Due to their excellent product features and the fact that the product range is optimally designed for the wide range of applications in the fields of industry. e. They are used. Disconnecting and isolating The available disconnectors guarantee a safe isolation of downstream system components and devices. System protection The well coordinated combination of circuit-breakers. for example. overload and fire protection. Matching all individual components ensures optimum system protection in all areas of application. the coordinated use of lightning current and surge arresters can protect the electrical system against overvoltages resulting from electrostatic discharges.

capacitors.600 A.2.e.6. i.000 V C No derating (i. generators. same accessories for several sizes 6/38 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . busbars and cables C As an Emergency OFF circuitbreaker in connection with Emergency OFF equipment Product range C 3 sizes from 630 A to 6.000 A) C Wide range of accessories such as locking devices. motors. Switch ES operator control and monitoring software C External digital and analog output modules.1 Circuit-Breakers Brief description Circuit-breakers serve as incoming and outgoing circuit-breakers for power distribution in low-voltage switchgear. generators and transformers. current values.300 A C Fixed-mounted and withdrawable design.600 A in switchgear only 400 mm wide C State-of-the-art microprocessorcontrolled overcurrent release for every application Further versions C SENTRON 3WL circuit-breaker with UL489 approval C Versions with ANSI.and 4-pole C Short-circuit breaking capacity from 50 kA to 100 kA (at 440 V AC) C Rated operational voltages up to 1. distribution. 70. SENTRON 3WL Air Circuit-Breakers Areas of application C As an incoming. rated operational voltage up to 690 V AC C Three versions with short-circuit breaking capacity 40. 100 kA at 415 V AC C No derating up to 50°C. coupling and outgoing circuit-breaker in electric installations C As a switching and protecting device for motors. CSA or CCC approval C SENTRON 3WL switch-disconnector for DC applications SENTRON VL Compact Circuit-Breakers Areas of application C As incoming and outgoing circuitbreakers in distribution systems C As switching and protective devices for motors. full rated current at same size up to 50°C C Complete range of modular accessories. full rated current) up to 55 °C (up to 5. They are responsible for overload and short-circuit protection in systems. tripped signals. transformers. mechanical mutually interlocking devices. digital input module Photo 6/45 SENTRON 3WL Photo 6/46 SENTRON 3VL (250A) Features C Modular design for an easy retrofitting of functions and components C Communication-capable via PROFIBUS-DP (transmission of circuit-breaker states. generators. 3. power management functions) C Remote diagnosis via Ethernet / Internet possible with BDA (Breaker Data Adapter) C Space saving: up to 1. transformers and capacitors C As main and EMERGENCY STOP switches in connection with lockable rotary operating mechanisms Product range C Rated currents from 16 to 1.e.

rated current 25 A. For installation in dusty and damp rooms. at 400 V AC suitable for AC motors up to 11 kW C Size S2 – 55 mm wide. withdrawable design or busbar connection – the high versatility of SENTRON 3VL guarantees easy installation.g. dust. every SENTRON 3VL can communicate via PROFIBUS or other internationally used bus protocols. The 3RV1 circuit-breakers are suitable for use in IT systems (IT networks).5 kW C Size S0 – 45 mm wide. suitable encapsulations have to be provided. destructive gases). maximum switching capacity. Standards SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers work reliably no matter where they are used. Product range The circuit-breakers are available in 4 sizes: C Size S00 – 45 mm wide. max. integrated wrap-around terminals. The circuitbreakers are used for switching and protecting AC motors up to 45 kW at 400 V AC or for other loads with rated currents up to 100 A. max. rated current 12 A. a comprehensive range of accessories even meets special requirements. plugin sockets or guide frames. The permissible ambient temperatures. 6/39 6 . in accordance with every electrical standard. it is extraordinarily easy to adjust the device to changing requirements. thermal/magnetic or electronic. Power Management offers the user an economic method to visualize system states. rated current 100 A. SIRIUS 3RV Circuit-Breakers Areas of application 3RV1 circuit-breakers are compact. at 400 V AC suitable for AC motors up to 5. at 400 V AC suitable for AC motors up to 45 kW Photo 6/47 SIRIUS 3RV10 circuit-breakers Operating conditions The 3RV1 circuit-breakers are climateproof.Low Voltage Features Modular design Due to the compact dimensions and the modular accessories. tripping currents and other boundary conditions for the application are to be found in the technical data and tripping characteristics. Quality Quality management according to ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art production methods ensure consistently high quality. current-limiting circuit-breakers optimized for load feeders. The 3RV circuit-breakers can be power supplied from the bottom or top. at 400 V AC suitable for AC motors up to 22 kW C Size S3 – 70 mm wide. Easy connection and installation No matter whether you are using front or rear terminals. Universal accessories No matter whether you are using motorized operating mechanisms. Easy configuration Dimensioning programs such as SIMARIS design provide you with support for calculations and dimensioning processes. max. They are designed for indoor operation in which there are no severe operating conditions (e. rated current 50 A. a plug-in system. corrosive vapors. Communication via PROFIBUS-DP Independent of the selected overcurrent release. Two internal accessory product lines are available for different voltage levels and can be easily snapped into place. Economical operation in all cases Graded switching capacities make it possible to economically adjust the circuit-breakers to short-circuit currents up to 100 kA at the mounting position. The different short-circuit breaking capacity in the IT system has to be observed for that. max.

The overload signal is reset automatically. The overload release just activates two auxiliary contacts (1NC + 1NO). the current paths are to be connected in series. even high peak inrush currents of the transformers do not lead to trippings upon closure. 6/40 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Areas of application The tripping characteristics of the 3RV10 /3RV11 circuit-breakers are mainly designed for the protection of AC motors. The same applies to the circuit-breakers for transformer protection. The circuit-breakers of sizes S2 and S3 are also available in tripping class 20 (CLASS 20). In order to prevent premature trippings due to the phase-failure sensitivity. The circuit-breaker itself only trips in case of a downstream short circuit. the three current paths are always to be loaded uniformly. Motor protection with overload relay function (automatic reset) The circuit-breakers for motor protection with overload relay function are designed for the protection of AC motors. It is also possible to directly deactivate a downstream contactor.Since the operational currents. System protection The 3RV10 / 3RV11 circuit-breakers for motor protection are also suitable for system protection. Overload tripping can be signaled to a higherlevel controller via the auxiliary contacts. With single-phase loads. The factory setting of the short-circuit release is a value thirteen times the rated current of the circuit-breaker. The circuit-breaker always remains active in the case of an overload. Transformer protection The 3RV14 circuit-breakers are also suitable for transformer protection. Circuit-breakers with thermal overload releases are usually designed in tripping class 10 (CLASS 10). Decisive for the correct selection of circuit-breakers is always the precise starting and rating data for the motor to be protected. thus making the start-up of motors under aggravated start-up conditions possible. The rated current In of the motor to be protected is to be set on the setting scale. The phase-failure sensitivity of the circuit-breaker ensures that the circuit-breaker is tripped in time in case of the failure of a phase and the resulting overcurrents in the other phases. They have the same short-circuit release and overload release as the circuit-breakers for motor protection without overload relay function. This ensures a trouble-free start-up and safe protection of the motor. the motor power values given in the selection tables are only guide values. Due to the high excitation values for the instantaneous short-circuit release of >20 x In. starting currents and current peaks can even be different in motors with the same power rating due to the inrush current that is present. The circuit-breakers are therefore also called motor circuitbreakers.

nor adequate shock-hazard protection is required. D03/M30 x 1 DIAZED NDZ/E16. They provide secure protection for electric systems. high-quality switch. fuse systems are distinguished as follows: C Fuses that can be handled by nonspecialists (mainly screw-in type) NEOZED D01/E14. Siemens offers an appropriate range of covers and phase barriers to also provide these LV HRC fuses with shock-hazard protection. where it is impossible to interchange fuses having different rated currents due to their design. The following low-voltage fuse systems are classified according to their application: C NEOZED® fuses D0 system ranging from the standard version to MINIZED circuit-breakers C DIAZED fuses D system with DIAZED and SILIZED® fuse links C LV HRC fuse system C Cylindrical fuses A fuse always consists of several components (at least one fuse base and one fuse link).2 Fuse Systems General Low-voltage fuses are space-saving. DIV/R11/4“ . size 0. size 1.2. Flush-mounting fuse base Protective cover Adapter sleeve Fuse link Screw cap Photo 6/47 Design of a NEOZED fuse (screw-in fuse system) LV HRC fuse base Protective cover Cover LV HRC fuse link Photo 6/48 Design of a LV HRC fuse (plug-in fuse system) Fuse systems Within the low-voltage range of up to 1000 V. D02/E18. size 4a. and accurate current limiting with a high resistance to aging.Low Voltage 6. size 4. DIII/E33. 6/41 6 .and controlgear which reliably break overload and short-circuit currents. cables and lines as well as for electric devices. optimum selectivity conditions among themselves as well as in combination with miniature circuitbreakers. size 3. C Fuses that can only be handled by specialists (mainly plug-in type) LV HRC fuse systems size 00 (size 000). They comply with the requirements concerning high operating safety. size 2. DII/E27. and where shock-hazard protection is ensured for the user. where neither a rated current non-interchangeability as a result of the design. low power loss.

German notation e. Utilization categories According to their functions. Owing to smaller rated currents. 500 V AC. 440 V DC. ~ 500V 2) European notation for direct voltage e. Here. several fuses are connected in series in an installation.Selection The following parameters are important when choosing a fuse for circuit protection: C Rated voltage Volt (V) AC voltage1) DC voltage2) C Rated current Ampere (A) C Utilization category (as time-current characteristic) C Design (type and sizes) Features C NEOZED. the requirement of a ratio of 1:1. Siemens fuses of the utilization category gL/gG are interselective in the ratio 1:1. DIAZED. especially to enhance shock-hazard protection C Approved in many countries throughout the world Selectivity Usually. LV HRC. Selectivity ensures that only the faulted circuit is broken and not the entire process in operation.6 given in the standard is distinctly exceeded. This is due to the fact that the tolerance ranges of ±5% of the time/current characteristics are considerably lower.g.g. from one rated current level to the other. Photo 6/49 Fast arcing and an accurate extinction are the prerequisites for a safe breaking capacity g = General-purpose fuses: Fuse ˆ links which must. to DIN VDE) B = Protection of mines ˆ Tr = Transformer protection ˆ 1) European notation for alternating voltage e.g. i. SITOR® fuses and cylindrical fuses have a consistently high quality C Low power loss output for high economy and minimal heating C Safe rated breaking capacity from the lowest inadmissible overload current up to the highest shortcircuit current C Fuses have full selectivity in accordance with the standard at a rated current ratio of 1:1. continuously conduct currents up to the specified rated current and break currents from the lowest fusing current up to the breaking current. Overload and short-circuit protection.6 C High current limiting to protect all system components C Reliable long-term. German notation e. fuses are divided into utilization categories: the first letter indicates the functional class. conductor cross-sections can be reduced in size. 2nd letter: Object G = Cable and conductor protection ˆ (general applications) M = Switchgear/motor protection (for ˆ protection of motor circuits) R = Semiconductor/thyristor protecˆ tion (for protection of rectifiers) L = Cable and conductor protection ˆ (acc.25 at a rated voltage of up to 230 V AC.e. at least. 440V 6/42 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . the second the object to be protected: 1st letter: Functional class a = Accompanied fuses: Fuse links ˆ which must. at least. continuous operation C High resistance towards aging to avoid unnecessary system malfunctions C Constant characteristics even under different temperature conditions C Safe replacement of fuse links and switching with the MINIZED® switch-disconnector C Extensive product range for all applications C Wide range of matched accessories.g. continuously conduct currents up to their specified rated current and which must be able to break currents above a specific multiple of the rated current up to the rated breaking current. SILIZED.

partial electrical arcs in series result. 50 to a cut-off current with a peak value of approx. ensuring that the current is quickly interrupted with significant current limiting. the resistance to pressure and temperature change of the fuse body as well as the chemical purity. quick. grain size and density of the quartz sand are of great importance. The characteristic ”slow” of the DIAZED fuses for the protection of DC traction systems is particularly suitable for breaking direct currents with a high inductance. ranging from the lowest inadmissible overload current to the highest short-circuit current. Both characteristics can also be used for cable and conductor protection. 6/11 Fuse application with regard to the utilization category 6/43 6 . is significantly influenced by the manufacturing quality. slow) safely interrupt inadmissible overload and short-circuit currents. defined in IEC/CEE and DIN VDE. When all of the narrow parts of a fuse element melt at the same time. For example. etc. When a fuse blows because of a short circuit.Low Voltage Furthermore. The short-circuit current is only limited by the network impedance. For example. The current limiting. performance factor. besides designing the dimensions. an LV HRC fuse link of size 2 with In = 224 A reduces a short-circuit current with a potential rms value of approx. gR. 18 kA. “gB” Mining HV HRC fuse switch-fuse combination LV HRC fuse switch-disconnector Overcurrent relay > I M “gR/aR” semiconductor protection “aM” switchgear protection “gTr” transformer protection “gL/gG” cable and conductor protection Fig. switching angle. – are defined in the national (DIN VDE 0636) and international (IEC 60 269) standards. too. the short-circuit current continues to be fed into the network until the fuse breaks the circuit. the fuse with the ”quick” characteristic interrupts more quickly than one in the utilization class gL/gG. General-purpose fuses (gL/gG. punched profile and position in the fuse body of the fuse element. The basic requirements and circuit data for tests – voltages. Accompanied fuses (aM. aR) are used exclusively for short-circuit protection. many quality features have to be considered during construction and manufacture. The following utilization categories are available in the Siemens product range: gL (DIN VDE)/gG (IEC) = General-purˆ pose cable and conductor protection aM (DIN VDE/IEC) = Accompanied ˆ switchgear protection aR (DIN VDE/IEC) = Accompanied ˆ semiconductor protection gR (DIN VDE/IEC) = General-purpose ˆ semiconductor protection quick (DIN VDE/IEC/CEE) = Generalˆ purpose cable and conductor protection slow (DIN VDE) = General-purpose caˆ ble and conductor protection Breaking capacity The fuses distinguish themselves with their high rated current breaking capacity and minimum space requirements. The rated breaking capacity for AC is 50 kA for NEOZED and most of the DIAZED fuses. For LV HRC fuses it is even 120 kA AC. For Siemens fuses it is excellent. Current limiting Besides a safe rated breaking capacity. DIAZED fuses are marked with the designations ”slow” and ”quick” These designations are . For a consistently safe interruption of any current. the current limiting effect of a fuse link has a significant impact on the cost-effectiveness of an installation. Under short-circuit conditions.

Siemens fuse links of the utilization category gL/gG meet the following requirement in accordance with the supplementary sections of DIN VDE 0636: I z: ”Interruption with I2 = 1. Considering the high breaking safety. factor 1.45 x In (Tripping rule) IB: Circuit operating current In: Rated current of the selected protective device Permissible current load capacity under given operating conditions I2: Tripping current of protective device under specified conditions (”high test current”). however. a thin fuse element is required.45 x In for the conventional test duration under specific test conditions according to the supplementary sections of DIN VDE 0636” . Rated power loss The cost-effectiveness of a fuse depends considerably on the rated power loss. Fuse assignment for cable and conductor protection When assigning fuses to cable and conductor protection against overload. the physical interdependence between the rated breaking capacity and rated power losses should be taken into consideration. fuses). the following requirements have to be met in accordance with DIN VDE 0100. This should be kept as low as possible and only manifest a low self-heating characteristic.g. 6/44 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . However.45 is an internationally accepted compromise between utilization and level of protection for a conductor when considering the interrupting performance of the possible protective device (e. In order to achieve a low resistance value. Part 430: (1) IB ≤ In ≤ Iz (Nominal current rule) (2) I2 ≤ 1. when evaluating the intrinsic losses of a fuse.Photo 6/50 MINIZED switch-disconnector and NEOZED fuses in a SIMBOX 63 small distribution board Photo 6/51 LV HRC fuse links with center indicator in a 3NP fuse switchdisconnector Photo 6/52 NEOZED and DIAZED bus-mounted fuses of the 60 mm SR busbar system integrated in an ALPHA distribution board This strong current limitation protects the system from excessive load at all time. the fuse element should be as thick as possible. To ensure a high rated breaking capacity. In the meantime. Siemens fuses have the lowest possible rated loss.

When used at higher ambient temperatures of 50°C. Load capacity at higher ambient temperatures According to DIN VDE 0636. the following are included: 120 % 100 90 80 60 40 20 0 0 20 40 50 60 80 100 °C 120 Ambient temperature Fig. the fuse should be loaded with 90% of the rated current. Amongst the many tasks and different use conditions for fuses. assembled in an ALPHA distribution board Photo 6/55 LV HRC fuse links with center indicator in a 3KL fuse switch-disconnector Load capacity These values lie far below the limits specified in the relevant regulations. and they are also suited to protect equipment and devices. Application examples Fuses are primarily used to protect cables and conductors against overload and short-circuit currents regardless of the current’s strength. The short-circuit breaking capacity is not affected by higher ambient temperatures. the course of the time/current characteristics of NEOZED/DIAZED and LV HRC fuses refers to an ambient temperature of 20°C ± 5°C.Low Voltage Photo 6/53 DIAZED fuses and LV HRC fuses in a building-site distribution board Photo 6/54 LV HRC fuse links in fuse bases and fuse switch-disconnectors. safe breaking capacity and high cost-effectiveness. 6/12 Load capacity at higher ambient temperatures C A high degree of selectivity requirements in radial and meshed networks to avoid unnecessary system failures 6/45 6 . This means minimal heating.

the deterioration of the ground and water resources. in which short-term overloads and short circuits may occur during operation C Short-circuit protection of switchand controlgear such as contactors and automatic circuit-breakers C In TN and TT networks where disconnection is operated by overcurrent protective devices. problems in dealing with waste and raw materials – have all proven the necessity of common action.C Back-up protection of miniature circuit-breakers C Protection of motor circuits. The purpose of this committee is to duly recycle fuse links. changes in the climate and the atmosphere of the earth. The disconnected fuse links are completely melted down by an officially certified recycler. which was enacted in Germany at the end of 1996. Profits made herewith will be assigned to environmental research for public interest by the ”NH/HH-Recycling e. the destruction of the ozone layer.” which has . The fuses are labeled with the following symbols 6/46 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . the MINIZED fuse switch-disconnector is particularly suitable for use in meter cabinets as the main switch. Initiated by Siemens AG. as a manufacturer of low-voltage and high-voltage HRC fuses. you can also have a Euro pallet box on your premises. Industry is requested to be aware of its responsibility – also towards future generations – and to take the initiative. selectivity and minimum space are required. Residues such as inorganic waste are used.V. The recycling law. extending from residential installations to installations in commercial buildings and from industrial installations to installations in power supply companies. safe operation. been recognised as beneficial to common interests. commit” tee. For further information. We. and for selective duties in control and industrial applications where high switching capacity. and the safe switching of overload and short-circuit currents of up to 50 kA. are aware of this responsibility and are determined to focus more than ever on protecting the environment and taking care of our natural resources. fuses additionally prevent unduly high contact voltages from being maintained in the event of a fault. for example. If you accumulate large quantities of old fuses. various German manufacturers of LV/HV HRC fuses have formed a committee ”NH/HH-Recycling e. requires companies to recycle materials and thus to save resources.V. Fuses are used in a wide range of applications. Environmental protection Environmental protection is a continuing task for modern industrial society and demands action! Environmentally compatible recycling of LV HRC/HV HRC fuses National and global environmental problems – for example. Here. without packaging. contact your regional Siemens sales office. The MINIZED switch-disconnector allows NEOZED fuse links to be replaced in no-voltage conditions. and in doing so actively contribute to the protection of the environment and natural resources. taking into account the prevailing legal regulations. Euro pallet boxes are available from your wholesaler. How are fuses recycled in Germany? Only LV HRC and HV HRC fuse links will be accepted for recycling. in road and dam building. The silver and copper gained are put back into the materials cycle.

8 kA DC Mounting position any. 1. DIN VDE 49515. IEC 60241. DIN VDE 49511. DIN VDE 0636. EN 60269 DIN VDE 49510. DIN VDE 49524. DIN VDE 49514. slow. at 95% rel. DIN VDE 0680. IEC 60269.g. preferably vertical Resistance to climate1) up to 45 °C. DIN VDE 49525 400 V AC. 48 /110 V DC Rated current range 2 to 63 A Rated breaking capacity 50 kA AC.6 kA DC (E16) achieved with screw adapters or ring adapter Table 6/11 Overview 1: fuse systems 6/47 6 . humidity Non-interchangeability achieved with adapter sleeves 1) e. DIN VDE 49516 gL/gG.Low Voltage MINIZED switch-disconnectors. CEE 16. EN 60947-3 Dimensions DIN 43880 Utilization categories gL/gG Rated voltage 400 /415 V AC. 40 kA AC (E16). SILIZED fuse link Standards: Dimensions: Utilization categories: Rated voltage: Rated current range: Rated breaking capacity: Non-interchangeability: DIN VDE 0635. with regard to corrosion NEOZED fuse Standards: Dimensions: Rated voltage: Rated current range: Mounting position: Non-interchangeability: DIN VDE 0636. draw-out assembly Standards DIN VDE 0638. EC 60269. DIN VDE 49523. quick 500/690/750 V AC. 8 kA DC (E16). DIN VDE 0680. aR. EN 60269 DIN VDE 49522. 250 V DC 2 to 100 A any. 500/600/750 V DC 2 to 63 A 50 kA AC (E16). preferably vertical achieved with adapter sleeves DIAZED fuse.

at 95% rel. 250/440 V DC 2 to 1. NBN C 63269-.000 V AC 16 to 630 A > 50 kA AC Cylindrical fuse Standards: Dimensions: Utilization categories: Rated voltage: Rated current range: Resistance to climate1): IEC 60269. DIN 43623 aR. EN 60269 DIN 43620. NF C 63211. NF C 60200. with regard to corrosion Table 6/12 Overview 2: fuse systems 6/48 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . with regard to corrosion SITOR fuse link Standards: Dimensions: Utilization categories: Rated voltage: Rated current range: Rated breaking capacity: DIN VDE 0636. IEC 60 269. gR 600/690/1. humidity 1) e. at 95% rel.250 A 120 kA AC. humidity not required e.LV HRC fuse Standards: Dimensions: Utilization categories: Rated voltage: Rated current range: Rated breaking capacity: Resistance to climate1): Non-interchangeability: 1) DIN VDE 0636.g. EN 60269 DIN VDE 43620.5 to 100 A up to 45 °C. aM 500/690 V AC. aM 400/500 V AC 0.g. DIN VDE 43623 gL / gG. 50 kA DC –30°C to 50 °C. NF C 63210. 2-EN-2-1. DIN VDE 0680 IEC 60269. CEI 32-4 IEC 60 269-2-1 gG.

as calculation of short-circuit current is not required. Switch-disconnectors 3KL and 3KM with fuses are able to make. lignite open strip mining). UPS systems and soft starters.3 Fuse SwitchDisconnectors 3K Switch-disconnectors – High-Level Safety and Performance Brief description 3KA and 3KE switch-disconnectors are able to make. 6/49 6 . conduct and break the specified rated current (incl. the switchdisconnector must be able to conduct a specified short-circuit current during the time indicated. High level of safety for user and system Lockable to prevent reclosure. hydrogen sulfide). The 3KA and 3KL switch disconnectors are available as special versions for use in aggressive atmospheres (hydrogen sulfide in the chemical industry. they can be used as effective protection in frequency converters. paper mills. Switch-disconnectors 3KL and 3KM with fuses also provide overload and short-circuit protection as main and EMERGENCY STOP switches for switchgear.g. cables and loads. If a short circuit occurs. Additionally. High switching capacity AC 23 A at 690 V AC A standard series meets highest demands as to power distribution and motor switching capacity.000 A realized with 8HP molded-plastic enclosure. on a busbar system. Features High rated short-circuit current (up to 100/80/50 kA) Easy configuration. sewage plants. In combination with semiconductor fuses (SITOR). the switch-disconnector can be easily mounted.6. Quality Quality management according to ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art production methods guarantee consistently high quality. a predetermined degree of overload). EMERGENCY STOP repair. the switchdisconnector must be able to conduct a specified short-circuit current during the time indicated. Photo 6/56 3KL switch-disconnector with fuses Use in aggressive atmosphere This special version of the switchdisconnector can be used under extreme ambient conditions (e.2. In the 3KM version. deenergized fuses in OFF position by means of double contact seaparation of the switching contacts. tem disconnection switches in distribution board construction for residential and functional buildings as well as in industrial switchgear. the fuses fitted to the circuitbreaker also provide overload and short-circuit protection for downstream system components. Areas of application Switch-disconnectors 3KA and 3KE are used as main. power supply and motor feeders.Low Voltage 6. If a short circuit occurs. distribution boards. Unlimited selectivity Selectivity to a line-side fuse can be easily attained using the factor K = 1. conduct and break the specified rated current (incl. IP 65 enclosure Safety switch philosophy up to 1. system selector and sys. a predetermined degree of overload). without tools.

440 V DC Switch type: Rated continuous current: Rated operational voltage: 3KE42 250 A 3KE43 400 A 3KE44 630 A 3KE45 1000 A 690 V AC. 440 V DC Customers can combine two 3KE miniature circuit-breakers to a transfer control device 3KL and 3KM miniature circuit-breakers with fuses Switch type: Rated continuous current: Rated operational voltage: 3KL/M50 63 A 3KL/M52 125 A 3KL/M53 160 A 3KL/M55 250 A 3KL/M57 400 A 3KL61 630 A 690 V AC. 63 A to 400 A Table 6/13 Range of delivery 3K switch-disconnectors 6/50 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 440 V DC C Available with LV HRC and BS88 fuse-switches for the IEC and British Standard Market C 3KL miniature circuit-breakers available as protective switches with high-quality 8HP (IP 65) molded plastic enclosure.3KA and 3KE miniature circuit-breakers without fuses Switch type: Rated continuous current: Rated operational voltage: 3KA50 63 A 3KA51 80 A 3KA52 125 A 3KA53 160 A 3KA55 250 A 3KA57 400 A 3KA58 630 A 690 V AC.

Areas of application 3NP4 fuse switch-disconnectors are used in power distribution and infeed for occasional manual switching/isolating of load feeders and cable distribution cabinets. In the ”open position” it meets the re. masking frames and mounting sets for various cabinet/distribution board systems such as STAB-SIKUS. for example. as well as in industrial switchgear. auxiliary switches. Electronic fuse monitoring by 5TT3 170 fuse monitor. Quick and easy installation ensured by snap-on mechanism or quick mounting plates for installation on standard mounting rails and versions for mounting onto busbar systems (40 mm and 60 mm). They protect and switch downstream system components and devices on an all-pole basis. the fuse switch-disconnector must be able to conduct a specified short-circuit current during a predefined time. conduct and break the specified rated current (including a certain degree of overload). quirements for an isolating function. Together with semiconductor fuses (SITOR) they can be used to protect. Free selection of distribution boards due to a wide range of accessories and covers. Quality Quality management in accordance with ISO 9001. feeder terminals and busbars. The fuse switch-disconnectors are suitable for distribution board construction for residential and functional buildings. for personnel protection. Features High safety for users and system Overreaching protection and laterally fingerproof. frequency converters and soft starters.Low Voltage 3NP4 Fuse Switch-Disconnectors – Compact and Safe Isolation and Protection Brief description 3NP4 fuse switch-disconnectors are able to make. Overload and short-circuit protection of downstream system components and devices is provided by the size NH000 to NH3 (630 A). 6/51 6 . no arc in case of short-circuit breaking via fuse. The fuses effectively protect downstream electric devices and system components from short circuits and overloads. Range of delivery 3NP4 fuse switch-disconnectors are available C up to a rated continuous current of 630 A in size 000 to 3 for mounting/installation C for mounting onto standard mounting rails (up to 250 A) and snapping onto busbar systems (up to 630 A) C with or without fuse monitoring C Accessories: Terminals and terminal covers. and state-of-the-art production methods guarantee consistently high quality. If a short circuit occurs. The switch-disconnector is opened (OFF) and closed (ON) by operating the handle unit. sealable. Due to the open isolating gap they are perfectly suited for isolating systems and. capacitor protection via tested capacitor switching capacity. 8HP . quick opening due to an artificial point of force. SIPRO. SIKUS-3200. (630 A) LV HRC fuses integrated in the handle unit. Photo 6/57 3NP4 fuse switch-disconnector Various fields of application Semiconductor protection by the tested use of SITOR fuses. Fuse monitoring by built-on 3RV circuit-breakers. thus. degree of protection IP 30/IP 20.

The fuse switch-disconnectors are used in distribution board construction for residential and functional buildings. integrated fuse monitor. busbar adapters. 8HP and switchboard installation. Range of delivery 3NP5 fuse switch-disconnectors are available C up to a rated continuous current of 630 A for size LV HRC 00 to LV HRC 3 C for mounting/installation and for affixing to busbar systems C with or without fuse monitoring C Accessories: Terminals and terminal covers. LV HRC fuses integrated in the handle unit. sealable. If a short circuit occurs. high-speed closing prevents arc standstill. for personnel protection. overreaching protection and laterally fingerproof. Areas of application 3NP5 fuse switch-disconnectors are used in power distribution and infeed for occasional manual switching/isolation of load feeders and cable distribution cabinets. Together with semiconductor fuses (SITOR) they can be used to protect.3NP5 Fuse Switch-Disconnectors – Isolation and Protection. The switch-disconnector is opened (OFF) and closed (ON) by operating the handle unit. frequency converters and soft starters. They protect and switch downstream system components and devices on an all-pole basis. Due to the open isolating gap they are perfectly suited for isolating systems and. hydrogen sulfide). Solid-state fuse monitoring by selfsupplied. Photo 6/58 3NP5 fuse switch-disconnector Various fields of application Semiconductor protection by the tested use of SITOR fuses. Quality Quality management in accordance with ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art production methods guarantee consistently high quality. 23 A AC switching capacity of up to 690 V AC. degree of protection IP 30/IP 20. Overload and short-circuit protection of downstream system components and devices is provided by the size NH00 to NH3 (630 A). 6/52 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Quick and easy installation due to easy mounting/installation and adapter for busbar systems (40 mm and 60 mm). Use in aggressive atmosphere The special version can be also used under extreme ambient conditions (e. auxiliary switches. masking frames and mounting sets for numerous cabinet/distribution board systems such as STAB-SIKUS. Sturdy. such as ship installations. chemistry and paper industry. The integrated fuses efficiently protect downstream loads and system components against short circuit and overload. 3NP5 fuse switch-disconnectors are especially suitable for industrial plants and distribution systems with high demands on switching capacity and material resistance. SIKUS-3200. as well as in industrial switchgear. thus.g. for example. requirements for an isolating function. conduct and break the indicated rated current (including a certain degree of overload). the fuse switch-disconnector must be able to conduct a specified short-circuit current during a predefined time. no arcing in case of shortcircuit breaking by fuse. Compact and Safe With High Switching Capacity Brief description 3NP5 fuse switch-disconnectors have a high switching capacity and are able to make. capacitor protection via tested capacitor switching capacity. In the ”open position” it meets the . Fuse monitoring due to integrated 3RV circuit-breakers. Features High degree of safety for user and system High rated breaking capacity. free selection of distribution boards due to a wide range of accessories and covers. SIPRO. fully compartmented.

network and transformer substations. for personnel protection. and in cable distribution cabinets used in power supply companies and in industry. Quality Quality management in accordance with ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art production methods guarantee consistently high quality.and all-pole operation. mechanical fixing and electrical contact in one work operation. disconnectors of size NH00 via a 100 mm busbar system. Easy current pick-off Measuring fuses for current measurement as well as piggyback for construction site supply pick-off can be inserted via a window in the grip lug. 3NJ4/3NJ5 in-line fuse switch-disconnectors are fed via the 185 mm busbar system. conduct and break the rated current (including a certain degree of overload). Areas of application 3NJ4/3NJ5 fuse switch-disconnectors are used in power distribution and infeed for occasional manual switching/isolation of load feeders and cable distribution cabinets. TTA testing in connection with SIKUS-3200 and SIVACON cabinet system. Quick and easy installation By direct mounting on busbar systems. they are mainly used in lowvoltage distribution boards. LV HRC fuses integrated in the handle unit.250 A in sizes NH00 to NH4a C switchable in one. auxiliary switches. In-Line Type – Isolation and Protection. 6/53 6 . visible isolating gap. parking position of the handle unit. for size NH00 on 100 mm C Accessories: Terminals and terminal covers. in-line type lockable in OFF position. As a result of the narrow design. cable connection from top or bottom. masking frame. Features High degree of safety for user and system No arcing in case of short-circuit breaking by fuse. The integrated fuses efficiently protect downstream loads and system components against short circuit and overload. Photo 6/59 3NJ4 fuse switch-disconnector. thus. Due to the open isolating gap they are perfectly suited for isolating systems and. They protect and switch downstream system components and consumers in one. Overload and short-circuit protection of downstream system components and devices is provided by the size NH00 to NH4a (1. adapter for adjusting size NH00 to NH1-3.Low Voltage 3NJ4/3NJ5 Fuse Switch-Disconnectors. the fuse switchdisconnector must be able to conduct a specified short-circuit current during a predefined time. The in-line fuse switch-disconnectors are used in distribution board construction for residential and functional buildings. If a short circuit occurs. requirements for an isolating function. The switch-disconnector is opened (OFF) and closed (ON) by operating the handle unit. In the ”open position” they meet the . Compact and Safe in Narrow Design Brief description 3NJ4/ 3NJ5 in-line fuse switch-disconnectors are able to make.and three-pole mode C for affixing to 185 mm busbar system. Range of delivery 3NJ4/3NJ5 in-line fuse switch-disconnectors are available C up to a rated continuous current of 1.250 A). inspection holes for voltage testing in ON position.

4 Miniature CircuitBreakers Areas of application Miniature circuit-breakers are mainly used to protect cables and lines against overload and short circuit. Further. 6/54 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Under certain conditions. This guarantees excellent selectivity with the upstream overcurrent protective devices. and an instantaneous electromagnetic release for higher overload and short-circuit currents. Part 410. are underranged by 50%. The special contact materials ensure a long service life and offer a high level of protection against contact welding. miniature circuit-breakers also ensure protection against hazardous shock currents in case of an excessive touch voltage caused by insulation failures. For the respective application. in accordance with DIN VDE 0100. circuit-breakers are supplemented by the following add-on accessories: C C C C C C Auxiliary circuit switches Fault signal contacts Open-circuit shunt releases Undervoltage releases Remote control RCCB blocks Photo 6/60 5SP4 miniature circuit-breaker single-pole Photo 6/61 5SY miniature circuit-breaker single-pole Photo 6/62 5SY miniature circuit-breaker with versatile additional components Functional design. Generally. specified in DIN VDE 0641 Part 11. due to the fixed rated current settings of the miniature circuitbreakers.2. DIN VDE 0641 Part 11 and IEC 60 898 are the underlying standards for construction and approval. mode of operation Circuit-breakers have a time-delayed overload current/time-dependent thermal release (thermal bimetal) for low overcurrents. Thus. they also protect electrical equipment against overheating according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 430. it is also possible to protect motors in a limited form. EN 60 898. For application in industry and system engineering. different tripping characteristics are available. miniature circuit-breakers significantly and safely limit the current when breaking. the admissible I2t limit values of energy limitation class 3. Due to the ultra-fast separation of the contacts in case of faults and the quick quenching of the arc in the arc chamber.6.

5 4 6 10 16 25 35 Table 6/14 Two-conductor A 16 25 32 40 63 80 100 125 Three-conductor A 16 20 32 40 50 63 80 100 Iz (conductor) Continuous current in A acc. to DIN VDE 0298 T4 and DIN VDE 0100 T430 Supplement 1 Two-conductor Three-conductor A A 19.45 x I z I Ib Operating current: load-determined current during uninterrupted operation Iz Permissible continuous current for a conductor whereby the continuous limit temperature of the insulation is not exceeded 1. Thus. multi-core wires on/in the wall.Low Voltage Rated cross section Rated current miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) mm2 1.5 2. 1) Example: Rising main busbar. Cable and line protection The actual task of miniature circuitbreakers is to protect cables and lines against thermal overload of the insulation caused by overcurrents and short-circuits.5 24 32 41 57 76 96 119 Conductor cross-sections: Allocation of miniature circuit-breakers to copper wires with PVC insulation for installation type C1) and R=30°C. Ib In Iz I2 1.5 26 35 46 63 85 112 138 17. temporary overload current which does not result in a safety-relevant reduction of the insulation properties when the continuous limit temperature is temporarily exceeded Time t I1 I2 I3 In Rated current: current which the MCB is suitable for and which other rated values refer to I1 Conventional non-tripping current: current which does not lead to a switch-off under defined conditions I3 I2 Conventional tripping current: current which leads to a switch-off within one hour (In ≤ 63 A) under defined conditions I3 Tolerance limit I4 Holding current of the instantaneous release (short-circuit release) I5 Tripping current of the instantaneous release (short-circuit release) I4 I5 Current I Fig. In the opposite chart. The tripping characteristics are in accordance with the standards EN 60 898. IEC 60 898 and DIN VDE 0641 Part 11. the tripping characteristics of the miniature circuit-breakers are adjusted to the load withstand curves of the cables and lines. the relative values of the lines and of the miniature circuit-breakers are assigned to each other. 6/13 Schematic drawing of the relative values of lines and protective device 6/55 6 .45 x Iz Maximum permissible.

g.4 0. e.g. acc.06 0. Characteristic G in accordance with CEE 19. transformers.13 1. to DIN VDE 0100 Part 410 1.02 0. 6/14 Tripping characteristics according to EN 60 898.6 0.45 I2_06663b 120 60 40 Minutes 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 10 6 4 Seconds 2 1 0.2 0.131.4 0.1 0. the new tripping characteristics with a thermal tripping of I2 = 1. 1st edition is still defined.01 1 1. Features of miniature circuitbreakers C High rated breaking capacity up to 15.45 Tripping characteristic B Cable protection mainly in residential building installations. C and D can be certified. the three characteristics B.1 0.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 Multiple of rated current 30 Tripping characteristic A C For limited semiconductor protection C Protection of measuring circuits with transformers C Protection of circuits with long cable lengths which require tripping within 0.6 0.04 0.13 1. with lamps.45 x In have the advantage of a more simple and obvious assignment of miniature circuit-breakers for cable and line protection in case of overload. capacities Fig.1 0. The only condition is now: I n ≤ I z. solenoid valves. C and D C Terminals are safe from finger touch and touch by the back of the hand C Uniform additional components.2 0. to EN 60204 Tripping time 10 6 4 Seconds 2 1 0. Characteristic B replaces the previous characteristic L. B.04 0.1 0.06 0.4 0.06 0.45 120 60 40 Minutes 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 Multiple of rated current 30 Tripping time 0.2 0. quick mounting using snap-on and snap-in mechanism on site C Separate switch position indication C Variable labeling system C Handle locking device effectively prevents unauthorized operation of the handle C Disconnector characteristics acc. however.4 sec.02 I2_06354c Tripping time 2 1 0.6 0.000 A according to EN 60 898 and 25 kA according to EN 60947-2 C Excellent current limiting and selectivity C Tripping characteristics A.06 0.01 1 1.02 0.13 1.1.04 0.02 I2_06352c Thus.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 Multiple of rated current 30 Tripping time 0. motors Tripping characteristic D C Application area is adapted to strongly pulsating equipment. advantageous for controlling higher making currents. to DIN VDE 0660 Part 107 C Main switch characteristics acc.45 I2_06353c 120 60 40 Minutes 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 10 6 4 Seconds 2 1 0.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 Multiple of rated current 30 Tripping characteristic C C Cable protection. it is replaced by characteristic C. no proof regarding personnel protection required 120 60 40 Minutes 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 10 6 4 Seconds 1. In practice.04 0.4 0.01 1 1.6 0.2 0. DIN VDE 0641 Part 11 6/56 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . e.01 1 1.

more wiring space Features of 5SY Easier. more wiring space C Identical terminals at the top and bottom C Connection of the feeder cable in front of the busbar C Larger and more easily accessible wiring space for the feeder cable C Comfortable insertion of the feeder cables into the busbar C Clear. the 5SY miniature circuit-breakers can easily and rapidly be removed from the assembly when circuits have to be changed: It is no longer necessary to remove the busbar. faster. visible and verifiable connection of the feeder cables C Universal infeed with busbar mounting at the top or bottom Flexible and without tools C Integrated.Low Voltage Photo 6/63 Flexible and without tools Photo 6/64 Shock-hazard protection with obvious advantages Photo 6/65 Easier. movable terminal covers in the area of the feeder cable entries C With tightened screws. 6/57 6 . It just takes a moment to replace a 5SY miniature circuit-breaker. the terminals are completely enclosed C Effective shock-hazard protection even if fully grabbed C VBG 4/BGV A2 requirements are greatly exceeded Shock-hazard protection with clear advantages C Manual rapid mounting and dismounting system – no need for tools C Rapid mounting and dismounting of the MCB onto and from the standard mounting rails in accordance with DIN EN 60715 C Devices can be replaced easily and comfortably at any time Photo 6/66 Removal from the assembly Removal from the assembly As a result of the combination of the various features. faster.

100 A DIN VDE 0645 25 000 C C Overview of miniature circuit-breaker product ranges 6/58 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens ... 63 A 0. 80 A 0......3 ... 63 A 0.3 ....3 .3 .. 63 A 0. 63 A EN 60898 6 000 3 C C C C C C C C C C C C 70 1 .3 . 63 A 0.. 80 A 0... 80 A 0......... 63 A 0.... 32 A 6 .3 .... 63 A EN 60898 10 000 3 C C 70 80 . 100 A EN 60898 10 000 C C C C C C E 92 16 .3 .. 125 A 80 . 63 A 6 . 80 A 6 ...... 63 A EN 60898 10 000 3 C C C C C C C C C C C C C 15 000 3 C C C EN 60947-2 25 kA C C 70 6 .Product overview Version Tripping characteristic Device mounting depth [mm] Rated currents In Standards Rated breaking capacity Energy limitation class Type of application Functional buildings Residential buildings Industry Standard product range 5SJ6 5SY6 B B C D High-performance product range 5SY4 A B C D 5SY7 B C D 5SY8 C D AC/DC product range 5SY5 B C High current product range 5SP4 B C D Power supply company product range 5SP3 Table 6/15 70 6 ...3 . 125 A 80 .3 . 80 A 0.

adhere to the specified polarity for DC applications any average of 20...75 . to DIN 40050.5 . 3. 25 0. 35 0.000 operations for 5SY5. IP20 acc. 35 0.. to IEC 60068-2-30 m/s 2 60 at 10 Hz ..5 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 0... to DIN 43880 Degree of protection Free of CFC and silicone Mounting 15 6 – 15 25 10 – 2 3 C C C mm 70 C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C IP00 acc.. additionally for C 5SY: rapid mounting system operable without tools C 5SP4: also screw mounting 5SY combined terminals on both sides for simultaneous connection of busbars (pin-type version) and conductors 5SP4 tunnel terminals on both sides Terminals Terminal tightening torque recommended Conductor cross sections solid and stranded C upper terminal C lower terminal finely stranded with end sleeve C upper terminal C lower terminal Nm 2. IP40 when mounted in distribution board yes can be snapped onto 35 mm standard mounting rail (DIN EN 60715).000 operations at rated load °C 2) –25 . 50 0....75 . details available on request Supply connection Mounting position Service life Ambient temperature Resistance to climate Resistance to vibration 1) 2) any...75 .75 . to DIN 40050 for 5SY.. to EN 60204 Sealable in the final handle position Device depth acc.75 . max... 95% humidity. 40 A. max. 150 Hz acc..75 . to DIN EN 50274 Main switch characteristics acc. 35 0.Low Voltage Technical data Number of poles 1 1+N 2 3 3+N 4 V AC V DC min. max. 25 0... 35 Different cable cross sections can be clamped simultaneously.. +45.75 . to EN 60947-2 Coordination of insulation Rated insulation voltage Degree of pollution with overvoltage category III Shock-hazard protection acc. 3 3 . V AC / DC V/Pol DC V AC kA AC kA DC kA AC V AC 5SY4 5SY5 5SY6 5SY7 5SY8 5SP4 C C C C C C 230 / 400 – 24 60 1) 440 10 – – 250/440 C C C C C C C C – 60 1) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C Rated voltage Operational voltage 220 / 440 220 Rated breaking capacity acc. 50 A and 63 A at rated load Technical data for miniature circuit-breakers Table 6/16 6/59 6 ..75 . to EN 60898 acc... +75 6 cycles acc.. temporarily +55. storage temperature: –40 ... to IEC 60068-2-6 Battery charging voltage 72 V 10.. 50 0.

75 . 16 0. 16 0... max.. 16 max. 16 0. temporarily +55... to DIN EN 50274 Main switch characteristics acc.-...KV tunnel terminals on both sides mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 0. 25 0. to EN 60898 acc. 25 any any 0. 70 max.75 ..... to IEC 60068-2-30 m/ s 2 60 at 10 Hz .75 .. storage temperature: –40 . 5SJ6.75 . 25 0. 95% humidity.KV 5SP3 C C 230 / 400 24 60 250 6 230 C 220 / 440 440 Rated breaking capacity acc. to DIN 40050 for 5SP3. to DIN VDE 0645 Coordination of insulation Rated insulation voltage Degree of pollution with overvoltage category III Shock-hazard protection acc. 150 Hz acc. 5SY6 .. max.000 operations at rated load °C 2) –25 ..75 .75 ...Technical data Number of poles Rated voltage Operational voltage min. 1 1+N V AC V AC / DC V DC / Pol V AC kA AC kA AC V AC 5SJ6 5SY6 …-. IP40 when mounted in distribution board yes can be snapped onto 35 mm (DIN EN 60715) standard mounting rail... 50 max. 70 max. +45. +75 6 cycles acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Tabelle 6/17 Technical data for miniature circuit-breakers 6/60 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 50 average of 20.75 ... to EN 60204 Sealable in the final handle position Device depth acc. additionally for 5SP3: also screw mounting 5SP3 saddle terminals on both sides.. max..75 . to DIN 43880 Degree of protection Free of CFC and silicone Mounting Terminals Conductor cross sections Solid and stranded C upper terminal C lower terminal Finely stranded with end sleeve C upper terminal C lower terminal Supply connection Mounting position Service life Ambient temperature Resistance to climate Resistance to vibration 25 250 2 / III 690 3 / IV C – C – – C C 92 C mm 70 C IP20 acc. 25 0...

Low Voltage

6.2.5 Residual-CurrentOperated Circuit-Breakers
Protection against hazardous shock currents according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 410 Application C Protection against indirect contact (indirect personnel protection). Protection is provided by disconnecting hazardous high contact voltages caused by a short circuit to exposed conductive parts of equipment. C When using RCCBs with I∆n ≤ 30 mA. extensive protection from direct contact (direct personnel protection) is given – as supplementary protection via disconnection when live parts are touched. Protective action While RCCBs for rated fault current I∆n ≥ 30 mA provide protection against indirect contact, the installation of RCCBs with I∆n ≤ 30 mA provides a high level of supplementary protection against unintentional direct contact with live parts.

Figure 6/15 shows the physiological responses of the human body when current flows through it, classified into current ranges. Current/time values in range 4 are dangerous, as they can initiate heart fibrillation which can result in death. The RCCB tripping range with a rated fault current of 10 mA and 30 mA is indicated. The average release time lies between 10 ms and 30 ms. The admissible tripping time in accordance with DIN VDE 0664 or EN 61 008 or IEC 1008 of max. 0.3 s (300 ms) is not required. Residual-current-operated circuit-breakers with a rated fault current of 10 mA or 30 mA provide reliable protection even if current flows through a person as a result of unintentional direct contact with live parts. This level of protection cannot be achieved by any other comparable means of protection against indirect contact. Wherever RCCBs are used, an appropriate earth terminal must also be provided and connected to all of the equipment and parts of the system.

Thus, a current can only flow through a human body if two faults are present or if the person accidentally touches live parts. If a person directly touches live parts, two resistances determine the level of the current flowing through the human body, i.e. the internal resistance of the person RM and the local ground leakage resistance RSt (see Fig. 6/17). For the purpose of accident prevention, the worst case must be assumed which means that the local ground leakage resistance is almost zero. The resistance of the human body is dependent on the current path. Measurements resulted, for example, in a resistance of 1000 Ω for a hand-tohand or hand-to-foot current path. A fault voltage of 230 V AC results in a current of 230 mA for a hand-tohand current path.

Photo 6/67 RCCB 4-pole

Photo 6/68 RCCB-protected outlet for a higher protective level

Photo 6/69 RCCB 2-pole

6/61

6

10000 ms t 2000 1000 500 1 200 100 2

10 mA 30 mA

Range a Usually, the effect is not perceived. Range s Usually, there are no noxious effects.

3

4

Fire protection according to DIN VDE 0100-482 Application When using residual-current-operated circuit-breakers with I∆n ≤ 300 mA, protection against electrically ignited fires caused by insulation faults. Protective action For ”locations exposed to the hazards of fire” DIN VDE 0100-482 specifies , measures to prevent fires that might result from insulation failures. Taking into account all external influences, the electrical equipment must be selected and mounted in such a way that their heating during normal operation and the predictable increase of temperature in case of a fault cannot cause a fire. This may be achieved by a suitable type of equipment or by additional protective measures during the installation. In TN and TT systems, there are therefore RCCBs with a rated fault current of 300 mA maximum additionally requested for “locations exposed to the hazards of fire” Where . resistive faults can cause a fire (e.g. in the case of overhead radiation heatings with surface heating elements), the rated fault current must not exceed 30 mA. The additional protection against fire provided by RCCBs should be used not only at locations with increased fire hazard but in general.
IM

50 20 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20

Range d Usually, no danger of 50 100 200 500 1000 mA 10000 heart fibrillation.
IM

: Shock current

t : Duration

Range f Heart fibrillation danger.

Fig. 6/15

Rated current range according to IEC 60479

FI

L1 N PE RA

FI

L1 N PE RA

FI

L1 N PE RA

Damaged insulation

PE conductor interrupted and insulation failure in the equipment

Conductors interchanged

R St

R St

R St

Fig. 6/16

Examples for unintentional direct contact

L1 L2 L3 N

FI

RM

IM

R St

Photo 6/70 RCCB AC/DC current sensitive

Fig. 6/17

Schematic drawing: Additional protection when directly touching live parts

6/62

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Low Voltage
L1 L2 L3 N 1 3 5 N L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 N

2

4

6

N

2

4

6

N

3 x 230 V AC + N 3 x 400 V AC + N

3 x 230 V AC 3 x 400 V AC

Fig. 6/18

Connection of RCCBs

Design and mode of operation of residual-current-operated circuitbreakers An RCCB essentially comprises 3 major functional groups: 1. Summation current transformer for fault current detection 2. Release to convert the electrical measured value into a mechanical release 3. Contact-latching mechanism with the contacts The summation current involves all of the conductors, i.e. also the neutral conductor, which are necessary for current conduction. In a fault-free system, the magnetizing effects of current carrying conductors in the summation current transformer cancel each other out in accordance with Kirchhoff’s law. There is no residual magnetic field which could induce a voltage in the secondary winding. However, if an insulation fault causes a fault current to flow, this balance is disturbed and a residual magnetic field remains in the transformer core. This produces a voltage in the secondary winding, which, via the release and the contact latching mechanism, disconnects the circuit with the insulation fault. This tripping principle works independently of the supply voltage or an auxiliary supply. This is the prerequisite for the high level of protection which RCCBs provide according to IEC/EN 61008 (VDE 0664). Only this ensures that the full protective function of the RCCB is maintained, even in case of a network fault, e.g. if a phase conductor fails or the neutral conductor is interrupted.

RCCB

We recommend that the functionality of the RCCB is tested after installation and at regular intervals (about twice a year). Furthermore, other standards or regulations (e.g. accident prevention regulations) which specify test intervals must also be met. The minimum operating voltage for the test function is typically 100 V AC (5SM series). 3-pole connection 4-pole RCCBs (Fig. 6/18) can also be used in 3-pole supply networks. In this case, the device must be connected at the terminals 1, 3, 5 and 2, 4, 6 (Fig. 6/18). The functionality of the test facility is only ensured if a jumper is inserted between the terminals 3 and N. Application RCCBs can be used in all three distribution network types (DIN VDE 0100-410) (Fig. 6 /19). In the IT system, a tripping upon the first fault is not required since this can not yet cause a dangerous touch voltage. An insulation monitoring device has to be provided so that the first fault is signaled by an audible or visual signal and the fault cleared as quickly as possible. The tripping is only requested in the case of a second fault. Depending on the grounding, the tripping conditions of the TN orTT system must be observed. The RCCB can also be used as a suitable circuit-breaker here; each current-using equipment must then be equipped with its own RCCB.
Fig. 6/19

N

PE TN-S

TN-C

TT system

RCCB

Test button Each RCCB has a test button which can be used to check its operability. When the test button is pressed, an artificial fault current is produced and the RCCB must trip.

TN system

PEN

L1 L2 L3 N PE

L1 L2 L3 N RCCB RCCB L1 L2 L3 N PE PE L1 L2 L3 RCCB PE PE

IT system (limited application)

RCCB; possible application in all three network types

Current types When using electronic components in household appliances and in industrial plants for equipment with an ground terminal (protection class I), non-sinusoidal fault currents may flow through an RCCB in case of an insulation fault.

RCCB

6/63

6

Current type

Current waveform

Proper functioning of RCCBs type AC A B

Tripping current 1)

AC fault currents pulsating DC fault currents (pos. and neg. half-waves) Phased half-wave currents Phase control angle Half-wave current with superimposed smooth 6 mA DC current Smooth DC current
1) Tripping

C –

C C

C C

0.5 … 1.0 I∆n 0.35 … 1.4 I∆n

90°el 135°el

– – –

C C C –

C C C C

0.25 … 1.4 I∆n 0.11 … 1.4 I∆n max. 1.4 I∆n+ 6 mA 0.5 … 2.0 I∆n

currents acc. to IEC /EN 61008-1 (VDE 0664, Part 10); for smooth DC currents acc. to VDE 0664, Part 100.

Table 6/18

Tripping currents for RCCBs

The standards for RCCBs include additional requirements and test specifications for fault currents which become zero or almost zero within one period of the supply frequency. RCCBs which trip on both sinusoidal AC fault currents as well as on pulsating DC fault currents have the symbol . RCCBs which additionally trip on smooth DC currents (type B) have the symbol . DC fault currents In industrial electrical equipment, circuits are being increasingly used where smooth DC fault currents or fault currents with a low residual ripple may flow in the event of a fault condition. This is shown in Fig. 6/20 with the example of a piece of electrical equipment with a three-phase rectifier circuit. Electrical equipment includes devices such as frequency converters, medical devices (e.g. x-ray generators, CT systems) and UPS systems. Pulse current sensitive RCCBs cannot detect such DC fault currents and cannot trip. Furthermore, this has a negative impact on their tripping function. This is why electrical equipment which generates such fault currents when faults occur may not be operated together with pulse current sensitive RCCBs on electrical supply networks.

Three-phase bridge connection 6-pulse
L1 L2 L3 IB

Three-phase star connection
N L1 L2 L3 IB

Load current
IB

t

Fault current
I

I∆

I∆
t

Fig. 6/20

Block diagram with fault location

A protective measure would be protective separation, which, however, can only be implemented using heavy and expensive transformers. A technically optimum and cost-effective solution is obtained by using the new AC/DC sensitive RCCBs. This RCCB type (type B) is specified in DIN EN 50178 (DIN VDE 0160) ”Electronic equipment for use in power installations” . AC/DC sensitive protective device Design The basis for the AC/DC sensitive protective device is a pulse-currentsensitive protective switching unit with a release which operates independently of the line supply, supplemented by an additional unit which senses smooth DC fault currents. Figure 6/21 shows the basic design.

The W1 summation current transformer monitors, as before, the electrical system or plant for AC and pulsating fault currents. The summation current transformer W2 senses the smooth DC fault currents, and transmits a disconnection command to release A via electronic unit E when a fault occurs. Operating principle In order to ensure a highly reliable supply, the power for the electronic unit is tapped from all of the three phase conductors and the neutral conductor. Furthermore, it is dimensioned to ensure that the electronics still operate when the voltage is reduced to 70% (e.g. between phase conductors and neutral conductor).

6/64

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Low Voltage
L1 L2 L3 N PE 1 M A n W1 3 5 N

A

Release

M Mechanical system of the protective device E Electronics to trip in the event of smooth DC fault currents Test facility Secondary winding

T n

This consequently ensures tripping whenever a smooth DC fault current is present; this also applies in case of faults in the supply network, e.g. when the neutral conductor is interrupted. Even in the extremely improbable case of a failure of the two phase conductors and the neutral conductor, and if the remaining intact phase conductor represents a fire hazard due to a ground fault, protection is still provided by the pulse-current-sensitive breaker part, which reliably trips due to its supply-independent release. RCCBs of type B are suitable for use in an AC system with 50/60 Hz ahead of input circuits with rectifiers. They are not designed for use in DC systems and in systems with operating frequencies deviating from 50/60 Hz. They can be used for the detection and tripping of fault currents which might arise in the power supply units (e.g. frequency converters, computer tomographs) of threephase loads with electronic components (rectifiers). In this electronic equipment, apart from the described fault current forms (AC fault currents, pulsating and smooth DC fault currents), there might also arise AC fault currents of very different frequencies as, for example, on the outgoing side of a frequency converter. For RCCBs of type B, the device regulation VDE 0664 Part 100 defines requirements for frequencies up to 2 kHz. At the moment, statements as to the danger of heart fibrillation (up to 1 kHz) for frequencies exceeding 100 Hz can only be made in a very limited way. Safe statements as to further effects and the influence on the human organism (thermal, electrolytic) are not possible.

n E

W2 T

W1 Summation CT to sense sinusoidal fault currents W2 Summation CT to sense smooth DC fault currents

2

4

6

N

Fig. 6/21

Block diagram of an AC/DC current sensitive RCCB

Based on these facts, protection for the case that a person directly touches live parts is only possible for frequencies up to 100 Hz. For higher frequencies, the method of protection to be implemented is protection against indirect contact with live parts. Configuration When designing and installing electrical systems, it must be ensured that electrical devices which can generate smooth DC fault currents when a fault occurs have their own circuit with an AC/DC sensitive RCCB (see Fig. 6 /22). It is not permissible to branch circuits with these types of electrical devices to pulse-current-sensitive RCCBs. Consumers which can generate smooth DC fault currents under fault conditions would then adversely affect pulse-current-sensitive RCCB tripping. The tripping conditions are defined according to DIN VDE 0664 Part 100 (for RCCBs of type B) and correspond to those of type A for AC and pulsating fault currents. The tripping values for smooth DC fault currents were defined in this device regulation taking into account the current compati-

bility characteristics according to IEC 60479 for the range 0.5- to 2.0times the rated fault current. AC/DC sensitive RCCBs have the symbols . Note: Using the available auxiliary current switches, the RCCBs can be integrated into the building management system via an instabus EIB or AS-Interface® bus or PROFIBUS®. Selective tripping Residual-current-operated circuitbreakers normally have an instantaneous release. As a consequence, an RCCB series connection which is to selectively disconnect in case of faults will not work. To achieve selectivity when RCCBs are connected in series, the serially connected devices must be graded both with regard to the release time as well as to the rated fault current. Selective RCCBs have a tripping delay. Furthermore, selective RCCBs must have an increased surge withstand strength of at least 3 kA according to IEC /EN 61008-1 (VDE 0664, Part 10). Siemens devices have a surge withstand strength of ≥ 5 kA. Selective RCCBs have the symbol S .

6/65

6

Wh

I n = 300 mA

FI

S

I n = 30 mA

I n = 30 mA

I n = 30 mA

I n = 30 mA

I n = 300 mA

FI

FI

FI

FI

FI

S

Fig. 6/22

Configuration of circuits

Main distribution board

Sub-distribution FI board

SIGRES RCCBs for aggravated ambient conditions i Our SIGRES RCCBs have been developed for the use of RCCBs in environments with an increased impact of corrosive gas such as, for example, C indoor swimming pools: chloric gas atmosphere; C agriculture: ammonia; C building site distribution boards, chem. industry: nitrogen oxides [NOx], sulfur dioxide [SO2] SIGRES RCCBs are marked with the symbol i . With the patented active condensation protection, a clear increase of the service life is achieved. The following points have to be taken into account when using the SIGRES RCCBs: C The must always be supplied from the bottom at the terminals 2/N or 2/4/6/N. C Prior to insulation tests of the installation system with voltages exceeding 500 V, the SIGRES RCCB must be deactivated or the cables on the supply side (bottom) have to be disconnected.

S

FI

FI selective version Upstream RCCB for selective tripping instantaneous/short-time delayed K or instantaneous short-time K delayed Tripping time Tripping time (at 5 I∆n) (at 5 I∆n) < 20 ms 1) 20…< 40 ms

Downstream RCCB S I∆n 10, 30 or 100 mA 10, 30 or 100 mA 10, 30, 100, 300 or 500 mA

I∆n 300 mA 500 mA 1000 mA
1)

Tripping time (at 5 I∆n) 60…110 ms

for RCCBs of type AC: < 40 ms Allocation of RCCBs

Table 6/19

Table 6 /19 shows a possible grading of RCCBs for selective tripping when the RCCBs are connected in series without or with short-time delay. Short-time delayed tripping Electrical devices which cause high leakage currents at switch-on (e.g. as a result of transient fault currents which flow between the phase conductor and PE via noise suppression capacitors) can cause instantaneous RCCBs to trip when they should not if the leakage current exceeds the rated fault current I∆n of the RCCB.

For applications such as these, where it is either not possible or only partially possible to eliminate such fault sources, short-time delayed RCCBs can be used. These devices have a minimum tripping time of 10 ms, i.e. they will not trip in case of a 10 ms fault current impulse. Here, the tripping conditions according to IEC/EN 61008-1 (VDE 0664, Part 10) are maintained. The devices have an increased surge withstand strength of 3kA. Short-time delayed RCCBs are marked with the symbol K .

6/66

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Low Voltage
Rated current of RCCB Rated breaking capacity Im acc. to IEC/EN 61008 (VDE 0664) at a 35 mm grid clearance Maximum permissible short-circuit back-up fuse LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED, utilization category gL/gG for RCCB

A

A Type A

125 V … 400 V AC A

500 V AC A

Versions for 50 to 400 Hz Due to their mode of operation, the standard versions of the RCCBs are designed for the maximum efficiency in the 50/60 Hz system. The device specifications and tripping conditions also refer to this frequency. With an increasing frequency the sensitivity decreases. To be able to realize an effective residual-current protection for applications in systems up to 400 Hz (e.g. industry), suitable devices have to be used. Such RCCBs fulfill the tripping conditions up to the stated frequency and offer appropriate protection. RCCBs with N-connection on the left side Since the RCCBs are usually located on the left side of the miniature circuit-breakers but have the N-conductor connection on the right side, the continuous busbar connection is disturbed. RCCBs in connection with MCBs therefore require a special busbar. To enable the customer to always use standard busbars, four-pole RCCBs are also offered with an Nconnection on the left side. The installation habit with the RCCB on the left side of the MCB using standard busbar connections can thus be retained. Breaking capacity, short-circuit capacity According to the regulations for installation, which are specified in DIN VDE 0100 Part 410 (protection against hazardous shock currents), RCCBs may be used in all three network types (TN, TT and IT systems). If the neutral conductor is used as protective conductor in TN systems, shortcircuit-type fault currents may flow in the event of a fault. Thus, RCCBs together with a back-up fuse must have

16 ... 40 63 80 25 40 63 80 125

2 MW 2.5 MW 2.5 MW 4 MW 4 MW 4 MW 4 MW 4 MW Type B

500 800 800 800 800 800 800 1250

63 100 100 100 100 100 100 125

– – – 63 63 63 – –

25 ... 63
Table 6/20

8 MW

630

63

Rated breaking capacity/short-circuit strength

% 100 90
I

Scheitel

Stirn

Rücken
Im

Kenngrößen eines Stromstoßes nach DIN VDE 0432 Teil 2 TS Stirnzeit in s T r Rückenhalbwertzeit in s 0 1 Nennbeginn Im Scheitelwert

50

10 0 01 TS Tr
t

Fig. 6/23

Surge current wave 8/20 µs (8 µs front time; 20 µs time to half-value on tail)

an appropriate short-circuit strength. Tests have been defined for this purpose. The short-circuit strength of the combination must be specified on the devices. Siemens RCCBs have, together with an appropriate back-up fuse, a shortcircuit strength of 10,000 A. In accordance with the VDE standards, this corresponds to the highest possible level of short-circuit strength. Details about the rated breaking capacity in accordance with IEC /EN 61008 and the maximum permissible short- circuit back-up fuse for RCCBs are shown in Table 6/20.

Surge strength During thunderstorms, atmosphericrelated overvoltage conditions may enter a system or electric installation via the overhead power lines in the form of travelling waves and thus the RCCBs are tripped. To prevent unintended disconnections, pulse-currentsensitive RCCBs must pass special tests to prove surge withstand strength. A surge current of the standardized surge current wave 8/20 µs is used for testing. Siemens pulsecurrent-sensitive RCCBs have a surge withstand strength of ≥ 1000 A.

6/67

6

RCCBs

Number Rated of poles current In A

Rated fault current I∆n mA

MW Auxiliary switch, mountable

N-connection on the right left

RCCB, type A1 1), 16 ... 125 A instantaneous tripping, surge strength > 1 kA

2

4

16 25 40 63 80 25 40 63 80 125 25 40 63 63 40 63

10, 30 30, 100, 300 30, 100, 300 30, 300 500 30, 300 100, 500 30, 300 100, 500 30, 300 30, 100, 300, 500 30 30, 100 100, 300 100, 300 100, 1000 300 300, 500 30 30 30 30, 300 30 300

2

2.5 4

K short-time delayed, surge strength > 3 kA S selective,

4

4

surge strength > 5 kA

2 4

2.5 4

125 SIGRES RCCB, type A1), for aggravated ambient conditions instantaneous tripping, 2 25 surge strength > 1 kA 40 63 80 4 25 40 63 80 4 63 S selective, surge strength > 5 kA RCCB, type A1), 500 V instantaneous tripping, 4 25 surge strength > 1 kA 40 63 RCCB, type A1), 50 ... 400 Hz instantaneous tripping, 4 25 surge strength > 1 kA 40 >N<, AC/DC sensitive, type B2) surge strength > 1 kA 4 25 40 63 S selective, surge strength > 5 kA 63

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

– – – – – • – • – • – • – – – – – – – • – – – – – – – – –

2 2.5 4

4

30, 300

4

• • • • • fixed fixed fixed fixed mounted mounted mounted mounted

• • • • • • • • •

– – – – –

30

4

30, 300

8

300

1) 2)

= Type A for AC and pulsating fault currents = Type B for AC fault currents, pulsating and smooth DC fault currents Overview of RCCB product range *1 MW = modular width 18 mm >N< = device mounting depth 55 mm 70 mm mounting depth = 70 mm device mounting depth

Table 6/21

6/68

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Low Voltage
RCCBs Number Rated of poles current In A Rated fault current I∆n mA MW Additional components, mountable Type (Typ A)1)

RCCB modules for 5SY4, 5SY6, 5SY7, 5SY8 MCBs instantaneous tripping, 2 surge strength > 1 kA 2 3 4
K short-time delayed, surge strength > 3 kA S selective, surge strength > 5 kA

4 2 3 4

0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

... 16 ... 40 ... 63 ... 40 ... 63 ... 40 ... 63 ... 40 ... 63 ... 40 ... 63 ... 63 ... 63

10 30, 300 30, 300, 500 30, 300 30, 300, 500 30, 300 30, 300, 500 30 300 300, 500, 1000 300, 500, 1000 30, 300 30, 300 300 300, 1000 10, 30 10

2 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3.5 5 3.5 5

at at at at at at at at at at at at at at at at at

MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

RCCB modules for 5SP4 MCBs2) instantaneous tripping, 2 80 ... 100 surge strength > 1 kA 4 80 ... 100 S selective, 2 80 ... 100 surge strength > 5 kA 4 80 ... 100 RCCB protected outlets for installation on mounting box, 2 16 equipped with RCCB and 2 SCHUKO outlets Molded-plastic enclosure, equipped 2 16 with RCCB and SCHUKO outlet RCCB protected outlet for an increased protection level 16 SCHUKO outlet DELTA profil titanium white 2 RCCB/MCB 6 ... 40 A; type A1) instantaneous tripping, surge strength > 250 kA Rated breaking capacity 6 kA 2 6 Characteristics B and C 10 6 000 3 13 16 20 25 32 40 Rated breaking capacity 10 kA 2 6 Characteristics B and C 10 10 000 3 13 16 20 25 32 40

10, 30

10, 30, 300

2

30, 300

10, 30, 300

2

30, 300

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1)

= Type A for AC and pulsating fault currents Overview of RCCB product range *1 MW = modular width 18 mm >N< = device mounting depth 55 mm 70 mm mounting depth = 70 mm device mounting depth

Table 6/22

6/69

6

3..0 .. 25 6. 1000 gray molded plastic (RAL 7035) Cable cross section mm2 1.5 .0 2... 80. 3. lower combined terminal for simultaneous connection of busbars and conductors 5SZ. 25 A. 30.6 ..0 50–60 Hz 50–60 Hz 50–60 Hz Versions Rated voltages Un Rated currents In Rated fault currents I∆n Enclosure Terminals A mA 5SM3.5 2. 80 A 125 A In = 25 A. VDE 0664 Part 20 2-pole and 4-pole AC V 125–230 230–400 500 16..100 A: 100 RCCB/MCB in two modular widths: 195 Device service life Storage temperature Ambient temperature °C °C > 10..0 0. 25 2. 50 1. 3.5 . 25. 40 A 63 A...0 .. 125 10. to IEC 60068-2-30 Free of CFC and silicone 28 cycles (55 °C.. 300.5 . 80 A 25 A.. 95% rel..000 operating cycles (electrical and mechanical) – 40 to + 75 – 5 to +45... 3. 25 0.0 .0 .. 63 A..5 .. 25 1.5 .5 . 3.5 1... 63 A Screw terminals with auxiliary switch up to In = 63 A In = 80 / 100 A 5SU1.. 80 A: 100. 4-pole: 100 80..5 MW at 4 MW at at at at In In In In = = = = 16 A. 40 A.0 2.75 . 25 Terminal tightening torque. tunnel terminals with wire protection on both sides Supply connection Mounting position Degree of protection optionally top or bottom (SIGRES: supplied from the bottom) any IP20 acc.3. 500.5 .0 . 125 A: 195 Minimum operating voltage for test facility function 0.5 . 35 1.. 3. 100... 40. IEC / EN 61543. 2. for versions marked -25 RCCB module : – 25 to + 45 Resistance to climate acc.....5 . tunnel terminals with wire protection on both sides 5SM2. tunnel terminals with wire protection at 2 MW at 2.. 0.Technical data Standards IEC / EN 61008. VDE 0664 Part 30 IEC / EN 61009.. 3.. 16 1. humidity) yes Table 6/23 Technical data for RCCBs *1 MW = modular width 18 mm >N< = device mounting depth 55 mm 70 mm mounting depth = 70 mm device mounting depth 6/70 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens ....63 A 2. 63.5 .8 2... 40 A. recommended Nm 2.0 ....0 3.5 2. tunnel terminals with wire protection on both sides. 3. VDE 0664 Part 10..and 3-pole: 195.. to DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 IP40 when mounted in distribution board IP54 when mounted in molded-plastic enclosure AC V with RCCB 16 A .0 3.

This may even result in the bankruptcy of an industrial enterprise or service provider.g. breaking short circuits. faults and destruction. In the event of a direct or close lightning strike. Direct or close strikes of lightning are lightning strikes into the lightning protection system of a building or the electrically conductive systems leading into the building (e. electromagnetic environment. high-performance information systems are the backbone of modern industrial society.Low Voltage 6.g.2. telecommunications and control lines). damage statistics of electronics insurance companies show worrying figures: more than a quarter of all damage cases are caused by overvoltages due to electromagnetic interference (see Fig. however. 6/24).g. it is no longer wise to wait for the mutual interference of electric and electronic equipment and systems and then take action to remedy the fault at considerable expense. The causes of faults can be manifold. 6/26) are caused by the voltage drop at the surge grounding resistor and the resulting raise of the ground potential of the building in relation to the far surroundings. The resulting surge currents and surge voltages are particularly dangerous for the system to be protected. electromagnetic lightning fields) • SEMP (switching electromagnetic impulse) – overvoltages that are caused by switching operations (e. Any malfunction or system breakdown could have farreaching consequences. 6/26). overvoltages are filed in two categories: C LEMP (lightning electromagnetic impulse) – overvoltages that are caused by atmospheric impact (e. direct lightning strike. It is necessary to plan and implement preventive measures in advance that reduce the risk of interferences. with regard to the current/voltage amplitude and energy content involved. Lightning current arrester – Class I (B) Combi-arrester – Class I (B) and II (C) Surge arrester – Class II (C) Surge arrester – Class III (D) Accessories Photo 6/71 Product overview 6/71 6 . overvoltages (Fig. low-voltage supply. operational switching of loads).6 Lightning Current and Surge Arresters Lightning current and overvoltage protection – why? Today. Overvoltages due to a thunderstorm are caused by direct/close strikes or remote strikes of lightning (Fig. This means the highest stressing for electric systems in buildings. Nevertheless. Considering our highly technologized. with electromagnetic interferences playing an important part here. Causes of overvoltages According to their causes.

switching operations Fig. Similar to induced overvoltages. overvoltages are generated in the electric building installation and the systems and equipment connected to it by the inductive effect of the electromagnetic lightning field (Fig. 6/24 Damage causes to electronic equipment in the year 2000. fire Overvoltage.7 % Water. Lightning strikes are called remote if they occur at a farer distance to the object to be protected. current rise speed.4 12.The characteristic parameters of the surge current present (peak value.1 % Other 16.g.2 % Elementary 27 % . 6/25). lightning discharge. for example. or occur as cloud-to-cloud lightning discharges in the immediate vicinity of such overhead lines (Fig. arc welding equipment) • Fuse tripping 6/72 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . it is therefore described by the surge current waveform 8/20 µs (Fig.7 % 1.5 x 106 2. load content. generated by: • The disconnection of inductive loads (e. or strike medium-voltage overhead lines.9 % Theft. motors) • Arc initiation and interruption (e. Components and equipment that need not conduct currents resulting from direct lightning strikes are therefore tested with such 8/20 µs surge currents. transformers. 6/25). vandalism 5. the effects of remote strikes of lightning to the electric building installation are handled by components and equipment which have been dimensioned according to the surge current waveform 8/20 µs. 6/26. cases 2a.75 x 103 Fig. They have been defined in international and national standards as the test current for components and equipment protecting against direct lightning strikes. reactors. 2b and 2c). analysis of 8. 6/25 Test surge currents Overvoltages caused by switching operations are. 6/26. specific energy) can be described by the surge current waveform 10/350 µs (Fig. In addition to the voltage drop at the surge grounding resistor.27 W/R [J/Ω] 1. The energy of these induced overvoltages and of the resulting pulse currents is far lower than the one of the direct lightning surge current.5 0.400 damage cases 80 i [kA] 60 40 1 20 2 0 0 80 200 400 350 600 800 t [µs] fmax [kA] Test surge current for 1 lightning current arrester 75 Test surge current for 2 surge arrester 75 Waveform [µs] 10/350 8/20 Q [As] 37 .g. case 1b). Negligence 36.

the concept of lightning protection zones. the equipment and components necessary for lightning and overvoltage protection can then be determined properly. is applied (Fig. continuous availability of modern infrastructure systems can be achieved. Definitions apply as classified in the Table “Definition of lightning protection zones. The undamped electromagnetic field is present here. 3 Table 6/24 Definition of lightning protection zones In accordance with the requirements and burdens placed on surge protective devices. Zone in which objects are not exposed to direct lightning strikes. the room shield and the overvoltage protection for the electrical and IT network. 6/73 6 . Part of an EMC-suitable lightning protection zone concept is the outer protection against lightning (including lightning rods. are required. subsequent zones must be established. arrester. By summation of the measures defined in the EMC-compatible concept of lightning protection zones.Low Voltage The effects of switching operations in the electrical installation are also simulated by surge currents of the waveform 8/20 µs under test conditions. grounding). Zone in which objects are not exposed to direct lightning strikes and currents are reduced as compared to zone 0A. At the transition point of lightning protection zone 0B to 1. In this zone. as described in IEC 61312-1 (DIN VDE 0185 Part 103). According to the degree of endangerment of these zones. To do so. based on a lightning protection system for the building. they are categorized as lightning current arresters. These arresters must be capable of conducting partial lightning currents of waveform 10/350 µs several times without being destroyed in order to prevent the ingress of destructive partial lightning currents into the electrical building installation. however the undamped electromagnetic field is present. ” Lightning protection zone 0A Definition Zone in which objects are exposed to direct lightning strikes and must therefore be capable of carrying the entire lightning current. Requirements to these zones must comply with the required ambient zones of the system to be protected. Protection scheme To ensure continuous availability of complex electric and IT systems even in the event of a direct impact of lightning. The highest requirements are placed on the arresting capability of lightning current arresters and combined arresters. surge arresters and combined arresters. The above described lightning and overvoltage protective measure at the borders of the lightning protection zones equally applies to the electrical and the IT network. It is important to take all causes of overvoltages into account. the equal potential bonding. roof conductors or air termination network. which perform the transition from lightning protection zone 0A to 1 or 0A to 2. 6/27). the electromagnetic field may be damped dependent on the shielding measures taken. Their task is both to reduce the residual current/voltage quantities of the upstream protective levels even further and to suppress the overvoltages induced or generated in the installation itself. in which. further measures for the protection of electric and electronic systems against overvoltage. Definition of lightning protection zones 0B 1 2. If a large-scale reduction of the conducted currents and/or the electromagnetic field is required. or downstream of the lightning current arrester at zone transition point 1 to 2 and higher. The building is divided into endangered zones. surge arresters are used to protect against overvoltages.

process frame (in industrial plants). cables etc. 6/27 The concept of lightning protection zones 6/74 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .1 Direkt/close lightning strike Strike into outer lightning protection system. L1 L2 L3 PEN 2b 2a 20 kV 1a Voltage drop at the surge grounding resistor RS 1b Induced voltage in loop 1 2c Remote lightning strike 2a Lightning strike into mediumvoltage overhead lines 1b 2b Traveling surge waves in overhead lines due to cloud-to-cloud lightnings 2c Fields of the lightning channel IT network 1b RS Power network Fig. 6/26 Causes for overvoltages during lightning discharges LPZ 0A LEMP LPZ 0B M LPZ 1 Room shield Ventilation LPZ 3 LEMP LPZ 2 LPZ 0B LPZ 0B LPZ 2 LEMP Terminal IT network SEMP Equipotential bonding as lightning protection. lightning current arrester Local equipotential bonding. surge arrester Power network Fig.

The international standard IEC 60664-1 (EN 60664-1) distinguishes four withstand surge voltage categories for lowvoltage equipment.5 kV <1. 6/28 Requirement classes Category Withstand Description surge voltage 6 kV 4 kV For devices connected upstream of the distribution board For devices which are an integral part of the installation (e. to E DIN part 6/A1 Fig. Table 6/25 respectively. 6/28. demonstrates that the lightning current arresters and surge arresters are divided into requirement classes dependent on their location within the power system.g. Rated surge voltage and overvoltage categories 6 kV IV 4 kV III 2.5 kV I HA 230/400 V Z Protection level B <4 kV C D none <1. Owing to the different response characteristics.g. The circuit diagram shown in Fig. To do this. distribution cabinets) For equipment withstanding normal impulse voltages (e.Low Voltage Requirement classes of arresters (SPD = surge protective devices: lightning current/overvoltage protective devices) Lightning current and overvoltage protection is only effective if the stipulated insulation strength of installation sections is also taken into account here. household appliances) For very sensitive equipment (e. electronic equipment) IV III II 2. Siemens SPDs comply with the following product standards: C Germany (VDE 0675-6. arresters of the different requirement classes are virtually connected in parallel. 1996) C International (IEC 61643-1. 1998) C Italy (CEI EN 61643-11) C Austria (ÖVE/ÖNORM E 8001) Co-ordinated use of lightning current and overvoltage arresters In practice.g.5 kV II 1.5 kV Stoßspannungskategorien German Draft Standard VDE 0675-6 Class B Class C International Standard IEC 61643-1 Class I Class II European Standard EN 61643-11 Type 1 Type 2 Designation Lightning current arrester Surge arrester for power distribution Surge arrester for consumer Class D Class III Type 3 Table 6/26 Product standards: Categorization of surge protective devices (SPD) 6/75 6 . The categories listed in Table 6/25 apply to low-voltage installations with nominal voltages of 230/400 V in particular.3 kV Requirement classes acc.5 kV I Table 6/25 1. discharge capacity and protective tasks. the withstand surge voltage of the different overvoltage categories is matched with the protective level Up of the different SPDs.

the surge arrester of Class II (C) will respond first due to its low protective level. This approach is called “energetic co-ordination” It must be . as its response value is in the range of 3. Lightning current arrester L1 L2 L3 N Surge arrester Minimum cable lengths: ≥ 5 m for PE conductor not integrated in the cable ≥ 15 m for PE conductor integrated in the cable l Alternative: Use of an interaction-limiting reactor Mounting diagram Interaction-limiting reactor Circuit diagram Interaction-limiting reactor Lightning current arrester Lightning current arrester Surge arrester Surge arrester Fig. This voltage value does not suffice to make the series gap of the Class I lightning current arrester respond. 6/30 Energetic co-ordination 6/76 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .kWh Service entry Fig. 6/29 Electricity meter Lightning current arrester Interaction-limiting reactor Surge arrester 1 Surge arrester n Co-ordinated use of lightning current and surge arresters the different arrester types must be installed in the network in such a way that the ratings of the individual devices are not exceeded. energetic co-ordination has already been established if there is a cable length of ≥ 5 m between the Class II arrester and the Class III arrester. The co-ordination of SPDs of Classes I and II will be discussed in the following.5 kV. These arresters provide a protective level of < 1. In the latter case. an energetic evaluation is required to ensure that a surge current always goes to the next upstream arrester if the affected arrester might be overloaded by this surge current. which ensures comprehensive protection. If an installation is stressed by lightning current. provided between arresters of Class I (B) and II (C). and between arresters of Class II and III (D). To do so. which is connected in parallel.5 kV.

N PE L1 .L2 . 5SD7 341-1 and 5SD7 344-0 have a follow current extinction capacity of 50 kA. The single-pole lightning current arrester 5SD7 315-0 and the combi-arresters 5SD7 343-0. an upstream protective device is not necessary.PE l < 15 m Energetic co-ordination of lightning current arresters and surge arresters F1 F F1 M S P D S P D Co-ordinating an SPD with overcurrent protective devices shall C protect the SPD against overload when excessive currents are present C ensure system availability Fig. an additional voltage drop of approx. a cable length of ≥ 15 m and more is required to attain a sufficient level of inductivity and the respective voltage drop.N . If these cable lengths cannot be realized.L2 . If the PE conductor is wired separate from the other conductors at a distance of 1 m or more. L3 and N. the system follow current is a short-circuit current with a frequency of 50 Hz. L2. which shall reach the response value of the series gap of the lightning current arrester. such as a miniature circuit-breaker or fuse. The system follow current is caused by a deliberate short-term short circuit that the lightning current arrester produces in order to discharge the lightning current. a cable length of ≥ 5 m is sufficient. In high-current networks. 6/31 Protection of surge arresters C support the extinction of system follow currents 6/77 6 . If the PE conductor is wired in a common cable together with L1.N PE built into same line Table 6/27 Conductor distribution Interaction-limiting reactor must be built in if l<5m L1 . Co-ordination of SPDs with miniature-circuit breakers and fuses Line arrangement / connection to ground L1 .L2 . so-called interaction-limiting reactors. when added up to the protective level of the surge arrester.Low Voltage In order not to overload the Class II arrester. Otherwise. 2 kV must be induced on the line between the B arrester and the C arrester. Follow current extinction capacity This characterizes the height of the maximum system follow current that the arrester itself is capable of breaking without the aid of an upstream protective device.L3 . additional interaction-limiting reactors (5SD7 390-0/-1) must be used between arresters of Class I and Class II. Rating information for the protective device is provided in the following sections.L3 .L3 .L3 . Line inductivity depends on the cable routing of the PE conductor.L2 . a fuse or miniature circuit-breaker must be installed. This means. If the maximum possible system short circuit current is lower than the maximum system follow current that can be extinguished by the SPD.N PE built into different line L1 . the voltage drop is attained by utilizing the existing cable impedances or by applying bundled inductivities.

Description

Requirement class

Product designation

Max. permissible Max. permissible energy value peak current

Comment

I2tmax
Combi-arrester I and II 5SD7 343-0, 5SD7 344-0, 5SD7 343-1 5SD7 315-0 600 kA2s

ip max
18 kA No protection necessary up to a shortcircuit current of 50 kA No protection nec essary up to a shortcircuit current of 50 kA

1-pole lightning current I arrester with high follow current extinction capacity Encapsulated lightning current arrester Open lightning current arrester Surge arrester I

600 kA2s

18 kA

5SD7 311-1, 5SD7 313-1

120 kA2s

10 kA

I

5SD7 311-0

80 kA2s

13 kA

II

5SD7 5SD7 5SD7 5SD7 5SD7

300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 100 kA2s 302-2, 5SD7 303-2, 323-2, 5SD7 325-2, 327-2, 5SD7 324-2, 326-2

10 kA

Table 6/28

Maximum permissible energy values and peak current values of surge protective devices

A co-ordination of the SPDs and fuse or miniature circuit-breaker shall ensure that C the maximum permissible peak current Ipmax and C the maximum permissible energy value I2tmax of the SPD are not exceeded. This way, damage to the SPD and hence, danger for persons or property, is prevented. Basically, two connection methods can be distinguished: C The protective device is integrated in the connection line of the SPD. When a miniature circuit-breaker or fuse trips, power supply is maintained. We recommend using a signaling device to indicate that the overvoltage protective function has

been isolated from supply and is therefore not effective. C As standard, protection is effected by the standard protective device integrated in the power distribution system (e.g. service fuse). In this case, the SPDs are only protected by the system fuse. If this fuse trips due to an SPD overload, the installation is isolated from supply. The fuse or miniature circuitbreaker to be used must be rated in accordance with the line cross sections in the installation. Maximum permissible arrester backup fuse ratings must always be taken into account.

Flow chart for the co-ordination of the SPD with the overvoltage protective device Power distribution within the installation is effected by circuit-breakers and fuses in accordance with relevant installation standards. If required, lightning current or surge arresters shall ensure protection against overvoltages by means of fuses or magneto-thermal switches. The planning engineer may utilize the system protection situated upstream of the SPD or provide a series circuit for the arrester. The following flow chart describes the procedure for choosing between fuse and miniature circuit-breaker as an overvoltage protective device: if a fuse is used (recommended use), you may directly refer to Tables 6/29 and 6/30 and ignore the flow chart.

6/78

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Low Voltage

A Icc eff B
S P D

Characteristic values of miniature circuit-breaker A Establish effective short-circuit current Icc eff Establish maximum value of ip and I2t limited by protective device A

A = Protective device for network B = Protective device for SPD Icc eff = Short-circuit current

No

ip ≤ ip max3) and I2t and I2tmax3)

Yes
1)

Protection B required for the SPD

No additional surge arrester fuse required

A
S P D

Miniature circuit-breaker

Back-up fuse or MCB?

Back-up fuse

Solution 1
2)

Breaker selection B with very high In and isolating capacity so that ip ≤ ip max3) and I2t and I2tmax3)

Fuse selection B with very high In and isolating capacity. Observe maximum fuse values. Take selectivity between protective device A and fuse F (B) into account.

SPD protected by MCB (B)

SPD protected by back-up fuse F (B)

A MCB (B)
S P D

A F (B)
S P D

Solution 3

Solution 2

1) 2) 3)

Owing to an allocated cross-sectional element, line power supply can be quickly restored in case of a replacement of the surge protective device. Recommended, because fuses generate a lower voltage drop and ensure better protection. Please refer to Table 6/28 for values.

Fig. 6/32

Flow chart for the co-ordination of the SPD with an overvoltage protective device

6/79

6

Installation protected by miniature circuit-breaker The following tables list the conditions required for protection against maxi-

mum currents, and the maximum rated current of the fuse matching the SPD. We recommend using fuses instead of magneto-thermal switches

because fuses ensure a lower voltage drop and better protection.

Surge arrester 5SD7 315-01) 5SD7 313-1, 5SD7 311-1 Upstream MCB [A] 16 25 32 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 > 250
1)

1-pole and multi-pole surge arresters 5SD7 300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 5SD7 302-2, 5SD7 302-4, 5SD7 303-2, 5SD7 303-4, 5SD7 303-5, 5SD7 308-0, 5SD7 323-2, 5SD7 324-2, 5SD7 325-2, 5SD7 326-2, 5SD7 327-2, 5SD7 328-2 Upstream MCB [A] 10 16 25 32 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 > 250 MCB Lq1 Fuse F [gL/gG] [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [A] 1.5 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 50 50 95 120 / / 1.5 2.5 6 10 16 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Lq2
S P D

Lq1

Lq2

Lq3

Fuse F

[mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [gL/gG] 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 50 50 95 120 / / 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 16 16 16 16 25 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 / / / / / / / / / / / /

Fuse F [gL/gG] [A] / / / up to 125 up to 160 up to 160 up to 160 up to 160 up to 160 up to 160 up to 160 up to 160

Lq1

Lq2

Lq3

6 6 6 10 16 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

/ / / / / up to 125 up to 125 up to 125 up to 125 up to 125 up to 125 up to 125 up to 125

Up to 50 kA, surge arrester 5SD7 315-0 does not require a fuse.

MCB

Lq1 Lq2 F
S P D

Lq3

Lq3

F Fuse Lq1 Line cross section of the installation

Lq2 Discharge-line cross section to arrester Lq3 Line cross section with connection to ground

Combi-arresters 5SD7 343-0, 5SD7 343-1, 5SD7 344-0 Feed-through connection Upstream MCB [gL/gG] 16 25 35 50 63 80 100 125 – – – –
2)

Discharge connection Lq3 [mm2] 16 16 16 16 25 35 50 50 – – – – Upstream MCB [gL/gG] 16 25 32 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 >250

2)

Lq1 = Lq2 [mm2] 2,5 6 10 16 25 35 50 50 – – – –

Lq1 [mm2] 2,5 6 10 16 25 35 50 50 95 120 / /

Lq2 [mm2] 2,5 6 10 16 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

Lq3 [mm2] 16 16 16 16 25 35 35 35 35 35 35 35

Fuse F [gL/gG] / / / / / / / / / / / /

Follow current extinction capacity 50 kA. / = No discharge protection necessary.
Technical data

Table 6/29

6/80

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Low Voltage

Installation protected by fuse
Surge arrester 5SD7 315-01) 5SD7 313-1, 5SD7 311-1 Upstream fuse [A] 16 25 32 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 250
1)

1-pole and multi-pole surge arresters 5SD7 300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 5SD7 302-2, 5SD7 302-4, 5SD7 303-2, 5SD7 303-4, 5SD7 303-5, 5SD7 308-0, 5SD7 323-2, 5SD7 324-2, 5SD7 325-2, 5SD7 326-2, 5SD7 327-2, 5SD7 328-2 Upstream fuse [A] 10 16 25 32 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 250 Lq1 Fuse F [gL / gG] [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [A] 1.5 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 50 50 95 120 / / 1.5 2.5 6 10 16 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Lq2
S P D

Lq1

Lq2

Lq3

Fuse F

[mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [gL / gG] 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 50 50 95 120 / / 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 16 16 16 16 25 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 / / / / / / / / / / / /

Fuse F [gL / gG] [A] / / / / / / / / / up to 160 up to 160 up to 160

Lq1

Lq2

Lq3

6 6 6 10 16 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

/ / / / / / / / / up to 125 up to 125 up to 125 up to 125

Up to 50 kA, surge arrester 5SD7 315-0 does not require any fuses. Lq1 F1 F
S P D

Lq2

F1

Lq3

Lq3

F Fuse Lq1 Line cross section of the installation

Lq2 Discharge-line cross section to arrester Lq3 Line cross section with connection to ground

Combi-arresters 5SD7 343-0, 5SD7 343-1, 5SD7 344-0 Feed-through connection Upstream MCB [gL / gG] 16 25 35 50 63 80 100 125 – – – –
2)

Discharge connection Lq3 [mm2] 16 16 16 16 25 35 50 50 – – – – Upstream MCB [gL / gG] 16 25 32 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 >250

2)

Lq1 = Lq2 [mm2] 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 50 50 – – – –

Lq1 [mm2] 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 50 50 95 120 / /

Lq2 [mm2] 2.5 6 10 16 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

Lq3 [mm2] 16 16 16 16 25 35 35 35 35 35 35 50

Fuse F [gL / gG] / / / / / / / / / / / /

Follow current extinction capacity 50 kA. / = No discharge protection necessary.
Technical data

Table 6/30

6/81

6

TN-S system L1 L2 L3 N F2 F3 Wh I∆ Consumer L N F1

*

PE • 4 arresters, Class B • 4 arresters, Class C

PE

Power outlet with integrated overvoltage protection, Class D

* For feeding with a TN-C system, the arrester between N and PE is omitted

TT system “3+1 wiring“1) F1

L1 L2 L3

L F2 Wh F3 I∆ Consumer

N

N

PE • 3 arresters, Class B •1 N/PE arrester, Class B • 3 arresters, Class C

PE Power outlet with integrated overvoltage protection, Class D

• 1 N/PE arrester, Class C

For rating the protective devices F2 and F3, please refer to Tables 6/28 to 6/30. If the lightning current and surge arrester are installed upstream of the RCCB, an S differential must be provided.
1)

In the single-phase TT system, the circuit diagram is called “1+1 wiring”

Fig. 6/33

Circuit diagrams – overview

6/82

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Low Voltage
Combi-arrester – range of protection Caution: The protection range of the combi-arrester covers 5 m! If the consumer is located more than 5 m (cable length) away from the combi-arrester, an additional overvoltage protection device must be provided for the consumer. MD SD Con Consumer Con Combi-arrester Surge arrester MD = Main distribution system SD = Subdistribution system

Combi-arrester – application in a combined main and subdistribution system SD Con Con Surge arrester SD Con Power outlet with integrated overvoltage protection Power outlet with integrated overvoltage protection

Surge arrester MD

SD Con Consumer Con Combi-arrester Surge arrester multi-pole Conventional installation using an interaction-limiting reactor SD Con Con Surge arrester SD Con Power outlet with integrated overvoltage protection Power outlet with integrated overvoltage protection MD = Main distribution system SD = Subdistribution system

Surge arrester MD + SD Con

Con Lightning current arrester Surge arrester Interaction-limiting reactor Power outlet with integrated overvoltage protection MD = Main distribution system SD = Subdistribution system

Fig. 6/34

Circuit diagrams – combi-arresters (application notes)

6/83

6

TN-C system Version featuring 1-pole arresters L3 L2 L1 3-pole version L1 L2 L3

a

PE

s

PEN a 3 arresters, type 5SD7 313-1

a 3 arresters, type 5SD7 311-1 s Busbar, type 5SD7 361-1 (cut at 6-pole) TN-S system Version featuring 1-pole arresters N L3 L2 L1

3-pole version N L1 L2 L3

a

a

a

a

a

s

PE

s

PE a Arrester, type 5SD7 313-4 s Arrester, type 5SD7 311-1 d Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0

d

a 4 arresters, type 5SD7 311-1 s Busbar, type 5SD7 361-1 TT system Version featuring 1-pole arresters N L3 L2 L1 f

3-pole version N L1 L2 L3

a a a a s d

s

d

PE g a s d f

f

PE a s d f g 3 arresters, type 5SD7 311-1 through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0 N/PE arrester, type 5SD7 318-1 Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0 (cut at 2-pole) Busbar, type 5SD7 361-1

Arrester, type 5SD7 313-1 Through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0 N/PE arrester, type 5SD7 318-1 Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0

Fig. 6/35

Circuit diagrams – lightning current arresters, Class I (B)

6/84

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Low Voltage

TT system “3+1 wiring” (with interaction-limiting reactors) N L1 = L1’ =’ L2 L2˛ L3 L3’ PE’
3 1 4 3 1 1 1 2 2 arresters, type 5SD7 311-1 arrester, type 5SD7 318-1 interaction-limiting reactors arresters, type 5SD7 300-2 arrester, type 5SD7 308-0 through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0 busbar, type 5ST2 147 combs, type 5SD7 361-1 combs, type 5SD7 361-0

Caution!

N

N’

N’

The design of the combi-arrester ensures an energetic co-ordination with the class II arresters without that an interaction-limiting reactor would be required. See solution shown in Fig. 6/39. Note: To simplify these circuit diagrams, the fuses or magnetothermal switches have not been represented: for their use and ratings please refer to co-ordination tables 6/29 and 6/30.

PE

Fig. 6/36

Circuit diagrams – lightning current arresters, Class I (B)

TN-S system Version featuring 1-pole surge arrester N • L1 Version featuring multi-pole surge arrester PE Fault alarm

a a a a a L1 L2 L3 N PE s TN system: Surge arrester for a TN system (type 5SD7 325-2 or 5SD7 326-2) a 1 surge arrester, type 5SD7 326-2 Austria: a 1 surge arrester, type 5SD7 326-4

a 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 303-2 s Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0 Austria: a 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 303-4 s Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0

Fig. 6/37

Circuit diagrams – lightning current arresters, Class II (C)

6/85

6

TT system Version featuring 1-pole surge arrester L3 L2 L1 N PE Version featuring multi-pole surge arrester PE Fault alarm

a a s d d d L1 L2 L3 N f a 1 surge arrester, type 5SD7 308-0 a 1 through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0 d 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 302-2 f 1 busbar, type 5SD7 361-1 (cut at 5-pole) Austria: a 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 308-0 s 1 through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0 & 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 303-4 f 1 busbar, type 5SD7 361-0 (cut at 5-pole) TN system: Surge arrester for a TN system (type 5SD7 325-2 or 5SD7 326-2) a 1 surge arrester, type 5SD7 328-2 Austria: a 1 surge arrester, type 5SD7 328-4 5SD7 300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 5SD7 302-2, 5SD7 303-2, 5SD7 323-2, 5SD7 324-2, 5SD7 325-2, 5SD7 326-2, 5SD7 327-2, 5SD7 328-2
F1 Miniature circuit-breaker F1 >125 A gL/gG

F3 =125 A gL/gG F3 On the arrester line F1 >125 A gL/gG

F3

Note: To simplify these circuit diagrams, the fuses or magnetothermal switches have not been represented: for their use and ratings please refer to co-ordination tables 6/29 and 6/30.

Fig. 6/38

Circuit diagrams – surge arresters, Class II (C)

6/86

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

6/39 Circuit diagrams – combi-arresters. Class I (B) and II (C) 6/87 6 .F3 >125 A gL/gG F4 .Low Voltage SEC F1F2F3 F4 F5 F6 L1’ L2’ L3’ N’ PE L1 L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’ N H1 H2 H3 N PE 5SD7 348-3 1 2 3 4 N’ F1 .F6 ≤125 A gL/gG (s = 50 mm2 Cu) 5SD7 344-0 PE PAS L1 L2 L3 N Service entrance cable SEC F1F2F3 F4 s F5 s F6 s s N’ L1’ L2’ L3’ N’ PE L1 L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’ N H1 H2 H3 5SD7 343-1 5SD7 348-3 1 2 3 4 F1 .F3 >315 A gL/gG F4 .F6 ≤ 315 A gL/gG (s = 50 mm2 Cu) PE PE L1 L2 L3 N Service entrance cable PAS Fig.

lockable in OFF position with three padlocks. lockable with two padlocks.5 mm C Snap-on terminal covers and safeto-touch terminals C Captive terminal screws accessible from mounting perspective Photo 6/74 Main and EMERGENCY STOP switch with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism 6/88 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 300 mm shaft. Areas of application Main switches (network disconnecting devices) or EMERGENCY STOP switches C of individual machine tools or processing machines.or fourhole fixing) C For front mounting with masking frame and knob. machine tools and processing machines).g. mountable on 35 mm standard mounting rail. N and PE conductor can be mounted) C Rapid mounting with center-hole fixing ø 22. encapsulated in a moldedplastic enclosure for wall mounting C of switchgear and control cabinets for maintenance or repair purposes Product range Main control and EMERGENCY STOP switches from 16 A to 125 A. C For front mounting with rotary operating mechanism (center. lockable with two padlocks Photo 6/72 6-pole main and EMERGENCY STOP switch Photo 6/73 Main and EMERGENCY STOP switch in a molded-plastic enclosure C In molded-plastic enclosure with rotary operating mechanism C For base mounting with rotary operating mechanism. detachable door coupling and door locking in ON position (center. direct switching C for switching off machine or device groups.or four-pole switch-disconnectors with manual operation (network disconnecting devices) for switching main and auxiliary circuits of threephase motors and other devices of up to 45 kW (e. The lockable rotary operating mechanism guarantees optimum use as maintenance or repair switch from 16 to 125 A. cap dimensions 45 mm C As 6-pole changeover and parallel switches Advantages at a glance C Plugged on – accessories installed (convertible from three-pole to fourpole switches.or four-hole fixing) C For mounting in distribution boards.7 3LD2 Main Control and EMERGENCY STOP Switches Brief description Three. 2 auxiliary contact blocks can be mounted.6.2.

g. also defined in the CENELEC Report R 023. to switch on sealed-in circuits. DIN EN 60947-3 (VDE 0660 Part 107) IEC 60669-1. indicating. In Germany. DIN EN 60669-1 (VDE 0632 Part 1) C C C C C C For use in logic operations in control cabinets As pushbutton in control systems. Together with the instabus EIB devices. The following list provides an overview of the currently available product groups mainly used in functional. DIN EN 60669-1 (VDE 0632 Part 1) C C C C C 5TE8 ON/OFF switch 20 A to 125 A For use in logic operations in control cabinets 16–25 A and 40 –100 A: IEC 60947-3. DIN EN 60669-1 (VDE 0632 Part 1) 32 A and 125 A: IEC 60947-3. This standardization has led to an enormous simplification regarding the planning. the design and with it the dimensions of the modular devices are constructed to conform with DIN 43880. i. construction and installation of switchgear and distribution boards and is therefore also the reason for an increase in device development.Low Voltage 6. 20 A 5TE4 8 pushbutton With/without latching function Switching of lighting. 20 A C Control switch 5TE8.001. as a collective name. 20 A C Group switch with center position 5TE8. administrative and institutional buildings and in industry. KEMA-certified acc. DIN EN 60947-3 (VDE 0660 Part 107) IEC 60669-1. DIN EN 60947-3 (VDE 0660 Part 107) IEC 60669-1. modular devices provide maximum functionality for low-voltage switchgear as well as power distribution boards and distribution boards. Switch Application Standards Use in buildings of type residential functional industrial 5TE8 control switch C Changeover switch 5TE8. monitoring.e. DIN EN 60947-3 (VDE 0660 Part 107) IEC 60947-3. or as pushbutton with latching function for manual operation. refers to all installation equipment which is used for switching.3 Modular Devices The term modular devices. motors and other electrical equipment IEC 60947-3. in commercial. to UL 508 C C C 5TE1 switch-disconnector 100 A to 200 A Switching of plant sections C C Table 6/31 Product overview 6/89 6 . as control switch or for load switching IEC 60947-3. e. DIN EN 60947-3. controlling and signaling.

flush-mounted System remote-control switch C Without central switching C With central switching C With central and group switching Relay C For controllers DIN EN 61095 (VDE 0637) DIN EN 60669 (VDE 0632) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C For capacitive loads Switching of small loads. especially to switch lights. rotational speed setting of 1-phase AC motors. EN 61095 C C C Table 6/32 Product overview 6/90 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . ohmic and inductive loads EN 60947-4-1. ohmic and inductive load. Switch Application Standards Use in buildings of type residential functional industrial Remote-control switch C Without central switching Switching of lighting with C With central switching pushbuttons C With central and group switching Venetian blinds and remote series switch Electronic remote series switch Remote-control switch. or DIN EN 60255 (VDE 0435) use in control circuits. heaters or lighting. EN 60947-5-1.Switching devices Switching of lighting. switching of small loads and contact multiplications in controllers. such as fluorescent lamps or high-pressure metal-vapor lamps and metal-halide lamps. with capacitive properties C C C C Insta contactors Switching of motors. such as fluorescent or glow lamps. protection of motor-driven mechanical drive parts and pumps.

pumps. belt or chain drives. (VDE 0660 Part 117) C C EMERGENCY OFF module >N< 5TT5 200. conveyor belts. 400 V AC Protection of machinery with gear. in particular to the switching of lighting systems are to be taken into account for planning. The technical information presented here is intended to provide background information and to prevent planning errors and early system failures that would result in time-consuming trouble shooting. DIN EN 954-1 C C Electric switching Some general requirements to operation. compressors. trade and private households In compliance with the EC Directive for Machinery 98/37/EC. Table 6/33 Product overview 6/91 6 . 10 A EMERGENCY OFF switch for in industry. 230 V AC C 5TT3 440. fans.Low Voltage Switch Application Standards Use in buildings of type residential functional industrial Soft-starter C 5TT3 441. packing machines and door-opening drives DIN EN 60947-4-2.

5TT1 303 Power saving for staircase lighting. prewarned off-switching of stairwell lighting in multiple dwellings. 7LF6 114 C Power-save timer with pre-warning function. for time sequence control in control systems. automatic startup without the necessity to enter the time. Standards Use in buildings of type residential functional industrial Timers for buildings C Stairwell lighting timer. IEC 60255 C C C C C Table 6/34 Product overview 6/92 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 7LF6 113 C Stairwell lighting timer ECG.Timers Power saving in stairwell lighting. 30-minute accurate switching in day or week cycles. 7LF6 112 Industrial timers C Multi-function timer. flashes to warn before the lights are switched off DIN EN 60669. time monitoring for accuracy. Creates. power saving in rarely used rooms or rooms that are frequented with a varying intensity. 5TT3 181 C Wiper timer. modifies and documents switching programs. 5TT3 185 C Delay timer. IEC 60699. IEC 60699 C C For time sequence control in control systems DIN EN 60255. IEC 60699. 7LF6 115 C Fan timer. 5TT3 182 C Flashing timer. IEC 60699 DIN EN 60669. To trigger electronic control gear in fluorescent lamps. 7LF6 110. 1-minute accurate switching in day. warns by dimming the stairwell light before it is switched off on multi-apartment floors and landings. Power saving in rarely used rooms. run-on operation for fans in toilets. 5TT3 183 C Off-delay timer. or rooms that are frequented with a varying intensity. week and year Application mode. IEC 60699. DIN 18015 DIN EN 60669. timer-controlled stairwell Timers lighting for ECG dynamic® electronic controlgear. 5TT3 184 DIN EN 60669. Flashes to warn before the stairwell lights are switched off in multiple dwellings. 7LF6 111 C Stairwell lighting timer with pre-warning function. DIN 18015 C C C C Power saving in toilets DIN EN 60699. DIN 18015 C C C C C C C Lighting timer with pre-warning function.

4AC3 104 Bell or buzzer with 230 V AC connection in one device. monitoring of operating hours and switching-on of devices or systems. switching of network loads in resi- dential buildings. controlling of liquid levels in containers. monitoring of 24 V DC Monitoring devices power supply. thermal protection of motor windings in heating or cooling equipment. monitoring of luminaries and transformers for halogen lighting. monitoring of all types of fuses. monitoring of power supply. that can also be pushbutton-operated with 12 V AC safety extra voltage DIN EN 61558-2-8 C Table 6/36 Product overview 6/93 6 . buzzer With power supply unit 4AC3 004. switching of lighting according to daytime brightness. disconnecting of unused lines. monitoring of a network’s direction of rotation. IEC 60730 C C C Table6/35 Product overview Monitoring devices Monitoring of the emergency lighting’s power supply in public buildings. overcurrent release for the protection of motors. monitoring of the power supply to ensure the compliance with operational parameters for devices or system parts. monitoring of the neutral conductor for breakage. week or year mode DIN EN 60730. controlling and limiting of temperatures. monitoring of the power supply for short-time interruptions of 20 ms. remote display of room temperatures. monitoring of emergency and signal lighting and motors.Low Voltage Timers Application Standards Use in buildings of type residential residential functional industrial industrial Mechanical and digital clock timers 1-second accuracy of switching in day. Application Standards Use in buildings of type functional Light indicator 5TE5 8 Optical signaling in plants and DIN VDE 0710-1 control circuits to indicate switching states or faults C C Bell.

Monitoring devices Application Standards Use in buildings of type residential functional industrial Fault signaling units 5TTE5 8 C Centralized fault indicator Evaluation and display of faults or 5TT3 460 alarms to monitor industrial plants C Expansion fault indicator footpaths. DIN VDE 0435 C Table 6/37 Product overview 6/94 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . EN 60730 C C Temperature controller 7LQ2 0 Temperature control and limiting EN 60730 C C C Fuse monitor 5TT3 170 Power-off switch 5TT3 171 Monitoring of all types of fuses IEC 60255. DIN VDE 0435 C C C Disconnection of unused supply lines IEC 60255. DIN VDE 0435-303 C C C C Dusk switches 7LQ2 1. for cost saving purposes 5TT3 461 IEC 60255. DIN VDE 0435 Phase-sequence/direction Monitoring of the phase sequence of rotation monitors of a network or power supply 5TT3 421 / 5TT3 423 IEC 60255. 5TT3 3 On-demand switching of lighting systems for shop windows or sidewalks to save costs.

5TT3 400 to 5TT3 403 C Undervoltage relay. DIN VDE 0435-303. IEC 61557 C Level relay 5TT3 430/5TT3 435 Thermistor motor protection relay 5TT3 43 Table 6/38 Product overview Control of liquid levels in containers Thermal protection of motor windings IEC 60255.Low Voltage Monitoring devices Application Standards Use in buildings of type residential functional industrial Voltage relays C Undervoltage relay. DIN VDE 0108 C C C IEC 60255. DIN VDE 0435 6/95 6 . IEC 61557 C C IEC 60255. DIN VDE 0435 C C C Current relay 5TT6 1 To monitor emergency and signal lighting and motors IEC 60255. 5TT3 407 C Under-/overvoltage relay 5TT3 408 Power supply monitoring of the emergency lighting in public buildings Power supply monitoring for short-time failures of 20 ms Power supply monitoring to maintain operative parameters for equipment or plant sections Monitoring of neutral conductor for breakage Power supply monitoring to maintain operative parameters for equipment or plant sections IEC 60255. 5TT3 19 DIN VDE 0633 IEC 60255. BTO § 6 Section 4 IEC 60255. 5TT3 404 to 5TT3 406 C Short-time voltage relay. DIN VDE 0435-303 C C Priority switch 5TT6 10 Isolation monitor for industrial applications 5TT3 4 Cosϕ monitor 5TT3 472 Switching of network loads in residential buildings To monitor the dielectric resistance in ungrounded networks To monitor low loads of motors up to approx. 5 A alternating current by cosϕ measurements IEC 60669 (VDE 0632). DIN VDE 0435 C C C IEC 60255. DIN VDE 0435 C C Under-/overvoltage relay 5TT3 410 C Overvoltage relay.

relays. bells. dooropeners. Insta contactors and DC power supply for safetyextra-low-voltage systems intended for permanent operation DIN EN 61558-2-6 C C C Outlets 5TE6 7 Power supply for maintenance purposes in distribution boards DIN VDE 0620. intercoms. remote-control switches and AC power supply for safety-extra-low-voltage systems intended for short-term operation DIN EN 61558-2-8 C C Transformers for continuous load 4AC3 4.Power supply units Voltage/current supply up to 63 VA as safety extra-low voltage. 4AC3 5. for power supply during maintenance. buzzers. as safety extra-low voltage. Insta contactors and AC power supply for safety-extra-low-voltage systems intended for permanent operation DIN EN 61558-2-2 C C Power supply units for DC voltage 4AC2 4 Direct current/voltage supply up to 40 VA. relays. for gongs. Power supply units Application Standards Use in buildings of type residential functional industrial Bell transformers 4AC3 0. DC current/voltage supply up to 24 VA as safety extra-low voltage. as safety extra-low voltage. dooropeners. 4AC3 6 Alternating current/voltage supply up to 63 VA. 4AC3 1 Alternating current/voltage supply up to 40 VA. as safety extra-low voltage. bells. for gongs. for control circuits. CEE 7 Standard Sheet V C C C Table 6/39 Product overview 6/96 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . buzzers.

Table 6/40 Product overview 6/97 6 . input voltage 230 V AC. contacting via data bus.Low Voltage instabus binary inputs N260 binary input For four independent switching or pushbutton signals. input voltage 24 V AC/DC. contacting via data bus. Standards EN 50090 N261 binary input For four independent switching or pushbutton signals.

instabus clock timers REG371 2-channel clock timer Can be used in day. up to 9 more week programs can be entered in each channel and called up with reference to a certain period (e. Every week program can be complemented by date switching commands and single-date switching commands. 500 switching times can be permanently saved. Switching. In connection with a DCF77 antenna. Besides the standard week program. an automatic time synchronization and summertime/wintertime changeover triggered by a DCF77 signal can be performed. Bus contacting via bus terminal. Table 6/41 Product overview 6/98 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . when used in connection with a DCF77 antenna. can perform an automatic time synchronization and summertime/wintertime changeover triggered by a DCF77 signal. Every week program can be complemented by date switching commands and single-date switching commands. dimming or value frames can be sent on every channel.g. 12-24 to 01-06). A random switching program can be enabled. Date and time can be transmitted. Besides the standard week program. AP390 DCF77 antenna To receive DCF77 signals for REG372/02 and REG373 clock timers. Bus contacting via bus terminal. A random switching program can be enabled. 12-24 to 01-06). Calendar-timed automatic summertime/wintertime changeover. Calendar-timed automatic summertime/wintertime changeover. week or year mode. Standards EN 50090 EN 60730-2-7 REG372/02 4-channel clock timer In addition to the functions featured by the REG372 clock timer. 324 switching times can be permanently saved. REG372 4-channel clock timer Can be used in day. up to 9 more week programs can be entered in each channel and called up with reference to a certain period (e. Holiday timing to interrupt the automatic program for 1…99 days with pre-selection of 1…99 days. type AP390. REG373 16-channel clock timer Can be used in day. Bus contacting via bus terminal. week or year mode. week or year mode. 36 switching times can be permanently saved. priority. Temporary or permanent manual operation is possible. REG372/02. Date and time can be transmitted.g. Temporary or permanent manual operation is possible. Calendar-timed automatic summertime/wintertime changeover. type AP390.

the sun shield can be repositioned by the actuator. Bus connection via data bus and/or bus terminal. the load switch controls eight independent groups of electric consumers. Standards EN 50090 N523/02 Venetian blinds switch The N523/02 Venetian blinds switch can independently control four sun shields (Venetian blinds. Down. In connection with a higher-level time. The sun shield drives must have end position switches. Tabele 6/42 Product overview 6/99 6 . In manual mode. No supply voltage necessary. A pushbutton with LED enables changeover between manual and automatic mode. 16 A at cosϕ = 1). roller shutters. contact rating for 230 V AC. sunshade blinds). N522/02 Venetian blinds switch The N22/02 Venetian blinds switch can independently drive four 230 V AC sun shield or window drives and their integrated end position switches. brightness or sun-follow-on controller. Slat angles or blinds position can be controlled at any angle/position between 0 and 100%. Functions for manual and automatic operation can be configured separately. using two pushbuttons per channel if a 230 V AC supply and bus voltage are available. This easy-to install Venetian blinds switch has 4 terminals per output to connect all of the 4 conductors (Up. Terminal may be used as connector.Low Voltage instabus actuators N512 load switch By means of eight floating contacts (bi-stable relays. PE) of a drive line. Bus connection via data bus and/or bus terminal. Contacting is made via bus terminal. Manual operation and switch position indicator. Terminal may be used as connector. the Venetian blinds switch can be used for shading with an optimum daylight incidence. N.

Bus connection via data bus and/or bus terminal. Terminal may be used as connector. Standards EN 50090 N526E switching/dimming actuator The switching/dimming actuator switches or dims eight independent groups (channels) of fluorescent lamps with dimmable electronic control gear. Bus connection via data bus and/or bus terminal. so that four completely different functionalities are available for each universal input/output: binary input or output. 16 A at cosϕ = 1. In addition. either of them to be used as binary or anolog input or output. Terminal may be used as connector. Bus connection via data bus and/or bus terminal. The device requires an external 24 V AC/DC supply. two inputs are provided for Pt 1000 sensors in two-wire connection. N670 universal I/O module The module is equipped with two universal inputs/outputs. Terminal may be used as connector. Automatically operates according to general phase control principle. Short-circuiting protection by means of electronic fuse. two power relays are provided with corresponding switching and forced-guidance objects. Table 6/43 Product overview 6/100 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . For temperature measurements. analog input or output. The switching contact output has a mechanical switching position indicator which can also be used for direct manual operation of the contact outputs. Each channel is assigned to a 1…10 V control output and a contact output with a switching power of 230 V AC.N527 universal dimmer Dimming of glow lamps and LV halogen lamps (with electronic or conventional transformers) from 20 W to 500 W.

the event module requires a date/time source. Table 6/44 Product overview 6/101 6 . The module can process up to 10 event programs with a maximum of 10 event tasks each. N343 operating hours and switching operations counter It records operating hours and switching operations for a maximum of 36 sensor/actuator channels with 1-bit switching objects. For the timing function. the event module requires a date/time source. Contacting is made via the data bus. For the timing function.Low Voltage instabus function modules N341 event module It can process up to 200 event programs with a maximum of 200 event tasks for up to 255 communication objects. a maximum of 4. The event module handles up to 125 calendar entries / day programs together with a maximum of 400 time-scheduling tasks. 100 timing programs (week clock timer) and 10 logic gates (AND. Contacting is made via the data bus. OR. Standards EN 50090 N350 event. The maximum runtime of the operating hours counter is 136 years. Limit values can be defined for all counter values. time-scheduling and logic module In a compact module unit 10 event programs.3 billion switching operations can be recorded. NAND. The week clock timer provides 100 timing tasks for 20 timer channels. NOR) with up to six inputs are offered. so that an alarm can be output to the instabus EIB if a limit is exceeded or undershot.

6. loads/consumers are switched off or switched back on. This offers the possibility to create a consumption statistic. Each load can be disabled and released by the assigned bus sensor. Channels 1 to 8 directly display the current state via LEDs at the device. day/month and year statistics. the operational switching carried out by the operator is handled with priority and therefore the maximum-demand monitor can only switch loads that are operationally switched on. as a rule. 30. Based on a defined maximum average power supply value. To visualize performance statistics. This is possible for 2 rates (high rate and low rate). 120 and 240 seconds. 6/102 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Photo 6/75 Maximum-demand monitor The maximum-demand monitor is parametrized via the ETS and can be run without any additional software.4 Maximum-Demand Monitors Product and functional description Description The maximum-demand monitor is a modular device with a width of 4 MW and is able to suppress peak loads and thus noticeably lower the users’ costs for power and energy supply.000 kW can be set. a warning limit between 25 and 1. Additionally. The power range limit to be observed by the maximum-demand monitor can be parametrized between 30 and 1. i. a software is available that can be used to draw up demand integration periods. which can then be exported to Excel for further evaluation. the following parameters can be set during start-up via the EIB Tool Software (ETS): C Switching-off priority (1 to 10) C Minimum switching-on time C Minimum switching-off time C Maximum switching-off time C Number of permissible switching cycles per 24 h. Exceeding of this warning limit is indicated via an LED. For all of the 120 channels available.e. Power is supplied via the bus line and via a 230 V supply. This enables the customer to negotiate better and more economical supply contracts with the respective power supply companies. 60.000 kW. Connection to the bus can be made via an EIB bus terminal or optionally via a data rail. Technical data Up to 120 channels are available for control. the cycle time for the load projection intervals can be parameterised with 15. this load is not subject to switching by the maximum-demand monitor in disabled state. In coordination with this. Here. 30 and 60 minutes. LEDs indicate the device’s position within the demand integration period in terms of time. The demand integration period required for the determination of the average power value can be set to 15.

Low Voltage Changeover high/low rate Synchronous pulse by the power supply company Visualization software S0 interface PC instabus EIB Maximum demand monitor Meter Actuator technology Sensor technology Electrical heater Lighting Fan ON/OFF disabling or releasing . C Power supply company synchronous pulse C Changeover high/low rate: The high/low rate changeover can also be carried out via bus. The maximum-demand monitor has the following inputs to which floating contacts or an S0 interface can optionally be connected according to DIN 43 864 and 62 053-31: C Consumption pulses: The valency of the pulses to be read in can be determined depending on the respective meter to be connected. This offers the possibility to save load curves and consumption values without the parameterization of the individual channels. via pushbutton. all conventional meters with S0 interface can be used. Thus. binary inputs. 6/40 Application example The software is available as part of the EIB visualization and as standalone version. sensors os sontrol modules Electrical heater Lighting Fan Loads available for load management Fig. The maximum-demand monitor can also be operated exclusively as registration unit during a recording period. 6/103 6 .

the most commonly used technique is the circular box system (Fig. individual device inserts are arranged side-by-side within a supporting frame with a masking frame or a cover. CEE/VDE technology In Europe.5 Switches. The following criteria have an influence on device construction: C Voltage level C Plug configuration C Mounting box dimensions C Modular size for side-by-side arrangements C Conductor connection C Supplementary functions C Design Fig 6/41 CEE/VDE techniques for devices in southern Europe. Box Device Fig. 6/104 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . uniform performance features have been specified which. controlling and signaling operations as well as for information and monitoring in electrical building installation. Outlets and Electronic Products Application The application of electrical installation equipment in residential. public. The modular technology comprises manufacturer-specific device inserts and country-specific mounting boxes with varying dimensions. type A 60 mm 71 mm 71 mm Box Insert Frame Rocker Standards The technical requirements are laid down in standards EN 60669-1 / IEC 60669-1 / DIN VDE 0632-1 for switches and in IEC 60884-1 / DIN VDE 0620-1 for power outlets. With this technology. In accordance with these standards. 6/42 Country-specific monoblock technology for type B devices with a switching function Modular technology In the south of Europe. Influences on device construction The construction of operation elements as well as the actual device construction with the required additional functions is subject to the differing national techniques and customs. also allow for country-specific values for the rated current as well as types of construction and versions. 6/41). a “modular technology” (Fig. 6/43) is applied. made up of a 60 mm diameter mounting box and a modular size of 71 mm for side-by-side arrangements. however. commercial and industrial buildings offers ever more diverse solutions for operating. different national techniques developed worldwide. switching.6. and EN 669-2-1 / IEC 60669-2-1 / VDE 0632-2-1 for electronic products. Various installation techniques Due to the various country-specific plug configurations.

live parts have finger-proof covers.5 mm Box Device insert Type B Type A Cover Supporting frame Type A Masking frame Fig. the device inserts can be tested for voltage from the front. A screwless terminal connection technique as well as a circuit diagram on the back of the base illustrating the 83. i.e.Low Voltage Monoblock technology “Monoblock technology” is mainly applied in South-East Europe. can be inserted into mounting boxes. For insertion into deeper wall-recessed mounting boxes. 6/40). The device dimensions are not standardized and only designed to comply with the dimensions of the respective country-specific mounting boxes (Fig. Furthermore. design types A and B connections in correct order further ease conductor connection. extension claws are available which must simply be plugged onto the conventional device claws. CEE/VDE technology Uniform device inserts The Siemens DELTA product range (Photo 6/77) meets these requirements as it uses uniform device inserts (Photo 6/79). South America and Asia. 6/43 Modular technology for devices used in Southern Europe. Type A Higher and ever changing demands result in a permanent modification of the touch elements’ surface design. With this technology. complete devices which can also comprise several switching or plugging functions. they come with returning claws and are fixed to the mounting box with captive +/– screws. The device inserts are very easy to mount as they have very small base dimensions. 6/105 6 . When mounted. The device inserts are equipped with an overall shock-hazard protection. The international standardized type A takes this into consideration and thus ensures that the covers which account for the devices’ stylish design can be replaced without detaching the connected conductors. providing more space for the conductors in the 60 mm diameter mounting box.

device insert and SCHUKO outlet (without stylish part) 6/106 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . design type A Photo 6/77 DELTA product range in CEE/VDE technology.DELTA line titan white DELTA line aluminum metallic DELTA vita gold DELTA vita carbon metallic DELTA miro titan white DELTA miro aluminum DELTA style titan white DELTA style titan white/ silver DELTA profil tobacco DELTA profil bronze DELTA natur cherry tree DELTA ambiente arctic white/ steel Surface-mounted range IP20 Photo 6/76 Surface-mounted range IP44 Surface-mounted range IP55 Surface-mounted range IP68 DELTA product range in CEE/VDE technology.

Low Voltage a) Plug-on technique Frame and rocker with bearing block Switching reliability: practical solution for badly fitting inserts 1 mm Practical leveling ring: 3 mm 3 mm b) Frame: Horizontal and vertical mounting for flush-type boxes and trunking installations Thermoplast molded plastic: resistant to impact and breakage Fig. 6/44). Environmentally compatible materials The contact material of the DELTA device inserts is free of cadmium and nickel and the electroplatings are free of chrome-6 deadening agents. Rocker. 6/44 Leveling and switching reliability for DELTA device inserts in CEE/VDE design as well as rapid frame mounting with plug-on technology Leveling ring The design of the touch elements and the switching device inserts allows leveling which is needed in practice. 6/44). An inspection window integrated in the rocker leads to an optimum brightness. All plastics are free of halogens and pigments containing heavy metals. Thus. Frame The frame is mounted together with the rocker by plugging them onto the device insert horizontally and vertically (Fig. 6/107 6 . Orientation light The DELTA device inserts have been designed in such a way that an orientation or pilot lamp can be retrofitted without having to remove the inserts. even with badly fitting device inserts. bearing block Rocker and bearing block have been constructed to form one single part. this fulfills the German Ordinance on Workplaces criteria for commercial and public buildings. switching reliability can be attained (Fig. preventing the rocker from being accidentally removed separately.

Photo 6/77 DELTA Venetian blinds control. conventional type Photo 6/78 DELTA Universal switch for twoway switch Photo 6/79 DELTA rotary dimmer switch Device insert versions The various device insert versions of the Siemens DELTA product range can be distinguished as follows: Operator units: C Pushbuttons for various applications C Double pushbuttons for various applications C Venetian blinds pushbuttons Switching devices: C ON/OFF switches.and 3-pole C Two-way switches C Double two-way switches C Intermediate switches C Two-circuit switches C Control switches for various applications C Venetian blinds switches C Venetian blinds key-operated switches C Timers C Delay timers Control devices: C Rotary dimmers for various applications C Sensor dimmers for various applications Photo 6/80 DELTA reflex smoke detector Photo 6/81 DELTA connection box. category 45 C Pushbutton-type dimmers for various applications C Regulating switches for various applications C Volume control buttons C Speed-regulating rheostats C Room temperature controllers for various applications C Motion detectors Signaling devices: C Light signals C Information displays C Smoke detectors Communication devices and sockets for data/voice networks: C Aerial sockets for various applications C Telephone sockets for various applications C Loudspeaker sockets C Telecommunications connection units C Universal connection box and specific device inserts for data and voice networks (Photo 6/81) 6/108 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 1-. 2.

Powerline or radiocontrol version.Low Voltage Plug-in equipment for power supply: C ‚®-outlets for various applications C ‚-outlets with operation indicator C ‚-outlets with overvoltage protection C Child-proof ‚-outlets (shutter) C ‚-outlets with integrated fault current protection. Photo 6/82 ‚-outlet Photo 6/83 ‚-outlets with center ground contact. according to US standard C73 The various DELTA product ranges The DELTA product ranges meet the quality of design required from an architectural point of view and come in different materials. 2-pole. DELTA Venetian blinds control. radio controlled Universal application The module technology implemented in the DELTA flush-mounting device insert system allows for a universal application of these devices. surfaces and colors. 6/109 6 . dimensions. be extended with modular accessories for various applications (Photos 6/83. 2-pole. various functions can be controlled via the instabus KNX/EIB in its Twisted-Pair. childproof (shutter) C Outlets with center ground contact. The standard mounting depth of 32 mm is still observed. Depending on the type of insert and application. 2-pole. for example. according to CEE 7 and child-proof C Outlets. The functionality of the DELTA SCHUKO outlets can. 6/85). child-proof Photo 6/84 DELTA bus coupling unit Photo 6/85 The operating rockers of the DELTA product ranges can also be plugged onto the instabus KNX/EIB DELTA bus coupling units (Photo 6/87). shapes. according to CEE 7 C Outlets with center ground contact.

oil refinery. while increasing plant availability and rendering substantial savings during the construction. When integrated in the low-voltage switchgear. the field bus systems Photo 6/86 The SIMOCODE pro motor management system Fields of application SIMOCODE pro is often used in automated processes where a plant standstill would be extremely costly and where it is important to prevent plant standstills by an analysis of detailed operating. operation and maintenance of a plant at the same time. independent of the automation system C Flexible software instead of hardware for motor control C Detailed operating. It optimizes the interfacing between the instrumentation and control system and the motor feeder. modular motor management system for constant-speed motors in the low-voltage range. as used in the process industry and power engineering. potentially explosive locations (chemical. materials processing industry. SIMCODE pro is an intelligent interface between the higher-level automation system and the motor feeder. Another field of application is the protection and control of motors C in hazardous. power plants) 6/110 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .6. which makes it especially suitable for application in Motor Control Centers (MCC). electronic motor protection. combining: C Full. SIMOCODE pro is modular and space saving in its design. commissioning. service and diagnostic data. oil and gas industry) C featuring heavy duty start-up (paper. cement. metal industry) C in high-availability plants (chemical.6 SIMOCODE pro – Motor Management System for ConstantSpeed Motors in the Low-Voltage Range Description SIMOCODE pro is a flexible. multi-functional. service and diagnostic data C Power management capability C Open communication via PROFIBUS-DP the standard among .

Both series (systems) consist of different hardware components (modules): C SIMOCODE pro C C SIMOCODE pro V Photo 6/89 SIMOCODE pro C Photo 6/90 SIMOCODE pro V (fully extended) 6/111 6 .Low Voltage SIMOCODE pro C Basic component 1 Current measuring module Operating module (optional) SIMOCODE pro V Basic component 2 Current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module1*) Operating module (optional) Various expansion modules (optional) Tabele 6/45 SIMOCODE hardware components Design SIMOCODE pro is a modularly designed motor management system which can be divided into two functionally graded component series.

To detect and monitor voltage.g. basic component 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) can be complemented by further expansion modules providing more inputs/outputs and functions. Bild 6/91 Current detection module Bild 6/92 Operating module Photo 6/93 Expansion modules for SIMOCODE pro V 6/112 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . basic component 2 must be equipped with a combined current/voltage detection module 1*) instead of a mere current detection module. an operating module can be connected to the basic component via a second system interface. power output and the power factor and any other related monitoring function. In addition to the inputs/outputs integrated in the basic component. Optionally.Every system consists of one basic component per feeder and a separate current detection module. The operating module can either be installed in the control cabinet door or in a front plate. Both the current measuring module and the operating module are power supplied by the basic component. which are available in different lengths. they can either be mechanically coupled as a unit (in series) or mounted separately (side by side). Both modules are linked through a connecting cable via the system interface. All modules are linked by connecting cables. between the basic component and the current detection module) may be up to 2 m. The maximum distance between the modules (e. The motor current to be monitored determines the selection of the current detection module.

Diagnostic data C Numerous detailed early warning alarms and fault messages C Device-internal fault logging with time stamp etc. level/flow monitoring) etc. Recording of measuring curves *) Software based motor control (instead of comprehensive hardware interlocks) Control functions: C Direct-on-line and reverse starter C Star-delta starter also with reversal of rotational direction C Two speeds. they can be flexibly adapted to any customerspecific motor feeder version. timer. motor temperature) *) etc. edge evaluation…). power output and power factor independent of the automation system. emergency start. external faults…).Low Voltage Functions Full electronic motor protection for motor current ratings of 0. motors with separated Dahlander windings also with reversal of rotational direction C Solenoid valve actuation C Valve control C Control of a circuit-breaker C Control of a soft starter also with reversal of rotational direction In addition.g. these control functions can be customized with parameterizable logic modules (truth tables. counter. output and monitoring of analog signals (e. and by using standard functions (supply line failure.g. makes all necessary data available and enables an optimal integration of the motor feeder into the higher-level power management systems via PROFIBUS-DP . Power management SIMOCODE pro also monitors current. service and diagnostic data Operating data C Motor switching state. available as of mid 2005 Table 6/46 function overview 6/113 6 . apparent power. standstill times and number of starts Extended monitoring functions*): C Temperature monitoring via up to 3 analog sensor circuits C Voltage monitoring C Power monitoring C Cos-ϕ-monitoring (no-load monitoring and loaddischarge monitoring of motor) C Input.3 to 820 A Protective functions: C Current-dependent electronic overload protection (Class 5 – 40) C Phase failure/imbalance protection C Stall protection C Thermistor motor protection C Ground fault monitoring C Monitoring of settable limit values for motor current C Monitoring of operating hours. motors with separate windings (pole reversing) also with reversal of rotational direction C Two speeds. Service data C Motor operating hours C Motor standstill times C Number of motor starts C Number of overload tripping events C Internal comments saved in the device etc. Operating. *) Communication via PROFIBUS-DP SIMOCODE pro supports: C Baud rates up to 12 Mbit/s C Automatic baud rate detection C Time stamping in device/clock synchronization *) via PROFIBUS-DP C Cyclical services (DPV0) and acyclical services (DPV1) etc. deducted from the current flow in the main circuit C All phase currents C All line voltages *) C Active power. and power factor *) C Phase imbalance C Phase sequence *) C Time till triggering C Remaining cooling time C Temperature (e. voltage.

or a defined response to such a failure can be configured. directly on mounting plate. an optimum and fast integratability to the most diverse system configurations and process automation systems. configuration and diagnosis: C SIMOCODE ES for “totally integrated” commissioning and service C Object manager OM SIMOCODE pro for “total integration” in SIMATIC S7 C PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro for “total integration” in PCS 7 Features C Modular design: – Expansion modules for retrofitting of inputs/outputs and functions as desired – Maximum module spacing up to 2 m C Compact. SIMOCODE pro offers matching software tools for integrated. 22. 6/114 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .Autonomous operation An important feature of SIMOCODE pro is the autonomous execution of all protective and control tasks even when the communication to the control system has been interrupted. space saving design types: – Basic components. fast parameterization. a targeted disconnection of the feeder. Integration Besides the device function and the hardware design. For this reason. service and diagnostic data Recording of measuring curves *) C Current detection/monitoring in the range of 0. i.3 A – 820 A – Busbar connection.e. the full functional performance capability of the motor feeder is maintained. or straightthrough current transformer – 45 mm – 145 mm width – Installation on DIN mounting rail. or the execution of certain parameterized control mechanisms (such as the reversal of the rotational direction). for example. 45 mm wide – Expansion modules.3 – 820 A C Voltage detection/monitoring up to 690 V *) C Safe isolation C Power management *) C Supply voltages: C 24 V DC or C 110 – 240 V AC/DC (wide voltage range) C Easy installation and commissioning: – Removable terminals – Memory module for parameterization without PC/PD – Address plug to assign a PROFIBUS address without PC/PD C Typical certifications and approvals *) Available as of mid 2005. even in the event of a bus system failure or automation system failure. or at contactor C Communication via PROFIBUS-DP: – Control of the motor feeder – Transmission of binary and analog signals – Transmission of operating. This means. a high degree of user friendliness of the parameterization software is also important for communication-capable switching devices together with a good system integration.5 mm wide – DIN mounting rail installation or directly on mounting plate C Removable current measuring modules (current transformers): – Motor rated currents of 0.

Low Voltage 6/115 6 .

.

Communications in Power Distribution chapter 7 .

etc. The electrical energy demand is forecasted. The communication with modern circuitbreakers allows a direct online parameterisation of the setting values. recording and managing of maintenance information can be implemented. water. cooling. load management. 7/1 Energy meter SENTRON circuitbreaker SIMOCODE SIPROTEC medium-voltage protection System structure for the communication in the energy distribution 7/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . The electrical power supply is monitored only with regard to observance of limits and the switching of equipment (onand off-switching). A consistent operating and monitoring concept forms the basis for comprehensive power management (see Chapter 9). All information about faults and events aids in troubleshooting. fast fault clearance. All information and actions focus on smooth-free operation. consumption recording with the corresponding load curve presentations and assignment to cost centers. heating. Complete and detailed maintenance information is important for the execution of maintenance works. Visualization Operating and monitoring U I cos ϕ p W Load curve Energy flow History Events Motor 1 Service Motor 2 Service Tank cv Bearing replacement Completion of operating hours Technical Tank test Inspectorate Archive Operating and monitoring level Bus systems Substation control and protection systems (Chapter 8) Processing level Bus systems Acquisition and control level Contactors Meters Analogue SIMEAS Switches Pulses signals multifunction measuring device Fig. and the expedient execution of maintenance work. but also to perform switching operations. Bus systems are used for the data transmission and communication in the electrical energy distribution. messages and measurements. as well as reporting and control functions. all recorded measured values can be read out. Furthermore. Power management in electrical power distribution A visualisation for event-oriented operating and monitoring is used at the level of low and medium voltage electrical power distribution. prognoses. This communication is not only used to record switch position.7 Communications in Power Distribution From electrical power distribution to power management within the corporation Power management as part of Totally Integrated Power implements the connection of various energies (electricity.) to various software packages. gas. Applications such as status visualization.

whereas in the retrofit market (for retrofitting existing installations). head office can also be used as synonym for corporation. must provide the hardware and software requirements. The power management in the corporation covers all sites. such as switchgear cabinet and assembly manufacturers. The corporation goal is the optimum utilization of existing energy supply contracts. electrical departments or maintenance departments. Although the individual functionality levels must build on each other. The results and stipulations are transferred to the individual sites. peak load) Electrical energy Extending energy distribution by bus-capable data acquisition and control Gas Compressed air Water Steam etc. average. the recorded data is documented in reports according to the requirements. Within the dispatch (see Chapter 9). Executive department. such data can be used for optimum fault clearance or preventive maintenance. 7/3 7 . the power management view is extended to satisfy the corporation requirements.Communications in Power Distribution Power Management Functions Visualization Faults Maintenance Energy import Energy procurement in energy distribution Event-oriented operating and monitoring Correction Execution Monitoring Demand forecasts Power Management within the site Event-oriented operating and monitoring Correction Execution Monitoring Demand forecasts Power Management within the corporation Demand-oriented reports Analysis Planning/evaluation Dispatch/monitoring Load forecasts (base. this demand is placed on electrical fitting and maintenance departments. These purchases then form the stipulations for dispatch. average and peak load are each satisfied with the appropriate purchases at the energy exchanges. system integrators. Power management within the site In addition to electricity. corporate department. any faults that occur are analyzed and plannable maintenance work scheduled. Power management within the corporation In the highest level of functionality. such as internal energy providers. the requirements of power management within the site take account of all of the other energies that an in-house supplier provides for smooth operation within the site. In the individual sites. the quantities of corporation-wide energy supply contracts are allocated to the individual sites and updated cyclically. there is the option to focus all of the three levels of power management merely on a single type of energy. The following discussion refers to electrical energy. The energy procurement combines the forecasts of the individual sites to produce total quantities. Taking account of all energy types of the on-site energy provider Site 1 Bundling all corporation-wide energy services Site 2 Site n Fig. The base. The software satisfies all requirements of site management. 7/2 From energy distribution to power management within the corporation In the new installation business.

Operating and monitoring in an electrical power distribution system When power distribution is considered from the viewpoint of operating and monitoring.Conventional – Switching – Indication – Signaling Bus systems Transducers The communication transfers the transducer’s measured values. analog measuring instruments for voltage. only limited use is made of this information. If the switch has a motor drive. current. circuit-breakers C Disconnectors C Transducers Switches Using the communications. The operating and monitoring communications level permits off-switching using the voltage or undervoltage coil. using the fuse monitoring. three basic types/classes result: C Switches. In future – Operating – Monitoring – Fault messages – Parameterizing – Analyzing – Documenting Fig. However. capacity. The capacity measurement display provides for a rapid and transparent analysis of demand/consumption fluctuations. The operating cycles list shows these status changes over time. – is queried and displayed in the operator control and monitoring system. After being scaled. Load curves Measurements are transparently visualized by means of graphic display of the measured values or load curves. In future. Disconnectors The actual disconnector setting (ON or OFF) and. the control room or a local event. Newly designed power distribution systems are equipped with bus systems by default. The same bus will also be used to switch the power distribution. the switch state – ON/OFF. This allows the status of the energy distribution to be uniformly visualized. tripped. The load curve shows the measured value over time. This immediately demonstrates the cause and time interdependencies of switching operations. the measured value can be used for the actual-value display. Limit-value monitoring for editable values provide additional information about the plant state as superposed functions. 7/3 Modern power distribution with connection to bus systems Modern power distribution with connection to bus systems In a conventional power distribution system. the automatic acquisition via devices that can be connected to the bus will permit a central display and evaluation. on-switching and reset can be performed on initiation from the operating and monitoring level. the triggering of a fuse can be displayed. 7/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . are often equipped with the appropriate transducers. The operating cycles list precisely indicates the cause that triggered a switch operation. Operating cycles list Most information in the event log refers to position changes of the switches and disconnectors. frequencies etc. in addition to off-switching.

1 Function ident.20 2000. site identification. either initiated from the control room or by manual operation on site or by tripping is recorded. Q1.Limit value display 110 A Load curves P [kW] t Monitoring status Q12.Fuse tripped Operating cycles list local ON OFF tripped t Event log Date ident. The actual status of measurements is displayed directly as a measured value in the control room.tripped Operating cycles list remote ON OFF OFF ON local ON OFF tripped Operating switching . remote switching can be performed from here. local OFF local ON UG2 UG1 local OFF Event text Infeed switch switched off locally Infeed switch switched on locally Current > 20 A Current > 50 A Switch disconnector switched off locally Fig. The event log is archived in a database and can be analysed using additional programs/ third-party systems. Information flow Control-room monitoring shows online the status of the electrical power distribution.4 . to mobile telephones using WAP. Each event consists of date/time. function identification.0 Q1.Communications in Power Distribution Power distribution Monitoring status .01.15 Time ident. The event log permits the long-term tracking of the distribution status. The maintenance personnel can then also be contacted directly when it does not have any access to the control room terminal.01.ON/OFF . every switching operation of a circuitbreaker.ON/OFF . Hall B Hall B Hall B Hall B Hall F Plant ident.3 Q12. Each event can be subject to various forms of acknowledgement. device identification. The entries are logged automatically.01.01. Infeed Infeed Outgoing circuit Outgoing circuit Outgoing circuit Device ident.3 T7 . This initiates a faster fault clearance and the personnel receives a detailed cause description.20 2000.01. 22:59:03 23:16:24 01:12:45 01:17:13 20:59:33 Site ident. 7/5 7 . 7/4 Operating and monitoring in an electrical power distribution system Event log The event log documents all status changes of the distribution and limitvalue violations.14 2000. Manual switching records are replaced by this electronic variant. Selected messages can be transferred directly using SMS services and.ON/OFF/ Reset t Q1. This provides a transparent display of all switching operations and limit-value violations. The weak-point analysis must be mentioned here as being of particular interest.0 T7 . An archiving is performed in parallel to the message display.14 2000. in future.OFF . 2000. plant identification.3 .Actual-value display .0 G Monitoring measured value T7. and a detailed event text.

The limit-value violations and load curves are stored in archives and can be used for cost center assignments of the energy flows. assessment of reserves. The graphical display shows the measured value information as a load curve. 7/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .Notification – SMS / mobile telephone – WAP Archiving – SQL database Third-party systems – Cost centres – Maintenance – Weakpoint analysis – Forecast Control room Operating – Switching Monitoring – Status – Measured value Event log – Test plus date / time Graphical display – Operating cycles list – Load curve Power distribution U< Fig. etc. Thus. The limit-value monitoring and load curve display makes the measured value transparent. information can be obtained about the time-related utilization. 7/5 Information flow Limit-value violations are stored with date/time in the event log. The acquisition of all data of the electrical power distribution represents the first step towards power management. The display and archiving of the power distribution information is derived from this acquisition. utilization profiles. The information recorded in this manner is very important for plant extensions and energy optimization.

Purchasing contracts can be signed to meet actual demand.000 € per infeed panel) > Q Energy consumption becomes transparent. the interpretation is the total of the outgoing circuits) Q Plant extensions can be made specifically within the existing possibilities. forwarding as SMS services (mobile telephone) Preparations for power management have been made C Maximum-demand monitoring Making optimum use of energy purchasing contract C Load curves C Assignment to cost centers C Forecasts C Power quality Documenting energy consumption Assigning energy consumption to the consumer Determining future energy requirement Monitoring and documenting energy quality criteria 7/7 7 .g.Communications in Power Distribution Benefits Transition from local operation to central operating and monitoring Central control room C Quick overview of the current status of the plant C Immediate response to limit-value violations C Documentation/archiving of the distribution status C Weakpoint analysis using the event log Q Preventive supervision of the energy distributions and thus avoidance of plant standstills Q Generation of SMS messages (mobile telephone). Power Management Liberalized energy market C Utilizing offer advantages Q Reduction of the energy costs by up to 20% possible Summary Transition from local operation to central operating and monitoring C Central control room C Graphical display C Events Display of the actual distribution state Graphical display of measurements and operating cycles Documentation and archiving. of the infeeds (according to the design.000 – 60. e. This permits a faster response to faults/events. Personnel can undertake additional work (personnel costs 30. saving of additional infeeds (cost > 5.000 € per man-year) Load curves C Documentation of the utilisation.

8 Protection and Substation Control 8.3 Relay Selection Guide 8.1 Power System Protection 8.2 Relay Design and Operation 8.4 Typical Protection Schemes .

Protection and Substation Control chapter 8 .

both in the construction and connection of the devices and in their operation and communication. One design for all applications In this respect. Furthermore. which means that previously costly maintenance can be reduced considerably. Protective relays are connected serially. and are therefore also suitable for direct installation in switchgear cells.8 Protection and Substation Control General overview Three trends have emerged in the sphere of power automation: distributed intelligent electronic devices (IED’s). open communication and PC-assisted HMI’s. Siemens offers a uniform. coordinated interfaces and the same operating concept being established throughout. all devices and systems are self-monitoring. 8/1 The digital SICAM substation control system implements all of the control. This results in uniformity of design. Corporate Network TCP/IP Power system control center Station unit “Full server“ IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-104 HMI Station bus Ethernet TCP/IP Serial Hub IEC 61850 Fig. individual devices prevalent in the past as well as comprehensive parallel wiring are being replaced by a small number of multifunctional devices with serial connections. in substation control and protection or in telecontrol. whether in power system and generator protection. universal technology for the entire functional scope of power automation equipment. measurement and automation functions of a substation. The multitude of conventional. in measurement and recording systems. Photo 8/1 Protection and control in medium-voltage substations 8/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . All devices are highly compact and immune to interference. Numerical relays and computerized substation control are now state-of-the-art.

plain-text. complete self-monitoring and the use of proven technology – 20 years of practical experience with digital protection. the following protocols are supported: PROFIBUS FMS.00 devices in operation (in 2004) – 15 years of practical experience with substation automation (SINAUT LSA and SICAM). Besides an optimal integration into the SICAM PAS substation control system in compliance with IEC 61850.000 substations in operation (in 2004) Numerical measurement techniques ensure precise operation and require less maintenance thanks to their continuous self-monitoring capability.00 and Modbus. Fig. IEC 60870-5-103. numerical relays for all applications in the field of power system and machine protection. For communication at the telecontrol or substation control level. 8/3 8 . Thus. 8/2 For the user. over 3. our activities cover: C Consulting C Planning C Design C Commissioning and Service This uniform technology ”from a single source“ saves the customer time and money in the planning. Furthermore.Protection and Substation Control Rationalization of operation Savings in terms of space and costs Simplified planning and operational reliability Efficient parameterization and operation High levels of reliability and availability by means of SCADA-like control and high-performance PC terminals that can all be operated in the same way by means of integration of many functions into one unit and compact equipment design by means of uniform design. Setting and programming of the devices can be performed through the integral. For complex applications. The integration of additional protective and other functions. SIPROTEC protective relays Siemens offers a complete spectrum of multifunctional. DNP V3. configuration and wiring costs. type and design test facilities are available together with extensive network models using the most modern simulation and evaluation techniques. control. coordinated interfaces and universally identical operating software thanks to PC terminals with uniform operator interfaces by means of type-tested system technology. all in one unit economizes on space. the on-line measurements and fault data recorded in the protective relays can be used for local and remote control or can be transmitted via telephone modem connections to the workplace of the circuit engineer. event and fault recording. the “entire technology from one partner” has many advantages Entire technology from one partner The Siemens Power Transmission and Distribution Group supplies devices and systems for: C Power plant protection C Substation control / power system control C Remote control (RTU’s) C Current measurement and recording C Measurement and monitoring of power quality This covers all of the measurement. automation and protection functions for substations. more than 350. Siemens supplies individual devices as well as complete protection systems in factory-assembled cabinets. menu-guided operator display or by using the comfortable DIGSI 4® PC software. installation and operation of his substations. PROFIBUS DP. devices of the SIPROTEC 4 group can be equipped with exchangeable communications modules. Uniform design and a metal-enclosed construction with conventional connection terminals which is free from electromagnetic interference in accordance with public utility requirements assure simple system design and usage just as with conventional relays. such as real-time operational measurements.

digital technology saves enormously on space and wiring. with a level of convenience which was previously only available in a power system control center. transformer tap changing) required by a switching station. SICAM systems are subjected to full factory tests and are delivered ready for operation. that is. 8/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . bay units and I/O modules withstand voltages up to 2 kV. measurement and automation functions (e. Furthermore. Optional telecontrol functions can be added to allow coupling of the system to one or more power system control centers. Devices are extremely compact and can be built directly into mediumand high-voltage switchgear. In contrast to conventional substation control systems. SICAM PAS has a system-wide time resolution of 1 ms.g. and thanks to their Windows look & feel they are easy to use. The PC-based SICAM PAS UI – Configuration software is used for system configuration and parameterization. SICAM PAS UI – Operation and SICAM Value Viewer support the user during configuration and commissioning and provide diagnostic functions for the system in operation. Communication between devices in branch circuits and the central unit is made via fiber-optic connections which are immune to interference. with SCADA-comparable functions.Protection and substation automation SICAM power automation SIPROTEC substation protection SIMEAS power quality SICAM PAS power automation systems 7SJ4 and 7SJ6 Feeder protection overcurrent/overload relays SIMEAS R disturbance recorder SICAM RTU SICAM miniRTU SICAM microRTU Remote terminal units 7SA5 and 7SA6 feeder protection overcurrent/overload relays SIMEAS Q power quality recorders 7SD5 and 7SD610 power system protection. SICAM PAS engineering tools are based on Microsoft operating systems. The operator interface is menuguided. 8/3 Product range for protection and substation control systems by Siemens Substation control The digital substation control systems of the SICAM family provide all control. Due to the special requirements of medium. They operate with distributed intelligence.and high-voltage systems. differential protection and communication SIMEAS T measuring transducers 7UT6 transformer protection SIMEAS P power meter 7UM6 generator/motor protection 7SS60 and 7VH60 busbar protection Fig.

Digital protection devices can be connected by serial links through fiber-optic conductors or bus systems. and measuring transducers. the central processor DAKON can be installed at substation level. Alternatively. Data transmission circuits for analog telephone or digital ISDN networks are incorporated as standard. It prevents false switching. WAN) is equally possible. We can also offer the SIMEAS T series of compact and powerful measuring transducers with analog and digital outputs. This method allows an economically favorable solution when modernizing or renewing control systems in older installations. Stored data can be transmitted manually or automatically to PC evaluation systems where they can be analyzed by intelligent programs. matched interfaces and EMI security throughout C Rationalized programming and handling 8/5 8 . For local bulk data storage and transmission. especially for new installations. they provide comprehensive data pre-processing of operational and fault information. fault recorders (oscillostores). This leads to rapid fault analysis and valuable indicators for the improvement of network reliability. Advantages for the user The concept of the “entire technology from one partner” offers the user many advantages: C High-level security for his systems and operational rationalization possibilities C Powerful system solutions with the most modern technology C Compliance with international standards C Integration in the overall system SIPROTEC®– SICAM®– SIMATIC® C Space and cost savings C Integration of many functions into one unit and compact equipment packaging C Simple planning and safe operation C Homogeneous design. direct connection is also possible. Expert systems are also applied here. Power quality (measuring and recording) The SIMEAS® product range offers equipment for the monitoring of power supply quality (harmonic content. Connection to local or wide-area networks (LAN. thus enhancing the safety of operating personnel and equipment considerably. In the classic case. distortion factor. Switchgear interlocking The distributed substation control system SICAM PAS provides the option to implement bay-specific and ‘inter-bay’ interlocking by means of on-screen graphic planning. Furthermore. connections to the switchgear are made through coupling relays and transducers. power factor. and automating functions that are based on powerful microprocessors.). peak loads.Protection and Substation Control Remote Terminal Units Siemens RTU’s fulfill all the classic functions of remote measurement and control. etc. The substation topology as well as infeed conditions are taken into consideration.

Detailed information is contained in the device manuals. high flexibility C High-level operational safety and availability C Continuous self-monitoring and proven technology: C 20 years of digital relay experience (more than 350.000 systems in operation) C Rapid problem solving C Comprehensive support and fast response from local sales and workshop facilities worldwide Application notes All devices and systems for protection. fast commissioning C Efficient spare part stocking.C Windows-based PC tools and standardized displays C Fast. nor to large temperature variations which may give rise to condensation. 8/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . or in the same cubicle.5 mm2 for multiple cables in one cable duct. on 56 days per year 95% relative humidity. condensation not permissible We recommend that units be installed in such a way that they are not subjected to direct sunlight. however. power plants and the various industrial application areas. special emphasis was placed on the design of electromechanical interference (EMI). The devices are in accordance with IEC 60255 standards. It must. be ensured that the coils of auxiliary relays located on the same panel. Reliable operation of the devices is not affected by the usual interference from the switchgear. all external connection cables should be fitted with a screen grounded at both ends and capable of carrying currents. even when the device is mounted directly in a lowvoltage compartment of a mediumvoltage switchgear panel. free-wheeling diodes).000 units in operation) C 15 years of digital substation control (more than 3. metering and control mentioned herein are designed to be used in the arduous environment of electrical substations. That means that the cross section of the screen should be at least 4 mm2 for a single cable and 2. are fitted with suitable spike-quenching elements (e. When the devices were developed. All equipment proposed in this guide is built up either in enclosures (type 7XP20) or switchgear cabinets with degree of protection IP51 according to IEC 60529: C Protected against access to dangerous parts with a wire C Sealed against dust C Protected against dripping water Photo 8/2 Installation of the numerical protection in the door of the low-voltage compartment of a mediumvoltage switchgear panel Climatic withstand features C Permissible temperature during service –5 °C to +55 °C storage –25 °C to +55 °C transport –25 °C to +70 °C C Permissible humidity Mean value per year ≤ 75% relative humidity. When used in conjunction with switchgear for up to 1 kV or above.g. flexible mounting and reduced wiring C Simple.

5 kV (peak). amplitude-modulated ENV 50141. duration 2 s C Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2 class III and EN 61000-4-2 class III – 4 kV contact discharge. 5/50 ns.5 g acceleration sweep rate 10 octaves/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes Vibration and shock during transport C Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 C Vibration – sinusoidal IEC 60255-21-1. AM C High-frequency electromagnetic field.5 J. 0. 400 shots/s. immunity (type tests) C Standards: IEC 60255-22 (product standard) EN 50082-2 (generic standard) C High frequency IEC 60255-22-1 class III – 2. pulse-modulated. 1. 3 positive and 3 negative shots at intervals of 5 s Electromagnetic compatibility EU conformity declaration (CE mark) All Siemens protection and control products recommended in this manual comply with the EMC Directive 99/336/EEC of the Council of the European Community and further relevant IEC 255 standards on electromagnetic compatibility. class III – 2 kV. class A 30 MHz to 100 MHz C Conducted interference voltage. class III – 10 V/m. non-modulated. Ri = 50 ohm. IEC 60068-2-6 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 0.000 MHz. EN 55011.2/50 µs. voltage CISPR 22. All products carry the CE mark. 27 MHz to 500 MHz C High-frequency electromagnetic field. Ri = 330 ohm C High-frequency electromagnetic field. 50 Hz – Impulse voltage withstand test (type test) all circuits. emission (type tests) C Standard: EN 50081-2 (generic standard) C Interference field strength CISPR 11. aux. ENV 50140. 50 Hz EMC tests. amplitude-modulated. 1 kHz.035 mm amplitude. 80%. class IV – 30 A/m continuous. AM C Power-frequency magnetic field EN 61000-4-8. both polarities. 300 A/m for 3 s. ENV 50140/ENV 50204. 1 MHz. class III – 10 V. both polarities.Protection and Substation Control Mechanical stress Vibration and shock during operation C Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 C Vibration – sinusoidal IEC 60255-21-1. burst length 15 ms. 80 MHz to 1. repetition frequency 200 Hz. 150 pF. 900 MHz.5 mm amplitude. τ = 15 µs. EMC tests. class 1 10 Hz to 60 Hz: ± 0. 5 kHz. duration 1 min C Conducted disturbances induced by radio-frequency fields HF. class III 5 kV (peak). IEC 60068-2-6 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration sweep rate 1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes C Shock IEC 60255-21-2. duty cycle 50% C Fast transients IEC 60255-22-4 and EN 61000-4-4. 8 kV air discharge. repetition rate 300 ms. class 2 5 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 7. 150 kHz to 80 MHz. EN 55022. class 1 IEC 60068-2-27 Insulation tests C Standards: IEC 60255-5 – High-voltage test (routine test) 2 kV (rms). class III – 10 V/m. class B – 150 kHz to 30 MHz 8/7 8 . 1 kHz. IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III – 10 V/m. 80%.

plus relay burden). an accuracy of 1% (class 5 P) is specified. 8/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . accuracy and saturation characteristics (accuracylimiting factor) of the cores and secondary windings must meet the particular application. ANSI/IEEE C57. 0. and an accuracy limiting factor of 5 or 10. 15 VA. 3 with output ratings between 10 and 300 VA.t. Typical values are 5.) in single or double-pole design for all primary voltages have single or dual secondary windings of 100.0 % accuracy (class 0. The required output power (rated burden) must be higher than the actually connected burden. the current transformers cannot be designed to avoid saturation under all circumstances because of cost and space reasons. 110 or 120 V/KL .5 % or 1.5 M or 1. particularly in HV and EHV stations. in rated accuracy limiting factors of 10 or 20 dependent on the rated burden of the current transformer in relation to the connected burden.limiting factor K’ssc can be determined by calculation.) are usually of the single-ratio type with wound or bar-type primaries of adequate thermal rating. 15 VA. an overdimensioning factor has to be considered to cover the influence of the DC component in the short-circuit current.Instrument transformers Instrument transformers must comply with the applicable IEC recommendations IEC 60044. 15 VA or 5P20.2 M is normally required. Output power (rated burden in VA). The required current transformer accuracy. For the normal case. Single.5 M 10.t. The numerical relays proposed in this guide are particularly stable in this case due to their integral saturation detection function. 10 VA. as shown in Table 8/4. In general.0 M). should be preferred. A typical specification could be: 0. plus burden of connecting leads. Potential transformers Potential transformers (p. burden. Protection cores The size of the protection core depends mainly on the maximum shortcircuit current and the total burden (internal c. the necessary value for K’ssc can be taken from Table 8/1.5 or 1 % to suit the particular application. particularly with metal-enclosed switchgear. as a rule. In many practical cases. Higher values are normally not necessary when only electronic meters and recorders are connected. 10. Further. The requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance are specified in IEC 60044-6. class 0. to reduce the burden of the connecting leads. formerly IEC 60185 (current transformers) and 186 (potential transformers). Current transformers Current transformers (c. The current transformer classification code of IEC is used in the following: Measuring cores They are normally specified with 0. The accuracy limiting factor KSSC should normally be designed so that at least the maximum short-circuit current can be transmitted without saturation (DC component not considered). 1 A rating. Cores revenue metering In this case.2. The Siemens relays are therefore designed to tolerate current transformer saturation to a large extent.t. with short-circuit time constants lower than 100 ms. dual or triple secondary windings of 1 or 5 A are standard. however.13 or other comparable standards. and accuracies of 0. This results. The transient rated dimensioning factor Ktd depends on the type of relay and the primary DC time constant. A typical specification for protection cores for distribution feeders is 5P10.

5 P 10. max.3 Rct = 4 Ω Table 8/2 Current transformer definition Numerical busbar protection (low-resistance) 7SS5 1 Iscc.Protection and Substation Control R’b + Rct K’ssc Kssc > Rb + Rct Kssc : Factor of the symmetrical rated short-circuit current K’ssc : Rms factor of the symmetrical rated short-circuit current Rb : Ohmic burden (rated) R’b : Connected burden Rct : Resistance of secondary winding And: K’ssc > Ktd Issc. 7SA6 = a and Iscc. (close-in fault) Ipn Tp > 30 ms: a=1 b=4 Tp < 50 ms: a=2 b=5 Us. max. (external fault) Ipn 2 ≤ 100 Measuring range Distance protection 7SA522. max. 25 VA Us. (external fault) Ipn for Tp ≤ 100 ms ≥5 for Tp > 100 ms Issc.t. minimum is 20 Transformer protection 7UT6 ≥4 Iscc. short-circuit current Ipn = Rated primary current Ktd = Transient dimensioning factor Optical waveguide line differential protection 7SD52/610 = Iscc. max. Ipn Relay type Overcurrent protection 7SJ60. max = 20 • 5 A • Rb • Kssc 20 = b Iscc. max. 63. 61.t. 64 Minimum K’ssc = I>>-Setting Ipn . Rct = 4 Ω (15 + 4) • 1 • 10 V = 146 V BS: UK = 1. max. 5 P 20. (external fault) Ipn and K’ssc ≥ 30 Table 8/1 Current transformer dimensioning formulae UK = (Rb + Rct) • Isn • Kssc 1.t. (external fault) Ipn (K’ssc • Ipn) Line-end 1 and 3 ≤ ≤4 4 (K’ssc • Ipn) Line-end 2 3 Isn = Nominal secondary current Example: IEC60044: 600/1. max.13: 600/5. (line-end fault) Ipn Tp < 200 ms: a=4 b=5 Rb = b Pb Isn2 and Isn = 5 A results in Tp : Primary time constant (system time constant) Pb • Kssc 5A Table 8/4 Current transformer requirements Us. = Max. 62. (external fault) Ipn Iscc. max. max.3 Line differential (pilot wire) protection 7SD600 = Iscc. max = Example: IEC 60044: ANSI C57. 15 VA. max = 25 VA • 20 = 5A = 100 V corresponding to Class C100 Table 8/3 ANSI definition of current transformers 8/9 8 .

max. Rct = 4 Ohm l = 50 m 7SS52 A = 6 mm2 I scc. = 30 kA Table 8/5 Resistance of current loop Iscc.3 Ω + 0.4 Ω Rct + R’b 4 Ω + 15 Ω 10 = 43. Fig. up to the order of 10 VA. This has to be considered when older relays are connected to the same current transformer circuit. 15 VA. Ipn = 30. the relevant relay manuals should always be consulted for the actual burden values. as the ratio adaptation for busbar and transformer protection is numerically performed in the relay.4 Ω Rct + Rb 4 Ω + 15 Ω = Kssc = 4 Ω + 0. 7SD600 (4 VA). have a much higher burden. Normally.3 Ω 6 R’b = Rl + RRelais = = 0. however. Burden of the connection leads The resistance of the current loop from the current transformer to the relay has to be considered as follows: 2 ρ l ohm A Example: Stability test of the 7SS52 numerical busbar protection system Assuming: Rl = l = Length of the single conductor from the current transformer to the relay in m Specific resistance ρ A = 0.2) is greater than the calculated value (25).4 Ω K’ssc = = Result: Rating factor K’ssc (43. 5 P 10. Mechanical relays. 8/4 Example: stability verification 8/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .1 Ω Rl = 2 0.0179 50 = 0.Relay burden The current transformer burdens of the numerical relays of Siemens are below 0. The stability criterion has therefore been met.1 Ω = 0. Analog static relays in general also have burdens below about 1 VA.max.2 4 Ω + 0.0179 ohm mm2 (copper wire) m = Conductor cross section in mm2 600/1. intermediate current transformers needn't be used any more. In any case.000 A = 50 600 A According to Table 8/4 K’ssc > 1 2 50 = 25 Rb = 15 VA = 15 Ω 1 A2 RRelais = 0.1 VA and can therefore be neglected for a practical estimation. Exceptions are the 7SS60 busbar protection (2 VA) and the pilot wire relays.

For many years. In 1985. locally or by remote access C Possibility to communicate with higher-level control systems using standardized protocols (open communication) Modern protection management All the functions. the innovative SIPROTEC 4 series has been launched.1 Power System Protection Introduction Siemens is one of the world‘s leading suppliers of protective equipment for power systems. of a power system protection scheme can be incorporated in one unit: C Distance protection with associated add-on and monitoring functions C Universal teleprotection interface C Auto-reclose and synchro-check 8/11 8 . To date. incorporating the many years of operational experience with thousands of relays as well as the awareness of user requirements (power company recommendations). Meanwhile. Today. Advantages C Compact design and lower cost due to the integration of many functions into one relay C High availability even with less maintenance owing to integrated self-monitoring C No drift (ageing) of the measuring characteristics because of their complete digital processing C High availability even with less maintenance due to digital filtering and optimized measuring algorithms C Many integrated add-on functions.Protection and Substation Control 8.000 numerical protection relays from Siemens are providing successful service. In 1976. more than 350. Siemens offers a complete program of protective relays for all applications including numerical busbar protection. for example for load monitoring and event/fault recording C Local operation keypad and display designed to modern ergonomic criteria Photo 8/3 SIPROTEC 4 numerical relays by Siemens C Easy and secure reading of information via serial interfaces with a PC. as stand-alone devices in traditional systems or as components of coordinated protection and substation control. for example. Siemens has also significantly influenced the development of protection technology. Thousands of relays ensure first-class performance in the transmission and distribution networks on all voltage levels all over the world. in countries of tropical heat and arctic frost. State of the art Mechanical and solid-state (static) relays have been almost completely phased out of our production because numerical relays are now preferred by the users. we were the first to produce a series of fully numerically controlled relays with standardized communication interfaces. the first minicomputer (process-computer)-based protection system was commissioned: A total of 10 systems for 110/20-kV substations were supplied that are still working at their customers' full satisfaction today.

increased availability of information Load monitor kA. “One feeder. The reliability of the protection scheme has been highly increased. Interwiring between these relays and scheme testing have been carried out manually in the workshop. testing and commissioning. Engineering has moved from schematic diagrams towards a parameter definition procedure.93 Fault record Relay monitor Breaker monitor Supervisory control Protection-related information can be called up on-line or off-line. 8/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Data sharing now allows for the integration of several protection tasks into one single numerical relay. A. the traditional protection concept of separate main and alternate protection as well as the external connection to the outdoor switchyard remain unchanged. panel wiring. Thus. Hz. All relays can stand fully alone. Free allocation of LED operation indicators and output contacts provides more application design flexibility. kVAr) To fulfill vital protection redundancy requirements. The documentation is provided by the relay itself. This has significantly lowered the costs of engineering. MW. MVA Fault report 01. MW. operating times etc.52 21 67N FL 79 25 SM ER FR BM 85 Serial link to station – or personal computer to remote line end ANSI-No. one or more additional units have to be provided.) C Set values C Line load data (kV.*) Circuit-breaker 52 Distance protection 21 67N Directional ground-fault protection Distance-to-fault locator FL Autoreclosure 79 Synchro-check 25 Carrier interface (teleprotection) 85 SM Self-monitoring Event recording ER Fault recording FR BM Breaker monitor *) see Table 8/6 cont. Only a small number of external devices may be required for completion of the overall design concept. only those functions which are interdependent and directly associated with each other are integrated in the same unit. 8/5 Numerical relays. For backup protection. kV. such as: C Distance to fault C Fault currents and voltages C Relay operation and data (fault-detector pickup. assembly. Fig.10. MVAr. one relay” concept Analog protection schemes have been engineered and assembled from individual relays.

especially in outdoor switchyards. fiber-optic cables are preferably used. In the opposite direction. for metering used for electricity bills. For greater distances. additional transducers and measuring instruments are now only necessary where high accuracy is required. Online remote data exchange A powerful serial data link provides for interrogation of digitized measured values and other information stored in the protection units. When numerical protection technology is employed. 8/7 Communication options Fig. protective current transformers are in many cases accurate enough to take operational measurements. they could not be connected to the protective current transformer directly. settings may be altered or test routines initiated from a remote control center. Due to the low thermal withstand capability of the measuring instruments. e. Offline communication with numerical relays A simple built-in operator keypad which requires no special software knowledge or code word tables is used for parameter input and readout. 8/6 PC-aided setting procedure of numerical protection relays Personal computer DIGSI Recording Assigning Protection Laptop DIGSI Recording and confirmation System level to remote control Substation level Modem (option) ERTU Data collection device Bay level RTU Coordinated protection and control 52 Relay Control 8/13 8 . for printout and further processing at the substation or system control level. This technique has the advantage that it is totally unaffected by electromagnetic interference. Fig.Protection and Substation Control Measuring function included The additional transducer was rather used for protecting measuring instruments under system fault conditions.g. Consequently.

alteration and readout of settings C Testing the functions of the protective device and C Readout of relay operation data for the three last system faults and the auto-reclose counter Modern power system protection management A notebook PC may be used for upgraded protection management. 6. approx. 500 relays 1 1.8/8 System-wide setting and relay operation library 1000 1000 1000 1000 1100 1200 1500 280 3900 Parameter 1100 Line data 1200 Parameter 1100 Line data A 1200 Parameter 1100 Line data B 1200 Parameter Line data C O/C Phase settings D O/C Phase settings Ground settings 1500 O/C O/C Phase settings Ground settings 1500 O/C 280 Fault recording O/C phase settings Ground settings 1500 O/C 280 Fault recording Breaker fail 3900 O/C earth settings recording 280 Fault 3900 Breaker fail Fault recording Breaker fail 3900 Breaker fail Fig. a. Answers appear largely in plain text on the display of the operator panel. First.This allows operator dialog with the protective relay. a. the entire relay dialog can be guided from any remote location through a modem-telephone connection (Fig. 8/7). a.200 flags p. The relays may be set in 2 steps. after a system fault. the settings can then be downloaded from a PC into the relay. On site. Dialog is divided into three main stages: C Input. The MS Windows-compatible relay operation program DIGSI 4 is available for entering and readout of setpoints and archiving of protection data. Setpoints Relay operations 10. 300 faults p. the relay memory can be uploaded to a PC. Alternatively. The relay confirms the settings and thus provides an unquestionable record.000 setpoints system approx. Vice versa. and comprehensive fault analysis can then take place in the engineer’s office. and 100 km) system 200 setpoints 20 setpoints 1 bay 4 flags 1 substation substation OH line Fig. 8/9 Alternate parameter groups 8/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . all relay settings are prepared in the office with the aid of a local PC and stored on a diskette or the hard disk.000 km OHL (fault rate: 5 p.

convenient and comprehensive adjustment to changing conditions. e. assists the relay engineer in data filing and retrieval. One set is normally operative. Corrective rather than preventive maintenance Numerical relays monitor their own hardware and software. then the number adds up to 10. Equipment failures and faults in the current transformer circuits are immediately recorded and signaled. c) For “switch-onto-fault” protection to provide shorter time settings when energizing a circuit after maintenance. A personal computer-aided man-machine dialog and archiving program. There are a number of applications for which multiple setting groups can upgrade the scheme performance. Exhaustive self-monitoring and failure diagnostic routines are not restricted to the protective relay itself. f) For ”ring open“ or ”ring closed“ operation. The normal settings can be restored automatically after a time delay. resulting in a significantly upgraded availability of the protection system. If we consider a power system with about 500 relays. d) For auto-reclose programs. the service personnel are now able to correct the failure upon occurrence. b) For maintaining short operation times with lower fault currents.g. This requires considerable expenditure in setting the relays and filing retrieval setpoints. 8/9). Adjustments may be initiated either by the relay’s own intelligence or from outside via contacts or serial telegrams. automatic change of settings if one supply transformer is taken out of service. Adaptive relaying Numerical relays now offer secure. Modern numerical relays contain a number of parameter sets that can be pre-tested during commissioning of the scheme (Fig.Protection and Substation Control Relay data management Analog distribution-type relays have some 20–30 setpoints. i. for example: a) For use as a voltage-dependent control of o/c relay pickup values to overcome alternator fault current decrement to below normal load current when the AVR is not in automatic operation. instantaneous operation for first trip and delayed operation after unsuccessful reclosure.000 settings. Thus. e) For cold load pickup problems where high starting currents may cause relay operation. The program files all settings systematically in substation-feeder-relay order. DIGSI 4.g. Transfer to the other sets can be controlled via binary inputs or serial data link. e. but are methodically carried through from current transformer circuits to tripping relay coils. 8/15 8 .e.

The protection principle is based on a cyclic calculation algorithm. utilizing a dual-channel control. After analog filtering. 8/10). A trip command is transferred to the command relay by the processor. The analog measured values of current and voltage are decoupled electrically from the system's secondary circuits via input transducers (Fig. between 12 and 20 samples per period.g.8. reliability and user friendliness. The sampling rate is. such as: C High measurement accuracy: The high utilization of adaptive algorithms produce accurate results even during problematic conditions C Good long-term stability: Due to the digital mode of operation. PC interface. substation control interface Meas.24 FO serial interfaces Input/ output ports Binary inputs Current inputs (100 x /N. the danger of an undetected defect or malfunction in the device causing protection failure in the event of a line fault is clearly reduced when compared to conventional protection technology. especially with regard to higher security. With certain devices (e. drift phenomena at components due to ageing do not lead to changes in accuracy of measurement or time delays C Security against over. utilizing the sampled current and voltage analog measured values. generator protection) a continuous adjustment of the sampling rate takes place depending on the actual system frequency. 5 A analog 10 V analog digital Input/output contacts Fig.and underfunctioning: With this concept. 1 s) Amplifier Alarm relay Command relay Voltage inputs (140 V continuous) A/D converter 0001 0101 0011 Processor system Memory: RAM EEPROM EPROM Input/ output units LED displays 100 V/1 A. inputs Input filter V. Cyclical and preventive maintenance services have therefore become largely obsolete. The numerical protection concept offers a multitude of advantages.2 Relay Design and Operation Mode of operation Numerical protective relays operate on the basis of numerical measuring principles. The fault detection determined by this process must be established in several sequential calculations before protection reactions can follow. the sampling and the analog-to-digital conversion take place. depending on the different protection principles. 8/10 Block diagram of numerical protection 8/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .

iL1 + iL2 + iL3 = iE uL1 + uL2 + uL3 = uE A D Check of analog-to-digital conversion by comparison with converted reference quantities The integrated self-monitoring system (Fig. Siemens supports both stand-alone and combined solutions on the basis of a single hardware and software platform. e. whereas on the distribution level. combined feeder relays for protection. The high processing power of modern numerical devices allow further integration of non-protective add-on functions. a trend towards higher function integration can be observed.Protection and Substation Control Plausibility check of input quantities e. With the SIPROTEC 4 series (types 7SJ61.g. page 25 cont. 62 and 63). The user can decide within wide limits on the configuration of the control and protection functions in the feeder. 8/12). 8/11 Self-monitoring system Switchgear with numerical relay (7SJ62) and traditional control Switchgear with combined protection and control relay (7SJ63) 8/17 8 . Here. The question as to whether separate or combined relays should be used for protection and control cannot be uniformly answered. Photo 8/4 Microprocessor system Hardware and software monitoring of the microprocessor system incl. separation into independent hardware units is still preferred. by watchdog and cyclic memory checks Relay Monitoring of the tripping relays operated via dual channels Tripping check or test reclosure by local or remote operation (not automatic) Fig.). without compromising the reliability of the protection functions (Fig. In transmissiontype substations. 8/11) encompasses the following areas: C Analog inputs C Microprocessor system C Command relays Implemented functions SIPROTEC relays are available with a variety of protective functions (see relay charts. monitoring and control are gaining ground (Photo 8/4). g. memory.

0 on rotor MODBUS RTU lock Fault detector Directional element Phase-sequence monitoring Inrush lock Interm. I< Startup time IEC 61850 ICE 60870-5-103 PROFIBUS FMS/DP SwitchLocked DNP3. ground fault Switch failure protection High-imp. DIGSI 4 Telephone connection SICAM PAS IEC 61850 or IEC 60870-5-103 Modem IEC 6870-5 DIGSI 4 IEC 60870-5-103 Fig. options for communication 8/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . P element calculated Trip monitor Final OFF Thermobox connection Limit values. remote control Command/checkback Motor control (only 7SJ63/64) 7SJ61/62/63/64 CFC logic Measurements during operation 7SJ62/63/64 Synchronization (only 7SJ64) U. reclosure Directional ground fault detection element Ground fault detection element Fig. Autodiff. implemented functions The following solutions are available within one relay family: C Separate control and protection relays C Protective relays including remote control of the feeder breaker via the serial communication link C Combined feeder relays for protection. f.Busbar 52 Local. monitoring and control Mixed use of the different relay types is easily possible on account of the uniform operation and communication procedures. mean values. 8/12 SIPROTEC 4 relay types 7SJ61/62/63/64. 8/13 SIPROTEC 4 relays. min/max memory Energy counter values as count pulses (only 7SJ64) Operation Communications Fault Motor protection element modules recording logic Bearing RS232/485/LWL temp.

Thus. The station configurator. the new substation control system by Siemens has been designed as an open system which employs IEC 61580 as communication standard between the bay and station control level. which is part of the DIGSI 4 operating software. SIPROTEC protective relays and bay control units are the first devices released in mid 2004 which use a communications protocol in compliance with IEC 61850. SIPROTEC 4 relays can still be connected to the SICAM system or to a communications system of another supplier via IEC 60870-5-103. Communication is based on the PROFIBUS standard. to IEC 60870-5-103 for open communication with substation control systems either by Siemens (SICAM) or by any other supplier.Protection and Substation Control Integration of relays into substation control Basically. SIPROTEC 4 protection systems and SICAM substation control technology have a uniform design. the user is provided with open communication systems which are based on Ethernet technology. The agreed objective of this standard is to create a comprehensive communications solution for substations. can be used to configure SIPROTEC relays as well as non-Siemens relays via IEC 61850. are even more flexible and equipped with several communication options. IEC 61850 has been established as a global standard by users and manufacturers. Many advantages are already to be found on the clear and user-friendly front panel: C Ergonomic arrangement and grouping of the keys C Large non-reflective back-lit display C Programmable (freely assignable) LED's for important messages C Arrows arrangement of the keys for easy navigation in the function tree C Operator-friendly input of the setting values via the numeric keys or with a PC by using the DIGSI 4 software C Command input protected by key lock (6MD63/7SJ63 only) or password C Four programmable keys for frequently used functions “at the touch of a button” 8/19 8 . The relays of the latest SIPROTEC 4 series. IEC 61580 supports interoperability and integration of substation control systems which facilitates system engineering independent of the manufacturer and reduces the planning expense at the same time. monitoring and control functions SICAM PAS. all Siemens numerical relays are equipped with an an interface acc. 1 Large illuminated display 2 Cursor keys 3 LED with reset key Photo 8/5 1 1 2 2 3 4 3 4 6 7 5 6 7 4 Control (7SJ61/62 uses function keys) 5 Key switches 6 Freely programmable function keys 7 Numerical keypad Front view of the 7SJ62 protective relay Front view of the 7SJ63 relay combining protection. Direct operation of a SIPROTEC 4 relay All operator actions can be executed and information displayed on an integrated user interface. however.

C When configuring the operator environment and interfaces. The PC software DIGSI 4 is the human-machine interface between the user and the SIPROTEC 4 units. DIGSI is synonymous with convenient. from unauthorized access. Hardware and software platform C Pentium 1. if required. for example. DIGSI 4 is a logical innovation for operation of protection and bay control units of the SIPROTEC 4 family. And with one mouse click. such as parameterizing. commissioning and control. which LED's are linked to which protection control function(s). OR and time elements are available. user-friendly parameterizing and operation of numerical protection relays. Configuration matrix (routing) The DIGSI 4 matrix allows the user to see the overall view of the relay configuration at a glance. Display editor (Photo 8/10) A display editor is available to design the display of SIPROTEC 4 units. With DIGSI 4. the SIPROTEC 4 units can be configured and queried. no special knowledge of software is required. This means that you can readily use DIGSI 4 on the station control level in conjunction with SICAM. you can configure interlocks and switching sequences simply by drawing the logic sequences. with at least 128 Mbytes RAM C DIGSI 4 requires more than 500 Mbytes hard disk space C One free serial interface to the protection device (COM 1 or COM 4) C One DVD/CD-ROM drive (required for installation) C WINDOWS 2000. or XP Professional 8/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . It features modern. as well as via the PROFIBUS® of a substation control system. you can also use the PC to link up with the relay via star coupler or channel switch. intuitive operating procedures. C Access authorization by means of passwords protects the individual functions. you have the overall picture – a matrix shows you at a glance. For example. It just takes a click with the mouse to establish these links by a fingertip. C Explorer operation on the MS Windows standard shows the options in logically structured form. The predefined symbol sets can be expanded to suit the user. All binary inputs and outputs can be read and set directly. The drawing of a one-line diagram is extremely simple.DIGSI 4 – the operating software for all SIPROTEC relays For the user. Load monitoring values (analog values) can be set. This can simplify the wire checking process significantly for the user. Commissioning Special attention has been paid to commissioning. CFC: graphic configuration With the help of the graphical CFC (Continuous Function Chart) Tool. C Contextual menus for every situation provide you with made-tomeasure functionality – searching through menu hierarchies is a thing of the past. we have attached importance to continuity with the SICAM automation system. The integrated administrating system ensures clear addressing of the feeders and relays of a substation. C Thus. you can display all the LED's that are linked to binary inputs or show external signals that are connected to the relay. connections can be switched. Logical elements such as AND. C The interface provides you only with what is really necessary. C Even with routing.6 GHz or better. irrespective of which unit you are currently configuring.

Protection and Substation Control Photo 8/9 DIGSI 4 routing matrix Photo 8/6 DIGSI 4 Manager Photo 8/7 Functional scope Photo 8/10 Display editor Photo 8/8 The device with all its parameters and process data Photo 8/11 CFC logic with module library 8/21 8 .

A reclose cycle with one or more reclosures is treated as one fault history. A fault record can also be read out repeatedly. auto-reclose commands). i. faulty phase. which subsequently calculates a checksum for the changed data and stores it with the data. The fault recording memory is organized as a ring buffer. etc.g. monitoring alarms. Each new fault in the network overrides the oldest fault history. The time tag attached to the fault records is the relative time of fault detection with a resolution of 1 ms. such as voltage and current. trip command. Data security. DIGSI 4 is supplied together with the SIGRA® (DIGSI 4 Graphic) program. reclose command. C 5 fault-event histories.Fault analysis The evaluation of faults is simplified by numerical protection technology. The memory for operational events and fault record events is protected against failure of auxiliary supply with battery back-up supply.) are also part of the extensive graphical functionality. The following types of memory have been integrated in the numerical protection relay: C 1 operational event memory. Up to 8 fault recordings are stored.e. data interfaces DIGSI 4 is a closed system as far as protection parameter security is concerned. overlaying and zooming of curves and visualization of binary tracks (e. In addition to analog values. a new fault entry overrides the oldest fault record. 8/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . which provides the customer with full graphical operating and evaluation functionality like that of the digital fault recorders (oscillostores) by Siemens (see Photo 8/12).g. Devices with integrated battery backup clock store operational events and fault detection events with the internal clock time and a data stamp. The security of the stored data of the operating PC is ensured by checksums. C 1 ground-fault event memory (optional for isolated or impedance grounded networks). trip commands. type of fault detection. Evaluation of fault records Readout of the fault record by DIGSI 4 is done by fault-proof scanning procedures in accordance with the standard recommendations for transmission of fault records. Alarms that occurred during the last 3 faults on the network (e. This means that it is only possible to change data with DIGSI 4. alternation of a set value. Changes in the data and thus in safety-related protection data are reliably recorded. Event recording of the sensitive ground fault detector (e. all events as well as the analog traces of the measured voltages and currents are recorded. The integrated operator interface or a PC supported by the DIGSI 4 programming tool is used to retrieve fault reports as well as for the input of settings and routing. In the event of a fault in the power system. spectrum analysis and fault resistance derivation. C A memory for the fault recordings for voltage and current. Alarms that are not directly assigned to a fault in the network (e. real component of residual current). as are setting of measurement cursors.g. binary tracks can also be transferred and presented. blocking of the automatic reclosure function). Photo 8/12 Display and evaluation of a fault record using DIGSI 4 software Real-time presentation of analog disturbance records.g. fault location.

After password input. but only the addressed one answers the operator command which comes from the central PC. This enables the export of fault records from Siemens protection units to customer-specific programs via the COMTRADE format. Every protection device which belongs to a DIGSI 4 substation structure has a unique address. however. also an open system. The relays are connected to the star coupler via optical fiber links. optionally with call-back function RS485 7SJ60 7RW60 7SD60 7**5 7**6 Fig. such as test programs.Protection and Substation Control DIGSI 4 is. 8/14 Remote relay communication The relays are always listening. without endangering the security of data within the DIGSI 4 program system. 8/23 8 . The data export function supports export of parameterization and routing data in standard ASCII format. DIGSI 4 establishes a connection to the protection device after receiving a call-back from the system. If the relay located in a station is to be operated from a remote office. Remote relay interrogation The numerical relay range of Siemens can also be operated from a remotely located PC via modem-telephone connection. Office Analog ISDN DIGSI PC. a high-performance data interface is produced which supports import and export of fault records into the DIGSI 4 partner program SIGRA. This way. secure and time-saving remote setting and readout of data are possible. 8/14). Up to 254 relays can be addressed via one modem connection if the 7XV53 star coupler is used as a communication node (Fig. This permits simple access to these data by other programs. centrally located in the substation (option) RS232 Signal converter RS232 RS485 bus 7XV53 Modem. With the import and export of fault records in IEEE standard format COMTRADE (ANSI). then a device file is opened in DIGSI 4 and the protection dialog is chosen via modem. Remote diagnostics and control of test routines are also possible without the need of on-site checks of the substation. remotely located Modem Substation Star coupler DIGSI PC.

The standard cabinet has the following dimensions: 2. for cable cross sections of 0. A simple. 6 x 1 slotted screw driver is suitable for this type of screw heads. dust and dripping water (IP 51). insulated cable lugs must be used. Screw terminals are available for devices intended for: C Panel and cabinet mounting and C Devices with a separate operator station The following screw-connection types are to be distinguished: C Connector modules for voltage connection and C Connector modules for current connection Clamping screws are slotted screws which shall be tightened with a screw driver. 8/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 2 devices with a width of 1/2 x 19" to be mounted. For mounting of devices into switchgear cabinets. For this purpose two-tier terminal blocks are used to attain the required number of terminals. Tightening torque Max. In the housing version for surface mounting. The following requirements must be observed: Cable lugs Bolt diameter is 4 mm. the terminals are wired up on terminal strips on the top and bottom of the device. for cable cross sections of 1. followed by a number for the degree of protection. special precautions are to be taken. 1/3.6 mm AWG 16 to 14 accordingly.0 mm to 2. It can swivel as much as 180° in a swing frame. The devices in the 7XP20 housing are secured to rails by screws. the degree of protection is indicated by the identifying IP. 1.45 mm). To meet the insulation path requirements. Whenever secondary circuits of current transformers are concerned. The rack provides for a mounting width of 19". 8MC switchgear cabinets are recommended.200 mm x 900 mm x 600 mm (H x W x D).Enclosures and terminal systems The protection devices and the corresponding supplementary devices are available mainly in 7XP20 housings. Installation of the modules in a cabinet without the enclosure is not permissible. Ring tongue connectors and forked cable lugs can be used for connection. Only use copper conductors! Direct connection Solid conductors or litz conductors with end sleeves. The terminating end of the single strand or conductor must be pushed into the terminal compartment in such a way that it will be pulled into it when the clamping screw is tightened. 1/2 or 1/1 of a 19" rack. The termination module is located at the rear of devices for panel flush mounting or cabinet mounting.5 mm to 2.8 Nm. the second digit indicates the protection against water.g. Only use copper conductors! Wire stripping length 9 mm to 10 mm for solid conductors. Module racks are not required. The first digit indicates the protection against accidental contact and ingress of solid foreign bodies. 7XP20 housings are protected against ingress of dangerous parts. The heavy-duty current plug connectors provide automatic short-circuiting of the current transformer circuits when the modules are withdrawn. by covering it with shrinkdown plastic tubing). The width of the housing conforms to the 19" system with the divisions 1/6. the crimping zone must be insulated by other suitable means (e. allowing. According to IEC 60529. maximum outer diameter is 10 mm. for example. Or else.6 mm AWG 20 to 14 accordingly. These cabinets are provided with a 44 U high mounting rack (standard height unit U = 44.

1) 14 21 21N 21FL 24 25 27 27/34 32 32F 32R 37 40 46 47 48 49 49R 49S 50 50N 50BF 51GN 51 Description Locked rotor Distance protection. ground Fault locator Overfluxing ( U/f) Synchro-check Undervoltage U/f protection voltage/frequency protection Directional power Forward power Reverse power Undercurrent or underpower Protection against under-excitation Load unbalance protection Phase sequence monitoring Start-up current-time monitoring Thermal overload Rotor overload protection Stator overload protection Instantaneous overcurrent Instantaneous ground fault overcurrent Breaker failure Stator ground-fault overcurrent Overcurrent with time delay – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – V – – – – – – – – – – V – – V – – V – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – C C C – V – – V – – V – V – – – – – – – – – – – V – – – – – – – – V V – – – – – – – V – – – – V – – – – V V – V – C – C – C – V V V C – C – C – C – V – – C – – C C V – C – – – C C V – C – – – C – – – C C C C C – – V C C C C C C – V C C C C C C – C C V C C C C C C – C C V C C C C C C – C C V C C C C C C – V – – V – – C – – – – C – – C – – V – – C C V – C C V – C C V – C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C Standard function 1) V Option ANSI (American National Standards Institute) /IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) C 37.3 Relay Selection Guide Distance protection Pilot wire differential Optical waveguide current comparison Overcurrent 7SD600 7SD610 Differential 7UT612 7UT613 7SJ600 7SJ602 7VH60 7UT63 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Type Protective functions ANSI No.Protection and Substation Control 8. phase Distance protection.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers Relay selection guide Table 8/6 7SS60 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 7SJ45 7SJ46 7SJ61 7SJ62 7SJ63 7SJ64 7SA6 8/25 8 .

line Ground-fault differential protection C – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – C – – – – – – – – – C – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – C – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – C – – – – – – – – – – – C – – C – – – – – – – – – – – C – C – C – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – C – – – – – – – – – C – – – – – – – – – C – – – –– – – – – – V V – – – C – – – V C – – V C – – V C – – V – C – – C C – – – – C C – – – – C C – – – – V C – C – C – V – – – – – V – – – – – V – – – – – V C C C – – – – – – V – – V – – – – – – – – – – V – – – – – – – – – – V – – – V V – – V V – – V V – – V C – C C – C – – – – – C – – – – – C – – – – – C – – – – – C – – V – – C – – – C – C – C C C C C C C C C C C V C C C C C C V C C C C C C V C Standard function 1) V Option ANSI (American National Standards Institute) /IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) C 37. transformer Differential protection.Pilot wire differential Optical waveguide current comparison Distance protection Overcurrent 7SD600 7SD610 Differential 7UT612 7UT613 7SJ600 7SJ602 7VH60 7UT63 Type Protective functions ANSI No.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers Relay selection guide Table 8/7 8/26 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens 7SS60 – – – – – – – – – – – – – –– – 7SJ45 7SJ46 7SJ61 7SJ62 7SJ63 7SJ64 7SA6 C – – C – – – .1) 51N 51V 59 59N 64 64R 67 67N 67G 68 74TC 78 79 81 81R 85 86 87G 87T 87BB 87M 87L 87N Description Ground-fault overcurrent with time delay Voltage-dependent overcurrent-time protection Overvoltage Residual voltage ground-fault protection 100% rotor ground fault protection (20 Hz) Rotor ground fault Directional overcurrent Directional ground-fault overcurrent Stator ground fault. motor Differential protection. generator Differential protection. busbar Differential protection. directional overcurrent Oscillation detection (Block Z <) Trip circuit monitoring Out-of-step protection Autoreclose Frequency relay Frequency change protection Carrier interface Lockout Differential protection.

frequency – – – – Synchronization 7UM62 7VE6 7SV600 7UM61 Breaker failure V – C – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 8/27 8 . ground Fault locator Overfluxing ( U/f) Synchro-check Undervoltage U/f protection voltage/frequency protection Directional power Forward power Reverse power Undercurrent or underpower Protection against under-excitation Load unbalance protection Phase sequence monitoring Start-up current-time monitoring Thermal overload Rotor overload protection Stator overload protection Instantaneous overcurrent Instantaneous ground fault overcurrent Breaker failure Stator ground-fault overcurrent Overcurrent with time delay C V – – C V – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – C – C – C C – C C C C C C C V C V C – C V – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – V C – V V C V C – C C C C – C C C C C C C C – – C Standard function 1) V Option ANSI (American National Standards Institute) /IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers Relay selection guide Table 8/8 7RW600 Voltage.1) 14 21 21N 21FL 24 25 27 27/34 32 32F 32R 37 40 46 47 48 49 49R 49S 50 50N 50BF 51GN 51 Description Locked rotor Distance protection. phase Distance protection.Protection and Substation Control Generator and motor protection Type Protective functions ANSI No.

busbar Differential protection. frequency – – Synchronization 7UM62 7VE6 7SV600 7UM61 Breaker failure C – – – – – – – – – – C V – – – – – – – – – . motor Differential protection. line Ground-fault differential protection C C C C – C C C C V C C C C V C V – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – V – V – – – – – – – – C C C C – C – – C V V – C V V – V V V – C – – – – – – C C C – V – – – – – – C – V C Standard function 1) V Option ANSI (American National Standards Institute) /IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers Relay selection guide Table 8/9 8/28 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens 7RW600 Voltage. directional overcurrent Oscillation detection (Block Z <) Trip circuit monitoring Out-of-step protection Autoreclose Frequency relay Frequency change protection Vector jump relay Carrier interface Lockout Differential protection.Generator and motor protection Type Protective functions ANSI No. generator Differential protection.1) 51N 51V 59 59N 64 64R 67 67N 67G 68 74TC 78 79 81 81R 85 86 87G 87T 87BB 87M 87L 87N Description Ground-fault overcurrent with time delay Voltage-dependent overcurrent-time protection Overvoltage Residual voltage ground-fault protection 100% rotor ground fault protection (20 Hz) Rotor ground fault Directional overcurrent Directional ground-fault overcurrent Stator ground fault. transformer Differential protection.

8/15 Load Protection scheme with definite-time overcurrent-time protection Infeed Transformer protection. t 51 51N 46 2) ARC 79 1) 7SJ60 8. 8/15 1)ANSI no. Load C I>. 8/16 Protection scheme for ring circuit Ring circuits General notes on Fig.4 Typical Protection Schemes Radial systems Notes on Fig. 8/22 52 7SJ60* 52 52 7SJ60* I>.2 s grading-time delay to be preferred) C Thermal overload protection for the cables (option) C Negative sequence o/c protection 46 as sensitive protection against unsymmetrical faults (option) 8/29 8 . small current variation between near and far end faults C Inverse time: Longer lines.Protection and Substation Control Infeed Transformer protection. 7SJ61 Load Fig. t 51 51N 46 7SJ60 D I>. 8/16 C Tripping times of overcurrent relays must be coordinated with downstream fuses of load transformers.3 seconds. t IE>. t I2>. Steeper characteristics also provide higher stability on service restoration (probes for cold load pickup and transformer inrush currents). t I2>. C Dependent curves can be selected according to the following criteria: C Definite time: Source impedance is large compared to the line impedance. t IE>. t I2>. 2)Negative sequence o/c protection 46 as back-up protection against asymmetrical faults. where the fault cur rent is much less at the end of the line than at the local end. i. Relays further upstream have to be timegraded against the next downstream relay in steps of about 0. t I2>. t IE>. where coordination with fuses or reclosers is necessary. General notes: C The relay (D) with the largest distance from the infeed point has the shortest tripping time. t I2>. 8/20 A B Further feeders I>. 79 only for reclosure with overhead lines. t 51 51N 46 ϑ> 49 52 I>. (Highly inverse time characteristic with about 0. t 51 51N 46 7SJ60 * Alternatives: 7SJ45/46. 7SJ61 Fig. t 51 51N 46 ϑ> 49 * Alternatives: 7SJ45/46. see Fig. see Fig. C Highly or extremely inverse time: Lines where the line impedance is large compared to the source impedance (high difference for closein and remote faults) or lines. t IE>. t IE>.e.

switch disconnectors and fuses. C The o/c relay should automatically switch over to less sensitive characteristics after longer load interruption times to enable overriding of subsequent cold load pickup and transformer inrush currents. t 51 51N ϑ> 49 I2>. delay times and autoreclosure cycles must be carefully coordinated with downstream reclosers. t 50N/ 51N 46 7SJ60 7SJ61 Autoreclose 52 Distribution feeder with reclosers General notes on Fig. C The directional o/c protection 67/67N trips instantaneously for faults on the protected line. 79 Further feeders Recloser Sectionalizers Fuses Fig. C The o/c relay functions 51/51N have each to be time-graded against the relays located upstream. t 46 7SJ60 52 OH line or cable 1 OH line or cable 2 Protection same as line or cable 1 67 67N 51 51N 7SJ62 52 52 52 52 52 Load Fig. 8/17 Protection scheme for distribution feeder Infeed 52 52 I>. 8/18: C This configuration is preferably used for the uninterrupted supply of important consumers without significant backfeed.Infeed 52 I>>. I>. 8/18 Protection concept for parallel lines Load Parallel lines General notes on Fig. I2>. The instantaneous zone 50/50N is normally set to reach out to the first main feeder sectionalizing point. t IE>. Fast autoreclosure is initiated in this case. 8/30 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . t IE>. 8/17: C The feeder relay operating characteristics. This allows the saving of one timegrading interval for the o/c relays at the infeed. It has to ensure fast clearing of closein faults and prevent blowing of fuses in this area (“fuse saving”). Further time-delayed tripping and reclosure steps (normally 2 or 3) have to be graded against the recloser. t 50/ 51 IE>>.

C Primary breaker and relay may be replaced by fuses. 8/20: C Ground faults on the secondary side are detected by current relay 51G which. t 51 IE> 50N ϑ> I2>. t 49 46 7SJ60 63 RN Optional resistor or reactor I>> 87N 51G 52 7VH60 IE> Distribution bus 52 o/c relay Load Fig. 8/20 7SJ60 Fuse Load Protection scheme for small transformers Small transformer infeed General notes on Fig. The restricted ground-fault relay 87N may additionally be used to achieve fast clearance of earth faults in the secondary transformer winding.5 miles) 4) Functions 49 and 79 only with relays of type 7SD610. Relay 7VH80 is of the high-impedance type and requires class X current transformers with similar transformation ratio.Protection and Substation Control Infeed 52 52 52 7SJ60 79 87L 1) 2) 51N/ 51N Line or cable 7SJ60 51N/ 51N 52 49 7SD600 or 7SD610 52 4) Same protection for parallel line. 7. 7SD600 is a cost-effective solution where only the function 87L is required (external 4AM4930 current summation transformer to be installed separately). if applicable 4) 52 Cables or short overhead lines with infeed from both ends Notes on Fig. 8/31 8 . 22 miles) or via a 64 kbit/s channel of a general purpose PCM connection (optical waveguide. has to be time-graded against downstream feeder protection relays. however. 3) 7SD600 or 7SD610 87L 79 52 49 2) 1) 52 Load Fig. microwave) C Type 7SD600 with 2-wire pilot cables up to about 12 km (approx. 8/19 52 Backfeed Protection scheme using differential protection 52 52 HV infeed 52 I>> 50 I>. 8/19: 1) Auto-reclosure only with overhead lines 2) Overload protection only with cables 3) Differential protection options: C Type 7SD610 with direct fiber-optic connection up to about 35 km (approx.

t 51 51N 67 I> 67N IE> 1) 52 52 Load bus 52 Load Fig. Matching transformers. t 51N 49 63 I2> ϑ> 87N 87T 7UT613 7SJ60 51G I>> 51 52 52 Load Fig. 8/21: 1) Line current transformers are to be connected to isolate stabilizing inputs of the differential relay 87T in order to assure stability in case of line-through-fault currents. 8/22 52 Load 52 Load Protection scheme for transformers connected in parallel 8/32 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 8/22: The directional functions 67 and 67N do not apply for cases where the transformers are equipped with transformer differential relays 87T. t IE>. as used with traditional relays. 2) Relay 7UT613 provides numerical ratio and vector group adaptation. t I>. 8/21 IE> 51N 7SJ60 52 52 Load bus Transformer protection scheme HV infeed 1 52 7SJ60 or 7SJ61 HV infeed 2 I>> 50 I>. are therefore no longer necessary. Parallel incoming to transformer feeders Note on Fig. Protection line 1 same as line 2 52 Protection line 2 21/21N or 87L + 51 + optionally 67/67N 52 7SJ60 oder 7SJ61 I>> 50 I>. t 46 52 63 7SJ62 Protection same as infeed 1 51G 7SJ60 IE>. t 51 IE>.Dual infeed with single transformer Notes on Fig. t ϑ> 51N 49 I2>. t 51 46 IE>.

8/24: 1) 1) Window-type zero-sequence current transformer. 3) This function is only needed for motors where the start-up time is longer than the safe stall time tE. With high-resistance grounded inI feed (IE ≤ IN Motor) Notes on Fig. According to IEC 79-7. 8/25: 1) Window-type zero-sequence current transformer. from the temperature reached in rated service and at maximum ambient temperature to the limiting temperature. 2) Sensitive directional earth-fault protection 67N only applicable with infeed from isolated or Peterson-coil-grounded network.Protection and Substation Control Small and medium-sized motors < 1 MW With effective or low-resistance grounded infeed I (IE ≥ IN Motor) General note on Fig. 8/25 Protection scheme for large motors 8/33 8 . 2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protection 67N only applicable with infeed from isolated or Peterson-coil-grounded network. when carrying the starting current IA.tE is the time needed to heat up AC windings. also see application circuit No. 8/24 Protection scheme for medium-sized motors 52 I>> ϑ> I2> U< Large HV motors > 1 MW Notes on Fig. (For dimensioning of the sensitive directional ground-fault protection. 8/23: Applicable to low-voltage motors and high-voltage motors with low-resistance grounded infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor). 24) 3) Relay type 7SJ602 may be used for power systems with isolated neutral or compensated neutral 7XR96 1) 60/1A 52 I>> IE> ϑ> Locked rotor 49 CR I2> 50 51N 49 46 7SJ60 M Fig. 8/23 Protection scheme for small motors 52 I>> ϑ> I2> I< 7SJ62 or 7SJ602 3) 50 49 46 37 IE> 51G 2) 67N M Fig. 7XR96 1) 60/1A 50 49 2) 67N 46 27 optionally IE> 51N I< 37 Monitoring of the start-up 49T stage 3) 3) Speed switch 87M 5) 7UM62 M Option: thermistor 4) Fig.

IE>. The motor breaker is tripped if the motor does not reach speed in the preset time. 8/26 and 8/27: If a window-type zero-sequence current transformer is provided for sensitive ground-fault protection. 8/28 Protection scheme for generators > 1 MW 8/34 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 8/24). relay 7SJ602 with separate ground current input can be used (similar to Fig. The speed switch is part of the motor delivery itself. t 51 51N I2> 46 ϑ> 49 7SJ60 Protection scheme for smallest generators with solidly grounded neutral conductor MS Generator 2 G1 1) I>.5 to 1) • Irated Protection scheme for smallest generators with a resistance-grounded neutral conductor 52 1) Field f> < 81 G I>. Ni100. Ni120 5) 49T can only be implemented using 7XV5662 thermobox Smallest generators < 500 kW Note on Fig. 8/27 Fig 8/26 MS G I>. t 51 51N I2> 46 ϑ> 49 7SJ60 RN = VN √3 • (0. IE>. Fig. 8/28: Two current transformers in V-connection are sufficient. t 51 ϑ> 49 I2> 46 P> 32 U> 59 7UM61 IE>. 4) Pt100. t 51N Fig. Small generator up to 1 MW Note on Fig.A separate speed switch is used to monitor actual starting of the motor.

I>t. 2) The integrated differential protection function may be used as longitudinal or transverse differential protection for the generator. 52 MS 50 27 I>/U< 1) 59 U< 2) ∆I RE field< 1) 81 87 7UM62 f> < G Field 64R I2> 46 ϑ> 49 . t 51N 87N Fig.F 51V 40 32 -P> IE>. 8/29 Protection scheme for generators > 1 MW 8/35 8 .O. U< L.Protection and Substation Control Generators > 1 MW Notes on Fig. 8/29: 1) Functions 81 and 59 only required where drives can assume excess speed and voltage controller may permit rise of output voltage above upper threshold.

t 51 51N 7SJ60 t0 = 50 ms 52 I> 50 50N I>.Busbar protection by o/c relays with reverse interlocking General note on Fig. t 51 51N 52 I> 50 50N I>. t0 50 50N 52 I>. 8/31 C Applicable for single and double busbars C Different current transformer ratios are balanced by intermediate-circuit transformers C Unrestricted number of feeders C Feeder protection may be connected to the same current transformer core Infeed Reverse interlocking I>. t 51 51N 7SJ60 7SJ60 7SJ60 Fig. t 51 51N 52 I> 50 50N I>.25 x IN) backfeed from the outgoing feeders. 8/31 S 7SS60 busbar protection 8/36 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 8/30 Busbar protection with reverse interlocking 7MT70 7SS601 87 BB 52 86 52 7SV60 50 BF 52 7SV60 50 BF 52 7SV60 50 BF 1) Load G 7SS60 Fig. 7SS60 busbar protection General note on Fig. 8/30: Applicable to busbars without substantial (< 0.

Protection and Substation Control 8/37 8 .

.

Power Management chapter 9 .

gas. Energy purchasing Optimizing purchased quantities/prices Electricity. C modify the general specifications for energy import through the best possible use of stipulated provisions in the contract as well as through C optimally negotiating new contracts. diesel. an optimal efficiency should be demanded. The use of several types of power in interrelation takes the cogeneration optimization into consideration. planning or. An efficiency improvement of the equipment/consumer devices saves energy and reduces cost directly. or other piece of property. In a turbine. import monitoring will influence the power consumption. expands to its distribution and ends at the supply to the devices themselves. To minimize the energy costs. if possible. power management aims. on the one hand. This can occur within the power management via priorities-list controls. The optimal use of existing contracts avoids penalties for exceeding the agreed-upon import quantities. one can C directly influence the power consumption. by involving in-plant generation of power. at an optimal use of the existing contracts – not exceeding the import quantity – and on the other hand at concluding the most advantageous new continuous purchasing contracts – buying neither too much nor too little. When making invitations to tender for new equipment. In addition to the ideal way of reducing power costs through limiting power consumption. The view begins with the energy import. This optimization is carried out by retrofitting. 9/1 Power management: the special energy point of view of an industrial plant. 9/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . etc.9 Power Management Power management is the special energy point of view of an industrial plant. All functions are directed towards the operator with the goal of enabling an economical operation. Costs arising from this can be clearly allocated to the corresponding power types. a commercial building. Import monitoring compares the amounts actually used to those stipulated in the existing continuous purchasing contracts. process heat and electricity are generated from gas. If the amount used threatens to exceed the latter. water Import monitoring Avoiding penalties In-plant generation Optimization of the energy mix Coordination of all energy types involved Energy cost savings Energy flow representation Transparency of energy consumption Efficiency improvement Optimal energy exploitation Energy savings Fig. district heat. a commercial building. or other piece of property.

Energy flow representation. those responsible for the process can influence the power consumption behavior in such a way that peaks are clipped and valleys are filled. Energy costs Energy savings Kilowatt-hour rate (electricity) quantity costs Energy cost savings Demand rate (electricity) basic fees Influence Influence when negotiating new contracts via Continuous purchasing quantities Benefit of liberalization Optimization of power import and in-plant generation via Efficiency improvement Fig. the import will also – as sum of all power consumers – have no peaks.0 Outgoing circuit-breaker to sub-distribution board Incoming circuit-breaker to sub-distribution board G Busbar coupler unit Transformer T7 . quantitybased energy costs can be employed as a lever to influence total energy cost by improving the efficiency of the equipment in use. a leveling is achieved.Power Management Electricity costs for in-plant generation are comparable to those of the energy market. By evaluating the load curves. Load curves make the most effective statements if there is a direct reference to the technological process. As power costs on the market change daily. maximum-demand monitoring and the optimization of the energy mix serve to optimize energy purchasing. Infrastructure Building automation and control Heating Ventilation Air conditioning Time controllers Industry Power distribution Process automation/ automated manufacturing technology Batches Sequential control systems Sequence processors Feeder circuitbreaker Q1.4 Fig.3 Switch-disconnector Q12. Another leverage is a change of that process that would yield an optimized degree of efficiency. At any time. It visualizes the power consumption behavior and provides transparency. If power consumption is reduced by down-sizing production. this comparison is not necessarily always favorable to in-plant generation. The energy flow representation via load curves depicts the power consumption over the course of time. Only when the customer knows his requirements exactly. 9/3 Composition of power costs and options for influencing them 9/3 9 . can he use the offer from the various power suppliers to his best advantage. this is irrelevant for consideration. gas or coal. The same considerations must be made when using the primary energy sources oil. 9/2 Power distribution interfaces in industry and infrastructure Composition of power costs and options for influencing them The cost of (electrical) energy is composed of quantity-based costs and basic fees. If no peaks appear in the lowest level of power consumption.

When retrofitting systems in existing power distribution systems. C meters and measuring instruments. Transformers reduce the voltage levels. the circuit-breakers. C isolators. They are started and stopped. These new import load curves can be used as a basis for negotiating a new. lower import limit at the next contract change. A remote display requires a conversion to 4. Considering regular contract terms of 5 years.A reduction of basic fees by influencing demand charges can only be effected when a contract is changed. continuously monitor energy import. in accordance with the local country standards. switch-disconnectors. cut off peak supplies and level consumption. Electrical power distribution comprises medium and low voltage. isolators. gas or water – as a connection of the energy import with the power consumers – is set up for infrastructure projects and industrial plants with the same components. The multitude of devices used in power distribution comprise the components: C circuit-breakers. as well as having their power output regulated. These measurements are placed on-site on display units. The planning tool SIMARIS design® supports this work when dimensioning new systems or new designs. Circuit-breakers switch and protect the electrical power flow. Strategy: First.. Generators transform mechanical energy into electrical energy. 9/4 9/4 Power management modules Transducers generate measurements with standardized interfaces. fuses. The interfaces from Totally Integrated Power for building services automation and automated manufacturing technology are storey distribution boards or motor control centers. Disconnectors protect electrical installations. Purchasing associations Energy purchasing Optimizing purchased quantities/prices Basis for energy market Prognosis Broker > 24 h. The know-how of system-specific power distribution is in the dimensioning of the individual elements and their interconnection with cables. this leverage is unsuitable for immediate success. busbar trunking systems and switchgear cabinets. They can be switched onsite and monitored both on-site and remotely. along with the corresponding transformers are often already on hand. current. whether electricity. etc. different types of energy Cost center assignment Automatic Manual input Quality Harmonics cos ϕ Overvoltages Transients Flicker Efficiency improvement Optimal energy exploitation Optimizing equipment Thermodynamic control systems Evaluations Reports Data validation Maintenance Fig. frequencies. C generators and C transformers are also used. either locally or remotely.to 20-mA interfaces. output. C transducers. in the expansion. They can be switched and monitored both locally and remotely. 9/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 1/5 A for current transformers and 100 V for voltage transformers. > 48 h Energy transmission Contract monitoring Dispatch Virtual Default contract setting for monitoring limit per site (per minute) Import monitoring Avoiding penalties Prioritieslist control Planning In-plant power generation Inspection planning Cross-connection Schedules optimisation Coordination of all energies involved Energy operation plans Energy flow representation Transparency of energy consumption Load curves Identical. Power distribution at the industry and infrastructure level The distribution of power. They can be monitored and switched either locally or remotely. measurements for voltage.

The existing supply structures cannot be adapted to the new premises/building. This company then assumes the role of the energy supplier for all of the other companies formed on the premises. The maximum-demand contract is a government-oriented standard contract. Entire site P Maximum-demand monitoring of total import t Sub-site P Electricity Maximum-demand monitoring of sub-site t Grafik 9/5 Einkaufsgemeinschaften – Energiedurchleitung Purchasing associations – energy transmission If within an existing area several companies are formed out of one company through restructuring. at a disadvantage from the very beginning. as the representative of a purchasing association. a commercial building. The same bus is also used for switching within the power distribution system. energy purchasing will tend to move away from governmentally stipulated standard contracts towards market-oriented individual contracts. Rather. An advanced warning and a purposeful reduction of the import limit of all the sub-sites reduces an exceeding of the total maximum demand. If a sub-site exceeds the maximum demand. Customer requirements will play a much more important role. The skilled use of the total continuous energy purchasing contract results in cost advantages for all companies in the purchasing association. See also Chapter 7 “Communications in Power Distribution. yet this will not cause the energy supplier’s interests to be neglected. An automatic recording via bus-capable devices is the prerequisite for a centralized display and evaluation. Documenting the requirement profile in the form of a load curve over a lengthy period of time forms the basis to advantageously structure contractual negotiations. concludes an external continuous energy purchasing contract that includes the consumption quantity of the entire area. Inside buildings there are comparable supply structures. each one of these must be considered individually with regard to its energy import. under such market conditions. 9/5 9 . modules will result which describe power management from the operator’s point of view. Customers with insufficient knowledge of their requirement profile are. or other piece of property. The energy supplier of the area.” If one further develops the initially described view of power management as the special energy point of view of an industrial plant. Every company in the area receives a maximum-demand contract. This quantity is then divided by the area’s en- ergy supplier amongst the individual companies. Knowing the requirements exactly is an absolute must in order to optimally use the energy market for the medium load and to avoid the spot market for the peak load. The liberalization of the energy market also provides the possibility to explicitly order base load. the power infeed is assigned to one company. this does not necessarily lead to an exceeding of the maximum demand of the entire site: Thus no penalties will be charged. Since the total continuous purchasing contract does not represent the sum of the maximum peak imports. the situation could arise in which the total maximum demand is exceeded. but each individual subsite does not exceed its maximum demand. medium load and peak load. Energy purchasing In future.Power Management Neither new nor retrofitted systems use the information available in the distribution systems consistently.

The goal of dispatch is on the one hand. to get a better import price. Examples of this are companies with their branches or amalgamations of several independent companies. Thus. and the expected temperature at 12:00 noon. prognoses are to be structured in correspondence with this information. energy consumption is mainly linked to production. etc. there are energy markets. days taken off between a holiday and the weekend to lengthen the weekend. In industry.m. there is a standard load curve that is super-elevated/ adapted with the daily temperature at 06:00 a. A virtual total continuous purchasing contract is formed that represents the sum of all sites. weekends. a prognosis tool is absolutely necessary for the load side. 15 minutes – distributes the energy to the sites in such a way that the total continuous purchasing contract is not violated. The trick with dispatch is to combine consumption valleys of some sites with the consumption peaks of other sites in such a way that a continuous total import results. 9/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . that have a significantly different power consumption. 9/6 Purchasing associations – dispatch Basis for the energy market – prognosis The liberalized energy market allows the purchase of energy via energy markets in addition to the usual import of energy from the local power supply company.g. The procedures are proven and in use in many municipalities. only those customers/ consumers who know their requirements in the future can bid on these markets. Since quantities of energy that have to be ordered at least 24 h in advance are traded on these energy markets. Total import P t Allocation of maximum imported energy Return of available switch-off power Pdefault ∆P Pdefault ∆P Pdefault ∆P Site A P Site B P Site C P t t t Fig. The virtual total continuous purchasing contract monitors the maximum demand and within the period – e. Consequently. The daily load curves have proven themselves as prognoses in the municipalities. and on the other hand to generate a continuous total import load curve and thus enable a better exploitation of the continuous purchasing contract. by pooling large quantities of energy. Oslo (NordPool) and in Amsterdam (APX). In Leipzig (EEX)..Purchasing associations – dispatch Dispatch is about a purchasing association whose members are located at various sites. For every day of the week. the total import can be considerably smaller than that which would result from the sum of the individual sites.

Fig. These defined power loads will be placed in a priorities list. without negatively influencing the production process. depending on their position in the priority list. the average of the actually imported power will be calculated and permanently compared with the imported energy limit. The goal is to reduce peaks – higher energy consumption – and to fill valleys – not fully utilized power reserves. A priorities-list control reacts to the momentary actual state of the energy import. which should not be exceeded. Online energy measurement generates a load curve. This is a case of a period average.Power Management Defined energy quantities can be ordered at fixed prices 24 h in advance. Amsterdam) – prognoses Site x P block Priorities list 1 2 3 Consumer a Consumer b Consumer c Consumption control ON OFF release Release Blocking n Consumer x Feedback 0 t 15 M Forced ON Fig. 9/7 Basis for the energy market (Leipzig. Import monitoring – priority-list control Power shifts are performed by loads that.. i. only in accordance with demand and not as a result of direct planning.. 9/7 9 . Loads are switched or controlled according to the priorities list. however. a curve trace as a mountain range with peaks and valleys. Monitoring refers to the contractually agreed-upon imported energy limit. If the value rises too high. the priority list’s loads will be released either for switching on or controlling up. gas. can be switched on and off or controlled when required. A new contract will be required due to the peak established in the prognosis. 9/8 Demand monitoring – priorities-list control Import monitoring Every type of energy – electricity. Demand is established via prognosis procedures. the loads will be either switched off or controlled down. An ideal power import is characterized by a curve trace that is as level as possible.. On the Internet. .e. If the period monitoring shows that too little power is being consumed. in the period. sometimes water – has its own continuous purchasing contract. an amount is agreed upon with a broker.

9/9 Import monitoring – planning 9/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Regarding maximumdemand monitoring for the measurement of the energy types. the affiliated wiring. that is now subordinated to the control by planning. By carefully shifting individual batch starting points. the relevant hardware (metrology). After the analysis of the production requirements it is possible to time the production processes in such a way that an addition of load peaks is avoided and thus the energy import curve is leveled. Only in exceptional situations will the priority control. the relevant wiring from the maximum-demand monitoring into the load control must be installed. It is especially used where batch products are created or processed that show typical energy requirement curves in regularly recurring intervals.Import monitoring – planning Careful planning and control of energy consumption is an additional way to exploit the energy supply contract as much as possible. An optimal envelope curve results that remains below the import limit. For the open-loop control and closed-loop control of the loads. because their typical shape enables the prognostication of load behavior. and a corresponding software package for monitoring must be installed. Characteristic P 100 Product A 55 0 10 20 30 40 t Aggregated load curve P 100 Product is started in parallel at the same point in time 110 0 10 20 30 40 t P 100 Product is started within a time shift of 8 time units 80 0 10 20 30 40 50 t Fig. peak load situation can be detected in advance and prevented. intervene.

500 kW import limit. e. penalties are assessed.5 MW P Continuous energy purchasing contract Demand rate referred to import limit 4.500 € at 135 € /kW demand rate and 4. When this is exceeded.000 kWh power consumption and 0.5 MW Kilowatt-hour rate Period 135 0.g. a lower import limit can be agreed upon and the costs reduced. The quantity of energy actually used is calculated with the kilowatt-hour rate. Such costs arise whether energy is used or not. The sum of the demand rate and kilowatt-hour rate is then the total electricity cost. 9/10 Demand rate of 607. 9/9 9 .903. It doesn’t matter to him when the agreed-upon amount of electrical energy is used within this period. by 10% (450 kW) corresponds to 60. Clipping the import limit.600.125 MWh 0 15 30 45 t Fig. however.750 € per year. Kilowatt-hour rate of 1.500 kW).000 € at 21. A demand rate is set for such an import limit. Example for costs in Fig.296.06 15 €/kW €/kWh minutes 15-minute period Work 1. Example of an electricity purchasing contract The continuous energy purchasing contract contains the parameters demand rate. The supplier supplies a defined amount of electrical energy in a defined period. By clipping the import peaks.Power Management Import limit 4. This demand rate. kilowatt-hour rate and period. For example. The imported energy limit is calculated from the defined amount of energy within the period and is an average value. multiplied with the imported energy limit.500 € per year.06 € /kWh costs. (Power consumption at 360 days/ 24 h a day and medium power requirements of 2. Total costs of 1. existing emergency power units can be used to generate operating current. they correspond to the connection costs for domestic power supply. 9/10 Components of the continuous energy purchasing contract Import monitoring – in-plant power generation In-plant power generation within the framework of import monitoring is another possibility to prevent energy import levels from being exceeded. is the monetary value to be paid annually.

process heat). but also according to other criteria.Boiler unit Air Turbine unit B1 External purchase Water power T1 G Oil Air B2 AIn the boilers B1 and B2. it powers the generation of electricity in the generator and at the same time generates heat for thermal loads. the energy import from power supply companies and other in-plant generation. or a great deal of heat and little electricity. 9/11 Correlations (combined heat and power) Optimization of the energy mix Cogeneration optimization stands for the dependencies of the transformation of one type of energy into one or several others. The slow control possibility consists in generating more or less live steam. The system differentiates between two control possibilities. The sum of the electricity from the generators. the flashed steam is made available for the provision of heat (district heating. We will use a combined heat and power plant as an example here. which generates live steam from the primary energies oil and coal. These load curves demonstrate which energy was consumed and when it was consumed. If one proceeds from the assumption that electrical energy cannot be stored but must always be available when it is needed. and a corresponding software package for monitoring must be installed. 9/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . only the thermal load or the generation of live steam remains. then this aspect cannot be used as a control value. the live steam is flashed. The dependencies inside of the turbine. Energy flow representation In the energy flow representation. are documented in the turbine diagram. The fast control possibility of this system consists in using live steam to generate a great deal of electricity and little heat. Inside of the turbine.g. Coal T5 G Feed-water storage tank Condensate tank Customers Return-flow Thermal loads Loads Electrical loads Fig. a history can be displayed in the consumption profile up to the current time. Using these load curves. the affiliated wiring. including the non-linear correlations. e. Cogeneration optimizations can be interpreted along the lines of cost. live steam is generated using the primary energies coal or oil. generates the energy that is made available for the electrical loads. For the measurement of the energy types. The exploitation of this optimization potential is mathematically a very demanding matter and is only worthwhile after an exact assessment. The combination of the load curves with the process knowledge represents the savings potential. This live steam is lead to turbines T1 and T5. This live steam is used to generate steam in a turbine. the relevant hardware (metrology). such as from water power. To control the entire system. the measured values are represented over a period of time. ecological aspects.

Effects. a feedback arises in the shortest time. All measurements may be used for in-house expense distribution. the appropriate hardware (metrology).Power Management An expert interprets the load curves and makes changes in the technical. Via this representation. To better use the measurements. 9/11 9 . each measurement can be assigned several different cost center via a % key. The documentation of the data acquired via reading receipts uses the same types of representation as the automatic meter readings. correlations can be seen. non-certified measurements and simple measurements. A differentiation is made between certified measurements. Documentation of these is of great importance as one of the most important bases for proof of cost-cutting measures. These data are transferred to the power management system via screen mask input. Identical types of energy P 1 1 2 2 3 3 t Different types of energy 1 P 1 T 2 G 2 3 3 t Fig. the total power costs are distributed on the basis of consumption to cost center. The load curve is an irreplaceable measure in a modern company for the continual energy monitoring and the optimization resulting thereof. These types of power engineering correlations and the various dependencies within a system are generally not known to the operator. can be checked immediately with the help of the new load curves. The load curves are always a representation of the power output over a period of time. If meters are installed. For the energy analysis. 9/12 Energy flow representation – load curves Energy flow representation – cost center assignment Every measurement inside of a system can be used for cost center assignment. To measure these energies. measurements are recorded in the accompanying hardware and converted to power values in the software. the affiliated wiring and a corresponding software package must be installed. technological or organizational levels. This representation works out the complex interconnections. In many cases. so that an optimization of consumption by clipping the peaks and filling in the valleys can begin immediately. Normal measurements are only designed for expense distribution. various load curves are simultaneously displayed one above the other. positive as well as negative. Only certified measurements can be used as a basis for invoicing. For expense distribution. there is a meter reading by means of receipts.

9/14 Energy flow representation – cost center assignment (manual input) 9/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 9/13 Energy flow representation – cost center assignment (automatic) Input Receipt Measuring point Actual value Time Date % Cost center Sum per cost center Rate 1 Total kWh Rate 2 Total kWh Rate 3 Total kWh 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 1st quarter 2nd quarter 3rd quarter 4th quarter Estimated value Σ Load curves P t Fig.Measurement % Cost center Sum per cost center Rate 1 Total kWh Rate 2 Total kWh Rate 3 Total kWh 180 Transformer 1 Σ Transformer 2 160 140 120 100 Virtual measurement % Cost center Sum per cost center 80 60 40 20 0 1st quarter 2nd quarter 3rd quarter 4th quarter Transformer 1 ∆ Rate 1 Difference kWh Rate 2 Difference kWh Rate 3 Difference kWh BD-350A Fig.

Oberwellen.9 Apparent power Active power Reactive power ϕ Fig. Flickers can. etc. Efficiency improvement The efficiency improvement is always directed towards the existing equipment. 9/16 Reactive power = 100 = 90 = 43. the poorer the network quality will be.g.Power Management Measuring energy quality Documenting energy quality Influencing energy quality SIPCON 1 1 2 2 3 3 t Compensation Grafik 9/15 Energieflussdarstellung – Qualität (cos ϕ. e. Apparent power ϕ Active power cos ϕ = 0. in the second step the applied energy or type of energy plays a role. the poorer the network quality will be. see Fig. Flicker. Through the use of controllable fluorescent lamps. within limits. only the amount of light needed to illuminate the work area is generated. these measures also have a positive effect on the mechanical service life of the generator: it is increased. 9/13 9 . be compensated for with the appropriate devices. harmonics and flicker. These harmonics are modulated up to the normal network frequency of 50 Hz.power compensation systems adjust the generated reactive-power component to the default setting.6 = 25.8 kVA kW kVAr degrees Power types and cos ϕ A constant workplace illumination can be guaranteed by using a mix of daylight and fluorescent light. generate harmonics. Better insulation improves the thermal efficiency. The more flickers appear. ECO motors. The higher the share of the harmonics (x % of the fundamental component) is. Through the use of controllable drives. A network voltage that is not a pure sine wave arises. In future continuous energy purchasing contracts. Examples: Reactive power: Every motor generates a reactive-power component (cos j = ratio of active power to apparent power. by avoiding starts and stops – avoiding start and stop losses – a further total efficiency improvement of the generator is possible. Harmonics: Electronic power loads. converters. This point of view is first of all generator-oriented. an energy saving is feasible from the electrical point of view. these parameters will play an increasingly important role.. In addition to the efficiency improvement. The harmonics are measured and filtered by the appropriate devices. 9/16). Energy saving via new equipment requires the latest technology and an optimal design (power output always at the optimal efficiency). Reactive. Through full use of the control range – an adaptation to demand – or. Transienten) Quality Power quality stands for reactive power. Flicker: Flickers are temporary network interruptions in the millisecond range. Überspannungen.

g. is avoided. The thermal energy consumption per square meter in an office building serves as an example here. smoother. Further advantages are longer maintenance intervals and a longer service life.g. The performance of inspections and maintenance is viewed realistically. The maintenance schedule resulting from or recommended by this forms the basis for an efficient maintenance planning. as a list. the system can be connected online to the process in order to cyclically calculate the actual runtime (operating hours) and/or the operating cycles of the objects on the basis of the status signals (ON/OFF). which is usually associated with high repair and down-time expenses. Reports present the data graphically. the activities inspection (determination of the actual condition). longer service life Instant gradient violation Maximum permissible temperature gradient Fig. 9/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . The lower the value is. e. Evaluation – data validation Data validation forms characteristic values that allow a comparison with other projects. they can be realized in the automation systems.Efficiency improvement – thermodynamic closed-loop controllers The optimization of the start and shut-down processes of thermodynamic power loads (boilers) is not only interesting from an energy point of view. however. to DIN 31051. it is done neither too early nor too late. maintenance (maintaining the desired condition) and corrective maintenance (restoring the desired state). daily protocols. faster start-up. Because of this. longer maintenance intervals. The lesser the start and shut-down times. or include both types of representation in one. inter-site comparisons are made that reveal the savings potentials that a point of view restricted to one locality cannot detect. Evaluation – reports All information in the database is compiled in reports and presented in a customer-oriented manner. 9/17 Efficiency improvement – thermodynamic closed-loop controllers Evaluation – maintenance The maintenance of a technical installation comprises. In addition to regularly scheduled maintenance. temperature) rated by the manufacturer. it also affects the maintenance intervals and service life. The collected values of various items of real-estate (xx kJoule/m2 per month) serve as the comparative figure. the lower the power loss. acc. weekly statistics and monthly statistics serve as examples here. MICROMASTER ECO Photo 9/1 Efficiency improvement – optimizing equipment Motors Reduced start-up time Additionally. Operating hours and operating cycle meters are integrated in the system. The goal with this is the reduction of maintenance costs. Via data validation.. A system failure. Shift protocols. every operator attempts to approach the gradients (e. the better the thermal insulation will be. but not to exceed them.

reports P Comparison 180 160 140 Evaluation Site A t 120 100 80 60 40 Feedback to the sites P 20 0 1st quarter 2nd quarter 3rd quarter 4th quarter Site B t Fig. 9/19 Data validation – comparison of two sites with identical processes 9/15 9 . 9/18 Evaluation .Power Management Daily load curve – total import P 7000 6500 High rate 6000 Low rate 5500 5000 12:15 15:15 20:30 22:45 22:00 23:30 13:45 14:30 16:45 18:15 13:00 16:00 19:00 19:45 11:30 17:30 21:15 10:00 10:45 1:45 2:30 4:45 5:30 7:45 8:30 0:15 3:15 6:15 1:00 4:00 7:00 9:15 t Fig.

check-control indicator and much more are cyclically updated. Important data. recommended maintenance schedule. Process bus Fig.000 8 M M-interval counter 317 h 3108 Recommended M-date 31. 31. 9/20 Maintenance orders). In the example (Fig. the represented value will continue to be counted with a negative sign up to the completion notice. A maintenance order can be automatically activated when the recommended date is reached or manually at any time by the operator. 2000 08:45 10. 11. 07 2000 10:05 . When the runtimes or operating cycles are exceeded. The progress within the maintenance is highlighted in color. such as operating hours and operating cycles of the object. remaining runtime until the next scheduled maintenance date. Further detailed information can be simply called up by a “mouse click” on the “Tabs”.The automatic calculation of the maintenance schedule refers to the earliest calculated time. 9/21 Maintenance status 9/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 07 2000 10:05 . operating cycles and maintenance schedule are of lesser importance. Runtime Operating cycles Calendar Process signal M-interval data 1500 h 20. The check-control indicator breaks down the maintenance time via 5 symbolic LED’s in 20% intervals. 9/20 Maintenance orders Fig. The status display of the maintenance shows all scheduled orders in tables. 08. 2000 12:15 Recommended M-date for your M-order Data manager 31. the runtime determines the maintenance order.

: If the load is blocked. transparent. for example.e. the maximumdemand monitor switches loads and devices off or on again. must be kept ready in order to avoid load over ranges. to set up the process correspondingly and create possibilities of temporally staggering the power consumption. The maximum-demand monitor only interferes with operationally connected loads in correspondence to the set priority (1 to 10). via pushbutton. The only requirement is. operational switching by the operator always has the highest priority. Each of these loads can be blocked from the correspondingly assigned switch and released again. binary inputs. The result: One can reduce the ordered power reserves and further save expenses. In systems that are not monitored. On the basis of a defined maximum average power. the maximum-demand monitor is not available for switching. power reserves. especially for process control.Power Management Example of maximumdemand monitoring with instabus EIB Power costs are becoming increasingly important. i. because these make themselves noticeably felt in the calculation: expenses rise. efficient: the maximum-demand monitor’s work. Switchover high rate/low rate S0 interface Synchronous pulse from the power station Visualization software Maximumdemand monitor Meter PC instabus EIB Actuators Electric heating Lighting Fan Loads available for load management Sensors Electric heating Lighting Fan ON/OFF blocking or release . In so doing. Photo 9/2 Maximum-demand monitor 9/17 9 . sensors or control modules Fig. This is where the maximum-demand monitor steps in: It effectively suppresses peak loads and thus unnecessary expenses. 9/22 Schematic diagram of maximum-demand monitoring Simple.

9/25 Specific statements about the switching performance are made for the 120 channels 9/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . The device shows the actual switching status of channels 1–8 via LED’s. Special LED’s indicate if a warning limit is exceeded during the high or low rates. 9/24 Time delays for the restart function can be entered Fig. The parameters required for load control can be set for all available 120 channels. Fig. and a further display shows where the maximum-demand monitor within the integration period is temporally located. 9/23 System-specific information and limit values are entered in the general section Fig. Easy commissioning The maximum-demand monitor is commissioned with the EIB-Tool software for instabus®EIB®.Up to 120 channels Up to 120 channels are available for control.

it records load curves and consumption values. The current switching status and the important system parameters are displayed. 9/27 Integration period 9/19 9 . Typical of this: The low power underrange at the beginning and the low power overrange at the end of the integration period. The software for power statistics is part of the instabus EIB EIB visualization software and is also available as a stand-alone version. one can compile statistics – the basis for the customer’s negotiation of better and less expensive supply contracts with the power supply company. Through this. Over the entire cycle of the integration period. It facilitates online tracking of the switching priorities with a PC and allows them to be changed. monthly and annual statistics which can then be exported to Excel for further evaluation. Green and red: the respective power demanded. the maximum-demand monitor can also be operated as a mere detection unit during a recording phase. 9/26 Depiction of the maximum-demand monitor in the instabus EIB visualization software Basically.Power Management Software for power statistics The software for power statistics enables the compilation of demand integration periods and daily. Integration period The power statistics of an integration period over 15 minutes are displayed in minutes. however. red: the released power. green: the switchedoff power. Fig. Fig. In this case. this results in an even balance. The individual channels need not be parameterized for this.

Switched-off and released power outputs represent the demanded power of all loads.Daily profile The evaluation of daily statistics shows the individual integration periods. 9/28 Power statistics as software tool with daily statistics Fig 9/29 Switching states of the channels – history database 9/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . power overranges are unavoidable. History database In the instabus EIB visualization software’s history database. Fig. When manually switching the loads. In spite of changing the power demand. the switching states of the channels are depicted in their temporal course – just as they result from the priority assignment and requirements. the maximum-demand monitor limits the released power and thus prevents an exceeding of the admissible limit value.

Power Management Fig. 9/30 Power statistics 9/21 9 .

10 10.1 10.3 Measuring and Recording Power Quality Overview SIMEAS Q SIMEAS R .2 10.

Measuring and Recording Power Quality chapter 10 .

the time of day could be considered in the price calculation (cheap night current. Over the last few years. to an even larger degree. These demands result in the following consequences for the supplier: C The energy rates will have to reflect the quality supplied. for example. the term “quality” was associated mainly with the reliable availability of energy and the prevention of major deviations from the rated voltage. On the one hand. the term of voltage quality has gained a completely new significance. This requires the use of suitable measuring instruments in order to verify compliance with the limits defined for the individual characteristics as laid down in the relevant standards. to offer energy at lower prices and to take cost saving measures. as well as the limits of emissions from these devices. expensive peak time rates) and agreements could be made on the maximum and minimum power consumption within defined periods. In contrast to usual commodity trade. frequency and waveshape. however. these quantities are increasingly affected by extreme load variations (e. Examples are in particular C Semiconductor industry C Paper industry C Automotive industry (welding processes) C Industries with high energy requirements Siemens offers a wide range of equipment for the recording. the polluter may be requested to provide for corrective action. C Customers polluting the grid with negative effects on power quality will have to expect higher power rates – “polluter-must-pay” principle. devices have become more and more sensitive and depend on the adherence to certain limit values in voltage. Power quality standards The specific characteristics of supply voltage have been defined in standards which are used to determine the level of quality with reference to C Frequency C Voltage level C Waveshape C Symmetry of the three-phase voltages These characteristics are permanently influenced by accidental changes resulting from load variations.g. The latest development shows an increased tendency to include the aspect of voltage quality into the purchase orders and cost calculations. disturbances from other machines and by the occurrence of insulation faults.1 Overview Introduction For more than 100 years. 10/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . measured. in steelworks) and non-linear consumers (electronic devices. the quality of voltage depends not only on the individual supplier but. on the customers. The significant aspect for the customer is that non-satisfying quality and availability of power supply may cause production losses resulting in high costs or leading to poor product quality. fluorescent lamps). If these limit values are exceeded. archiving and evaluation of voltage quality. Competitive advantage through power quality In addition to the requirements stated in standards. in kilowatt-hours. the liberalization of the energy markets forces the utilities to make themselves stand out against their competitors. Previously. C Cost-saving through network planning and distribution (being different from today’s practice in power systems. electrical energy has been a product.10 Measuring and Recording Power Quality 10. In addition. on the other hand. The IEC series 1000 and the standards IEEE 519 and EN 50160 describe the compatibility level required by equipment connected to the power grid. which is oriented towards the customers with the highest power requirements). and its value was determined by the amount of energy supplied.

The measured values can be automatically transferred to a central computer system at freely definable intervals via a standardized PROFIBUS®-DP interface and at a transmission rate of up to 1. export). However. This enables the registration of all characteristics of voltage quality according to the relevant standards. – Value below min. many electronic consumers require a defined power quality in order to work properly. as well as 100 to 230 V AC. Volt. Complete recording and evaluation of power quality according to international standards is imperative. Photo 10/1 SIMEAS Q power quality recorder Front view PROFIBUS-DP 20 21 22 23 24 25 SIMEAS Q 7KG-8000-8AB/BB RUN BF DIA 75 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 90 Side view Special features C Cost-effective solution C Interfacing to the SICAM® PAS power automation system possible C Comprehensive measuring functions which can also be used in the field of automatic control engineering C Function modules for SIMATIC® S7-300/400 C Minimum dimensions C Communication C PROFIBUS-DP C RS 232/modem C RS 485 Measuring inputs 3 voltage inputs. SIMEAS Q 7KG-8000-8AB/BB Input: Current AC 1 2 3 4 5 6 Input: Volt. measured values will only be recorded if one or several limit values are exceeded. available either for – Device in operation – Energy pulse – Signaling the direction of energy flow (import. Application The growing use of non-linear or unbalanced loads is increasingly having an effect on power quality in supply systems. 0–6 A Outputs/display C 2 relays as signaling outputs. 10/3 10 .Measuring and Recording Power Quality 10. In this mode. 10/1 SIMEAS Q power quality recorder. the device is also capable of recording faults. limit for cos ϕ – Pulse indicating a voltage dip – 3 LED's indicating the operating status and PROFIBUS activity Terminal block 90 105 Connection terminals 20 21 22 23 24 25 PROFIBUS-DP Aux. Inadequate power quality has an adverse effect on the operating safety of consumers within the power supply system and can cause outages with serious consequences.2 SIMEAS Q The SIMEAS Q quality recorder SIMEAS®Q is a is a measuring instrument for recording electrical parameters in power distribution systems.5 Mbit/s. 0–280 V 3 current inputs. dimension drawings Auxiliary power Two types: 24 to 60 V DC and 110 to 250 V DC. Besides a continuous recording of all relevant parameters. Functions SIMEAS Q is a cost-effective measuring and recording instrument for quality monitoring of electrical power supply (low voltage / medium voltage). AC 7 8 9 10 IL1 IL1 IL2 IL2 IL3 IL3 ULN UL1 UL2 UL3 All dimensions in mm Fig. for example. which are utilized for power quality analyses with regard to compliance to standards EN 50160 and IEC 61000.

SIMEAS Q Telecommunications network SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q with PC as a master The SIMEAS Q units are installed at various points to record series of electrical quantities in order to analyze power quality. measured values acquired with the SIMEAS Q can be used for control tasks. For connection to a PC. The open communication interface permits data transmission between SIMEAS Q units and all types of PROFIBUS-DP Masters. implemented and certified according to standard EN 50170 Volume 2. The measured values stored in the device memory are called up with a personal computer via one of 3 possible communication interfaces and can then be evaluated. enables fast adaptation to PLC systems.Two different connection methods or system configurations are possible. such as programmable controllers or personal computers (with integrated PROFIBUS-DP hardware). That way. They permit fast configuration of customer-specific PLC programs for applications combining SIMEAS Q with these PLC systems. It is then possible to set up a system for measured value acquisition and evaluation using the SICARO Q Manager software. Fig. depending on the application and existing infrastructure. One is to use a central PC as the master. serial RS232 interface C Serial RS485 interface SIMEAS Q with PLC systems as master The SIMEAS Q version with a PROFIBUS-DP interface opens up a further field of application. The PROFIBUS interface. 10/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 10/3 SIMATIC S7 PLC as the master station with various PROFIBUS-DP slaves Detailed information on how to retrieve measurement data from SIMEAS P via PROFIBUS is available to everyone in the SIMEAS Q user description. Function blocks are available for the SIMATIC S7-300 and -400 PLC systems. with an internal or external DP interface. the following communication interfaces are available: C PROFIBUS-DP interface C Modem-capable. the SIMEAS Q can be used as a ”sensor for electrical quantities“. Together with programmable control systems (PLC). 10/2 Using the SICARO Q Manager software and a PC with several SIMEAS Q units SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q Fig. The other possibility is to link up to a PLC system where the SIMEAS Q is connected to the central master as a slave.

30 sec 1. 5. 6. EN 50160). 2. 10. 5. 30 sec 1. 2. 5. 6. 15. 10. 5. 10. 10. 6. 2. 30 sec 1. 15. 10. 5. 2. 15. the current time and date information and the mean value since the last limit violation of that measured variable are stored in the memory. 10/5 10 .g. depending on the type of power system. In “continuous recording” mode. 6. 60 min 10 min fixed acc. 30 sec 1. 15. 30 sec 1. 6. 2. 10. 15. 2. 30. the rms values are acquired and stored in the memory along with the relevant time and date information. 30. depending on the setting for each measured variable. the SIMEAS Q compares the half period measurement of a variable. 60 min 1. 6. 60 min 1. 6. 5. Fault recording “Fault recording” means that measurement data are recorded when the average measured value violates one or more defined upper or lower limits (thresholds). Acquisition of maximum and minimum values of measured variables within the measurement period (averaging time) is also possible. 30. 5. 2. 2. 30. 6. 30. 5. 6. 6. 5. 60 min Max. 5. 30. depending on the averaging time set. 15. 60 min 1. 60 min 1. During measurement. 30. 10. 30. 15. 15. 6. 60 min 1. 2. with the set thresholds and is thus able to record very short voltage dips. 10. 5. Table 10/1 shows which measured variables can be acquired by continuous recording. 10. 5. 6. possible yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes no Active energy – import / active energy – export 1. 15. 15. 2. This records a “chain of measured values” whose resolution can range from low to very high. the SIMEAS Q can record measured variables as defined in the standards (e. 30. When a limit is reached. to IEC 60868 and IEC 60868 A – Flicker meters 120 min fixed acc. 2. which can be used simultaneously. 6. 10. 5. 6. 30 sec 1. 2. 10. 10. 15. 2. 6. 15. Measured variable Rms values phase-to-ground voltages or phase-to-phase voltages Rms values phase currents System frequency (always measured at input UL1) Active power per phase and total active power Reactive power per phase and total reactive power Apparent power per phase and total apparent power Power factor per phase and total power factor Voltage unbalance Current unbalance Flicker factor short-term per phase voltage (Ast or Pst) Flicker factor long-term per phase voltage (Ast or Pst) 1st to 40th harmonic voltage per phase 1st to 40th harmonic current per phase Total harmonic distortion (THD) per phase Possible averaging time 1. which corresponds to the rms value. 2. 2. 30 sec 1. 15. 6. 15. to IEC 60868 and IEC 60868 A1 – Flicker meters 1. 30 sec 1. 6. 2. 10. 15. 2. 5. 10. 15. 2. 6. 5. 2. 60 min 1. 10. 30 sec 1. 2. 15. 10. 30 sec 1. 30. 6. 5. 6. the lowest possible averaging time of 10 ms is selected. 6. 5. 2. 6. 30 sec 1. 30. 10. 5. 10. 15./min.Measuring and Recording Power Quality Recording of measured values is possible in two modes. 10. 6. 6. 6. 10. 60 min 1. 10. 15. 10. 5. 5. 15. 15. 15. 60 min 1. 10. 15. To record voltage dips. 10. 2. Table 10/2 shows the measured variables for which fault recording can be parameterized. 2. 2. 5. 15. 5. 5. 5. 60 min 1. 60 min 1. 30 sec 1. 10. 5. 2. 60 min Reactive energy inductive / reactive energy capacitive Apparent energy Table 10/1 Possible measured variables for continuous recording This type of recording is primarily used for recording voltage dips. C Continuous recording C Fault recording Continuous recording In continuous recording. 15. 30. 30.

15. 100. 5. 2. 30. 5. 6. 5. 5. 30. 10. 2. 6. 10. energy export – Reactive energy. 30 sec 1. 6. 15. 6. 2. 6 A can be measured) without switchover. 6. 2. 2. 30 sec 1. 50. 15. 6. 2. If the measurement data are not retrieved. 60 min 1. 60 min 1. 6. 10. 30 sec 1. 2. The rated current values are 1 and 5 A (max. 5. 15. 60 min 1.Data memory and data transmission The SIMEAS Q has a measurement memory with a capacity for 70. 30. 30. 6. 60 min 1. 10. 15. 5. 15. 15. 30 sec 1. 30. 6. 2. 6. It must therefore be ensured that the measured data are always retrieved before memory overflow / ring buffer mode occurs. 6. Relay outputs The SIMEAS Q is fitted with 2 relay outputs (opto-relays). 10. 15. 50. 15. 10. 5. 10. 5. 5. 2. 2. if higher voltages are applied. 10. 30. 2. 5. 10. 10. 10. 100. 10. 6. 20. 6. 5. 10. 5. 60 min 1. 10. 30. 30 sec 1. 15. 6. 2. 6. 30 sec 1. 2. 6. 500 ms 1. 30. 30. 2. 15. 6. Retrieving measurement data frees capacity in the SIMEAS Q. 60 min 10. 10. 6. 20. 10. 30 sec 1. 2. 15. 10. 60 min 1. 15. 10. 2. 10. 60 min 1. 10. 15. 15. 30 sec 1. 500 ms 1. 60 min Number of thresholds 5 5 System frequency (always measured at input UL1) Active power per phase and total active power Reactive power per phase and total reactive power Apparent power per phase and total apparent power Power factor per phase and total power factor Voltage balance Current balance 1st to 40th harmonic voltage per phase 1st to 40th harmonic current per phase Total harmonic distortion (THD) per phase Table 10/2 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 2 per harmonic 2 per harmonic 2 Possible measured variables for fault recording C Pulses on voltage dips (contact closed for 500 ms if violation of the first threshold below rated voltage detected) The relay outputs enable the SIMEAS Q to be used for acquisition of measured values and for energy metering. 2. 15. which causes loss of data and gaps in the measured value chain. 10. 5. 6. capacitive – Reactive energy. One of the following functions can be assigned to these outputs: C Indication device active (switched on) C Energy metering pulse per settable energy value for: – Active energy. 5.000 measured values. 15. 60 min 1. 5. which is then available again for new measurement data. Information on SIMEAS Q configuration Up to 400 V (L-L). 30. In normal measurement mode. 5. 2. 10. 2. 30 sec 1. 30. 15. 6. 15. 15. 5. via an external transformer. 5. 6. 2. 10/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 15. 60 min 1. the capacity of the data memory indirectly defines the intervals at which the PC must retrieve measurement data in order to obtain an unbroken chain of values. 30 sec 1. 5. 2. 5. 6. 5. inductive – Apparent energy C Indication active power import (contact open) or active power export (contact closed) C Limit cos ϕ ((contact closed for as long as cos ϕ is lower than a settable limit value) Measured variable Rms values phase-to-ground voltages or phase-to-phase voltages Rms values phase currents Possible averaging time 10. The information on time and date of the measurement are stored along with each measured value. energy import – Active energy. 6. 15. the device is connected directly. 6. 15. 30 sec 1. or. 15. 2. 30. the SIMEAS Q goes into memory overflow / ring buffer mode. 5. 2. 5. 2. 10. 5. 60 min 1. 30 sec 1. 10.

identical load SIMEAS Q connection terminals 3-wire 3-phase current. any load (high-voltage network) SIMEAS Q connection terminals Photo 10/2 SIMEAS Q connection examples The above listed input circuitries are merely examples. 10/7 10 . Voltage transformers can also be connected in star or V topology. All of the input/output terminals not required for measurements remain unassigned. the device may also be connected without current or voltage transformers. identical load (low-voltage network) SIMEAS Q connection terminals 4-wire 3-phase current. any load SIMEAS Q connection terminals 4-wire 3-phase current. identical load SIMEAS Q connection terminals 3-wire 3-phase current. Up to the maximum permissible current and voltage values.Measuring and Recording Power Quality Single-phase AC current SIMEAS Q connection terminals 4-wire 3-phase current.

e. current and unbalanced load (positive and negative phase sequence system) C Falling below the limit values for voltage. high. All functions can be performed simultaneously and are combined in one unit with no need for additional devices to carry out the different tasks. C Component of secondary equipment of power plants and substations or industrial plants. binary signals and direct voltages or currents with a high time resolution.and medium-voltage systems. The recorded data are then archived and can either be printed directly in the form of graphics or be transferred to a diagnosis system which can. current and unbalanced load (positive and negative phase sequence system) C Limiting values for sudden changes in up. occurs.3 SIMEAS R Recording units The SIMEAS R fault recorder and PQ recorder Application C “All-in-one” recorder for extra-high-. be used to identify the fault location. Fault detection is effected with the help of trigger functions.10. With analog quantities this refers to C Exceeding the limit values for voltage. Monitoring of the binary signals includes C Signal status (high.g. Special features C The modular design enables the implementation of different configurations starting from systems with 8 analog and 16 binary inputs up to the acquisition of data from any number of analog and binary channels C Clock with time synchronization using GPS or DCF77 C Data output via postscript printer. the specific fault will be registered including its history. a short circuit. for example. remote data transmission with a modem via the telephone line. If a fault event. low) C Status changes 10/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . connection to LAN and WAN Photo 10/4 Fault recording Photo 10/2 SIMEAS R systems are used in power plants … Photo 10/3 … and to monitor overhead transmission lines Fault recording This function is used for the continuous monitoring of the AC voltages and currents.or downward direction. Functions Digital fault recording system.

(limit of error ±1 mHz) C Active power. A new current transformer concept enables a measuring range between 0.or four-wire connection is used. Sequential control An intelligent logic operation is used to make sure that each record refers to the actual duration of the fault event.g.s. e. a three.g. from transducers Depending on the individual network configuration. Furthermore. this enables a true image of the transient DC component in the short-circuit current.5 mA and 400 Arms with tolerance ranges of < 0. History Depends on the averaging interval. reactive power (reactive displacement power). direct current is registered in the range above 7 A. The recorder is also used for the registration of power swings. values of voltages and currents C Active power C Reactive power C Power factor C Frequency C Positive and negative sequence voltage and current C Weighted and unweighted total harmonic distortion (THD) C 5th to 50th harmonics (depending on the averaging time) C DC signals. the profile of the measured values will be recorded including their history. between a voltage dip caused by a short circuit (low voltage. Fault diagnosis Performed with the SICARO® software package. e. caused by the outage of a power plant or when high loads are applied. Digital recording This function is used for the continuous registration of the mean values of the measured values at intervals which can be freely defined. If major deviations are detected.g. In single-phase and three-phase systems. Automatic power analysis With the help of the SICARO software package (see SICARO page 08).2%) C Power factor Averaging interval A value between 1 and 250 periods of the network frequency can be selected. high current) which needs to be recorded.Measuring and Recording Power Quality Logic triggers Logic triggers can be defined by combining any types of trigger event (analog or binary). a power analysis of a station can be created automatically. 10/9 10 . the following measured variables are recorded: C R. 12. The device can distinguish between different causes of a fault. (limit of error ≤ 0. Data compression For best utilization of the memory space and for high-speed remote transmission. 10 s times the averaging periods. i. This is to prevent continuous violation of a limit value (e. undervoltage) from causing permanent recording and blocking of the device. They are used to avoid undesired recording by increasing the selectivity of the trigger function. Binary signals The sampling frequency at the binary inputs is 2 kHz.g. Analog measured values 16-bit resolution for voltages and DC quantities and 2 x 16-bit resolution for AC voltages. Frequency/power recording (F/PR) This function continuously monitors the gradient of the frequency and/or power of one or more three-phase feeders.2% at < 7 Arms and < 1% at > 7 Arms. the data can be compressed to as little as 2% of their original size.8 kHz at 50 Hz and 15. and the disconnection of a feeder (voltage low.e. Measured variables C Frequency of one of the voltages. current low) which does not need to be recorded. The sampling frequency is 256 times the network frequency.m. e.36 kHz at 60 Hz for each channel.

g. enables the storage of approx. The use of a separate SOE recorder will no longer be required. evaluation and archiving (database system) of the data received from a SIMEAS R or OSCILLOSTORE® and from digital protection devices. With the help of the SICARO program. 10/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 120.5 ms and is then provided with a time stamp indicating the time information from the year down to the millisecond.m. The SICARO PQ evaluation program The SICARO PQ software package is suitable for use in personal computers provided with the operating systems MS WINDOWS 2000 or WINDOWS XP.s. The mass memory of the device can be configured according to requirements (a 5 MB memory.000 status changes). The time-synchronous power output enables the combined representation with analog curves. Modules are available for signal voltages between 24 and 250 V. for example. of alarm and command signals together with the course of relay voltages and currents.25 Telephone Station level Configuration Evaluation Printer DAKON XP Office LAN Decentralized database Diagnostic system Data compression Remote control. It is used for remote transmission. The program includes a parameterization function for remote configuration of SIMEAS R and OSCILLOSTORE units. values and diagnosis Spontaneous print Spontaneous print Containerized database Configuration Evaluation WAN ISDN X. automatic mode Stations LAN Bay level SIMEAS R 8 analog/ 16 binary inputs Fig 10/3 Example of a distributed recording system realized with SIMEAS R recorders and a DAKON XP data central unit “Sequence of Event” (SOE) recording Each status change occurring at the binary inputs is registered with a resolution of 0. e.Load dispatch center Office R. the event signals can be displayed in the form of a text list in chronological order. 200 status changes per second can be stored for each group of 32 inputs.

the SIMEAS R system has been designed in such a way as to allow both centralized or decentralized installation. of course. The modular structure with a variety of interface modules (DAU’s) provides a maximum of flexibility. digital protection devices of different make can be connected to the DAKON XP. diagrams of the rms values or vector diagrams (Photo 10/7). switched line or a network. symmetry. active and reactive power. harmonics. Additional diagnosis modules can be used to perform an automatic analysis of fault events and to identify the fault location. since it enables the processing of up to 32 analog and 64 binary signals. etc. The individual diagrams can.Measuring and Recording Power Quality The program enables fully-automated data transmission of all recorded events from the acquisition units to one or more evaluation stations via dedicated line. 1/2 19" design Photo 10/6 Rear view of a SIMEAS R unit with terminals for the signals and interfaces for data transmission 10/11 10 . The different quantities measured can be immediately calculated by marking a specific point in a diagram with the cursor (impedance. With the help of a DAKON XP unit (see Fig. Information for project planning with SIMEAS R The secondary components of high or medium-voltage systems can either be accommodated in a central relay room or in the feeder-dedicated low-voltage compartments of switchgear panels. either 1/2 19" or 19" (full width). the full-width version of 19" is more economical. In all other cases.). The recording unit can be delivered in two different widths. Often. be adjusted to individual requirements with the help of variable scaling and zoom functions. the received data can then be immediately displayed on a monitor and/or printed (Fig. this also applies to high-voltage stations where each feeder is provided with an extra relay kiosk for the secondary equipment. In addition. reactance. peak value. The program also supports server/client structures. rms value. 10/3). The first version is favorable if measured values of only one feeder line are to be considered (8 analog and 16 binary signals). Records from different devices can be combined in one diagram. 10/3). The number of DAU’s which can be integrated in the recording system is unlimited. The SICARO PQ program is provided with a very convenient graphical evaluation program for the creation of a time diagram with the curve profiles. Photo 10/5 SIMEAS R for 8 analog and 16 binary inputs. For this reason. several devices can be interlinked and automatically controlled.

g. The DAKON XP performs a great variety of different functions. via the telephone network. The binary inputs are connected to floating contacts. If more than one SIMEAS R is installed. disconnector status signals. evaluation and fault recording 10/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .The voltage inputs are designed for direct connection to low-voltage transformers. Current inputs are suitable for direct connection to current transformers (IN = 1 or 5 A). DAU version VCDAU Measured values 4 AC voltages 4 AC currents 16 binary signals Application Monitoring of voltages and currents of three-phase feeders or transformers including the signals from protective equipment. we recommend the use of a DAKON XP unit (data collection platform). Monitoring of busbar voltages VDAU 8 AC voltages 16 binary signals 8 AC voltages 16 binary signals CDAU Monitoring of supply lines and transformer currents or currents at the incoming feeders and busbar couplings For monitoring of current quantities supplied by transducers and telecontrol units. Moreover. it supports the automatic fax transmission of the data. circuit-breaker monitoring DDAU 8 DC currents or 16 binary signals BDAU 16 binary signals Table 10/1 Use of the data acquisition units (DAU's) Photo 10/7 SICARO program. e. Data transmission is preferably effected via telephone network or WAN (Wide Area Network). to IEC 60255.g. All inputs comply with the relevant requirements for protection devices acc. 20 mA or 1 and 10 V Event acquisition of alarm signals. e. the DAKON XP automatically collects all information registered by the devices connected and stores these data on a decentralized basis. The DAKON XP creates a link with the SICARO evaluation program. A database management system distributes the recorded data to different stations either automatically or on command.

Measuring and Recording Power Quality 10/13 10 .

11 11.2 11.4 Meters and Measuring Instruments SIMEAS P Power Meter SIMEAS T Transducers for High-Current Power Quantities Meters/Measuring Instruments as Modular Devices 4NC3 and 4NC5 Current Transformers .3 11.1 11.

Meters and Measuring Instruments chapter 11 .

There is a high cost saving potential in the monitoring and selective control of the energy flow in complex power networks and processes – in industry as much as in functional and commercial buildings like bakeries and workshops. this availability can be better planned in relation to the utilization level. To match every requirement with the most suitable device.11 Meters and Measuring Instruments Today. harmonic voltages and currents. we offer you our power meters. This potential benefits those who analyze the load curves of the actual power consumption. voltages and power values in distributions in order to know the system utilization so that overloads do not occur. Those who go one step further can even save money when purchasing energy and reduce the cost for the energy purchase. However. it is standard procedure to monitor currents. such as phase voltages and currents. Prerequisite to this are suitable measuring instruments. symmetry factor. To do so. There is a wide range of industrial and commercial applications. devices are available in different basic and extended versions: Standard versions C SIMEAS P500/P550 (with graphic display) C SIMEAS P100 with the same functionality as SIMEAS P500 but without display 11/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . For this we can also offer you solutions up the online recording via PC and an integration into our Power Management System (see Chapter 9). Photo 11/1 SIMEAS P power meter 11. It is used for the recording and/or display of measurements in electric power supply systems. More than 80 measuring parameters. a further great opportunity opens up: saving potentials and cost optimization can be utilized in a target-specific way. the possibility to measure currents.1 SIMEAS P Power Meter SIMEAS P is a power meter for panelboard mounting or DIN rail mounting. There is a high potential in this option. voltages and power values to increase system availability has by far not been exhausted. When using the measurement results. energy and external measuring parameters and operating states can be viewed at the graphic display and transferred to a central computer system for further processing using the PROFIBUS-DP or Modbus RTU/ASCII standards. reactive and apparent power. transducers and transformers. active. If you have detailed information on the consumption of the devices connected to the power system and use these data appropriately.

SIMEAS P also offers the possibility to parameterize several limit groups with the limit values of the measured quantities. For the user this means a high degree of system protection. All derived quantities are then calculated by a processor and available for display on the screens and transfer via a serial interface. Quality Development and production of the device in our Berlin plant which is ISO 9001-certified ensure the highest possible quality standard. content and sequence can be parameterized. reactive and apparent energy per phase and for the entire system C Power factor per phase and for the entire system C Symmetry factor of currents and voltages 11/3 11 . menu-guided parameterization make SIMEAS P operation simple and easy to understand. type. or to single-phase systems C Large graphic display with background lighting C Very easy parameterization and calibration via panel front keys or using a PC-based parameterization software C The number and contents of the measurement display screens can be configured by the user as desired C Relay outputs can be parameterized for energy pulses. Functionality Input voltages and input currents are scanned and used to generate the rms values. there is a status line which shows the status. limit-value violations or status messages Measured quantities: C C C C Rms values of the phase voltages Rms values of the phase currents System frequency Active. battery and clock module) C SIMEAS P200 with the same functionality as SIMEAS P600 but without display C SIMEAS P610/ P660 has the same functionality as SIMEAS P600. They can be linked with AND/OR and their violation can be indicated at the meters or output at the binary outputs. EMC proof C Complies with all relevant national and international standards Connection SIMEAS P can be connected to all types of power systems (up to 690-V systems) ranging from the singlephase type to the 4-wire type. Parameterization and calibration are secured against unauthorized use via parameterizable password protection. 3 pushbuttons have been integrated in the device front for device operation.Extended versions C SIMEAS P600/ P650 (with graphic display. Safety Electrical isolation between the inputs and outputs with high test voltages ensures the greatest possible safety. reliability and a long service life of the devices. On the measurement screens. CE mark. Measurement display The user can adapt the representation of measured quantities on the graphic display screens of the SIMEAS P to suit his requirements. Further quality features are their high precision which remains constant over the years. interfacing and diagnostic messages of the SIMEAS P. P500/P550 standard version C Suitable for connection to 3-phase systems in 3-wire and 4-wire design with identical or different loads. UL listing. Clear designations and texts and an uncomplicated. memory. CE mark. A universal power unit with ratings from 24 to 250 V DC and 100 to 250 V AC makes it truly universal. Their number. An oscilloscope triggering is thus also possible. Operation Besides the graphic display. the connection is made either directly or via transformers. but it can additionally be equipped with a maximum of 8 different analog and digital input/output modules C Harmonic voltages and harmonic currents up to the 21st order C Total harmonic distortion (THD) C Constant high measuring accuracy over many years. reactive and apparent power C Active. Up to 20 screens can be addressed via the front panel keys. The display is refreshed in intervals of 1 s. EMC proof and the fulfillment of all relevant national and international standards.

Communication Every SIMEAS P features 2 standard protocols. inputs which are not required are not allocated.SIMEAS P 7KG7 RS485/Modbus 1 Protective Ground 3A 4 RTS 5 GND 6 +5V 8B PROFIBUS-DP 1 Protective Ground 3B 4 CTRL-A 5 GND 6 +5V 8A Communication R 1 2 Measurement Auxiliary voltage Communication Voltage Current L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 PE PG N/- L/+ Terminal F Terminal E Terminal H 24 – 250 V DC 100 – 230 V AC Terminal G J RS485 RS232 L1 L2 L3 N k l k l k l Fig. PROFIBUS-DP and Modbus RTU/ASCII. 11/1 shows the input/output circuitry of the SIMEAS P. 11/2 Counters 1 to 4 Limit-value group 1 UL1 < 690 V or UL2 < 690 V or UL3 < 690 V Binary output 1/2 Oscilloscope trigger Limit values Limit values Several limit-value groups with up to 6 measuring parameters can be set at the SIMEAS P. The measurements can be linked with AND/OR and counted in counters if limits are violated. amplitudes of the energy quantities per pulse can also be parameterized. 11/1 Inputs and outputs Service SIMEAS P devices require no maintenance and thanks to their modular design. Protocols are selected via the parameterization functions. hysteresis. as well as an internal protocol for the SIMEAS P software. The basis for this is an RS485 interface with standardized 9-pole D-SUB connector. Inputs/Outputs Fig. or output to binary outputs and used for triggering the oscilloscope. they are easily serviceable. They can easily be calibrated using the panel front keys or a PC and the corresponding parameterization software. Binary outputs SIMEAS P has 2 binary outputs for free parameterization as follows: C Status messages C Energy quantities from the measured quantities table C Limit-value violations Pulse output time. Fig. 11/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Device versions SIMEAS P500 is also available with UL listing. Depending on the type of network.

Photo 11/2 Screens Oscilloscope for sinusoidal values C 9 screen types can be selected: – 4 types of measured-value screens – 1 list screen for min-ø-max values – 2 screens for harmonics – 1 screen for the oscilloscope function – 1 screen as vector diagram Measured-value screens C Number and content of the measured-value screen with the measured quantities can be individually designed C In the default setting. Table 11/2) and recorded together with their history Oscilloscope for rms values Photo 11/4 Oscilloscope 2 digital measured values 2 digital/analogue measured values 4 digital measured values C The recording can either be started manually or triggered by a limit violation C When the cursor measuring function has been enabled. there is a display which represents the displayed part of the recording Vector diagram In the Vector Diagram screen. 4 digital/analogue measured values Photo 11/3 Measurement screens 11/5 11 . Vb. the start and end range can be parameterized C Measured-value screens may be used any number of times C The status line contained in the measurement screen shows the status and diagnostic messages of the device C Screens are refreshed in intervals of 1 s Oscilloscope C 3 parameters. C The number.Meters and Measuring Instruments Screens Up to 20 screens can be selected on the SIMEAS P display via the front panel keys. voltage or current can be selected from the measured-quantities table (on page 11/11. If desired. UL2. this executive routine can also be performed automatically. the amplitudes and phase angles of the currents and voltages can be read at a glance. a maximum of any 3 parameters can also be selected from the measured-quantities table C Optimal peak value representation of the measured quantities in the screen is conducted automatically C In the lower part of the screen. the cursor can be moved to the recorded signals with the front panel keys and the measurements can be read from the cursor position C When rms values are recorded. cos ϕ or Va. the designation of the measuring quantities is additionally available: UL1. PF etc. type and sequence of the screens can be freely parameterized. Vc. UL3. C In the bar chart.

C Type 1: transfer of 3 measured quantities C Type 2: transfer of 6 measured quantities C Type 3: transfer of 12 measured quantities C Type 4: transfer of 32 measured quantities This type selection ensures an easy and efficient data transfer between SIMEAS P and the master station in the fastest possible way. there is a window with the digital display of the individual harmonics which can be selected via the front panel keys. the user can choose from 4 transfer types. The current GSD-File is available at the homepage www. Here. List screens C List screens show the minimum. C In the top right corner of the screen.com 11/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .Master station GSD file Photo 11/5 Vector diagram S SIMEAS P S SIMEAS P S SIMEAS P Further field devices S SIMEAS P Photo 11/6 Harmonics Fig. With the aid of the GSD file. 12 or 32 measured values to be transferred can be taken from the measured quantities table. the parameters relevant to communication are loaded into the master station. as well as their order can be freely parameterized Parameterization C The user can conduct the parameterization of the SIMEAS P very easily C Detailed key words. SIMEAS P supports transfer rates within the range of 9. operation with cursor and Enter key as in Windows make a parameterization as easy as can be even without a manual C Parameterization and calibration are secured against unauthorized use via parameterizable password protection Communication SIMEAS P has a communication interface according to the EIA RS485 standard with 9-pole D-SUB plug for connection to the RS485 field bus systems. 11/3 SIMEAS P at the PROFIBUS-DP Photo 11/7 List displays for Maximum – Average – Minimum Photo 11/8 Parameterization Harmonics 2 screens can be selected for the harmonics: C Harmonic voltages C Harmonic currents C The representation in the screens shows all 3 conductors with all uneven harmonics up to the 21st order. maximum and average values of the measured quantities since the beginning of the recording C The start of the recording and reset is executed with the front panel keys C The number of the measured quantities and screens.simeas. PROFIBUS-DP SIMEAS P works in the slave mode in PROFIBUS-DP. 6. The following can be parameterized: C PROFIBUS-DP V1 protocol according to EN 50170 Volume 2 C Modbus RTU/ASCII Thus SIMEAS P supports the most common communication protocols. In order to transfer measured values to the master station. For types 1 to 4.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s. the 3.

Screen for log entries The "Log Entries" screen shows the date and time of the last status change for every log entry on display. Photo 11/12 Log entries screen Device versions SIMEAS P600 is also available with UL listing. the maximum number of entries will be shown instead.g. Photo 11/11 Recording of limit-value violations Photo 11/10 Memory management Photo 11/9 SIMEAS P 7KG7600 SIMEAS P600/P650 extended version SIMEAS P600 has the same functionality as SIMEAS P500 (7KG7500). meter values (energy values). For limit-value violations and binary states.Meters and Measuring Instruments Memory management Due to an extended recording capacity (1 Mbyte) and the new memory management. Recording of limit-value violations This screen shows all limit-value violations in their time sequence. the corresponding memory time is also displayed. in addition it features the following: C Battery buffering: Recordings. displayed and analyzed using the RS485 interface and the SIMEAS P parameterization software. For more information. 11/7 11 . please refer to the Section SIMEAS P parameterization package. will not be lost during a failure of the auxiliary power supply. such as limit-value violations. the memory may be segmented to record the following: C Mean values C Mean values of power records (e. but will be stored in the measurement memory for up to 3 months C Clock module: Measured values are recorded with time stamp or transmitted to the master stations C Extended measurement memory including memory management C Recording of limit-value violations C Log entries These additional functionalities can be set in the parameterization software. mean value of power over the period of 15 min) C Oscilloscope measurements C Limit-value violations C Binary states Next to the percentage value. Reading the measurement memory The measured values and items of information stored in the device memory can be read.

measured quantities can be displayed on the screens and stored in the memory.e. by using the communication protocols PROFIBUSDP V1 and Modbus RTU/ ASCII.Examples of application Slot assignment The exact module configuration of the SIMEAS P. Transmission is made. Digital inputs Messages. but they can be ordered with additional analog and digital input/output modules. Replacement or retrofitting of modules is not possible. the external measured values can be saved in the device memory including their time stamp. the combination of the different input and output modules. Oil flow rate. intended for energy metering.SIMEAS P610/P660 extended version. switch positions. I. status Time synchronization Analog outputs Electrical quantities: U. In addition. limit-value violations Relay outputs Switching in case of limit-value violations Communication All measured quantities can be sent to a master station via PROFIBUS-DP Modbus. 11/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Slots A to D Photo 11/13 SIMEAS P610/P660 Analog inputs Via transducers 0-20 mA Water flow rate. modules can be assig- ned to the slots as desired. pressure etc. pressure etc. with analog and digital input/output modules Input/output modules SIMEAS P610 or P660 have the same functionality as SIMEAS P600 (7KG7600). For this functionality. cos ϕ. they can be transmitted to the SIMEAS P parameterization tool and displayed and analyzed there. display and post-processing of external measuring parameters (0 – 20 mADC). i. Fig. they have been fitted with 4 slots which can be equipped with 5 different modules. must be specified on order. With the help of the read function which is integrated in the parameterization software. Records of measured quantities can be read out and displayed at the PC using the SIMEAS PAR software. 11/4 SIMEAS P610/P660 . (0–20 mA) Binary outputs Pulses for energy metering Messages. pressure. Gas flow rate. With the exception of the relay module and the binary outputs. pH etc. Device versions SIMEAS P610 with input/output modules can also be ordered as type P660 with UL listing. f etc. as with the standard versions. District heating Measured electrical quantities of other branch circuits Like the electrical quantities. Output modules may be used for the output of electrical quantities ranging from 0 – 20 mADC or 4–20mADC . message generation and switching. Slots which have not been equipped remain unassigned. . Application The input modules at the SIMEAS P are used for recording. All of the acquired measured quantities can be displayed on the device together with their units of measurement and/or transmitted to a central computer system for further processing.

which have been implemented through semiconductor relays. the binary inputs do not require any auxiliary supply voltage. Analog inputs may be used for: C Recording and display of measuring signals in the range of 0 to 20 mADC C Recording of limit-value violations C Storage of external measuring signals Binary inputs SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 binary input modules. therefore they are not isolated. Both analog outputs form a common circuit. This module has 3 rooted. Each of these modules has 2 rooted binary outputs. The relay outputs can be used to switch loads. these binary outputs may be used for: C Output of energy pulses C Display of limit-value violations C Display of device status C Display of the rotational direction of the phase voltages L1-L2-L3 Relay outputs SIMEAS P can be equipped with one relay module as a maximum. the input voltage applied is transformed into a constant current. which cannot be handled by the semiconductor relays of the binary outputs any more. e.e. These relay outputs are parameterized like binary outputs and can be used for: C Switching in the event of limit-value violations. Analog outputs may be used for: C Output of measured quantities (current. rooted binary inputs which work according to the current source principle. i. electrically isolated against the internal circuit. electro-mechanical relays.Meters and Measuring Instruments Module description and options for application Analog inputs SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 analog input modules. therefore they are not isolated. power ϕ.) in the range 0 – 20 mADC or 4–20mADC Binary outputs SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 binary output modules. frequency etc. Binary inputs may be used for: C Metering external measured quantities C Status/message logging C Clock synchronization of the SIMEAS P with minute pulses (sets seconds to 00) Analog outputs SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 analog output modules. however.g. however. Each of these modules has 2 analog outputs which are rated for a nominal output current of 0 to 20 mADC. electrically isolated against the internal circuit. Each of these modules has 2 electrically isolated. The 2 analog outputs are. cos ϕ. The 2 analog inputs are. voltage. Both analog inputs form a common circuit. for reactive power compensation Terminal Assignment 1 2 3 4 AI1+ AI1– AI2+ AI2– 1 2 3 4 BI1+ BIR BIR BI2+ 1 2 3 4 AO1+ AO1– AO2+ AO2– 1 2 3 4 BOR BO1+ BO2+ free 1 2 3 4 RO1 RO2 RO3 ROR Table 11/1 Module description and options for application 11/9 11 . Like the internal binary outputs. Therefore. Each of these modules has 2 analog inputs which are rated for a nominal measuring range of 0 to 20 mADC.

Photo 11/14 SIMEAS P100/P200 – 7KG7100/7KG7200 11/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . SIMEAS P100 – 7KG7100 SIMEAS P100 is a power meter without display or front panel keys for snapping onto a 35-mm standard mounting rail according to DIN EN 50022.Power meter without display SIMEAS P without display is used wherever a display is not absolutely necessary. It features the same functionality as SIMEAS P500 but without a graphic display. Device parameterization is performed with the parameterization software only. Device parameterization is performed with the parameterization software only. It features the same functionality as SIMEAS P600 but without a graphic display. SIMEAS P200 – 7KG7200 SIMEAS P200 is a power meter without display or front panel keys for snapping onto a 35-mm standard mounting rail according to DIN EN 50022.

L2. L3 L1. L2.5 % ± 0.13.7. absolute Active energy.13 % 7) ± 0.1 to 0. L3. L3. ∑ L1-L2 L1. ∑ L1.5 % ± 0.5 % 3) 4) 5) 6) Conductor representation depends on the type of connection Fault limits under reference conditions related to 0. L2. L3. ∑3) L1. L3-N. L3. L3.5 % ± 0.5 % ± 0.1 % 2) /± 0.supply Reactive power Q + cap. N.5 % ± 0.5 % ± 0. L3 L1. L2. L2.5 % ± 0. L2. L3. ∑ 4-wire system 4-wire system L1. L2. Apparent power S Power factor |cos ϕ|4) Active power factor cos ϕ4) Phase angle4) Measuring path1) L1-N.5 % ± 0.11. L2. ∑ L1. ∑ L1. L3.17.19 Harmonics I5.1 to 0.5 % ± 0. L2.11.13.5 % ± 0. L3. L2. L3. L2.5 % ± 0. L2-L3. L3 counters 1 to 4 external external 7) Selection w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s w s w s w s w s w s w s w s w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s w s w s Fault limits2) ± 0. sum Reactive energy Q cap. ∑3) L1.19 Limit-value violations Analog inputs6) Binary inputs6) 1) 2) ± 0.5 % ± 0. L3. L3. – ind. L2-N.13 % 7) ± 0.2 x nominal range Mean value of all conductor circuits Measurement starting at 2% of internal apparent power Measurement starting at 30% of input voltage L1-N 7KG7610 and 7KG7660 only Measured quantities Fault limits over the entire temperature range related to: 0. ∑ L1. L3. supply Active energy. ∑ ∑ L1. (N-E) L1-L2. L2. ∑ L1. ∑ L1.Meters and Measuring Instruments Measured quantity Voltage Voltage Current Active power P + purchase. . purchase Active energy E.13 % 7) ± 0.5 % ± 0. L2.. L2. absolute Apparent energy Unsymmetrical condition of voltage Unsymmetrie Strom THD voltage THD current Harmonics U5.17.2 x nominal range w Measured quantities to be represented on the screens (only for types 7KG75 and 7KG76) s Measured quantities to be selected via communications q Measured quantities selection for list screens and oscilloscope (only for types 7KG75 and 7KG76) Table 11/2 11/11 11 . ∑ L1. L3 L1.5 % ± 2° ± 10 mHz ± 0.5 % System frequency5) Active energy E. ∑ L1. L3.5 % ± 0. L2.7. L3. L3-L1. L2.1 % 2) /± 0. ∑ L1.1 % 2) /± 0. Reactive energy Q.5 % ± 0.5 % ± 0. L2. L2. Reactive energy Q ind. ∑ L1.5 % ± 0.

zoom and measurement functions. The package comprises the Windows parameterization software. Another option is the upload of communication protocols and firmware updates. Oscilloscope recordings can be exported via a COMTRADE interface. the user benefits from a low-cost tool for an even more efficient utilization of the SIMEAS P functionality. a connection lead. WIN98. Parameters can be set and saved without directly operating the device. The parameterization software enables the user to configure SIMEAS P devices even faster. Memory reading An additional function in the parameterization software enables the following information to be read from the device memory: C Mean values C Mean values of power C Oscilloscope recordings C Binary channel status C Limit-value violations C Log entries Display and analysis The measured values transmitted by the device are automatically displayed on screen as graphs and tables including time stamps. The function "Send to device" transfers the parameters to the SIMEAS P.SIMEAS P parameterization package Application With the SIMEAS P parameterization software package. WIN2000 and Windows XP Professional. the data is made available in CSV format for further processing. It is mandatory for parameterizing SIMEAS P100/200 and P600. This enables the user to configure several SIMEAS P simultaneously. 11/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . The following measured quantities can be displayed as graphs: C Mean values C Mean values of power C Oscilloscope recordings C Binary channel status The following information is shown in tables: C Limit-value violations C Log entries Export functions An ASCII interface can be used to export transmitted measurements and information to other programs. The context menu offers various functions. The software is executable with the operating systems WIN95. Windows NT. When devices are replaced. The parameterization software helps to define which measured values and which status shall be recorded. The parameterization software supports all SIMEAS P devices. an RS232/RS485 converter and a plug-in power supply unit. such as showing/hiding signals. copy. Parameterization of the memory function Memory-equipped devices (SIMEAS P600 and SIMEAS P200) offer the possibility to record measured values and states together with a time stamp. stored parameter sets can easily be uploaded to the new devices. The converter is used to connect the SIMEAS P to a customary Notebook or PC using a 9-pole D-SUB connector.

Meters and Measuring Instruments S SIMEAS P RS485 RS232 Fig. 11/5 Parameterization Photo 11/17 Parameterization and recording of measured values Photo 11/15 Parameterization Photo 11/18 Display and analysis Photo 11/16 Parameterization Photo 11/19 Display and analysis 11/13 11 .

11. The transducer can be ordered fully parameterized or for individual parameterization via PC or notebook. Performance features of the SIMEAS T multi-purpose transducer for power quantities with RS232 interface C Minimum dimensions C Short delivery times.) can be parameterized as required for every output. Or they can be printed out together with a device label when you are doing the parameterization yourself. The transducer can be re-parameterized during normal operation. The binary output can be used as an energy meter.) and any measuring range. ex works C CE mark C EMC immunity C In accordance with all relevant national and international standards C High quality. Measured values can be transmitted through an RS232 or RS485 interface. frequency etc. The device has 3 analog outputs. Inputs and outputs are electrically isolated. Input currents of up to 10 A. Every output can be assigned to one variable (current. Set data and a specific connection diagram are included in the delivery of factory-configured devices.g. or input voltages up to a maximum of 600 V with nominal frequencies of 50. The devices require an auxiliary power source. active or reactive power. The configuration of the transducer for its measuring task is performed via a commercial PC or laptop. 4 to 20 A. It can be used to individually configure the transducer in a Windows desktop in an easy way. independent of the analog outputs. all measured quantities and parameters can be read out and displayed on the PC independently of the analog outputs. The output signal (e. to measure work quantities or as limit value indicator. The measurement is a true rms measurement which also allows distorted curves up to the 32nd harmonic order to be measured. ±20 mA. Depending on the measuring task. Devices with an RS485 interface are additionally provided with the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol which enables the transducers to be connected to an I&C network and measured values to be sent to the host processor via an RS485 bus. 60 or 16 2/3 Hz can be connected.2 SIMEAS T Transducer for HighCurrent Power Quantities Description All measured quantities in any type of high-current network can be detected with one device by using the SIMEAS T multi-purpose transducer. long service life C Electric isolation with high test voltage C High measuring accuracy C True rms measurement C Powerful output signal circuits C One device for all applications C All data can be freely parameterized C High system safety and reliability C High ease of servicing Photo 11/20 SIMEAS T 11/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . voltage. A version for the DC range of 24 V to 60 V and a version for the AC/DC range of 100 to 230 V are available. 0 to 10 V etc. All measured quantities and parameters may be read out and displayed at the PC with the help of the communication interface. Via a serial interface. A connection cable to the PC and an installation disk named SIMEAS T PAR is optionally available. These devices can be re-parameterized using the SIMEAS T PAR software. Orders for devices to be individually parameterized merely have to contain the corresponding order number. –10 to 0 to 10 mA. unused input terminals will remain unassigned. measured values can be displayed online or recorded on graphical instruments (contained in the software) on the PC or laptop. Fully configured devices can be ordered by specifying a parameterization key with clear-text information as illustrated in the order example.

RS485 bus acc. Var.1) Single-phase 3-wire system any load 3-wire identical load IL1 f UL1-L2 UL1-L3 UL3-L1 cosϕ ϕ S P Q – – – – – – 4-wire any load 4-wire identical load IL1 UL1-N f cosϕ ϕ S P Q – – – – – – – – 4-wire any load 4-wire identical load PL1-N PL2-N PL2-N QL1-N QL2-N QL3-N cosϕL1-N cosϕL2-N cosϕL3-N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1) No. they have a built-in EAI RS485 interface for bus operation in compliance with IEC 60870-5-103.Meters and Measuring Instruments SICAM PCC SIMATIC S7 CP 441 CP 340 SIMATIC S7 CP 521 CP 523 SICAM PAS RS323 RS485 OWG RS485 SIMEAS T transducers with interface according to IEC 60870-5-103 Design. 11/6 Example: application programs for SIMATIC for interfacing transducers with RS485 interface (on request) ASDU 140 Standard with a maximum of 16 measured values ASDU 9 ASDU 140 with 9 mea. Data transmission with IEC 60870-5-103 file transfer The content of file transfer protocols according to IEC 60870 is fully transparent for the user.with 9 measured values sured values No. The application program determines which data shall be selected. units of measured quantities: V. All of the available measured values can be integrated in such a file. Devices are parameterized with the SIMEAS T PAR software. Instead of an RS232 interface. to IEC 60870-5-103 Other field devices Fig. IL1 UL1-N f cosϕ ϕ S P Q – – – – – – – – IL1 IL3 f UL1-L2 UL2-L3 UL3-L1 cosϕ ϕ S P Q – – – – – IL1 IL2 IL3 UL1-LN UL2-LN UL3-LN U0 f UL1-L2 UL2-L3 UL3-L1 cosϕ ϕ S P Q IL1 IL2 IL3 UL1-LN UL2-LN UL3-LN P Q f corresponds to the measuring point in the telegram. thus they can be networked as shown in the example. This enables the transducers to be operated at a bus. They are listed in Table 11/3. type of connection and technical data of these transducers are identical to those of a transducer with RS232 interface. however. The output of analog measured quantities through the analog outputs will not be affected by bus operation. Data representation corresponds to DIN 19244 and VDEW. VA Transmission of measured values Table 11/3 11/15 11 . Hz. Measured-value transmission The measuring points to be acquired by the converter and transmitted with the ASDU depend on the selected mode of operation. A. W.

supply Reactive power.Types of connection Singlephase AC current 3-wire any load 3-wire identical load Measured quantities Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage UL1-N UL2-N UL3-N UL1-L2 UL2-L3 UL3-L1 UE-N w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q Parameterization Selection of measuring and metering quantities Depending on the type of connection. Reactive power. purchase Reactive power. supply Apparent power w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q Table 11/4 Selection of quantities for measuring and metering 11/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . supply IL1 IL2 IL3 IL0 fL1 ϕ Ptotal PL1 PL2 PL3 Qtotal QL1 QL2 QL3 cos ϕtotal cos ϕL1 cos ϕL2 cos ϕL3 Stotal w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q kWhtotal kWhL1 kWhL2 kWhL3 kWhtotal kWhL1 kWhL2 kWhL3 kvarhtotal kvarhL1 kvarhL2 kvarhL3 kvarhtotal kvarhL1 kvarhL2 kvarhL3 kVAhtotal w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w Measured quantities that can be switched onto the analog outputs. s Measured quantities that can be switched onto a binary output as count values for limit-value signaling or energy metering. purchase Active power. supply Reactive power. the transducer will calculate all measured quantities or count values marked with q. supply Reactive power. The serial interface transmits all measured quantities marked with q. supply Active power. q Measured quantities or count values to be transmitted via a serial interface of type RS232 or RS485. supply Active power. purchase Reactive power. Voltage Voltage Voltage Current Current Current Current Frequency Phase angle Active power Active power Active power Active power Reactive power Reactive power Reactive power Reactive power Power factor Power factor Power factor Power factor Apparent power Energy quantities Active power. purchase Active power. Any 3 of these measured quantities w can be switched onto the 3 analog outputs and any one measured quantity s may be switched onto the binary output for limit-value signaling or energy metering. purchase Reactive power. purchase Active power. they can be displayed and/or recorded at a PC or Notebook with the help of the SIMEAS T PAR software. purchase Reactive power. supply Active power. purchase Active power.

g.Meters and Measuring Instruments 4-wire any load 4-wire identical load w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q Units V. 3-phase current with identical load C 3-wire. kW. e. kvar. kvar. kW. define pulse rate of the energy quantity e.g. Choose whether signal is given when values exceed/fall below a given point./sec. e. Mvar – – – – VA.9 kV C Energy metering Select energy quantity from Table 11/2. MW W. example: 100/1 kV Analog output 1 Measured quantity C Select measured quantity from Table 11/2. lower range +4 mA/upper range +22 mA Characteristic curve C Linear curve C With knee-point in the measuring range/in the output signal. signal in the event of a malfunction of the transducer C Limit value signaling Select quantity from Table 11/2.g. kVA. e. w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse kWh/pulse w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q w s q 11/17 11 . sharp bend at +50 MW and +2 mA Analog output 2 and 3 same as analog output 1 Binary output C No signal C Unit in operation. define limit value of the measuring range. kW. kV A. kA A.1 kV Current inputs C Without transformer in the range of 0 to 2 A C Without transformer in the range of 0 to 4 A C Without transformer in the range of 0 to 10 A C With transformer via clear-text information: prim. three phase current with any load System frequency C 50 Hz C 60 Hz C 16 2/3 Hz Voltage inputs C Without transformer L-N in the range of 0 to 90 V C Without transformer L-N in the range of 0 to180 V C Without transformer L-N in the range of 0 to 450 V C With transformer via clear-text information: prim. kvar. 4 to 20 mA Output signal limitation C Enter output signal limitation with the lower/upper range. kvar. e. kV V. e. MW var. kV V.g. limit value for measured quantity “Voltage”: Signal if value is below 9. MVA The following parameters can be entered with the SIMEAS T PAR software: Operating mode C Direct connection without transformer C Single-phase AC current C 3-wire. kW. energy quantity: Active power-purchase-total. kA Hz ° W. kV V. Mvar var. Mvar var. kA A. pulse rate: 10 Imp/kWh. 3-phase current with any load C 4-wire. –100 to +100 MW Output signal C Enter output signal with start/end range –20 to +20 mA or –10 to +10 V. 3-phase current with identical load C 4-wire. Mvar var.g. kV V.g./sec. kA A. kV V. MW W. kV V. MW W.g. example: 10/0. Active power total Measuring range C Enter primary measuring range with start/end range e.

volt. 11/7 Block diagram Design The transducers are permanently wired and tested functional units. SIMEAS T transducer AC inputs: current IL1 1 IL1 2 IL2 3 IL2 4 IL3 5 IL3 6 AC inputs: voltage ULN 7 UL1 8 UL2 9 UL3 10 Fig. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 RXD GND TXD 3+ 3– 2+ 2– 1+ 1– Outputs 24 + ~ 25 – ~ Interface Aux. optionally RS485 IL2 UH Auxiliary power supply IL3 ~ Fig. Inputs and outputs can be safely connected with screw terminals. 11/8 Electrical connection Inputs and outputs which are not required are not assigned 11/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .Transformer UL1 Sequential/ MultiHold circuit plexer ~/ Transformer Processor Output modules A1 ~ UL2 ~ ~ ~ A2 A3 UL3 UN Binary output IL1 Serial RS232 interface. The transducers are flameretardant and free of silicone and halogens. They have a snap fixing for a 35 mm standard mounting rail in accordance with DIN EN 50 022.

50 Hz.2/50 µs. to IEC 68-2/1-3 –10°C to +50°C e. to DIN EN 61010 Part 1 III 2 Electromagnetic compatibility Emitted interference acc. to DIN EN 50081-1 and IEC/C ISPR 22 acc.g. to EN 50082-1.5 mm2 2.8 kV impulse voltage: 1. sin 6. asym.2/50 µs. to DIN EN 61010 Part 1 3. output load and type of installation) Fast transients.5 mm2 acc. to IEC 255-22-3 Inputs against outputs Interface and auxiliary energy Interference field strength Interference immunity Auxiliary voltage against outputs and interface Immunity against electromagnetic fields 10 V/m Electrostatic discharge ESD 8 kV acc. 0. acc.Meters and Measuring Instruments Other technical data Basic standard Electric strength Input (current against current and against voltages) acc.7 kV. where analogue output 1 is electrically connected with the interface Ambient temperature Working temperature range (depending on measured voltage. sin 6. EN 50082-2 acc. R1 = 500 W (type test) 5. at input voltage 3 x 100 V and sum of continuously applied output loads of ≤ 40 mA –40°C to +85°C EN 60721-3-3 temperature 3K8H humidity 3K5 V0 Storage temperature range Climatic application class Fire resistance class Connection level: terminals 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 90 90 105 75 [mm] Table 11/5 Technical data and dimensions 11/19 11 . to IEC 1000-4-2 IEC 255-22-2 Outputs and interface against each other.65 kg DIN VDE 0470 T 1 / EN 60529 IP 40 IP 20 screw terminals 4 mm2 2. R1 = 500 W (type test) 3. sin 10.2 kV impulse voltage: 1.2/50 µs.7 kV.5 kV.8 kV impulse voltage: 1. to IEC 1000-4-4 2 kV burst with capacitive link IEC 255-22-4 Weight Degree of protection Housing Terminals Type of connection Current inputs Voltage Outputs/interface approx. 50 Hz. 50 Hz. R1 = 500 W (type test) 700 V DC Safety Overvoltage category Pollution severity acc. to DIN EN 55022 Class B acc. to IEC 60888 acc.

DIN 43751-2 C C Multimeter 7KT1 30 Display and analysis of 23 electrical measured values in switchgear stations. Devices There is a great potential in this. Standards Use in building Commercial Residential Industrial Time and pulse counters • Time counters 7KT5 80 and 7KT5 82 • Pulse counters 7KT5 81 and 7KT5 83 Monitoring of operating hours and switch-on operations of devices or installations IEC 60255-6. they are also small. DIN EN 60051-2 IEC 61010-1. Apart from the fact that they are reliable and safe. are catching on because their planning and installation is so easy. The installation itself is very simple: just snap the devices in Application the distribution board onto the standard mounting rail without the use of tools and make the connection. incoming or outgoing feeders IEC 60051-2. DIN EN 60255-6 (VDE 0435 T 301) C C C Analog measuring devices 7KT1 0 Voltage and current measurements. to monitor incoming or outgoing currents or device currents IEC 60051-2.11. it is merely the modular widths and the mounting tier which have to be defined. The measuring instruments.3 Measuring Instruments/Meters as Modular Devices Measuring power consumption is the first step to cost saving This advantage is secured by using the measurements for a better planning in relation to system utilization. Measuring instruments by Siemens have proven themselves many times in this situation. When configuring these modular devices. DIN EN 60255-6 (VDE 0435 T 301) C C C C C C Time counter for front panel mounting 7KT5 5 and 7KT5 6 Monitoring of operating hours of devices or installations IEC 60255-6. DIN EN 61010-1 (VDE 0411 T 1) C C 11/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . DIN EN 60051-2 C C Digital measuring devices 7KT1 1 Voltage and current measurements. to monitor incoming or outgoing currents or device currents DIN 43751-1. which means they save space and make the device arrangement within the distribution board transparent. which are designed as modular devices.

e. multicounters and energy meters 7KT15 to LAN networks IEEE 802 C C Current transformer 7KT1 2 For non-contact acquisition of primary currents in three-phase power supply networks IEC 60044-1. offices and apartments in apartment complexes IEC 61010-1. 7KT1 51. DIN EN 62053-11 (VDE 0418 T 3-11) IEC 62053-21. offices and apartments in apartment complexes C C LAN coupler 3KT1 390 For connection of multimeters. incoming or outgoing feeders IEC 60051-2. three-phase instabus KNX EIB 7KT1 16 With instabus KNX EIB interface. offices and apartments in apartment complexes C C C Energy meter. DIN EN 62053-21 (VDE 0418 T 3-21) IEC 62053-11. DIN EN 60044-1 (VDE 0414 T 44-1) C C 11/21 11 . e. DIN EN 61010-1 (VDE 0411 T 1) IEC 62053-21. 7KT1 35 Display and analysis of 35 electrical measured values in switchgear stations. DIN EN 62053-21 (VDE 0418 T 3-21) IEC 61036 DIN EN 61036 (VDE 0418 T7) C C C Energy meter. DIN EN 62053-11 (VDE 0418 T 3-11) IEC 62053-21. e. in industrial plants. DIN EN 61010-1 (VDE 0411 T 1) IEC 62053-11. DIN EN 62053-21 (VDE 0418 T 3-21) C C Energy meter. in industrial plants.g. single-phase 7KT1 14 For kWh metering in single-phase power supply systems.g. 7KT1 34. in industrial plants.g.Meters and Measuring Instruments Devices Application Standards Use in building Commercial Residential Industrial Multicounter 7KT1 31. three-phase 7KT1 50. DIN EN 60051-2 IEC 61010-1. for kWh metering in single-phase or three-phase power supply systems. 7KT1 52 For kWh metering in single-phase or three-phase power supply systems.

Input is made in increments of 5 A • Large. L2. D3.000 A. D2.000 Display values of the multimeter Function Voltage measurement The multimeter either measures the delta voltages L1 to L2. current and power: ± 2 % ± 1 digit Application Very compact multi-functional display for direct or current transformer connection in a three-phase network. green 7-segment measurement display which is friendly on the eye • Clearly distinct orange text display of the measuring units assigned to the displays which show the measured value • Representation of measured values at 5 triple 7-segment displays and one auxiliary 7-segment display for input of the primary current • Detection of connection mistakes (interchanged phases) • Measuring accuracy for voltage. D3. L2 to L3 and L3 to L1 or the Wye voltages L1. Phase displacement and load unbalances may result in partial overloads. 11 mm high. D2. 11/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . D4 Unit W V A VA cosϕ V W V A VA cosϕ V W V A VA cosϕ V W VA var Hz cosϕ Assignment L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 – L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 – L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 – L1 ∑L ∑L ∑L ∑L ∑L 2 set values will be displayed in addition 24 25 Table 11/6 Current transformer setting Current transformer setting D5 D5 CT/A CT/A /1 or /5 10 . The analysis of differing phase loads is a special feature of this instrument. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Measured value Active power Voltage Current Apparent power cosϕ Voltage Active power Voltage Current Apparent power cosϕ Voltage Active power Voltage Current Apparent power cosϕ Voltage Active power Apparent power Reactive power Frequency cosϕ Display D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 D5 D1. 5..7KT1 30 multimeter Overview • All of the required measured values of the power supply system can be viewed at a glance • Innovative matrix selection to assign measurement values to the display tabs • For direct connection of 63 A or for current transformer /1A or /5A • For primary currents of a current transformer of 10 to 5. with Wye (Y) and Delta (∆) measurements to display a maximum of 23 different electrical values at a switchgear station.. incoming or outgoing feeders. The multimeter provides various options for the compilation and analysis of measured values. L3 to N. ∑L symbol for the 3-phase system This emphasizes that all units of measurement shown under this symbol always refer to all of the 3 phases. D5 D5 D4 D1. Display values 5 out of these 23 options can be continuously displayed.

Capacitive loads are automatically marked with a capacitor symbol and inductive loads with a coil symbol. followed by the vertical selection.g. 11/11. Measured values are displayed on 11 mm high. Capacitive loads are automatically marked with a capacitor symbol and inductive loads with a coil symbol. units of measurement are shown on orange LED's. L1 – L1-L2 – L. The resulting matrix selection might look as shown in Fig. Thanks to its matrix selection function.e. for example: kW or MW. each measured value in the horizontal view can be assigned to a value in the vertical view. This defines the matrix selection. the multimeter is much more flexible and universal. current or other comparable values for the 3 phases. kW L1 kW L2 kW L3 OK A COS L Fig. Letters M and k are automatically assigned depending on the measuring range.g. W – V – A or cos ϕ. Both colors can be recognized more clearly than the previously used red LED's. Rotary keys select the triple displays. Matrix selection Traditional measuring instruments either provide voltage. the desired display is confirmed with OK. 11/11 Example of a matrix selection This means. brightly lit LED display. e. Then the horizontal selection is made. 11/10 Display L D5 D4 ∑L symbol for the 3-phase system Display The multimeter has a shaded. the measured value. 11/23 11 .Meters and Measuring Instruments L1 L1-N D1 D2 D3 OK L1-L1 I3 ϕ3 ϕ1 L1-L2 M k W V A COS L1 L1-2 L M k W V A COS L2 L2-3 L MkW VAR CT/A M k W V A COS L3 L3-1 L H Z COS I1 N ϕ2 L3-N L3 Fig 11/9 I2 L1-L3 L2-N L2 Fig. green 7-segment LED's. e. i.

∑L. Display values 5 out of these 35 options can be continuously displayed. 2 set values will be displayed in addition 36 Current transformer setting D4 37 Current transformer setting D5 Table 11/7 Display values of the multimeter CT/A CT/A /1 or /5 10 . L3 to N. L2. ∑L. 11/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . Information on LAN operation and the MS EXCEL user interface can be found at the LAN coupler section in catalog ET B1. reactive and apparent power values. 11 mm high. Input is made in increments of 5 A • Large. ind. green 7-segment measurement display which is friendly on the eye • Clearly distinct orange text display of the measuring units assigned to the displays which show the measured value • Representation of measured values at 4 triple 7-segment displays and one seven-fold 7-segment display • Display selection for active. kap. ind. kap.000 A. D6 D4 D4 D4 D4 D5 D5 D5 D5 D5 D5 Unit W V A VA cosϕ V W V A VA cosϕ V W V A VA cosϕ V °C A W var VA Hz cosϕ Wh Wh Wh Wh varh varh varh varh VAh VAh Assignment L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 – L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 – L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 – L1 – ∑L ∑L ∑L ∑L ∑L ∑L ∑L q ∑L q ∑L y ∑L y ∑L. with Wye (Y) and Delta (∆) measurements to display a maximum of 35 different electrical values at a switchgear station. Function Voltage measurement The multicounter either measures the delta voltages L1 to L2.Measured value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Active power Voltage Current Apparent power cosϕ Voltage Active power Voltage Current Apparent power cosϕ Voltage Active power Voltage Current Apparent power cosϕ Voltage Temperature Current. L2 to L3 and L3 to L1 or the Wye voltages L1. incoming or outgoing feeders. 5. D3. -23 • Device types with LAN interface (via LAN coupler) and MS EXCEL user interface • Versions with PROFIBUS-DP V1 interface Application Very compact multi-functional display for direct or current transformer connection in a three-phase network. D2. Phase displacement and load imbalances may result in partial overloads.. N conductor Active power Reactive power Apparent power Frequency cosϕ Active energy Rate 1 Active energy Rate 2 Active energy Rate 1 Active energy Rate 2 Reactive energy Rate 1 Reactive energy Rate 2 Reactive energy Rate 1 Reactive energy Rate 2 Apparent energy Rate 1 Apparent energy Rate 2 Display D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 D6 D6 D4 D5 D5 D6 D1.000 The analysis of differing phase loads is a special feature of this instrument. on page 10/12. ∑L ∑L 7KT1 3 Multicounter Overview • All of the required measured values of the power supply system can be viewed at a glance • Innovative matrix selection to assign measurement values to the display tabs • For direct connection of 63 A or for current transformer /1A or /5A • For primary currents of a current transformer of 10 to 5. ∑L. 3or 7-digit • Detection of connection mistakes (interchanged phases) • Accuracy class 2 according to IEC 62053-21. The device provides various options for the compilation and analysis of measured values..

for example: kW or MW. followed by the vertical selection.Meters and Measuring Instruments L1 L1-N D1 D2 D3 OK L1-L1 I3 ϕ3 ϕ1 L1-L2 M k W V A COS L1 L1-2 L M k W V A HZ COS °C N L M k W V A COS L2 L2-3 L Mk CT/A T12 L VARh M k W V A COS L3 L3-1 L MkWh I1 N L3-N L3 Fig. 11/25 11 . 11/13 Display D5 oder D5 + D4 D4 ∑L symbol for the 3-phase system ∑L symbol for the 3-phase system This emphasizes that all units of measurement shown under this symbol always refer to all of the 3 phases. i. The resulting matrix selection might look as shown in Fig. Capacitive loads are automatically marked with a capacitor symbol and inductive loads with a coil symbol. 11/14. V V V L1-2 A L2-3 L3-1 OK N kWh T 2 ∑L Fig.e. units of measurement are shown on orange LED's. brightly lit LED display. Both colors can be recognized more clearly than the previously used red LED's. Rotary keys select the triple displays. This means. the multicounter is much more flexible and universal. Letters M and k are automatically assigned depending on the measuring range. 11/14 Matrix selection e. current or other comparable values for the 3 phases. e. L1 – L1-L2 – L. Thanks to its matrix selection function. W – V – A – VA or cosϕ. Matrix selection Traditional measuring instruments either provide voltage. Display The multicounter has a shaded. the measured value.g.g. 11/12 ϕ2 I2 L2-N D6 L1-L3 L2 Fig. Then the horizontal selection is made. green 7-segment LED's. Measured values are displayed on 11 mm high. the desired display is confirmed with OK. This defines the matrix selection. each measured value in the horizontal view can be assigned to a value in the vertical view.

Information on LAN operation and the MS EXCEL user interface can be found at the LAN coupler section in catalog ET B1.. Depending on the CT setting. Reactive energy Active power Reactive power kvar Phase-sequence indicator 1–2–3 CT primary current Table 11/8 10 .7KT1 5 Energy meter.or 3-phase measurement for Delta or Wye connection and neutral-point calculation for Delta connection • For direct connection of 63 A or for current transformer /5A • For primary currents of a current transformer of 10 to 5.000 A. This setting can be sealed for certification purposes. in industrial plants. 5. Input is made in increments of 5 A • 7-fold 7-segment display for energy values and additional functions • Detection of connection mistakes (interchanged phases) • Device types with LAN interface (via LAN coupler) and MS EXCEL user interface • Accuracy class 2 according to IEC 61036 Application Energy meters are used for kWh metering in single-phase and threephase systems. on page 10/12. values are internally converted and displayed.. e.000 A Data types shown on the display kWh kvarh CT 0 T1 T2 1 kM 3 W var 2 T Fig. 11/15 Device display LAN communication 6 measured values are transmitted: active energy Rate 1 and Rate 2. active power and reactive power. reactive energy Rate 1 and Rate 2. 11/26 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . three-phase Active energy Unit Rate 1 Rate 2 Rate 1 Rate 2 kWh kWh kvarh kvarh kW Identification Arrow and T1 Arrow and T2 Arrow and T1 Arrow and T2 Utilization and momentary value Utilization and momentary value Blinking triangle indicates left-hand rotation CT (current transformer) Overview Features • 1. offices and apartments in apartment complexes. Current transformer setting The primary current of the CT is set at the device ridge.g. Versions including LAN interface and LCD display are used in industrial plants and office buildings to analyze consumption and minimize operating costs.

settable Rate 1/2 Rate 1/2 Rate 1/2 Rate 1/2 Rate 1/2 Rate 1/2 Rate 1/2 Sum total Phase L1/L2/L3 Phase L1/L2/L3 Sum total Phase L1/L2/L3 Sum total Phase L1/L2/L3 Sum total Phase L1/L2/L3 Phase L1/L2/L3 kWh Cost/kWh Total cost kvarh kVAh kW min kW kW V A A FA I kvar kvar kVA kVA cos Hz No. A maximum-time analysis can be performed over several days on the PC in online mode.Meters and Measuring Instruments 7KT1 162 7KT1 165 Active energy Price per kWh. e. For meters with current transformer connection. The Energy meter will calculate the consumption cost when the price per kWh is entered. This ASCII file can be converted to an Excel or Access file. 11/16) can be called up directly at the Energy meter and recorded manually by pressing the Set/Reset button (5) and Display button (3). Data transmission with instabus KNX EIB 7KT1 162 and 7KT1 165 meters are intended for the following data transmission: Active energy (kWh) Rate 1 Active energy (kWh) Rate 2 Device number Active power (kW) Phase L1 Active power (kW) Phase L2 Active power (kW) Phase L3 Visualization software "Recording of consumption data and maximum-time analysis" (in preparation) The software can read out and allocate meter values./W) 5 Sealable Set/Reset button 3 Fig. in industrial plants. 7-digit LCD display with 8 x 4-mm digits 2 IR reading interface to plug on the reading head 3 Display button 4 IR test output LED (10 IMP. Benefit • • • • • PTB-certified Accuracy class 2 LCD display Short-circuit-proof pulse output With network analysis function and direct cost indication Application For kWh metering in single-phase and three-phase systems. settable x = These data will be displayed Table 11/9 For CT meters only Readings transmitted to the LCD display or via IR interface 1 2 1 Large-size. 11/27 11 .and secondary-side) and the proper allocation of the voltage and current paths must be observed.g. Direction of energy flow Metering is only performed in the specified direction of energy flow. the transformers' direction of energy flow (primary. 1) x/x x/x x/x x/x – – – x x – – – x1) – – – – – – x 7KT1 16 Energy meter. settable Total cost Reactive energy Apparent energy Active power maximum Measurement periods. Momentary active power Momentary voltage Momentary current purchase Momentary current factor Momentary reactive power Momentary apparent power Momentary cosϕ Momentary frequency Device number. instabus KNX EIB Overview Data for consumption analysis Manual reading: Data (see Fig. 98 and Windows NT. The option for device number input facilitates an assignment to a digit-code system and cost allocation to different cost centers. three-phase. and prepare the data for billing. Several graphical evaluation modes are available. Read software for the IR measuring head: The data of the above table are read into a PC with the aid of the magnetadhesive IR measuring head and filed in an ASCII file in compliance with IEC 61107. Versions including an LCD display are used as network analysis instruments in industrial plants and office buildings to analyze consumption and minimize operating costs. offices and apartments in apartment complexes. The program is executable on Windows 95. 11/16 Electricity meter with LCD display 4 5 The system does not distinguish between meters which were read online or manually.

Product range C 4NC3: rated currents of 75 A to 4. The current range is also perfectly suited for use together with SIMOCODE®-DP. 11/28 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .000 A C 4NC5: rated currents of 5 A to 1.4 4NC3 and 4NC5 Current Transformers Brief description Current transformers enable currents to be detected and measured.Photo 11/18 Current transformers 11. 4NC36 and 4NC37 current transformer sizes (75 A to 800 A) are recommended for use together with SIMOCODE-DP (external display via ammeter) and allocated via selection tables so that the customer doesn’t require any additional configuration and coordination expense. Areas of application Wherever currents in low-voltage switchgear and distribution board systems are detected and measured. standard mounting rail and primary conductor C All 4NC3 current transformers have been approved for use in shipbuilding C Accuracy class 1 and overvoltage limiting factor FS5 C Secondary current 1 A and 5 A Features 3WN1 and 3WN6 circuit-breakers The 4NC3 current transformer series has been optimally tuned to the phase center-to-center distance and the conductor cross section of the 3WN1 and 3WN6 circuit-breakers. This allows for the installation of three current transformers in series.500 A C Accessories: terminal cover. SIMOCODE-DP 4NC31. The 4NC3 current transformer series has been optimally tuned to the phase center-to-center distance and the conductor cross-section of the 3WN1 and 3WN6 circuit-breakers.

Meters and Measuring Instruments 11/29 11 .

12 SIMARIS design – the Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution .

SIMARIS design – the Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution chapter 12 .

SIMARIS design C Facilitates routine work C Helps to ensure high planning and cost safety C Leads to a holistic planning approach C Designs cost-effective complete installations instead of “cheap” individual products Network calculations and automatic permissibility checks throughout the whole power system In order to meet the high expectations of investors and plant operators. in implementing power supply concepts for commercial and industrial buildings from medium voltage through to the power outlet in compliance with accepted standards. engineering companies and planners spend a lot of time with the routine work involved in dimensioning installations and circuits. device characteristics. This support already begins at the initial concept finding stage. All circuits in a power system must be calculated to include the most unfavorable. tolerance ranges)? C Short-circuit protection – Does the cable/busbar thermally withstand the load under fault conditions until the fault has eventually been cleared (K2S2 > = I2t)? C Protection of human life in the event of indirect contact according to DIN VDE 0100 T410: – Will the circuit be definitely interrupted within the specified time interval by any switching device under any fault condition? – Has the type of connection to ground been taken into account in the network configuration? – Have minimum and maximum short-circuit currents been taken into account in dependency of alternative means of supply? – Will an additional equipotential bonding become necessary? – Have the limits for maximum contact voltage been complied with? C Voltage drop (static/dynamic): – Is the cumulated voltage drop down to the outlet circuits within the limits of the currently applicable standard? – Can all consumers be safely operated despite a voltage drop on the supply path (motor start-up?)? C Selectivity: – Is the switching/protective device in use fully selective to all of its upstream switching/protective devices across the entire currenttime range? – Can selectivity be documented in terms of a TÜV-approved selectivity proof according to DIN VDE 0100 T710 (former DIN VDE 0107) or DIN VDE 0108? 12/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . As standard. likely network conditions and verified to comply with countryspecific standards and installation practice.12 SIMARIS design – the Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution SIMARIS design supports C Engineering companies C Electrical fitters for installation planning C Switchgear manufacturers for dimensioning tasks C Acceptance authorities such as the German Technical Inspectorate (TÜV) etc. this includes the verification of: C Overload protection – Have the cables been dimensioned for the maximum operating current to be transmitted? – Has the selected switching device been rated for the maximum cable load current? – Does the selected switching device protect the cable against overload ? – Have the tripping currents been taken into account for the selected switching device class according to DIN VDE 0100 T430 (test currents.

can also be simulated.SIMARIS design SIMARIS design automatically performs such calculations and checks in compliance with the latest standards and regulations. comparable circuits. The DIN VDE 0100 series is based on the harmonized IEC 364 (HD 384). 12/1 Project structure tree In parallel to runtime. which speeds up the digitizing process for the whole system. or even complete subdistributions can be duplicated by just a mouse-click and assigned to a new subdistribution board. well matched device range SIMARIS design is not a traditional network calculation tool. the input of cable lengths and technical device data of the consumers is sufficient to start with the network calculation. which is divided in 3 sections (project tree structure / single-line diagram / message window) facilitates a quick overview of the network structure and the current status of the calculation results. is no problem either with SIMARIS design. standard tables or product catalogs becomes obsolete. such as the supply for airport buildings or building power supply of a university hospital. Mapping larger power supply systems. SIMARIS design automatically dimensions the network components which are required for safe supply of the specified consumers. Individual power system components are input in a circuit-related manner. This includes C besides the supply current sources (transformer(s)/generator(s)/neutral system infeed(s)) C and the cables or busbars C mainly the switching/protective devices ranging from the mediumvoltage side of the supply current source down to the individual consumer circuits. Once the basic electrical data have been stored. including the whole range from the medium-voltage substation down to the last outlet circuit. Extensive paging through regulations. 12/3 12 . network calculations may be started at any time for: C Load flow C Short circuit (1-/2-/3-pole minimum and 1-/3-pole maximum) C Energy balance Calculation results are displayed and evaluated in the project tree structure with the aid of the signal colors red/yellow/green for each circuit. For the engineering company this means a sustained work relief and at the same time a risk minimization regarding planning and cost safety. Even subsequent (manual) modifications of the network configuration or individual components are supported by SIMARIS design. SIMARIS design performs an automatic permissibility check for each modification in the background and immediately displays relevant messages if necessary. Based on the results of the network calculation. Such installations. Basically. Single-line diagram view Project structure tree Message window Fig. The data-processing-compatible representation of real power supply systems within SIMARIS design can be implemented easily and quickly. Automatic device selection based on an integrated. The project view. calculated and verified in the program with comparatively little time expense.

Normally this check is performed by means of a visual comparison of characteristic curves of upstream and downstream devices using so-called current/time curve diagrams. nor caused the fault stay in operation. the fire load can be reduced to a minimum in the whole installation while the protection of human life is ensured to a high degree and supply safety can be guaranteed in the entire installation under fault conditions. the underdimensioned device will automatically be protected by one of the devices upstream in the direction of energy flow. At the same time. With the aid of SIMARIS design’s own product database. According to DIN VDE 0100 T710 (former DIN VDE 0107) or DIN VDE 0108. In this context. The entire power supply system can thus be designed in a technically and economically optimized manner. such as the safety power supply. Fig. integrated planning becomes easy and efficient. 12/2 Switch combination. The widest scope for decisions regarding the design of a complete installation is in the planning stage. the switching/protective devices in operation are checked for compliance with fully selective switching behavior according to DIN VDE 0100 T710 (previously DIN VDE 0107) or DIN VDE 0108. the planner doesn’t need to have any special equipment know-how.Integrated planning Components as well as circuits within the entire power system are technically matched right from the start. If required: Expansion/extension of the entire installation through device reparameterization is possible. In the event of a fault. 12/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . are subject to a general proof of selective switching behavior of the switching devices in operation. Visualization and automatic evaluation of characteristic device curves regarding fully selective behavior In existing installations. The planner determines the criteria for automatic device selection in SIMARIS design. partially selective up to 48 kA b) Selectivity – greatest possible safety of supply for the entire installation: The upstream device which is closest to the fault location as seen in the direction of energy flow safely trips over the entire current-time range. Back-up protection or full selectivity The focus for dimensioning the switching/protective devices may be on a) Back-up protection – economical device dimensioning: The use of low-cost devices with a partially underdimensioned switching capacity becomes feasible. certain supply sections. Those parts of the installation which are neither affected by.

Selected protection settings will automatically be checked for permissibility in the background.SIMARIS design If this aspect has not been taken into account at an early stage prior to commissioning. Fig. 12/3 Selection of a suitable low-voltage switchgear station for LVMD from the integrated database Automatic selection of mediumvoltage and low-voltage switchgear stations and distribution boards including device equipping per panel SIMARIS design realizes a holistic planning approach covering device dimensioning as well as the layout of the required switchgear panels and subdistributions. it may cause the responsible party unscheduled. 12/5 12 . Here too. Exactly those setting options will be suggested which are permitted for the currently selected device. 12/4 Circuits can easily be parameterized Fig. The program – handles the compilation of device parameters and characteristic tripping curves – filters out the most unsuitable device combination in a power supply line (grading path) – performs a selectivity evaluation of the device combination taking those minimum and maximum short-circuit currents into account which would be unfavorable for this combination – and. it also takes manufacturer information on the dynamic switching behavior of tested device combinations in the time range less than 100 ms into account Present device protection settings can subsequently be adjusted via the switchgear panels. the integrated database in SIMARIS design with real device data demonstrates its advantages. besides the visual check of the characteristic device curves. SIMARIS design greatly facilitates this highly responsible but tedious planning task. The planner does not require any product-specific switchgear knowhow. high follow-up costs and extra expenditure.

material price calculations. calculation results.) Text modules for tender specifications. SIMARIS design has been certified by the TÜV Berlin. Fig. If desired. For the compilation of these texts. licensed users of SIMARIS design will also benefit from the free expert advice for complex projects rendered by the SIMARIS design Solution Support Team. The tool is also used by public authorities for results verification of submitted planning concepts. File formats of the output files are oriented to customary Office programs running in the various Windows operating systems. in AutoCAD All data and planning results featuring the entire installation. such as TÜV-approved selectivity proofs. CAD etc. all documents can also be output in English. 12/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . e. device settings. 12/5 Comprehensive documentation with easy data transfer (Office. can also be generated in the program and used for drawing up a planning tender.g. a great emphasis has been placed both on the adoption of relevant basic technical data and the documentation of technical highlights incorporated in the proposed devices and distribution boards.File generation for documentation purposes. such as C Calculation and input data C Single-line diagram views C Layout of the switchgear installation and distribution board panels can be directly output to a printer or viewed on screen. and can also be exported to other programs. Thanks to its high quality standards. the planner receives a first overview of the business volume involved in the planned installation. e. With a panel-based material price calculation. AutoCAD for further editing.g. so-called specifications of work and services. tender specifications. single-line diagrams / enclosure views and panel equipping in CAD format for further editing. In addition to the software.

SIMARIS design 12/7 12 .

.

Appendix chapter 13 .

www. Catalog HG 11. Catalog LV10 (as of October 2005: LV1) H DELTA Product Range.31 Switchgear up to 24 kV. Technical Information ET B1 T GAMMA: Catalog ET G1 Power Quality.com J 13/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens .41 NXAIR. Catalog ET A5 BETA: Catalog ET B1.13 Appendix Contact Planners or switchgear manufacturers. Type 3AJ Vacuum Circuit-Breaker Module. Corporate Publishing C Totally Integrated Power www. HV HRC Fuses. SF6-insulated. Catalog HA 35. SF6-insulated.siemens.com/sivacon F Modular Devices: ALPHA: Catalog ET A1.com/tip D SIMARIS design www. Catalog TV 1 G Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear. extendable.11 and HA 45. Catalog HA 25. If you would like to know more about Totally Integrated Power. Catalog HG 12 N GEAFOL Cast-Resin Transformers 100 to 2.51 Vacuum Switches.com/simaris E Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear www.71 L Switch-Disconnectors up to 24 kV. Catalog HA 41. Corporate Publishing B Switching. NXAIR P Circuit-Breakers up to 24 kV. NXAIR M. Catalogs HA 45.11 NXACT. and Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks.siemens.siemens.. commercial or industrial developments or other projects – everybody benefits from Totally Integrated Power. Protection. Publicis KommunikationsAgentur. SwitchDisconnectors. Catalog ET D1 I Products and Systems for Power Distribution.siemens. Catalog HG 11.500 kVA. or if you would like to get thorough support: We’re always there to help you! www..com K Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV.powerquality. electrician or building operator – for institutional.siprotec. Seip. Publicis KommunikationsAgentur. Catalog NS PS Numerical Protection Catalogs SIP 2004 www. investors or architects. by Günther G.11 M 3AH Vacuum-Circuit-Breakers (also available as online catalog). SF6-insulated. Catalogs SR 10 .com/tip Bibliography A Electrical Installations Handbook.

Switchgear and Substations Medium-Voltage Equipment. Outlets and Electronic Products Motor Management with SIMOCODE pro Communications in Power Distribution Protection and Substation Control Power Management Measuring and Recording Power Quality Overview SIMEAS Q SIMEAS R Meters and Measuring Instruments SIMEAS P Power Meter SIMEAS T Transducers for High-Current Power Quantities Meters / Measuring Instruments as Modular Devices 4NC3 and 4NC5 Current Transformers SIMARIS design – the Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution Appendix A C B C D E F G H I J C K L M N C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 13/3 13 .6 7 8 9 10 10.2.2.1 6. ALPHA 630 DIN Distribution Boards Wall-Mounted ALPHA 400/160.1 2.2.Appendix Chapter Topic 1 2 2.5 6.1.1.2 3 4 4.4 12 13 Introduction Power Distribution Planning for Commercial and Industrial Buildings Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems Power System Planning Module System Protection/Safety Coordination Medium Voltage Medium-Voltage and Circuit-Breaker Switchgear for Primary Power Distribution Secondary Distribution Systems.4 6.1 11. Product Range PQM® – Power Quality Management and Load Flow Control Transformers Control transformers Low Voltage Low-Voltage Switchgear and Distribution Systems SIVACON 8PS – Busbar Trunking Systems SIVACON Low-Voltage Switchgear – Economical.1.1.7 6. Flexible and Safe SIKUS Universal and SIKUS Universal HC Systems for the Switchgear Manufacturer Floor-Mounted ALPHA 630 Universal.6 6.2.4 5 6 6.3 11.2 4.2 6.5 6.2 11.1 4.2 6.2.2.1 10.3 4.7 6.3 11 11.4 6.1. ALPHA Universal and ALPHA 400 Stratum Distribution Boards ALPHA-ZS Meter and Distribution Cabinets for Germany SIMBOX Small Distribution Boards SMS Rapid Wiring System 8HP Insulated Distribution System Protective Switching Devices and Fuse Systems Circuit-Breakers Fuse Systems Fuse Switch-Disconnectors Miniature Circuit-Breakers Residual-Current-Operated Circuit-Breakers Lightning Current and Surge Arresters 3LD2 Main Control and EMERGENCY STOP Switches Modular Devices Maximum-Demand Monitors Switches.4 6.2 6.3 6.1.3 6.8 6.1.5 6.6 6.3 6.2 10.2.1.1 6.9 6.1.1 6.

. 6/18. 6/46. 6/102 Clock timer 6/98 Command time 3/8 ff. 6/19 ff. 6/16. 3/3 ff... 1/2 ff. 7/6 ff.. 6/71. 4/5 ff. 5/9. 6/72 Arcing time 3/5 Assembly kits. 6/67. 2/7 ff.. 6/42. 5/8 ff. 6/36. 6/20.. 6/26. 4/2 ff. mounting sets 6/17. 4/72 ff. 6/109. 6/38. 2/23. 7/2 Continuous operation 3/15.. Breaking capacity 3/2 ff.. 6/11. 6/114 Consumption analyses 11/17 Consumption control 9/7 ff.. 7/2.. 6/17 Clearance time 3/5 ff. 6/12 ff. 9/13 Conductor cross section 6/42. 6/46 8/12. Building services automation 9/3 ff. 10/3.... 6/20. 11/26 Comparison of characteristics 3/18 ff. 8/19.. 11/5 ff. 11/22 ff. 10/5 ff. 6/36 ff. 6/51 ff. 6/39. 6/44. 6/7.Keyword Index A Absolute selectivity 3/40 ff. 8/23. 4/76.. 8/36 12/3 C Cabinet panel versions 6/20 Capacitors 3/2 ff. 6/12.. 6/36. 6/8. 8/2 ff. 10/9.. 3/28.. 6/52. 10/10 Arcing 3/5 ff. 7/5 ff... 9/8 Circuit-breaker 1/6. Building substation control systems 1/3 Burden 8/8 ff.. 3/28. 6/34. 11/28 Active power 9/13. 11/17 Characteristic displacement factor 3/46 Characteristics 3/4 ff. 6/93. 6/19 ff. 7/4. 3/3 ff. 8/9 ff. 6/14. 2/25. 6/20. 9/5. 10/8. 6/38 ff. 11/2 ff. 6/38 ff. 6/52 Auxiliary switch 3/12. Busbar system 2/5. 6/75. 6/69. 6/108.. 6/42 ff. 11/27 Archiving 7/4. Busbar trunking system 6/2 ff. 3/4.. 6/49 ff.. 6/8. 6/110.. 6/20 ff.. 6/2 ff. 6/59 ff. 6/38. 4/35 Bus systems 3/12 ff. 6/66. 6/54. 6/16 ff.... 8/9. 11/11. 10/9 ff. 6/96 13/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 8/36 ff. 6/3 ff. 6/42. 6/78 Configuration 8/3 ff. 8/14. 11/22. 10/2. 11/24. 6/42.. 4/10 ff. 6/70 B Back-up protection 2/2 ff. 6/51 ff. 6/59... 3/3 ff. 6/49... Characteristic (curve) 2/8. 7/2 Contactor 3/2 ff. 4/73 ff.. Alarm relay 8/16 Apparent power 9/13. 6/56. 10/5 ff. 6/52 Compensation 2/3. 8/4. Air-insulated 4/2 ff. 6/50 ff. 6/49 ff... 6/20. 7/2 ff. 6/88... 8/12 ff. 5/9... Bay controller family 4/4 Bay level 8/4. Circuit-breaker panel 4/6 ff. 6/59. Basic fees 9/3 ff. 6/77.. 6/6. 11/16 ff. 6/113 ff.. 7/7. 6/5.. 11/14. 8/12. 6/42.. 9/4 Circuit-breaker feeder 4/57 ff. 6/13. 6/43 ff. 11/11. 6/65. 6/56. Consumption profile 9/10 Consumption recording 1/2.. Bus interface 1/3 Bus sectionalizer 4/32. Breaking current 3/18 ff.. 6/2. Accessories 2/26. 3/13.. 6/90.. 8/12.. Compartmentalization 4/2. 7/2. 6/55 ff. 3/2 ff. 4/2 ff.. 11/16. 11/26 ff. Busbars 2/5... 6/13. 3/27. 6/39.. 6/66 Cascade-connected 3/18 ff. 6/61. 8/5 Busbar protection 8/4. 6/101. 6/51. 8/13 Billing metering panel 4/59 ff. Communication 2/3 ff. 11/11.

. 6/19 ff. 7/5. Demand charge 5/6 ff. 6/44 ff. 7/6 ff. 10/2 Energy flow representation 9/2 ff. Environmental protection 6/46 Event log 1/6. 5/2 ff.. 6/13. 5/4.... 3/3 ff.. 6/36. 6/51 ff.. 6/39.. 6/83. 2/2 ff.. 9/5.. 9/17 Energy demand 1/6. 6/32. Cross-connection optimization 9/2 ff. 11/20. 3/30. 8/18 ff. 9/10 Current carrying capacity 6/44 Current grading 3/4 ff. 5/5 ff. 6/24.. 4/73. 6/26 ff. Documentation 1/3 ff. 9/10 ff. 9/2 ff. 9/13 Efficiency improvement 9/2 ff. 6/20 ff. 6/41 ff. 6/49 ff. 5/11. 9/2... Current limiter 3/9. 11/2 Energy market 7/7... 8/31 Digital protection 3/52 DIGSI 8/3. Extinction time 3/17 13/5 13 . Demand-oriented energy reports 7/3 Differential protection 3/4 ff. Dynamic selectivity 3/40 ff. 8/28.. 6/80. 8/26. 9/6 Distance protection 3/4.. Distribution system 6/34 Distribution transformer 3/52. 8/11 ff. Directional protection 3/4 Disconnector 3/39. 6/30 ff. 3/40 Current limiting 2/9. 9/11 Dry-type transformer 4/82... Disengaging time 3/5 Dispatch 7/3. 6/88 Encapsulation 3/30.... 3/54.. 7/7. 8/36.. 9/4. 3/22 ff. Energy costs 5/5. Data interfaces 3/52. 8/24. 9/3 ff. 6/17 ff.. Distribution blocks 6/32 Distribution board 1/2. 6/51 ff.Appendix Control board 4/5 ff. 6/75. 7/3.. 4/82. 6/5 ff. 6/56 Current limiting range 3/21 Current quality 8/3 ff. 6/27. 4/4. 8/25 ff. 6/71. 9/5 ff. 7/2 ff. 8/15 Delay time 3/3 ff. 7/7. 6/29. 8/12. 4/17 ff. Energy transmission 9/2 ff. 6/53 ff. Demand integration period 6/102. 6/32 ff. 6/70. 6/22. Current ratio 3/49 Current selectivity 3/4 ff. 8/13 ff. 9/4 Disconnector panel 4/8 ff. 10/9.. 7/4. 6/89. Energy import 1/2.. 9/13 ff. 4/6 ff. Current transformer 3/4 ff. Energy procurement 1/6.. Control level 7/2 Control range 3/6 Control switch 6/89 Conversion factors 13/8 Converter 3/51 Cost center 9/12 Cost center assignment 2/13 ff. 6/74. 9/2 ff. 7/5 ff. 7/7. 8/13. 9/2 ff. 6/59 ff. 6/75 Distribution circuit-breaker 3/25 ff.. 8/31 ff.. 7/2. 9/18 ff.. 9/4. 6/3. Dynamic short-circuit strength 3/13 E Efficiency 4/92. 6/38. 11/28 Current types 6/65 D Daily demand profile 9/20 Data compression 10/9 ff. 9/11 ff. 6/5.. 3/58.. 6/34 ff... 6/49. 12/6 Distribution box 6/32 Distribution cabinet 6/27. 10/12. 4/5 ff. 6/85 Degree of protection 3/15. 7/2. 5/2 ff. 6/10.. 6/61.. Decoupling reactor 6/76 ff. 8/9. Coupling switch 3/46 ff. EMERGENCY STOP switch 6/2. 8/8 ff. 11/21. 1/5. 8/22 Data networking 1/3 Data validation 9/14 ff.

6/56 ff.. 6/46 Limit value monitoring 7/6 Line protection 3/3 ff. 6/55 Let-through current 2/9. 3/22. 6/38. 10/9.... 6/44... 4/5 ff. 8/34 ff. 3/16 ff. 10/8 Fault-current protection 3/3. 5/17 ff. Insulation monitor 6/95 Insulator 4/78 Interlocking 4/2 ff. 8/22.. 6/17. 8/5. 6/24 Full-range fuse 3/3. Line-protection condition 3/40 Load circuit-breaker 3/6. 6/34. 8/20 Load peak 6/102. 9/17 ff.. 6/93. 8/29 ff.. 6/11 ff. 6/32. 6/36 ff. 10/11 High-current product range 6/58 HV HRC fuses 3/3 ff. 6/34. 8/22. 9/10 ff. 6/14. 2/17. 6/89 LV HRC fuse 3/3 ff. 11/21. 9/3 Filter circuit 3/51 Fire protection 2/11 ff.F Fault analysis 8/22 Fault current 2/9... 11/2 Load forecasts 7/3 I Import limit 9/4. 9/4 G Gas insulation 4/3 ff. 4/85 ff.. 3/3 ff. 6/46. 6/82. 6/37. 6/77 ff. 6/22.. 6/55 Insta contactor 6/90. 9/3 ff. 3/6 Grading time 3/5 ff.. 6/65. 6/37. 6/109. 9/17 Logic triggers 10/9 Loss evaluation 5/5 Losses (inherent to equipment) 5/5.. 6/3 In-line fuse switch-disconnector 6/19. 6/89. 2/3. 9/7 ff. 10/6. 6/23. 7/5.. 6/103. 2/2. Low-voltage cubicle 4/4 ff. 6/51 ff.. Generator protection 3/12. 3/51. 9/96 L Large test current 3/27. 10/3. 6/96 instabus EIB 3/28. 3/2 ff.. 6/46 Low-voltage circuit-breaker 3/3 ff.. 6/29.. 6/85 ff. 6/63. 8/31... 6/103. 6/109. 2/19. 8/11 ff. 7/7. 6/62 Fixed-mounted design 6/11 ff.. Limit value 3/33. 6/77 ff. 6/42. 6/45. Fault-signal contact 3/27 ff. 7/2 ff. 9/9 Import monitoring 9/4. 3/18 Functional category 3/18 ff. 3/53. 4/90.. 3/3 ff. 6/2 ff. 6/32. 3/25 ff. 4/51 ff.. 6/21. 6/71 ff. 3/4 ff. 6/62 ff. Infeed panel 7/7 Infeeds 2/7. 6/49 ff.. 7/7. 9/17 Load monitoring 8/11 ff. Grounding switch 4/6 ff.. 11/3 H Harmonic currents 3/51. 8/29 ff. Low-voltage fuses 6/41 Low-voltage power systems 2/8. 6/2. 3/6. 6/41 ff. 8/14. 6/11 Low-voltage switchgear 3/48.. 11/3 Harmonics 2/2. 5/19. 6/65. Grounding 6/20. 6/51 ff. 8/13. Flicker 9/4.. 6/31 ff. 6/71. 9/8.. 6/93 ff. 6/97 ff.. 6/8. 8/29 Fault detection 10/8 Fault diagnosis 10/9 Fault recording 8/22 Fault recording 8/3.. 9/13 Floor-mounted distribution boards 6/4. 10/12 Information technology 1/3. 13/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 8/36 Isolating 4/26 ff. 8/16 Grading diagram 3/5. 3/49. Joulean heat value 3/40 Load management 1/2. 3/6 ff. Load curves 1/6. Ground-fault protection 3/3. 8/3. 6/26. 6/54 Feeder circuit-breaker 1/6. 8/12. 6/42 Functional scope 8/21 Fuse switch-disconnector 6/2.. 10/6. 6/51 ff. 6/37. 6/54. 8/15. Fuses 2/3 ff. 9/4.. 6/67 Fault-current protective switch 6/37 Fault-current tripping 3/12 Faults 1/6. 6/15 ff..... 6/46. 7/2.. 6/2. 1/6. 6/4. 8/18. 6/2. 9/13. 9/6.. 11/27 Insulation failure 3/19. 3/27. 6/44 Lightning current arrester 6/83 ff. 6/36 ff. K Kilowatt per hour rate 9/3. 4/5 ff.

Maintenance measures 1/6 Making capacity – rated short-circuit current 6/49 Maximum-demand monitoring 7/7.. 9/17.. 8/27. 13/7 13 . 12/3 Network master relay 3/10 ff. 2/2 ff. 6/86 Modular design 6/11 Modular design 6/19 ff. 11/2 ff. 9/5. 6/54 ff. Open-circuit shunt release 3/27 ff. 6/38. 3/21. 9/16 Maintenance 4/3 ff. 3/3 ff. 6/2. 6/54 Opening time 3/5 ff. 6/16. 8/31 Overload range 3/21 ff. 6/17 Main distribution board 3/43 ff.. 6/93 Overcurrent-time protection 3/3 ff. 3/4 Medium-voltage equipment 4/72 ff. 6/36. 7/2. 8/28 ff. 6/66 Main switch (main circuit-breaker) 3/18. 11/19 ff. 6/88... 3/28. 8/27. Measuring transducer 4/76. 11/12 ff. 3/2. 11/18 O Oil-immersed transformer 5/3 ff. 6/88 Main switchgear 6/4 ff. 3/3 ff. 8/11. 6/46. 10/2. Nominal current rule 6/44 Overcurrent release 3/4 ff. 6/113. 6/37. 11/8. 5/6 ff. 6/5. 11/23. 11/17. 6/42. 11/9. 6/76. 8/4.. 6/54. 6/102 ff. 3/4. 11/9.. Overcurrent protection 3/9 ff. 10/5. 11/11.. 11/20 ff. 8/14 ff. 11/20 Molded-case circuit-breaker 3/16... 7/6. 6/11. Meter cabinets 6/27 ff. 9/4. 5/17. 8/26.. 6/41 Outgoing feeder panel 4/18 ff. 6/19 ff. Medium-voltage switchgear 1/2.. 6/95. 8/2 Meshed system 2/4. 6/59 ff. 8/8.. Mimic diagram 4/4 ff. Operator safety 4/4 ff. Mounting rail 6/3. Operating current 3/8 ff.. Node fuse 3/49 ff. 6/57.. 6/38 ff. 6/24 ff. 6/34. 9/4. 8/9. 6/77 ff. 5/18.. 6/51... 6/40..Appendix M Main busbar system 6/12. 8/13 Medium-voltage circuit-breaker 3/3. 6/59 ff. 9/4.. 6/27. 6/113. 8/4 Overload release 2/8. 9/17 ff. 6/114. Motor protection 3/9 ff. 8/30 N Network analysis 4/85 Network circuit-breaker 3/49 ff.. 8/13.. 6/13.. Operating costs 1/3 ff. 11/10.. 6/19 ff. 8/28.. 6/41. 8/34 Motor starter 3/9 ff. 4/2 ff.. 3/48 ff. 6/56. Miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) 3/3 ff. Overload relay 3/9 ff. 11/26 ff. Measured values display 7/4 Measuring cores 8/8 Measuring instruments 4/85.. Meter 1/6. 6/22 Monitoring equipment 6/72 Monitoring level 7/2 Motor management 6/110 ff.. 6/29 ff.. 8/29. Operating time 3/5 ff. 9/8. 9/14.. Operating values 3/3 ff. 8/25. 6/46. 6/4. 6/89. Overload limit 3/45 Overload protection 2/7 ff. 3/23. 11/5. Network configuration 2/2 ff. 9/11. 8/8. 4/82. 6/103. Modular devices 6/12. Metering panel 4/7 ff. 6/34 ff. 8/2. 5/7.. 6/11 Maintenance 1/5. 9/3.

4/2 ff. Release 3/50 ff.. 3/9 ff. 6/38. Rated residual current 3/12 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity 3/13 ff.. Point-to-point distribution board 6/4 ff. 8/4. 6/11. 6/14. 8/5 Protective measures 2/6. 8/2.. 8/11.. 6/21 ff. 11/16 Power loss 5/5 ff.. 9/3. 8/31 Protective switch 2/3. 9/2 ff. Power factor 2/10. 11/22 ff. Protection characteristics 3/21 ff. 8/4. 4/61. 3/2 ff. 6/2. 8/18 ff. 8/2 ff. 11/3 ff. 10/9.. 6/54.. 11/14 13/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 8/13 ff... 4/91. 8/3. 2/2 ff. 6/59 Rated operating current 3/15 ff. 8/23. 3/6 Planning tool 1/2. 6/70 Reactive power 6/14. Prearcing-time/current characteristic 2/18 Primary winding 5/4 Priorities list 9/7 ff.. 6/17. 4/82. 7/6 ff... 4/2 ff. Power distribution 1/2 ff. 9/4 Plug-connectors 5/8. 6/2. 9/13 Power statistics 6/102.. 6/42. 8/3.. 6/36 ff. 9/2.. 2/4 Power system protection (also © system protection) 2/2 ff. 8/14 Prearcing time 2/17 ff.. 7/3. Rated cross section 6/55 Rated current 3/3 ff. Panel versions 4/29 ff.. 3/13. 6/26. 6/12. 3/3 ff. 11/12 ff. 8/12. 6/26.. 9/4. 8/5.. 8/5. 6/21. 5/9.. 6/78. Reactive power compensation 6/5.. 6/41. 6/86. 6/23.P Panel (coupling) 4/35 Panel control 4/60 Panel design 4/6 ff. 6/36 ff. 6/50 ff. 3/2 ff. 8/24. 7/7. Release time 3/8 Reliability 4/3 ff. 6/110.. 6/110... level of ~ 3/9. 6/113 ff.. 6/73 ff. 3/2 ff. Peak short-circuit current 3/5 ff.. 11/3. Rated switching capacity 3/2 ff. 12/3. 6/12. 11/3 ff. 12/4 Protective equipment 2/8 ff. Rated short-circuit making capacity 3/13 ff.. 6/36. 3/18 Partial selectivity 2/9. 6/2. 10/11. 6/17 Panels 4/4 ff..34 ff. 6/49 ff. 8/16 ff. 8/20. PROFIBUS-DP 6/8... Parameterization 8/3. 3/21. 8/3. 6/34. Rated insulation voltage 3/13 ff. 11/2 Power supply company. 11/14. 3/4 Protective devices 2/7 ff. Partial range protection 3/3..... 6/18 Reactor 8/31 Reactor-connected capacitors 3/51 Relay burden 8/8. 3/2 ff. 10/10 ff. 11/11. 6/4 ff. 9/4 ff.. Prognoses (© Load forecasts) 1/6. 6/59 ff. 6/27. 3/12 Protective characteristics 3/3. 8/8. 9/2. 8/2 ff. 9/13. 7/4 R Radial system 8/29 Rated breaker current 6/13 Rated continuous current 3/15 ff. 6/44 ff. 6/20. 11/11. 6/44 Power management 6/38.. 2/2 ff.. product range for ~ 6/58 Power system design 2/2. 9/7. 3/15. 6/40 ff. 6/112 ff. 6/18. RCCB module 3/28. 6/32 ff. 11/09. Planning 1/2 ff. 6. 6/82. 6/42. 2/2. 6/67 Rated current rule 3/30 Rated frequency 3/15 ff.. 6/66 ff. Power supply 6/36. Protection cores 8/8 Protection.. 8/12. 11/20 Planning result 1/5 Planning software 1/5.. 6/91. 8/5.. 8/19. 7/7. 6/2. 12/2 ff. 8/11.. 8/5. 6/113 ff.. 10/2 Rating 3/52 ff. Period 9/9 Personnel safety 4/3 ff. 11/16. 6/69. 6/38. 10/6. Power meter 11/2 Power quality 4/2 ff. 6/43. 8/11.. 11/10. 10/10. 10/3 ff. 6/55 ff. 4/82.. 6/69 Rated voltage 3/13 ff. 10/6. 6/8. 6/15... 6/54 ff. 6/36. 6/89.. 7/2 ff.. 6/99. 3/6. 8/13.. 11/3. 6/77 ff. 6/67.. 9/6 Protection and substation control 3/2. 6/47 ff. 6/38 ff. 10/3. 6/63 Protective relay 3/52. 6/15. 8/10 Relay interrogation 8/23 Relay operation 8/19 Relay selection 8/25 ff. 7/2. 6/8 ff. 9/8.

Small distribution board 6/4.. 6/67. 6/41 ff. 2/3 ff. 6/55 Spread of protection response time 3/8 Spur panel 4/7 ff. Sentron (circuit-breaker) 6/2.. 6/19. 6/13.. 2/9. 6/104. 6/49. 8/12. Safety margins 3/17. 6/38 ff.. 6/15. SOE recording 10/10 Sequential control 10/9 Serviceability 4/3. 6/78 ff. 6/77 ff.. SIMARIS SIVACON 12/2 ff.. 8/18.. 6/45 ff.. 6/26. 2/7.. 6/19 ff. 4/6 ff. 6/9. 6/17. 12/5 Switchgear assemblies 3/9... 6/20 ff.. 6/56. 12/2... 6/67 Short-time grading control 3/42 Signaling devices 6/2.. 6/36... 5/2 ff. 5/8. 6/21. 6/54. 6/39. 3/13.. 8/6. 6/42 Secondary winding 5/4 Selective behavior 3/40 Selective tripping 6/65 Selectivity 2/2 ff. Residual ripple 3/12 Residual-current-operated circuit-breaker 6/66 ff. 3/16 ff. 8/6.. 6/57... 8/13. 7/5. 11/14. 6/22. 6/2 ff.. Ring-main feeder 4/44 ff. 6/38...8/8 ff.6/11 ff. 6/67 ff.. 8/29 ff.. 6/13. 8/8 ff. 8/12 ff. 3/6 ff. 6/2. 6/49 ff.. 4/79. 7/2. 2/9. 8/2 ff. Shock-hazard protection 6/19. 6/14..Appendix Remote control 8/3. 6/20. 9/3 ff.. 3/7 ff. 6/25.. Resonance phenomena 3/51 Resonant circuit 3/51 Retrofitting 9/2 ff. 6/20. 9/17 Switchgear 2/2 ff. 3/2 ff. Short-circuit making capacity 3/13 Starter circuit-breaker 3/9. 6/90 ff.... 6/89. 6/72 Switch position indicator 3/28. 8/31 ff.. 6/79. Selectivity types 3/33 Selectivity. conditions 3/6 ff. 6/88 ff. 6/41. 4/80. 12/2 Switching capacity 2/8. 6/49 ff. Switch-disconnector panel 4/8 Switch-disconnector stations (switchgear for secondary distribution) 4/55 Switches 1/6.. 8/11 ff. 6/42 ff. 6/51 ff. 6/88. 6/42 ff... 6/108 SIMARIS design 12/2 ff. 4/91 Surge arrester 4/33 ff. 6/34. 6/100 Short-circuit range 3/17 ff. 6/11. 6/41. 6/73 ff. 6/9.. 6/96 Residual current 3/11 ff.. 6/19. Sequence of event recording..6/23... 4/73 ff. 4/4. 4/60. 3/12. 6/2. 6/11 Switchgear manufacturer 1/5. 3/2 ff. 12/4 ff. 10/10 Remote-control switch 6/90. 6/20 ff. S Safety class 5/21 Safety margin (grading time) 3/5. 8/19 Summation current transformer 6/64 Supplementary protection 6/62 ff. 3/2 ff. 4/2 ff.. 4/5 ff. 6/2. 3/23. 8/23 ff... 8/25. 3/2 ff.. Switching capacity category 3/15 Switching devices 2/2. 6/30 ff. 6/43 Short-circuit reactance 3/51 Short-circuit strength 2/10. 6/29. 6/42 ff.. Short-circuit protection 2/8. 4/15 ff.. 6/36 ff. 6/26.. 2/4. 8/19 SF6-insulated 4/26 ff. Switch-disconnector 3/10 ff. 6/2. 6/22. 6/78. 5/9. 8/17 ff. 8/5 ff. 10/9. 6/43. 6/100... 6/36 ff.. 6/94.. 6/9. 6/46.. 3/3 ff. 6/38. 6/29 ff. 3/54 Safety technology 1/3 Scatter band width 3/56 Scatter bands 3/44 ff...... 6/80 ff. 3/19 Station level 8/5.6/49 ff. 6/6. Resistance to accidental arcs 4/5 ff.. 6/38 ff. 6/20 ff.. 9/4.. 6/16. 3/2 ff. 6/41 ff. 12/3 13/9 13 . 4/70 ff. 12/4 Selectivity criteria 3/4 Selectivity limit 3/32 ff. 6/36. 6/2 ff. Residual current tripping 3/12 ff. 4/4 Setting ranges 3/3 ff. 6/109 Short circuit 2/2 ff. 6/36. 6/51 ff. 6/66 Substation control and protection system 3/52 Substation control systems 8/2. 4/45 ff. Ring-main transformer 4/50 ff.. 8/5. 5/7... Short-circuit current 2/7 ff. 4/3 ff. 6/59 ff.. 6/2. Short-circuit breaking capacity 2/13. 6/46. 6/51 ff.. 8/14. 6/92. 6/49. 6/24 ff... 11/2. 6/55.. 4/75 ff. 8/15. Settings 2/12 ff.. 3/53.. Single-line diagram 12/3 ff. 6/49. SIMARIS planning software 12/2 ff. 6/44 Small test current 3/27. 6/77 ff. 12/2. 6/2.. 4/70. 6/35 ff.8/13 ff. Supply connection 6/31 Supply quality 2/32. 6/38. 6/4. 4/2 ff. 6/4 ff. Standards 1/5. 6/99 ff. 6/34. 6/110.. 3/3 ff. 8/4. 6/8. 10/10 Subdistribution board 3/18 ff. 6/15. 4/88. 8/18 ff. 6/75..

13/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . 6/63. 11/22. 10/12. 6/24. 11/24. 3/4 ff. Vacuum contactor 4/72... 6/104. Touch voltage 3/27. 4/26.. 3/14. 6/53 Type (of construction) 3/3 ff. 3/49. 6/78. 8/3 Type-tested 4/2 ff. 8/4 System protection management 8/14 System reactance 3/51 Tripping characteristic 2/27 ff. Voltage transformer 4/10 ff.. Withdrawable switchgear 4/4 Z Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) 3/42 T Technical supply conditions 6/27 Temperature-rise limit 6/20 Terminal box for cables 5/8 Thermal fault withstand capability 3/13 Thermistor motor protection device 3/19. 6/42 ff. 8/15. 4/79 Vacuum switch 4/80 Vacuum switching principle 4/75 Vacuum switching tube 4/6 ff.. 6/24 ff. 6/36 ff. 10/12. 8/9. transducer) 3/51. 3/2 ff.. 9/3 ff. 3/56. 6/54.... 7/4. 6/104 ff. 11/17 ff. 6/54 Utilization category 3/3.. 4/44. 6/59 Tripping characteristics ( ~ curves) 3/8 ff. 6/56. 3/20 Time grading 3/4 ff.. 9/12 Transformers (-> current ~. 11/3 ff. 6/26. 8/26. 4/44 ff.. Time selectivity 3/6 ff. Voltage levels 3/6. 8/4. 11/26 ff. 6/9 ff. 8/28 ff. 4/78. 6/46. 4/52 System protection 3/4 ff.. 6/33. 8/11. 6/95. 6/108 Total (peak) short circuit 3/55 Total clearance time 3/5 ff. 9/4 Voltage quality 10/5 ff.. 6/62. 6/16. Transmission range 3/53 ff. 9/11 W Wall-mounted distribution board 6/4 ff.. Time-current threshold zone 3/29 Timer 6/92. 4/3. 5/3 ff. 10/6 ff. Weakpoint analysis 7/5 ff. 8/25. 6/61. 8/27 Undervoltage protection 3/47 Undervoltage release 3/28. Tripping current rule 3/30 Tripping delay 3/49 Tripping rule 6/44 TTA (type-tested switchgear assembly) 1/2. voltage ~. 3/4. 6/93 ff.. 6/22. 6/40 ff... 4/86.. 6/67 V Vacuum circuit-breaker 4/6 ff. Time-current characteristics 3/17 ff. 6/16. 6/65 Transformer 2/2 ff. 5/2 ff. 4/4 ff. 8/10. 6/20 ff...... 6/54.Switching-off priority 6/102 Switch-off power 9/6 System configuration 3/2. Tree structure 12/3 U Undervoltage 2/26.

3d ≥0.3 x the cable diameter d and. permissible operating temperature is 70 °C (taken from DIN VDE 0298 Part 4) 13/11 13 .5 23 30 38 52 69 90 111 – – – – 15 20 27 34 46 62 80 99 – – – – 19.5 2. installations Direct installation Free in air ≥0.5 24 32 41 57 76 96 119 – – – – 22 30 40 51 70 94 119 148 – – – – 18. H07V-K 2 B1 3 2 B2 3 2 C 3 2 E 3 On or in walls or flush-mounted In pipes or ducts for electr. single-core sheathed cables or multi-core cable in the installation pipe in the brickwork Nominal cross section of Load rating in A copper conductor in mm2 1.5 24 32 41 57 76 101 125 151 192 232 269 15. in the ceiling or concealed 17.5 25 34 43 60 80 101 126 – – – – Load rating of cables for building installations. NYIF.3d Single-core cables in the installation pipe on the wall Multi-core cable in installation pipe on the wall or on the floor Multi-core cable on the wall or on the floor Single-core cables in a cable duct on the wall Multi-core cable in a cable duct on the wall or on the floor Single-core sheathed cables on the wall or on the floor Multi-core cable free in air with min.Appendix Technical Information Type of design Wires under load Installation type (Cable load rating in heat insulating walls acc. with a spacing of at least double the cable diameter Single-core cables. clearance from wall of at least 0.5 27 36 46 63 85 112 138 – – – – 17. suitable for continuous loading at 30 °C ambient temperature. to DIN VDE 0298 Part 4) NYM. if two cables are laid side by side or above each other.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 Table 13/1 Multi-core cable. NYBUY. NHYRUZY. H07V-U.5 21 28 36 50 68 89 110 134 171 207 239 16. flat-webbed cable in the wall. H07V-R. NHXMH.

5 – 25 – 34 – 43 59 79 106 129 157 199 246 285 326 374 445 511 – – – 82 100 119 152 186 216 246 285 338 400 In the special case that the overcurrent protection system fulfills the requirement I2 ≤ 1. In may be selected as being equal to the cable load rating Iz. Protection against short circuits is ensured if the current breaking capacity of the overcurrent protection device is at least equal to the short circuit present at the mounting location.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 240 300 Cu Al Cu – – – – – – 106 130 156 196 238 274 313 358 423 482 Al – – – – – – – 99 119 150 182 210 238 273 323 380 Cu – – – – – – 147 178 213 265 322 370 420 481 566 648 Al – – – – – – – 138 165 206 249 288 326 375 442 507 Cu – – – – – – 163 197 236 294 358 413 468 535 631 722 Al – – – – – – – 153 183 228 278 321 364 418 494 568 Cu – – – – – – – 200 239 297 361 416 470 538 634 724 Al – – – – – – – – 185 231 280 323 366 420 496 569 Cu – – – – – – – – 241 299 363 418 472 539 635 725 Al – – – – – – – – 187 232 282 325 367 421 496 568 19. laid in bunches * Three or four-core.6/1 kv 3. which is normally fulfilled in practice. is not true here.91 Section 6 must be observed. Nominal cross section Cable with PVC insulation Cable with VPE insulation * 0. DIN VDE 0276-620 and DIN VDE 276-1000.45. to DIN VDE 0278 Part 2 or Part 4 In Nominal current of protective system I2 Current which effects tripping of the protective system under conditions defined in the device standards (large test current). without concentric conductor.45 Iz Ib Operating current of the circuit Iz Cable load rating following the load rating tables and acc. DIN VDE 0641 and DIN VDE 0660. DIN VDE 02771. Table 13/2 Load rating of high-power cables for laying in air at 30 °C ambient temperature 13/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens . If this condition.Classification of overcurrent protection systems According to DIN VDE 0100 Part 430 To protect cables and lines in the event of overloading.5 2.6/6 kV 6/10 kV 6/10 kV 12/20 kV 18/30 kV Load rating in A mm2 1. for planning notes please refer to Heinhold/Stuppe “Cables and lines for high currents” (ISBN 3-89578-088-X). DIN VDE 02776-603.g. e. Three-core cable Three-core cable with single shield Single-core cable. DIN VDE 0100 Part 430/11. three loaded wires If conditions are different. DIN VDE 0636. the following conditions must be fulfilled: Ib ≤ In ≤ Iz I2 ≤ 1. the table values must be multiplied with appropriate conversion factors.

Subject to change without prior notice. 2nd revised edition Berlin and Munich All rights reserved. Hartmut Kiank (PTD M) Manfred Kleemeier (A&D ET) Helmuth Kotulla (A&D CD) Hans R. Dieter Sämann (PTD M) Tino Schuldt (A&D ET) Gordon Schumann (A&D CD) Herbert Soens (PTD M) Manfred Weiß (A&D CD) Astrid Werner (A&D CD TIP) Harald Zieger (SBT) Concept. Kranz (SBT) Dr. 13/13 13 . support. D-71101 Schönaich ethabind cover patented ®2005 by Siemens AG. Nominal charge 30.Appendix Imprint Totally Integrated Power – planning power distribution systems – the manual for Totally Integrated Power is your assistant. Winfried Kristen (A&D ET) Hugo Mähner (PTD T) Christoph Maul (PTD M) Martin Moosburger (A&D CD) Oliver Nöldner (PTD M) Klaus Nonnen (A&D ET) Norbert Pantenburg (A&D CD TIP) Wolfgang Pilsl (A&D ET) Claus Rohr (A&D CD) Dr. coordination. production: Uwe Wolf (A&D GC) Ulrike Fleischmann (A&D CD TIP) Gerhard Reinknecht (A&D GC) Layout: Publicis KommunikationsAgentur Erlangen Printed by Bollmann Druck.00 euro We accept no responsibility for the information and typical circuit diagrams given in this manual. Zirndorf Production: THALHOFER. Published by Siemens AG Automation & Drives (A&D) Power Transmission and Distribution (PTD) Siemens Building Technologies (SBT) Authors: Stefan Auxel (PTD M) Bernhard Böckenfeld (PTD EA) Ulrich Eckhoff (SBTS PM) Ingo Englert (SBT) Ulrike Fleischmann (A&D CD TIP) Jörg Flottemesch (PTD M) Andreas Friese (SBTS PM) Remo Gellert (A&D ET) Faik Günaydin (A&D CD) Harald Heil (A&D ET) Gerhard Hengstebeck (A&D CD) Ina Hübel (PTD M) Hans-Joachim Langels (A&D ET) Franz Kammerl (A&D ET) Dr.